Attachment B
Division of Student Affairs, Housing, and Residence Life
PROJECT MANUAL
RENOVATION of PRITCHARD HALL WEST WING - LLC OFFICES
Project Code: #R-2014-05
Architect's Project No. 13 1126
ARCHITECT:
VMDO ARCHITECTS, P.C.
200 East Market Street
Charlottesville, VA 22902
(434) 296-5684 fax (434) 296-4496
MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING AND
FIRE PROTECTION ENGINEERING:
LAWRENCE PERRY & ASSOCIATES
15 Salem Avenue, SE., Suite 101
Roanoke, Virginia 24011
(540) 342-1816 fax (540) 344-3410
FEBRUARY 12, 2014
9,5*,1,$7(&+'LYLVLRQRI6WXGHQW$IIDLUV+RXVLQJDQG5HVLGHQFH/LIH
5(129$7,21RI35,7&+$5'+$//:(67:,1*//&2)),&(6
3URMHFW0DQXDO7DEOHRI&RQWHQWV
)HEUXDU\$GGHQGXP0DUFK
973URMHFW&RGH5
',9,6,21352&85(0(17$1'&2175$&7,1*5(48,5(0(176
%,'',1*,1)250$7,21
'*6
5HY 1RWLFHRI,QYLWDWLRQIRU%LGV
'*6
5HY ,QVWUXFWLRQVWR%LGGHUV&2D
'*6
5HY 3UHELG4XHVWLRQ)RUP
'*6
5HY %LG)RUP
*(1(5$/&21',7,216)2506
'*6
5HY *HQHUDO&RQGLWLRQVRIWKH&RQVWUXFWLRQ&RQWUDFW&2
'*6
5HY &RQWUDFW%HWZHHQ2ZQHUDQG&RQWDFWRU&2
'*6
5HY :RUNHUV&RPSHQVDWLRQ&HUWLILFDWHRI&RYHUDJH&2D
'*6
5HY 6WDQGDUG3HUIRUPDQFH%RQG&2
'*6
5HY 6WDQGDUG/DERUDQG0DWHULDO3D\PHQW%RQG&2
'*6
5HY &RQWUDFW&KDQJH2UGHU&2
'*6
5HY 6FKHGXOHRI9DOXHVDQG&HUWLILFDWHIRU3D\PHQW&2
'*6
5HY *HQHUDO&RQWUDFWRU(VWLPDWHIRU&KDQJH2UGHU*&
'*6
5HY 6XEFRQWUDFWRU(VWLPDWHIRU&KDQJH2UGHU6&
'*6
5HY 6XE6XEFRQWUDFWRU(VWLPDWHIRU&KDQJH2UGHU66
'*6
5HY $IILGDYLWRI3D\PHQWRI&ODLPV&2
+(&2%
976FKHGXOHRI6SHFLDO,QVSHFWLRQV
+(&2
5HY &HUWLILFDWHRI&RPSOHWLRQE\$UFKLWHFW(QJLQHHU
+(&2D
5HY &HUWLILFDWHRI6XEVWDQWLDO&RPSOHWLRQE\$(
+(&2
5HY &HUWLILFDWHRI&RPSOHWLRQE\&RQWUDFWRU
+(&2D
5HY &HUWLILFDWHRI3DUWLDORU6XEVWDQWLDO&RPSOHWLRQE\&RQWUDFWRU
'*6
5HY )LQDO5HSRUWRI6WUXFWXUDO6SHFLDO,QVSHFWLRQV&2E
'*6
5HY &KHFNOLVWIRU2FFXSDQF\&2E
'*6
5HY 6XEPLWWDO5HJLVWHU)RUPDW
90'2IRUP
/LVWRI'UDZLQJV
90'2IRUP
5HTXHVWIRU,QWHUSUHWDWLRQ)RUP
',9,6,21*(1(5$/&21',7,216
6XPPDU\
6SHFLDO&RQGLWLRQV
:RUN5HVWULFWLRQV
$GGLWLYH%LG,WHPV
3URMHFW0DQDJHPHQWDQG&RRUGLQDWLRQ
&RQVWUXFWLRQ3URJUHVV'RFXPHQWDWLRQ
6XEPLWWDO3URFHGXUHV
4XDOLW\5HTXLUHPHQWV
7HPSRUDU\)DFLOLWLHVDQG&RQWUROV
&XWWLQJDQG3DWFKLQJ
&RQVWUXFWLRQ:DVWH0DQDJHPHQW
$WWDFKPHQW&RQVWUXFWLRQ:DVWH0DQDJHPHQW)RUPV
&ORVHRXW3URFHGXUHV
3ULWFKDUG+DOO:HVW:LQJ//&2IILFHV
7$%/(2)&217(176
$GGHQGXP0DUFK
973&5
72&
',9,6,21(;,67,1*&21',7,216
6HOHFWLYH'HPROLWLRQ
',9,6,21&21&5(7(
0LVFHOODQHRXV&DVW,Q3ODFH&RQFUHWH
',9,6,210$6215<1RW8VHG
',9,6,210(7$/6
&ROG)RUPHG0HWDO)UDPLQJ
'HFRUDWLYH0HWDO5DLOLQJV
',9,6,21:22'3/$67,&6$1'&20326,7(6
0LVFHOODQHRXV5RXJK&DUSHQWU\
,QWHULRU)LQLVK&DUSHQWU\
',9,6,217+(50$/$1'02,6785(3527(&7,21
3HQHWUDWLRQ)LUHVWRSSLQJ
-RLQW6HDODQWV
',9,6,2123(1,1*6
+ROORZ0HWDO'RRUVDQG)UDPHV
)OXVK:RRG'RRUV
$FU\OLF0RGLILHG3RO\HVWHU$03'RRU$VVHPEOLHV
$FFHVV'RRUVDQG)UDPHV
$OXPLQXP)UDPHG(QWUDQFHVDQG6WRUHIURQWV
'RRU+DUGZDUH
*OD]LQJ
0LUURUV
',9,6,21),1,6+(6
1RQ6WUXFWXUDO0HWDO)UDPLQJ
*\SVXP%RDUG
&HUDPLF7LOLQJ
$FRXVWLFDO3DQHO&HLOLQJV
$FRXVWLFDO0HWDO3DQ&HLOLQJV
5HVLOLHQW%DVHDQG$FFHVVRULHV
/LQROHXP)ORRULQJ
7LOH&DUSHWLQJ
5HVLQ7LOH:DOO6XUIDFLQJ
2SHQ*ULG:RRG:DOO3DQHOV
,QWHULRU3DLQWLQJ
+LJK3HUIRUPDQFH&RDWLQJV
3ULWFKDUG+DOO:HVW:LQJ//&2IILFHV
7$%/(2)&217(176
$GGHQGXP0DUFK
973&5
72&
',9,6,2163(&,$/7,(6
7RLOHW%DWKDQG/DXQGU\$FFHVVRULHV
)LUH3URWHFWLRQ&DELQHWV
',9,6,21(48,30(171RW8VHG
',9,6,21)851,6+,1*6
5ROOHU:LQGRZ6KDGHV
',9,6,2163(&,$/&216758&7,211RW8VHG
',9,6,21&219(<,1*6<67(061RW8VHG
',9,6,21),5(68335(66,21
)LUH6XSSUHVVLRQ6\VWHPV
',9,6,213/80%,1*
3OXPELQJ*HQHUDO5HTXLUHPHQWV
3OXPELQJ,QVXODWLRQ
)DFLOLW\:DWHU'LVWULEXWLRQ
'UDLQDJH6\VWHP
3OXPELQJ)L[WXUHV
',9,6,21+($7,1*9(17,/$7,1*$1'$,5&21',7,21,1*
+HDWLQJ9HQWLODWLQJDQG$LU&RQGLWLRQLQJ+9$&
7HVWLQJ$GMXVWLQJDQG%DODQFLQJIRU+9$&
+9$&,QVXODWLRQ
%XLOGLQJ$XWRPDWLRQ6\VWHP%$6
+9$&3LSLQJ
+9$&$LU'LVWULEXWLRQ
+9$&)DQV
8QLWDU\+9$&(TXLSPHQW
'HFHQWUDOL]HG$LU&RQGLWLRQLQJ(TXLSPHQW
&RQYHFWLRQ+HDWLQJDQG&RROLQJ8QLWV
3ULWFKDUG+DOO:HVW:LQJ//&2IILFHV
7$%/(2)&217(176
$GGHQGXP0DUFK
973&5
72&
',9,6,21(/(&75,&$/
%DVLF5HTXLUHPHQWVIRU(OHFWULFDO6\VWHPV
/RZ9ROWDJH(OHFWULFDO3RZHU&RQGXFWRUVDQG&DEOHV
*URXQGLQJDQG%RQGLQJIRU(OHFWULFDO6\VWHPV
+DQJHUVDQG6XSSRUWVIRU(OHFWULFDO6\VWHPV
5DFHZD\DQG%R[HVIRU(OHFWULFDO6\VWHPV
,GHQWLILFDWLRQIRU(OHFWULFDO6\VWHPV
:LULQJ&RQQHFWLRQVIRU(OHFWULFDO6\VWHPV
/LJKWLQJ&RQWURO'HYLFHV
3DQHOERDUGV
:LULQJ'HYLFHVDQG0LVFHOODQHRXV(TXLSPHQW
)XVHV
(QFORVHG6ZLWFKHVDQG&LUFXLW%UHDNHUV
/LJKWLQJ±,QWHULRU([WHULRUDQG(PHUJHQF\
',9,6,21&20081,&$7,2161RW8VHG
',9,6,21(/(&7521,&6$)(7<$1'6(&85,7<1RW8VHG
',9,6,21($57+:25.1RW8VHG
',9,6,21(;7(5,25,03529(0(1761RW8VHG
',9,6,2187,/,7,(61RW8VHG
(1'7$%/(2)&217(176
3ULWFKDUG+DOO:HVW:LQJ//&2IILFHV
7$%/(2)&217(176
$GGHQGXP0DUFK
973&5
72&
NOTICE OF INVITATION FOR BIDS IFB # 0032222
PRITCHARD HALL
WEST WING LLC OFFICES
VIRGINIA POLYTECHNIC INSTITUTE AND STATE UNIVERSITY
BLACKSBURG, VIRGINIA
Sealed bids are invited for a Renovation Project at a portion of the Second and Third Floors of Pritchard
Hall on the campus of Virginia Polytechnic Institute & State University, Blacksburg, Virginia. The project is
generally described as the renovation of two floors approximately 2500 square feet each with new
architectural, HVAC, electrical, plumbing and fire protection upgrades. The third floor area will include (5)
faculty offices, a supporting meeting space and a waiting area. The second floor will include a renovated
student use area for a multipurpose room for work, socializing, television-watching and gaming, as well as
an office for faculty. Both floors will be upgraded to include a handicapped-accessible gender neutral
bathroom.
Sealed bids will be received at Virginia Tech Procurement Department, Virginia Polytechnic Institute &
State University, North End Center (MC 0333), Suite 2100, 300 Turner Street NW, Blacksburg, Virginia
24061. The deadline for submitting bids is 2:00 p.m. sharp, as determined by the Bid Officer, on Thursday
March 20, 2014. The bids will be opened publicly and read aloud beginning at 2:00 P.M., on Friday, March
21, 2014, at the same location.
A Bid Bond and Contract Security will be required of all bidders regardless of bid amount.
eVA Vendor Registration: The bidder or offeror shall be a registered vendor in eVA prior to making the
first Application for Payment. Bidder or offeror must include the cost of the eVA transaction fee in its bid.
The eVA transaction fee will be assessed approximately 30 days after each purchase order is issued. Any
adjustments (increases/decreases) will be handled through eVA change orders.
Procedures for submitting a bid, claiming an error, withdrawal of bids and other pertinent information are
contained in the Instructions to Bidders, which is part of the Invitation for Bids. Withdrawal due to error in
bid shall be permitted in accord with Section 9 of the Instructions to Bidders and §2.2-4330, Code of
Virginia. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids.
A non-mandatory pre-bid conference is scheduled for 10:00 A.M., local prevailing time, on Tuesday, March
4, 2014, at the Pritchard Hall Third Floor Lounge at Virginia Polytechnic Institute and State University,
Blacksburg, Virginia. Enter Pritchard Hall at the second floor Mailroom. Attendance is not a prerequisite
for submitting a bid. Contractors are responsible for obtaining a University parking permit to attend this
meeting.
The Contract will be awarded on a lump-sum basis of the Total Base Bid Amount including any properly
submitted and received bid modifications plus such Additive Bid Items, as the Owner, in its discretion,
decides to award in the manner set forth in Paragraph 12 of the Instructions to Bidders.
Contractor registration in accordance with Section 54.1-1103 of the Code of Virginia is required. See the
Instructions to Bidders for additional qualification requirements.
The Invitation for Bids for the above project, including the drawings & specifications, containing the
information necessary for bidding, may be obtained by contacting VMDO Architects, P.C. 200 East Market
Street, Charlottesville, Virginia 22901, (434) 296-5684.
Electronic copies of the Invitation for Bids documents, including the plans and the specifications, will be
available for inspection online at the following website:
Site Address: https://records.facilities.vt.edu
User name: PritchLLC
Password: hokies
END OF NOTICE OF INVITATION FOR BIDS
DGS-30-055
CO-7A
(Rev. 04/13)
Page 1 of 9
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
The Invitation For Bids (IFB) consists of the Notice, this Instructions To Bidders, the Bid Form, the
Pre-Bid Question Form, the General Conditions of the Construction Contract, the Supplemental General
Conditions (if any), the Special Conditions (if any), the Forms to be used, and the Scope of Work as
described by the Plans and Specifications, other documents listed in the Specifications, and any addenda
which may be issued, all of which request qualified bidders to submit competitive prices or bids for
providing the described work on the project.
eVA Vendor Registration: The bidder or offeror shall be a registered vendor in eVA. See the attached
eVA Vendor Registration Requirements.
1.
CONDITIONS AT SITE OR STRUCTURE: Bidders shall visit the site and shall be responsible
for ascertaining pertinent local conditions such as location, accessibility, general character of the
site or building, and the character and extent of existing conditions, improvements or work within
or adjacent to the site. Claims, as a result of failure to have done so, will not be considered by the
Owner. See Section 7 of the General Conditions entitled "Conditions at Site."
2.
EXPLANATIONS TO BIDDERS: No oral explanation in regard to the meaning of drawings and
specifications will be made and no oral instructions will be given before the award of the contract.
The Owner shall not be responsible for any conclusions, assumptions or interpretations made by
bidders during the preparation of bids that are contrary to the drawings and specifications and their
clear intent. Discrepancies, conflicts, errors, omissions or doubts as to the meaning of drawings and
specifications shall be communicated in writing to the Architect / Engineer for interpretation.
Bidders must use the "Prebid Question Form" provided in the bid documents. Bidders must so act
to assure that questions reach the Architect/Engineer at least six (6) days prior to the time set for the
receipt of bids to allow a sufficient time for an addendum to reach all bidders before the
submission of their bids. If, however, there are two (2) weeks or less between the first bid
advertisement and the time set for receipt of bids, then bidders must submit questions so that they
reach the A/E no later than three (3) days prior to the time set for receipt of bids. Any interpretation
made will be in the form of an addendum to the specifications which will be forwarded to all
bidders, and its receipt shall be acknowledged by the bidder on Bid Forms. If such discrepancies,
conflicts, errors, omissions or doubts are reasonably apparent or should have been reasonably
apparent to the bidder, and the bidder failed to submit questions to the A/E in the time and manner
required herein and the Contract is awarded to the bidder, then any claims shall be deemed waived
and the bidder shall not be entitled to additional compensation or time, or entitled to sue the Owner
based on such discrepancies, conflicts, errors, omissions, or doubts.
3.
TIME FOR COMPLETION:
(a) "Time for Completion" shall be designated by the Owner on the Invitation for Bids or other
prebid documents and shall mean the number of consecutive calendar days following the
issuance of the Notice to Proceed which the Contractor has to substantially complete all Work
required by the Contract. In some instances, the Time for Completion may be stated in the form
of a Contract Completion Date based on a stipulated date of Notice to Proceed.
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall achieve Final Completion within thirty (30)
days after the date of Substantial Completion.
(b) When the Notice to Proceed is issued, it will state a Contract Completion Date, which has been
set by the Owner based on date of the Notice to Proceed and the Time for Completion.
DGS-30-055
(Rev. 04/13)
CO-7A
Page 2 of 9
(c) The Contractor, in preparing and submitting his bid, is required to take into consideration
normal weather conditions. Normal weather does not mean statistically average weather, but
rather means a range of weather conditions which might be anticipated, (i.e., conditions which
are not extremely unusual). Normal weather conditions shall be determined from the public
historical records available, including the U.S. Department of Commerce, Local Climatological
Data Sheets, Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration/Environmental Data and Information
Service, National Climatic Center and the National Weather Service. The data sheets to be
used shall be for the locality or localities closest to the site of the work. No additional
compensation will be paid to the Contractor because of adverse weather conditions; however,
an extension of time for abnormal weather will be considered by the Owner as indicated in the
General Conditions.
(d) If the Owner designates the public historical climatological records to be used, the bidder shall
use those records in computing bids. If the Owner requests each bidder to indicate the records
used, each bidder may select the public historical climatological records upon which he will
rely in computing his bid. In the latter situation, each bidder shall designate in the space
provided which of such climatological data records he used when formulating his bid. A
bidder's failure to designate climatological records when submitting a bid shall not disqualify
his bid, but shall constitute a waiver of the right to claim any extension of time as the result of
abnormal weather. In either case, the bid submitted and the time of completion shall be
presumed to have been based upon normal weather derived from the climatological records
used.
4.
PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION OF BIDS:
(a) Bids shall be submitted on the forms furnished, or copies thereof, and shall be signed in ink.
Erasures or other changes in a bid must be explained or noted over the signature of the bidder.
Bids containing any conditions, omissions, unexplained erasures, alterations or items not called
for in the proposal, or irregularities of any kind, may be rejected by the Owner as being
incomplete or nonresponsive.
(b) Each bid must give the complete legal name and full business address of the bidder and be
signed by the bidder, or the bidder's authorized representative, with his usual signature. Bids by
partnerships must be signed in the partnership name by one of the general partners of the
partnership or an authorized representative, followed by the designation/title of the person
signing, and a list of the partners. Bids by joint ventures must be signed in the joint venture
name by one of the joint venturers or an authorized representative of one of the joint venturers,
followed by the designation/title of the person signing, and a list of the joint venturers. Bids by
corporations must be signed with the legal name of the corporation followed by the name of the
state in which it is incorporated and by the signature and title of the person authorized to bind it
in this matter. The name of each person signing shall be typed or printed below the signature.
A signature on a bid by a person who identifies his title as "President," "Secretary," "Agent" or
other designation without disclosing the principal firm, shall be held to be the bid of the
individual signing. When requested by the Owner, satisfactory evidence of the authority of the
officer signing on behalf of the corporation shall be furnished. Trade or fictitious names may
be referenced by using "t/a _ _ _ ," but bids shall be in the legal name of the person or entity
submitting the bid.
(c) Bids with the bid guarantee shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope which shall be marked and
addressed as indicated by the advertisement. If a contract is for one hundred twenty thousand
dollars ($120,000) or more, or if the total value of all construction, removal, repair or
improvements undertaken by the bidder within any twelve-month period is seven hundred fifty
DGS-30-055
CO-7A
(Rev. 04/13)
Page 3 of 9
thousand dollars ($750,000) or more, the bidder is required under Title 54.1, Chapter 11,
Section 1100, Code of Virginia, as amended, to be licensed in Virginia as a "Class A
Contractor." If a contract is for seven thousand five hundred dollars ($7,500) or more, but less
than one hundred twenty thousand dollars ($120,000), the bidder is required to be licensed in
Virginia as a "Class B Contractor." The bidder shall place on the outside of the envelope
containing the bid and shall place in the bid over his signature whichever of the following
notations is appropriate and insert his Contractor license/registration number:
Licensed Class A Virginia Contractor No. ______________
or
Licensed Class B Virginia Contractor No. ______________
If the bidder is not properly licensed in Virginia at the time the bid is submitted, or if the bidder
fails to provide this information on his bid or on the envelope containing the bid and fails to
promptly provide said Contractor license number to the Owner in writing when requested to do
so before the opening of bids, he shall be deemed to be in violation of Section 54.1-1115 of the
Code of Virginia, as amended, and his bid will not be considered.
(d) The Board for Contractors has interpreted its regulations to mean "a licensed Contractor can
bid on a contract which contains work outside his license classification(s) as long as he
subcontracts those items for which he is not qualified to perform to licensed contractors with
the appropriate License Classification and the work of the second party is incidental to the
contract." Therefore, the Owner may, as a part of determining whether the bidder is
"responsible," require the apparent low bidder to submit a listing of his subcontractors along
with the license number and classification or specialty of each.
(e) The bidder must also place its Employer Identification Number (SSN or FEIN) in the space
provided on the Bid Form.
(f) Every bidder organized as a stock or nonstock corporation, limited liability company, business
trust, or limited partnership or registered as a registered limited liability partnership must be
authorized to transact business in the Commonwealth as a domestic or foreign business entity if
so required by Title 13.1 or Title 50 of the Code of Virginia, as amended, or as otherwise
required by law. Any bidder organized or authorized to transact business in the
Commonwealth pursuant to Title 13.1 or Title 50 must include in its bid the identification
number issued to it by the State Corporation Commission. Any bidder that is not required to be
authorized to transact business in the Commonwealth as a foreign business entity under Title
13.1 or Title 50 or as otherwise required by law shall include in its bid or proposal a statement
describing why the bidder or offeror is not required to be so authorized. A bidder required to be
authorized to transact business in Virginia that fails to provide the required information shall
not receive an award unless a waiver of this requirement and of any administrative policies and
procedures established to implement Section 2.2-4311.2 of the Code of Virginia, as amended, is
granted by the chief executive of the Owner.
If awarded the Contract, the bidder shall not allow its existence to lapse or its certificate of
authority or registration to transact business in the Commonwealth, if so required under Title
13.1 or Title 50, to be revoked or cancelled at any time during the term of the Contract. Doing
so shall be deemed to be a violation of Section 2.2-4311.2 and the bidder understands and
agrees that the Owner may void the Contract if the bidder fails to comply with this provision.
DGS-30-055
(Rev. 04/13)
5.
CO-7A
Page 4 of 9
BID GUARANTEE:
(a) Any bid (including the Total Base Bid plus all Additive Bid Items) which exceeds five hundred
thousand dollars ($500,000) shall be accompanied by a Commonwealth of Virginia Standard
Bid Bond, Form CO-10.2, payable to the Owner as obligee in an amount equal to five percent
(5%) of the amount of the bid. For construction contracts in excess of $100,000 but less than
$500,000, where bid bond requirements are waived, prospective contractors shall be
prequalified in accordance with §2.2-4317. A Bid Bond may be required for projects having
bids of less than five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000) if such requirement is stated in the
Notice of Invitation for Bids. The Bid Bond must be issued by a surety company which is
legally authorized by the Virginia State Corporation Commission to do surety business in the
Commonwealth of Virginia. Such Bid Bond shall guarantee that the bidder will not withdraw
his bid during the period of thirty (30) days following the opening of bids; that if his bid is
accepted, he will enter into a formal contract with the Owner in accordance with the Contract
Between Owner and Contractor, Form CO-9, included as a part of the IFB Documents; that he
will submit a properly executed and authorized Standard Performance Bond and Standard
Labor and Material Payment Bond on the forms included in the IFB documents; and that in the
event of the withdrawal of said bid within said period, or failure to enter into said contract and
give said bonds within ten (10) days after he has received notice of acceptance of his bid, the
bidder shall be liable to the Owner for the difference between the amount specified in said bid
and such larger amount for which the Owner may contract with another party to perform the
work covered by said bid, up to the amount of the bid guarantee. This amount represents the
damage to the Owner on account of the default of the bidder in any particular hereof. See §2.24336 of the Code of Virginia, as amended.
(b) See § 2.2-4338 of the Code of Virginia for provisions allowing alternative forms of bid security
in lieu of a Bid Bond. Forms of Security listed in § 2.2-4338.B must be approved prior to
submission of a Bid on the Bid Receipt date and time to be acceptable as Bid Security.
(c) The Bid Bonds or other bid security will be returned to all except the three lowest bidders after
the formal opening of bids. The remaining Bid Bonds or bid security will be returned to the
bidders after the Owner and the accepted bidder have executed the Contract and the
Performance Bond and the Payment Bond have been approved by the Owner.
(d) If the required Contract and bonds have not been executed within thirty (30) days after the date
of the opening of the bids, then the bond or other bid security of any bidder will be returned
upon his request, provided he has not been notified of the acceptance of his bid prior to the date
of such request.
6.
WITHDRAWAL OR MODIFICATION OF BIDS: Bids may be withdrawn or modified by
written or telefaxed notice received at the designated location from bidders prior to the deadline
fixed for bid receipt. E-mail modifications are not acceptable. The withdrawal or modification may
be made by the person signing the bid or by an individual(s) who is authorized by him on the face
of the bid. Written modifications may be made on the bid form itself, on the envelope in which the
bid is enclosed, or on a separate document. Written modifications, whether the original is delivered
or telefaxed, must be signed by the person making the modification or withdrawal. The
modification must state specifically what is to be modified and by what amount or it must state the
item to be modified and what the corrected amount should be. (e.g. “Deduct $25,000 from Part A
and from the Total Base Bid Amount”; or “Add $23,456 to the Total Base Bid Amount”; or
“Deduct $15,650 from the Additive # 2 amount”. A modification to “Deduct $25,000 from Part A”
will only be applied to Part A and not to the Total Base Bid Amount) Unless otherwise specified
by the Bidder in the modification, the modification will be applied to the TOTAL BASE BID
AMOUNT shown on the Bid Form. (e.g. a modification stating only “Deduct $25,000” which is
properly signed will be deducted from the Total Base Bid Amount shown on the Bid Form)
DGS-30-055
(Rev. 04/13)
7.
CO-7A
Page 5 of 9
RECEIPT OF BIDS:
(a) Bids will be received at or before the date and the hour and at the place stipulated in the
Invitation for Bids as may be modified by subsequent Addenda.
(b) It is the responsibility of the bidder to assure that his bid and any bid modifications are
delivered to the place designated for receipt of bids by the date and hour (deadline) set for
receipt of bids. Therefore, it is the bidder’s responsibility to take into account all factors
which may impact on its bid deliverer / courier’s ability to deliver the bid and to
implement whatever actions are necessary to have the bid delivered to the proper bid
receipt location prior to the bid receipt deadline. No bids or bid modifications submitted or
offered after the date and hour designated for receipt of bids will be accepted or considered.
(c) The Bid Officer is the Owner's representative designated to receive bids at the time and place
noted in the IFB and to open the bids received at the appointed time.
(d) The official time used for the receipt of responses is determined by reference to the clock
designated by the Bid Officer. The Bid Officer shall determine when the Bid Receipt
Deadline has arrived and shall announce that the Deadline has arrived and that no further bids
or bid modifications will be accepted. All bids and bid modifications in the possession of the
Bid Officer and his assistants at the time the announcement is completed are deemed to be
timely, whether or not the bid envelope has been physically date/time stamped or otherwise
marked by the time the Bid Officer makes the deadline announcement.
(e) In the event the bid receipt occurs during a period of suspended state business operations, the
receipt and opening will be delayed one business day.
8.
OPENING OF BIDS:
(a) Bids will be opened at the time and place stated in the Invitation for Bids or as modified by
subsequent Addenda, and their contents publicly announced. The Bid Officer shall decide
when the specified time for bid opening has arrived. No responsibility will be attached to any
officer or agent for the premature opening of a bid not properly addressed and identified. Bid
opening shall be no sooner than 24 hours after the time set for receipt of bids.
(b) The provisions of § 2.2-4342 of the Code of Virginia, as amended, shall be applicable to the
inspections of bids received.
(c) In the event the bid opening occurs during a period of suspended state business operations, the
opening will be delayed until the next business day.
9.
ERRORS IN BIDS: A bidder may withdraw his bid from consideration if the price bid was
substantially lower than the other bids due solely to a mistake therein, provided the bid was
submitted in good faith, and the mistake was a clerical mistake as opposed to a judgment mistake,
and was actually due to an unintentional arithmetic error or an unintentional omission of a quantity
of work, labor or material made directly in the compilation of a bid, which unintentional arithmetic
error or unintentional omission can be clearly shown by objective evidence drawn from inspection
of original work papers, documents and materials used in the preparation of the bid sought to be
withdrawn.
In accordance with § 2.2-4330.B.(ii) of the Code of Virginia, the bidder must submit to the Owner
his original work papers, documents and materials used in the preparation of the bid within one day
after the date fixed for submission of bids. Such work papers must be submitted in an envelope or
package separate and apart from the envelope containing the bid and marked clearly as to the
contents and shall be delivered to the Owner by the bidder in person or by registered mail prior to
DGS-30-055
(Rev. 04/13)
CO-7A
Page 6 of 9
the time fixed for the opening of bids and may not be withdrawn until after the two-hour period
(referred to later) has elapsed. The bids shall be opened at the time designated in the IFB, as
amended by addendum. Bid opening is usually one day following the time fixed by the Owner for
the submission of bids, but no sooner. Once the bids have been opened, the bidder shall have two
(2) hours after the opening of bids within which to claim in writing any mistake as defined herein
and withdraw his bid. The Contract shall not be awarded by the Owner until such two-hour period
has elapsed. Such mistake shall be proved only from the original work papers, documents and
materials delivered to the Owner prior to bid opening. This procedure (ii) shall not apply to when
the entire bid is required to be submitted on a unit price basis.
Failure of a bidder to submit his original work papers, documents and materials used in the
preparation of his bid on or before the time, date and place required shall constitute a waiver by that
bidder of his right to withdraw his bid due to a mistake.
No bid may be withdrawn under this section when the result would be the awarding of the Contract
on another bid of the same bidder or of another bidder in which the ownership of the withdrawing
bidder is more than five (5%) percent.
No bidder who is permitted to withdraw a bid shall, for compensation, supply any material or labor
to or perform any subcontract or other work agreement for the person or firm to whom the Contract
is awarded or otherwise benefit, directly or indirectly, from the performance of the project for
which the withdrawn bid was submitted. The person or firm to whom the Contract was awarded
and the withdrawing bidder are jointly liable to the Owner in an amount equal to any compensation
paid to or for the benefit of the withdrawing bidder without such approval.
If a bid is withdrawn under authority of this section, the lowest remaining bid shall be deemed to be
the low bidder on the project.
10.
REJECTION OF BIDS: The Owner reserves the right to cancel the Invitation for Bids, to reject
any and all bids at its sole discretion when such rejection is in the interest of the Owner, or to reject
the bid of any bidder who is determined to be not responsive or not responsible. See § 2.2-4319,
Code of Virginia, as amended.
11.
DETERMINATION OF RESPONSIBILITY
Each bidder shall be prepared, if so requested by the Owner, to present evidence of his experience,
qualifications and financial ability to carry out the terms of the Contract.
Prior to award of the Contract, an evaluation will be made to determine if the low bidder has the
capability, in all respects, to perform fully the contract requirements and the moral and business
integrity and reliability which will assure good faith performance, and who has been prequalified, if
required. Factors to be evaluated include, but are not limited to:
(a) sufficient financial ability to perform the contract as evidenced by the bidder's ability to
obtain payment and performance bonds from an acceptable surety;
(b) appropriate experience to perform the Work described in the bid documents;
(c) any judgments entered against the bidder, or any officers, directors, partners or owners for
breach of a contract for construction;
(d) any substantial noncompliance with the terms and conditions of prior construction contracts
with a public body without good cause where the substantial noncompliance is
documented; or
(e) a conviction of the bidder or any officer, director, partner, project manager, procurement
manager, chief financial officer, or owner in the last five years of a crime relating to
governmental or nongovernmental construction or contracting;
DGS-30-055
(Rev. 04/13)
CO-7A
Page 7 of 9
(f) any current debarment of the contractor, any officer, director or owner, from bidding or
contracting by any public body of any state, any state agency, or any agency of the federal
government.
The Owner reserves the right to disqualify or refuse to accept the bid of any bidder who has been
convicted, or entered a plea of guilty or nolo contendere, in any federal or state court to any charge
involving any unlawful, corrupt or collusive practice involving a public contract whether federal,
state, or local, or who has been determined in any judicial proceeding to have violated any antitrust,
bid-rigging or collusive practice statute in connection with any public contract, or against whom
such formal criminal prosecution or other judicial proceeding has been initiated.
A bidder who, despite being the apparent low bidder, is determined not to be a responsible bidder
shall be notified in writing in conformance with the procedures in §2.2-4359 of the Code of
Virginia, as amended.
12.
AWARD OF CONTRACT
(a) Basis for Contract Award: The Contract, if awarded, will be awarded to the lowest responsive
and responsible bidder, if any, provided his bid is reasonable and it is in the best interest of the
Owner to accept it and subject to the Owner's right to reject any and all bids and to waive
informality in the bids and in the bidding. The Bid Form contains a multi-part Base Bid and
may contain Additive Bid Items. Determination of the lowest responsible bidder, if any, will be
based on the Total Base Bid
Amount entered on the Bid Form including any properly submitted bid modifications plus as
many Additive Bid Items taken in sequence as the Owner in its discretion chooses to Award.
Where the sum of the values entered in the multiple parts do not agree with the Total
Base Bid amount, the Total Base Bid amount entered on the bid form, including any
properly submitted bid modifications, shall take precedence.
In the event that the Total Base Bid from the lowest responsible bidder exceeds available funds,
the Owner may negotiate the Total Base Bid amount with the apparent low bidder to obtain a
contract price within available funds, pursuant to § 2.2-4318 of the Code of Virginia, as
amended, and Section 12(c) herein.
(b) Informalities: The Owner reserves the right to waive any informality in the bids when such
waiver is in the interest of the Owner.
(c) Negotiation With Lowest Responsible Bidder: If award of a contract to the lowest responsive
and responsible bidder is precluded because of limitations on available funds, under the
provisions of § 2.2-4318 of the Code of Virginia (the Public Procurement Act), the Owner
reserves the right to negotiate the Total Base Bid amount with the lowest responsive,
responsible bidder to obtain a contract price within the available funds. This may involve
changes in either the features or scope of the work include in the Base Bid. Such negotiations
with the apparent low bidder may include reducing the quantity, quality, or other cost saving
mechanisms involving items in the Total Base Bid. Negotiations for Additive Bid Items are
excluded. The Owner shall notify the lowest responsive and responsible bidder that such a
situation exists and the Owner and bidder shall then conduct their negotiations in person, by
mail, by telephone or by any means they find convenient. If an acceptable contract can be
negotiated, the changes to the Invitation for Bid documents agreed upon in the negotiations
shall be summarized in a "Post Bid Modification" and included in the contract. If an acceptable
contract cannot be negotiated, the Owner shall terminate negotiations and reject all bids.
DGS-30-055
(Rev. 04/13)
CO-7A
Page 8 of 9
(d) Notice of Intent to Award or Notice of Award: The Notice of Award or the Notice of Intent
to Award will be posted at the Agency’s standard location for posting notices as shown on the
“Notice of Invitation to Bid”. In addition the Agency may also post such notice on the
Agency’s Website and/or the DGS central electronic procurement Website. Any bidder or
offeror who desires to protest the award or decision to award a contract shall submit the protest
in writing to the public body no later than ten days after the posting of the Notice of Award or
Notice of Intent to Award, whichever comes first (§ 2.2-4360).
13.
CONTRACT SECURITY: For contracts which exceed five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000),
the Standard Performance Bond (Form CO-10) and the Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond
(Form CO-10.1) shall be required, as specified in the Invitation for Bids documents. For
construction contracts in excess of $100,000 but less than $500,000, where bid bond requirements
are waived, prospective contractors shall be prequalified in accordance with §2.2-4317. See the
General Conditions and §2.2-4337 and §2.2-4338 of the Code of Virginia, as amended. The Owner
reserves the right to require such bonds for contracts less than five hundred thousand dollars
($500,000). If the Owner so elects, the requirement shall be set forth in the Invitation For Bids.
14.
CERTIFICATION: The bidder, by his signature on the Bid Form, certifies that neither his
organization nor any of its officers, directors, partners or owners is currently barred from bidding
on contracts by any Agency of the Commonwealth of Virginia, or any public body or agency of
another state, or any agency of the federal government. See the statement "Disqualification of
Contractors" in the Bid Form.
15.
ETHICS IN PUBLIC CONTRACTING: The provisions, requirements and prohibitions as
contained in Title 2.2, Chapter 43, Article 6, §2.2-4367 et seq., Code of Virginia, as amended,
pertaining to bidders, offerers, contractors, and subcontractors are applicable to this project.
16.
BUILDING PERMITS: Because this is a Project of the Commonwealth of Virginia, codes or
zoning ordinances of local political subdivisions do not apply. However, the Virginia Uniform
Statewide Building Code shall apply to the Work and shall be administered by the Building Official
for State-owned Buildings. The Building Permit will be obtained and paid for by the Owner. All
other permits, local license fees, business fees, taxes, or similar assessments imposed by the
appropriate political subdivision shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. See Section 25 of
the General Conditions for utility connection fees and services.
17.
MINORITY UTILIZATION: It is the policy of the Commonwealth of Virginia to contribute to
the establishment, preservation, and strengthening of minority business enterprises and to
encourage the participation of minority businesses in State procurement activities. Towards that
end, the Owner encourages firms to provide for the participation of minority owned businesses
through partnerships, joint ventures, subcontracts, and other contractual opportunities.
18.
BID DOCUMENTS: Bid Documents are the property of the Owner and a deposit in an amount as
stated in the Invitation for Bids is required for each paper set or for each set provided on removable
electronic media as a guarantee of the safe return of the documents within ten (10) days of bid
opening. This deposit will be refunded in full on not more than two paper sets or sets provided on
removable electronic media to each bidder who submits a prime contract bid and who returns the
documents in good condition. Refund will be made on paper sets and sets provided on removable
electronic media to non-bidders and subcontractors in the amount of half of the deposit when the
sets are returned in good condition within 10 days. A deposit is not required for downloading of
electronic construction documents through an FTP site. A non-refundable shipping charge may be
required for paper sets or sets provided on removable electronic media if stated in the Notice or the
Invitation For Bids.
DGS-30-055
(Rev. 04/13)
CO-7A
Page 9 of 9
19.
GENERAL CONDITIONS: The General Conditions of the Construction Contract, G. S. Form
E&B CO-7, are incorporated in the bid documents. If the General Conditions are incorporated by
reference, the bidder may obtain a copy of the current edition of the General Conditions of the
Construction Contract, G. S. Form E&B CO-7 at no cost by written request to the A/E and/or the
Agency where the bid documents are obtained. Copies may also be obtained from the DGS Forms
Center (http://forms.dgs.virginia.gov).
20.
PREBID CONFERENCE: See the Invitation For Bids for requirements for a prebid conference
and whether such conference is mandatory or optional.
21.
INSPECTION OF BID DOCUMENTS: Copies of the Invitation for Bids documents including
Plans and Specifications and the General Conditions of the Construction Contract, G. S. Form
E&B, CO-7, current edition, will be available for inspection at the Agency, at the A/E's office, and
at the locations listed in the Notice of the Invitation for Bids.
22.
DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE REQUIRED: Bidders are reminded that Section 2.2-4312 of the
Code of Virginia requires that the during the performance of the contract resulting form this
solicitation, the contractor agrees to (i) provide a drug-free workplace for the contractor's
employees; (ii) post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment,
a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, sale, distribution, dispensation,
possession, or use of a controlled substance or marijuana is prohibited in the contractor's workplace
and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition;
(iii) state in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the
contractor that the contractor maintains a drug-free workplace; and (iv) include the provisions of
the foregoing clauses in every subcontract or purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions
will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor.
For the purposes of this section, "drug-free workplace" means a site for the performance of work
done in connection with a specific contract awarded to a contractor in accordance with this
solicitation, the employees of whom are prohibited from engaging in the unlawful manufacture,
sale, distribution, dispensation, possession or use of any controlled substance or marijuana during
the performance of the contract. Paragraphs which have been added or revised since prior edition
are identified with a line to the right of the paragraph.
NOTE: These CO-7A, Instructions to Bidders, have been created specifically for the use of agencies of the
Commonwealth of Virginia, which may not alter their provisions without the express written approval of the
Virginia Department of General Services, Division of Engineering and Buildings. These Instructions to Bidders
have significant legal implications and shall not be altered or modified. Nothing in the CO-7A, Instructions to
Bidders, shall be amended or deleted or its intent changed, except by an approved and properly issued
‘Supplemental Instruction to Bidders’. The Commonwealth makes no representation as to their suitability for any
other purpose.
DGS-30-272
(Rev. 02/01)
PREBID QUESTION FORM
(Use separate Form for each question submitted.)
Date:
Project: RENOVATION OF PRITCHARD HALL WEST WING – LLC OFFICES; PC# R-2014-05
The following question concerns Drawing Sheet (number)
;
The following question concerns Specifications Section (number)
;
Page ________________________, Paragraph __________________________.
All responses to questions will be made by Addendum.
Question submitted by:
Name
Organization
Each Prebid Question shall be submitted in writing to the Architect.
Email scanned form to: Kim Thompson Smith; [email protected]; or FAX to (434) 296-4496.
DGS-30-272
(Rev. 02/01)
'*6 6WDQGDUG%LG)RUP)RUPDW
5HY
%,')250
'$7(
352-(&7
7R
)HEUXDU\$GGHQGXP0DUFK
5HQRYDWLRQRI3ULWFKDUG+DOO:HVW:LQJ//&2IILFHV
9LUJLQLD3RO\WHFKQLF,QVWLWXWH6WDWH8QLYHUVLW\
%ODFNVEXUJ9LUJLQLD
3URMHFW&RGH5,)%
&RPPRQZHDOWKRI9LUJLQLD
9LUJLQLD3RO\WHFKQLF,QVWLWXWH6WDWH8QLYHUVLW\
%ODFNVEXUJ9LUJLQLD
,QFRPSOLDQFHZLWKDQGVXEMHFWWR\RXU,QYLWDWLRQIRU%LGVDQGWKHGRFXPHQWVWKHUHLQVSHFLILHGDOORI
ZKLFKDUHLQFRUSRUDWHGKHUHLQE\UHIHUHQFHWKHXQGHUVLJQHGELGGHUSURSRVHVWRIXUQLVKDOOODERU
HTXLSPHQWDQGPDWHULDOVDQGSHUIRUPDOOZRUNQHFHVVDU\IRUFRQVWUXFWLRQRIWKLVSURMHFWLQDFFRUGDQFH
ZLWKWKH3ODQVDQG6SHFLILFDWLRQVGDWHG)HEUXDU\DQGWKH$GGHQGDQRWHGEHORZDVSUHSDUHGE\
90'2$UFKLWHFWV3&(DVW0DUNHW6WUHHW&KDUORWWHVYLOOH9$IRUWKHFRQVLGHUDWLRQRIWKH
IROORZLQJDPRXQW
%$6(%,'LQFOXGLQJWKHIROORZLQJSDUWVEXWH[FOXGLQJZRUNLQ$GGLWLYH%LG,WHPV
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB'ROODUVBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
$'',7,9(%,',7(0/XPSVXPSULFHIRUDOOZRUNWRDGGHOHFWURQLFGRRUKDUGZDUHLQOLHXRIDVVRFLDWHG
QRQHOHFWURQLFGRRUKDUGZDUHDVVSHFLILHGLQ6HFWLRQ³'RRU+DUGZDUH´FRPSOHWHLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK
WKHGUDZLQJVDQGVSHFLILFDWLRQVLV
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB'ROODUVBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
$'',7,9(%,',7(0/XPSVXPSULFHIRUDOOZRUNWRDGGE\IHHWVXVSHQGHGDFRXVWLFDOSDQHOFHLOLQJ
DVLQGLFDWHGRQ6KHHW$³5HIOHFWHG&HLOLQJ3DQHOVDQG&HLOLQJ'HWDLOV´DQGDVVSHFLILHGLQ6HFWLRQ
³$FRXVWLFDO3DQHO&HLOLQJV´DQGDVVRFLDWHG0HFKDQLFDO3OXPELQJDQG(OHFWULFDOUHYLVLRQVLQOLHXRISDLQWLQJ
H[SRVHGVWUXFWXUHFRPSOHWHLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHGUDZLQJVDQGVSHFLILFDWLRQVLV
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB'ROODUVBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
$'',7,9(%,',7(0/XPSVXPSULFHIRUDOOZRUNWRRPLWRSHQJULGZRRGZDOOSDQHOVDVLQGLFDWHGLQ
6HFWLRQ³2SHQ*ULG:RRG:DOO3DQHOV´FRPSOHWHLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHGUDZLQJVDQGVSHFLILFDWLRQV
LV
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB'ROODUVBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
&RQWUDFW DZDUG ZLOO EH EDVHG RQ WKH 727$/ %$6( %,' $02817 VKRZQ DERYH LQFOXGLQJ DQ\
SURSHUO\ VXEPLWWHG ELG PRGLILFDWLRQV SOXV DV PDQ\ $GGLWLYH %LG ,WHPV WDNHQ LQ VHTXHQFH DV WKH
2ZQHULQLWVGLVFUHWLRQGHFLGHVWRDZDUG
3ULWFKDUG+DOO:HVW:LQJ±//&2IILFHV
6WDQGDUG%LG)RUP)RUPDW
973&5
3DJHRI
7KHELGGHUKDVUHOLHGXSRQWKHIROORZLQJSXEOLFKLVWRULFDOFOLPDWRORJLFDOUHFRUGV
7KH9LUJLQLD6WDWH&OLPDWRORJ\2IILFH&KDUORWWHVYLOOH9LUJLQLDIRU5DGIRUG9LUJLQLD
7KH XQGHUVLJQHG XQGHUVWDQGV WKDW WLPH LV RI WKH HVVHQFH DQG DJUHHV WKDW WKH GDWH IRU 6XEVWDQWLDO
&RPSOHWLRQRIWKHHQWLUHSURMHFWVKDOOEHRQRUEHIRUH-XO\EDVHGRQD1RWLFHDXWKRUL]LQJ
:RUN WR SURFHHG RQ RU EHIRUH 0D\ DQG )LQDO &RPSOHWLRQ VKDOO EH DFKLHYHG ZLWKLQ FRQVHFXWLYHFDOHQGDUGD\VDIWHUWKHGDWHRI6XEVWDQWLDO&RPSOHWLRQDVGHWHUPLQHGE\WKH$(
$FNQRZOHGJPHQWLVPDGHRIUHFHLSWRIWKHIROORZLQJ$GGHQGD
,I QRWLFH RI DFFHSWDQFH RI WKLV ELG LV JLYHQ WR WKH XQGHUVLJQHG ZLWKLQ GD\V DIWHU WKH GDWH RI
RSHQLQJRIELGVRUDQ\WLPHWKHUHDIWHUEHIRUHWKLVELGLVZLWKGUDZQWKHXQGHUVLJQHGZLOOH[HFXWHDQG
GHOLYHUDFRQWUDFWLQWKHSUHVFULEHGIRUP&RPPRQZHDOWKRI9LUJLQLD&RQWUDFW%HWZHHQ2ZQHUDQG
&RQWUDFWRU)RUP&2ZLWKLQGD\VDIWHUWKHFRQWUDFWKDVEHHQSUHVHQWHGWRKLPIRUVLJQDWXUH
7KH UHTXLUHG SD\PHQW DQG SHUIRUPDQFH ERQGV RQ WKH IRUPV SUHVFULEHG VKDOO EH GHOLYHUHG WR WKH
2ZQHUDORQJZLWKWKHVLJQHG&RQWUDFW
,PPLJUDWLRQ5HIRUPDQG&RQWURO$FWRI7KHXQGHUVLJQHGFHUWLILHVWKDWLWGRHVQRWDQGVKDOOQRW
GXULQJ WKH SHUIRUPDQFH RI WKH &RQWUDFW IRU WKLV SURMHFW YLRODWH WKH SURYLVLRQV RI WKH )HGHUDO
,PPLJUDWLRQ 5HIRUP DQG &RQWURO $FW RI ZKLFK SURKLELWV HPSOR\PHQW RI LOOHJDO DOLHQV RU
NQRZLQJO\HPSOR\DQXQDXWKRUL]HGDOLHQDVGHILQHGLQWKH)HGHUDO,PPLJUDWLRQ5HIRUPDQG&RQWURO
$FWRI
',648$/,),&$7,21 2) &2175$&7256 %\ VLJQLQJ WKLV ELG RU SURSRVDO WKH XQGHUVLJQHG
FHUWLILHV WKDW WKLV %LGGHU RU DQ\ RIILFHU GLUHFWRU SDUWQHU RU RZQHU LV QRW FXUUHQWO\ EDUUHG IURP
ELGGLQJRQFRQWUDFWVE\DQ\$JHQF\RIWKH&RPPRQZHDOWKRI9LUJLQLDRUDQ\SXEOLFERG\RUDJHQF\
RIDQRWKHUVWDWHRUDQ\DJHQF\RIWKHIHGHUDOJRYHUQPHQWQRULVWKLV%LGGHUDVXEVLGLDU\RUDIILOLDWH
RIDQ\ILUPFRUSRUDWLRQWKDWLVFXUUHQWO\EDUUHGIURPELGGLQJRQFRQWUDFWVE\DQ\RIWKHVDPH:H
KDYH DWWDFKHG DQ H[SODQDWLRQ RI DQ\ SUHYLRXV GLVEDUPHQWV DQG FRSLHV RI QRWLFHV RI
UHLQVWDWHPHQWV
(LWKHUWKHXQGHUVLJQHGRURQHRIWKHIROORZLQJLQGLYLGXDOVLIDQ\LVDXWKRUL]HGWRPRGLI\WKLVELG
SULRUWRWKHGHDGOLQHIRUUHFHLSWRIELGVE\ZULWLQJWKHPRGLILFDWLRQDQGVLJQLQJKLVQDPHRQWKHIDFH
RIWKHELGRQWKHHQYHORSHLQZKLFKLWLVHQFORVHGRQDVHSDUDWHGRFXPHQWRURQDGRFXPHQWZKLFK
LVWHOHID[HGWRWKH2ZQHU
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
3ULWFKDUG+DOO:HVW:LQJ±//&2IILFHV
6WDQGDUG%LG)RUP)RUPDW
973&5
3DJHRI
,FHUWLI\WKDWWKHILUPQDPHJLYHQEHORZLVWKHWUXHDQGFRPSOHWHQDPHRIWKHELGGHUDQGWKDWWKHELGGHU
LV OHJDOO\ TXDOLILHG DQG OLFHQVHG E\ WKH 9LUJLQLD 'HSDUWPHQW RI 3URIHVVLRQDO DQG 2FFXSDWLRQDO
5HJXODWLRQ%RDUGIRU&RQWUDFWRUVWRSHUIRUPDOO:RUNLQFOXGHGLQWKHVFRSHRIWKH&RQWUDFW
%LGGHU 9LUJLQLD/LFHQVH1R
1DPHRI)LUP
&RQWUDFWRU&ODVV
%\
6LJQDWXUH
6SHFLDOW\
9DOLGXQWLO
7\SHG1DPH
)(,1661BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
7LWOH ,I*HQHUDO3DUWQHUVKLS/LVW3DUWQHUV
1DPHV
%XVLQHVV$GGUHVV
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
7HOHSKRQHBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
)$;BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
,I&RUSRUDWLRQDIIL[&RUSRUDWH6HDO
OLVW6WDWHRI,QFRUSRUDWLRQ
6WDWHBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
$IIL[6HDO
9LUJLQLD6WDWH&RUSRUDWLRQ&RPPLVVLRQ,'1RBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBRU
,I&RQWUDFWRULVDIRUHLJQEXVLQHVVHQWLW\QRWUHTXLUHGWREHDXWKRUL]HGWRWUDQVDFWEXVLQHVVLQWKH
&RPPRQZHDOWKXQGHU7LWOHVRURIWKH&RGHRI9LUJLQLDRUDVRWKHUZLVHUHTXLUHGE\ODZSOHDVH
SURYLGHDQH[SODQDWLRQDVWRZK\VXFKHQWLW\LVQRWUHTXLUHGWREHVRDXWKRUL]HGBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB
3ULWFKDUG+DOO:HVW:LQJ±//&2IILFHV
6WDQGDUG%LG)RUP)RUPDW
973&5
3DJHRI
3ULWFKDUG+DOO:HVW:LQJ±//&2IILFHV
6WDQGDUG%LG)RUP)RUPDW
973&5
3DJHRI
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
TITLE
PAGE
1.
DEFINITIONS
3
2.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
6
3.
LAWS AND REGULATIONS
7
4.
NONDISCRIMINATION
9
5.
PROHIBITION OF ALCOHOL AND OTHER DRUGS
9
6.
TIME FOR COMPLETION
10
7.
CONDITIONS AT SITE
11
8.
CONTRACT SECURITY
11
9.
SUBCONTRACTS
12
10.
SEPARATE CONTRACTS
13
11.
CONTRACTOR'S AND SUBCONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
13
12.
"ALL-RISK" BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE
14
13.
TAXES, FEES AND ASSESSMENTS
15
14.
PATENTS
15
15.
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER'S STATUS
15
16.
INSPECTION
17
17.
SUPERINTENDENCE BY CONTRACTOR
19
18.
CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION, METHODS AND PROCEDURES
19
19.
SCHEDULE OF THE WORK
20
20.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT
23
21.
ACCESS TO WORK
24
22.
SURVEYS AND LAYOUT
24
23.
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
24
24.
SUBMITTALS
26
1
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
25.
FEES, SERVICES AND FACILITIES
28
26.
EQUALS
28
27.
AVAILABILITY OF MATERIALS
29
28.
CONTRACTOR'S TITLE TO MATERIALS
29
29.
STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS INSTALLATION & WORKMANSHIP
29
30.
WARRANTY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
30
31.
USE OF SITE AND REMOVAL OF DEBRIS
30
32.
TEMPORARY ROADS
31
33.
SIGNS
31
34.
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
31
35.
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
32
36.
PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR
32
37.
PAYMENTS BY CONTRACTOR
36
38.
CHANGES IN THE WORK
37
39.
EXTRAS
43
40.
CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT
43
41.
OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE THE CONTRACT FOR CAUSE
43
42.
TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
44
43.
DAMAGES FOR DELAYS; EXTENSION OF TIME
45
44.
INSPECTION FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION & FINAL INSPECTION
47
45.
GUARANTEE OF WORK
48
46.
ASSIGNMENTS
50
47.
CONTRACTUAL DISPUTES
50
48.
ASBESTOS
51
49.
TRAINING, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT
52
50.
PROJECT MEETINGS
52
51.
SMALL BUSINESSES AND WOMEN-OWNED AND MINORITY-OWNED (SWAM)
54
BUSINESS PROCUREMENT PLAN
PLEASE NOTE: The CO-7, General Conditions of the Construction Contract, has been created specifically for the
use of agencies of the Commonwealth of Virginia, which may not alter any provisions without the express written
approval of the Virginia Department of General Services, Division of Engineering and Buildings. The General
Conditions have significant legal implications and shall not be altered or modified. Nothing in the CO-7, General
Conditions of the Construction Contract, shall be amended or deleted or its intent changed, except by an approved
and properly issued Supplemental General Condition. The Commonwealth makes no representation as to their
suitability for any other purpose. (Note: Political subdivisions intending to modify the General Conditions for their
use should consult with their legal counsel.)
2
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
1.
CO-7
DEFINITIONS
Whenever used in these General Conditions of the Construction Contract ("General Conditions") or in the
Contract Documents, the following terms have the meanings indicated, which are applicable to both the
singular and plural and the male and female gender thereof:
Agency: The Agency, institution or department which is a party to the Contract. For purposes of the
Contract, the term Owner shall include such Agency, whether or not the Agency owns the site or the
building.
Architect, Engineer, Architect/Engineer or A/E: The term used to designate the Architect and/or the
Engineer that contracts with the Owner to provide the Architectural and Engineering services for the
Project. The A/E is a separate contractor and not an agent of the Owner. The term includes any associates
or consultants employed by the A/E to assist in providing the A/E services.
Beneficial Occupancy: The condition after Substantial Completion but prior to Final Completion of the
Project at which time the Project, or portion thereof, is sufficiently complete and systems operational such
that the Owner could, after obtaining necessary approvals and certificates, occupy and utilize the space for
its intended use. Guarantees and warranties applicable to that portion of the Work begin on the date the
Owner accepts the Project, or a portion thereof, for such Beneficial Occupancy, unless otherwise specified
in the Supplemental General Conditions or by separate agreement.
Change Order: A document (Form CO-11) issued on or after the effective date of the Contract Between
Owner and Contractor (Form CO-9) which is agreed to by the Contractor and approved by the Owner, and
which authorizes an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract
Price and/or the Contract Completion Date. The term Change Order shall also include written orders to
proceed issued pursuant to Section 38 (a) (3). A Change Order, once signed by all parties, is incorporated
into and becomes a part of the Contract.
Code of Virginia: 1950 Code of Virginia as amended. Sections of the Code referred to herein are noted
by § xx-xx.
Construction: The term used to include new construction, reconstruction, renovation, restoration, major
repair, demolition and all similar work upon buildings and ancillary facilities, including any draining,
dredging, excavation, grading or similar work upon real property.
Contract: The Contract Between Owner and Contractor, Form CO-9, hereinafter referred to as the
Contract.
Contract Completion Date: The date by which the Work must be substantially complete. The Contract
Completion Date is customarily established in the Notice to Proceed, based on the Time for Completion. In
some instances, however, the Contract contains a mandatory Contract Completion Date, which shall be
stated in the Invitation for Bid or Request for Proposal, as applicable.
Contract Documents: The Contract between Owner and Contractor (Form CO-9) signed by the Owner
and the Contractor and any documents expressly incorporated therein. Such incorporated documents
customarily include the bid submitted by the Contractor, these General Conditions, any Supplemental
General Conditions, any Special Conditions, the plans and the specifications, and all modifications,
including addenda and subsequent Change Orders.
Contract Price: The total compensation payable to the Contractor for performing the Work, subject to
modification by Change Order.
Contractor: The person with whom the Owner has entered into a contractual agreement to do the Work on
this project.
3
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
Date of Commencement: the date as indicated in the written Notice to Proceed, the receipt of the earliest
Building Permit, or a date mutually agreed to between the Owner and Contractor in writing, whichever is
the latest.
Day(s): Calendar day(s) unless otherwise noted.
Defective: An adjective which, when modifying the word Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory,
faulty, deficient, does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of
inspections, standards, tests or approvals required by the Contract Documents, or Work that has been
damaged prior to the A/E's recommendation of Final Payment (unless responsibility for the protection
thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion or Beneficial Occupancy).
Drawing: A page or sheet of the Plans which presents a graphic representation, usually drawn to scale,
showing the technical information, design, location, and dimensions of various elements of the Work. The
graphic representations include, but are not limited to, plan views, elevations, transverse and longitudinal
sections, large and small scale sections and details, isometrics, diagrams, schedules, tables and/or pictures.
Emergency: Any unforeseen situation, combination of circumstances, or a resulting state that poses
imminent danger to health, life or property.
Final Completion Date: The date of the Owner's acceptance of the Work from the Contractor upon
confirmation from the Architect/Engineer and the Contractor that the Work is totally complete in
accordance with Section 44(b).
Field Order: A written order issued by the A/E which clarifies or explains the plans or specifications, or
any portion or detail thereof, without changing the design, the Contract Price, the Time for Completion or
the Contract Completion Date.
Final Payment: The final payment that the Contractor receives pursuant to the applicable provisions of
Section 36, except in the event no final payment is made due to termination of the Contract under either
Sections 41 or 42. In the event of a termination for cause under Section 41, the Final Payment shall be
when the termination became effective. In the event of a termination for convenience under Section 42, the
Final Payment shall be either the payment of compensation for termination that the Contractor receives
according to the provisions of Subsection 42, or the Owner’s determination that no compensation for
termination is due the Contractor under Subsection 42, as the case may be.
Float: The excess time included in a construction schedule to accommodate such items as inclement
weather and associated delays, equipment failures, and other such unscheduled events. It is the contingency
time associated with a path or chain of activities and represents the amount of time by which the early
finish date of an activity may be delayed without impacting the critical path and delaying the overall
completion of the Project. Any difference in time between the Contractor's approved early completion date
and the Contract Completion Date shall be considered a part of the Project float.
Float, Free: The time (in days) by which an activity may be delayed or lengthened without impacting upon
the start day of any activity following in the chain.
Float, Total: The difference (in days) between the maximum time available within which to perform an
activity and the duration of an activity. It represents the time by which an activity may be delayed or
lengthened without impacting the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date.
Notice: All written notices, including demands, instructions, claims, approvals and disapprovals, required
or authorized under the Contract Documents. Any written notice by either party to the Contract shall be
sufficiently given by any one or combination of the following, whichever shall first occur: (1) delivered by
4
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
hand to the last known business address of the person to whom the notice is due; (2) delivered by hand to
the person's authorized agent, representative or officer wherever they may be found; or (3) enclosed in a
postage prepaid envelope addressed to such last known business address and delivered to a United States
Postal Service official or mailbox. Notice is effective upon such delivery. All notices to the Owner should
be directed to the Project Manager.
If the Owner and the Contractor agree in writing that Notices transmitted by Facsimile (Fax) or e-mail are
acceptable for the Project, such Notice shall be transmitted to the Fax number or e-mail address listed in the
agreement and shall have a designated space for the Fax or e-mail Notice recipient to acknowledge his
receipt by authorized signature and date. The Fax or e-mail Notice with authorized signature
acknowledging receipt shall be Faxed or e-mailed back to the sender. The Faxed or e-mailed Notice shall
be effective on the date it is acknowledged by authorized signature. All Faxed or e-mailed Notices shall
also be sent by hard copy, which shall be effective upon delivery, as provided herein. Notice shall be
effective upon the date of acknowledgment of the Faxed or e-mailed Notice or the date of delivery,
whichever occurs first.
Notice to Proceed: A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor (with a copy to A/E) fixing the
date on which the Contract time will commence for the Contractor to begin the prosecution of the Work in
accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Notice to Proceed will customarily
identify a Contract Completion Date.
Owner: The public body with whom the Contractor has entered into a contractual agreement and for whom
the Work or services is to be provided. The term "Owner", as used herein, shall also mean the Agency.
Person: This term includes any individual, corporation, partnership, association, company, business, trust,
joint venture, or other legal entity.
Plans: The term used to describe the group or set of project-specific drawings which are included in the
Contract Documents.
Project: The term used instead of the specific or proper assigned title of the entire undertaking which
includes, but is not limited to, the "Work" described by the Contract Documents.
Project Inspector: One or more persons employed by the Owner to inspect the Work for the Owner and/or
to document and maintain records of activities at the Site to the extent required by the Owner. The Owner
shall notify the Contractor in writing of the appointment of such Project Inspector(s). The scope of the
Project Inspector's authority with respect to the Contractor is limited to that indicated in Section 16 (e) and
(f) and as supplemented by the Owner in writing to the Project Inspector and to the Contractor.
Project Manager: The Project Manager as used herein shall be the Owner's designated representative on
the Project. The Project Manager shall be the person through whom the Owner generally conveys written
decisions and notices. All notices due the Owner and all information required to be conveyed to the Owner
shall be conveyed to the Project Manager. The scope of the Project Manager's authority is limited to that
authorized by the Owner, who shall provide written information to the Contractor at the Preconstruction
meeting defining those limits. Upon receipt of such information, the Contractor shall be on notice that it
cannot rely on any decisions of the Project Manager outside the scope of his authority. Nothing herein shall
be construed to prevent the Owner from issuing any notice directly to the Contractor. The Owner may
change the Project Manager from time to time and may, in the event that the Project Manager is absent,
disabled or otherwise temporarily unable to fulfill his duties, appoint an interim Project Manager.
Provide: Shall mean furnish and install ready for its intended use.
Schedule of Values: The schedule prepared by the Contractor and acceptable to the Owner which
indicates the value of that portion of the Contract Price to be paid for each trade or major component of the
Work.
5
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
Site: Shall mean the location at which the Work is performed or is to be performed.
Specifications: That part of the Contract Documents containing the written administrative requirements
and the technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards, and workmanship
which describe the proposed Work in sufficient detail and provide sufficient information for the Building
Official to determine code compliance and for the Contractor to perform the Work. (The General
Conditions, any Supplemental General Conditions, various bidding information and instructions, and blank
copies of various forms to be used during the execution of the Work are usually bound with the
Specifications.)
Subcontractor: A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the
performance of the Work. Subcontractor includes any person who provides on-site labor but does not
include any person who only furnishes or supplies materials for the Project.
Submittals: All shop, fabrication, setting and installation drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules,
samples, and other data required by the Contract Documents which are specifically prepared by or for the
Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules,
performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a Supplier and submitted by
the Contractor to illustrate material or equipment conformance of some portion of the Work with the
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Substantial Completion: The condition when the Owner agrees that the Work, or a specific portion
thereof, is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so that it can be utilized by
the Owner for the purposes for which it was intended. The Owner at its sole discretion may, after obtaining
the necessary approvals and certificates, take Beneficial Occupancy at this time or choose to wait to occupy
until after Final Completion is achieved.
Supplemental General Conditions: That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements
the General Conditions.
Supplier: A manufacturer, fabricator, distributor, material-man or vendor who provides material for the
Project but does not provide on-site labor.
Time for Completion: The number of consecutive calendar days following the Date of Commencement
which the Contractor has to substantially complete all Work required by the Contract.
Underground Facilities: All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or
other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which are or have been
installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid
petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal,
traffic or other control systems or water.
Work: The services performed under this Contract including, but not limited to, furnishing labor, and
furnishing and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction. The Work also includes the
entire completed construction, or the various separately identifiable parts thereof, required to be provided
under the Contract Documents or which may reasonably be expected to be provided as part of a complete,
code compliant and functioning system for those systems depicted in the plans and specifications..
2.
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
(a)
The Contract Between Owner and Contractor (CO-9), the Workers' Compensation Certificate of
Coverage (CO-9a), the Standard Performance Bond (CO-10), the Standard Labor and Material
Payment Bond (CO-10.1), the Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (CO-12), the
Affidavit of Payments of Claims (CO-13), the Contractor's Certificate of Substantial Completion
(CO-13.2a), and the Contractor's Certificate of Completion (CO-13.2) issued by the
6
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
Commonwealth of Virginia in its Construction and Professional Services Manual are forms
incorporated in these General Conditions by reference and are made a part hereof to the same
extent as though fully set forth herein. They must be used by the Contractor for their respective
purposes.
3.
(b)
All time limits stated in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the Time for
Completion of the Work, are of the essence of the Contract.
(c)
The Contract Between Owner and Contractor shall be signed by the Owner and the Contractor in
as many original counterparts as may be mutually agreed upon, each of which shall be considered
an original.
(d)
Anything called for by one of the Contract Documents and not called for by the others shall be of
like effect as if required or called for by all, except that a provision clearly designed to negate or
alter a provision contained in one or more of the other Contract Documents shall have the intended
effect. In the event of conflicts among the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall take
precedence in the following order: the Contract between Owner and Contractor; the Supplemental
General Conditions; the General Conditions; the Special Conditions; the specifications with
attachments; and the plans.
(e)
If any provision of this Contract shall be held invalid by any court of competent jurisdiction, such
holding shall not invalidate any other provision.
(f)
All correspondence, invoices, memoranda, submittals and other documents related to this Project
whether generated by the Owner, the A/E, the Contractor or others should be identified at the
beginning of the document with the eleven digit (XXX-XXXXX-XXX) Project Code Number.
Additional identification such as a job number, purchase order number or such may also be shown
at the generator's option.
LAWS AND REGULATIONS
(a)
The Contractor shall comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of any
public authority bearing on the performance of the Work and shall give all notices required
thereby. The Contractor shall assure that all Subcontractors and tradesmen who perform Work on
the project are properly licensed by the Department of Professional and Occupational Regulation
as required by Title 54.1, Chapter 11, Articles 1 and 3 and by applicable regulations.
(b)
This Contract and all other contracts and subcontracts are subject to the provisions of Articles 3
and 5, Chapter 4, Title 40.1, Code of Virginia, relating to labor unions and the "right to work." The
Contractor and its Subcontractors, whether residents or nonresidents of the Commonwealth, who
perform any Work related to the Project shall comply with all of the said provisions.
(c)
IMMIGRATION REFORM AND CONTROL ACT OF 1986: By signing this Contract, the
Contractor certifies that it does not and will not during the performance of this Contract violate the
provisions of the Federal Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986, which prohibits
employment of illegal aliens.
(d)
The provisions of all rules and regulations governing safety as adopted by the
Commission of the Commonwealth of Virginia and as issued by the Department
Industry under Title 40.1 of the Code of Virginia shall apply to all Work under
Inspectors from the Department of Labor and Industry shall be granted access to
inspection without first obtaining a search or administrative warrant.
(e)
Building Permit: Because this Project is on Commonwealth of Virginia property, codes or zoning
ordinances of local political subdivisions do not apply to Work on the property. The Virginia
7
Safety Codes
of Labor and
this Contract.
the Work for
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
Uniform Statewide Building Code applies to the Work and is administered by the Building
Official for State-owned Buildings. The Building Permit will be obtained and paid for by the
Owner. All other permits, local license fees, business fees, taxes, or similar assessments imposed
by the appropriate political subdivision shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. See
Section 25 for utility connection fees and services.
(f)
The Contractor shall include in each of its subcontracts a provision requiring each Subcontractor
to include or otherwise be subject to the same payment and interest requirements in Subsections
(a), (b), and (c) of Section 37 of these General Conditions with respect to each lower-tier
Subcontractor and Supplier.
(g)
The Contractor, if not licensed as an asbestos abatement contractor in accordance with §54.1-514,
Code of Virginia, shall have all asbestos-related Work performed by subcontractors who are duly
licensed as asbestos contractors for the Work required.
(h)
Lead Based Paint Activities: If the Contract Documents indicate that lead based paint is present on
existing materials, components, or surfaces, the Contractor shall conform to the following:
(1)
The requirements set forth in 59 Federal Register 45,872 (September 2, 1994) Proposed
Rule) - Lead; Requirements for Lead based Paint Activities (Proposed Rules) in selecting
and performing the means, methods and procedures for performing the Work. This
includes, but is not limited to, training of personnel, lead abatement, encapsulation of
lead containing materials, removal and handling of lead containing materials, and
methods of disposal. When the Final Rule, to be codified at 40 CFR 745, supersedes the
Proposed Rule, the Contractor shall be responsible for conforming to the Final Rule, as of
the effective date set forth therein.
(2)
The requirements for employee protection contained in 29 CFR Part 1926, Subpart D,
and the requirements for record-keeping contained 29 CFR Part 1910.
(3)
The Virginia Department of Labor and Industry's (DLI) Emergency Regulation published
in the May 27, 1996 Virginia Register, requiring, among other things, that a permit be
issued to the lead abatement contractor, or any subsequent regulation issued by DLI.
(i)
If the Contractor violates laws or regulations that govern the Project, the Contractor shall take
prompt action to correct or abate such violation and shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless
against any fines, and/or penalties that result from such violation. To the extent that such violation
is the result of negligence or other actionable conduct of the Contractor, the Contractor shall
indemnify and hold the Owner harmless against any third party claims, suits, awards, actions,
causes of action or judgments, including but not limited to attorney's fees and costs incurred
thereunder, that arise or result from such violation.
(j)
If the Work includes any land disturbing activities, the Contractor shall have on-site an individual
certified by the Department of Conservation and Recreation as a Responsible Land Disturber in
accordance with §10.1-563, Code of Virginia.
(k)
The Contractor is neither required nor prohibited from entering into or adhering to agreements
with one or more labor organizations, or otherwise discriminating against subcontractors for
becoming or refusing to become, or remaining signatories to or otherwise adhering to, agreements
with one or more labor organizations. This section does not prohibit contractors or subcontractors
from voluntarily entering into agreements with one or more labor organizations. Both the agency
and contractor are entitled to injunctive relief to prevent any violation of this section.
This section does not apply to any public-private agreement for any construction in which the
private body, as a condition of its investment or partnership with the state agency, requires that the
8
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
private body have the right to control its labor relations policy and perform all work associated
with such investment or partnership in compliance with all collective bargaining agreements to
which the private party is a signatory and is thus legally bound with its own employees and the
employees of its contractors and subcontractors in any manner permitted by the National Labor
Relations Act, 29 U.S.C. § 151 et seq., or the Railway Labor Act, 45 U.S.C. § 151 et seq.
This section does not prohibit an employer or any other person covered by the National Labor
Relations Act or the Railway Labor Act from entering into agreements or engaging in any other
activity protected by law.
This section shall not be interpreted to interfere with the labor relations of persons covered by the
National Labor Relations Act or the Railway Labor Act.
4.
NONDISCRIMINATION
(a)
§2.2-4311 of the Code of Virginia shall be applicable. It provides as follows:
“1.
2.
(b)
5.
During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor agrees as follows:
a.
The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for
employment because of race, religion, color, sex, national origin, age, disability, or
other basis prohibited by state law relating to discrimination in employment, except
where there is a bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the
normal operation of the contractor. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous
places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth
the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause.
b.
The Contractor, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on
behalf of the contractor, will state that such Contractor is an equal opportunity
employer.
c.
Notices, advertisements and solicitations placed in accordance with federal law, rule
or regulation shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of meeting the requirements
of this section.
The Contractor will include the provisions of the foregoing paragraphs a, b and c in every
subcontract or purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding
upon each subcontractor or vendor.”
Where applicable, the Virginians with Disabilities Act and the federal Americans with Disabilities
Act shall apply to the Contractor and all Subcontractors.
PROHIBITION OF ALCOHOL AND OTHER DRUGS
(a)
§2.2-4312 of the Code of Virginia shall be applicable. It provides as follows:
“During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees to (i) provide a drug-free
workplace for the contractor's employees; (ii) post in conspicuous places, available to employees
and applicants for employment, a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture,
sale, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of a controlled substance or marijuana is
prohibited in the contractor's workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against
employees for violations of such prohibition; (iii) state in all solicitations or advertisements for
employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor that the contractor maintains a drug-free
workplace; and (iv) include the provisions of the foregoing clauses in every subcontract or
purchase order of over $10,000, so that the provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or
vendor. For the purposes of this section, "drug-free workplace" means a site for the performance
of work done in connection with a specific contract awarded to a contractor in accordance with
this chapter, the employees of whom are prohibited from engaging in the unlawful manufacture,
sale, distribution, dispensation, possession or use of any controlled substance or marijuana during
the performance of the contract.”
9
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
(b)
6.
CO-7
The Contractor shall also establish, maintain and enforce policies which prohibit the following
acts by all Contractor, Subcontractor and Supplier personnel at the Site:
(1)
The manufacture, distribution, dispensation, possession, or use of alcohol, marijuana or
other drugs, except possession and medically prescribed use of prescription drugs; and
(2)
The impairment of judgment or physical abilities due to the use of alcohol, marijuana or
other drugs, including impairment from prescription drugs.
TIME FOR COMPLETION
(a)
The Time for Completion shall be designated by the Owner on the Invitation for Bids, Request for
Proposals, or other prebid/proposal documents. In some instances, the Time for Completion may
be stated on the Invitation for Bids, Request for Proposals, or other prebid/pre-proposal document
in the form of a Contract Completion Date. The Work must be substantially completed by the
Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor
shall achieve Final Completion within thirty (30) days after the date of Substantial Completion.
(b)
The Time for Completion shall be stated in the Contract between Owner and Contractor and shall
become a binding part of the Contract upon which the Owner may rely in planning the use of the
facilities to be constructed and for all other purposes. If the Contractor fails to substantially
complete the Work within the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date, as set forth in
the Contract, he shall be subject to payment of actual damages incurred by the Owner or liquidated
damages, if provided for in the Contract.
(c)
The Contractor, in submitting his bid or proposal, acknowledges that he has taken into
consideration normal weather conditions. Normal weather does not mean statistically average
weather, but rather means a range of weather patterns which might be anticipated based on
weather data for the past ten (10) years, (i.e., conditions which are not extremely unusual). Normal
weather conditions shall be determined from the public historical records available, including the
U.S. Department of Commerce, Local Climatological Data Sheets, National Oceanic and
Atmospheric Administration / Environmental Data and Information Service, National Climatic
Center and National Weather Service. The data sheets to be used shall be those for the locality or
localities closest to the site of the work. No additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor
because of adverse weather conditions; however, an extension of time for abnormal weather will
be considered by the Owner under the following conditions, all of which must be strictly complied
with by the contractor:
(1)
The request for additional time shall be further substantiated by weather data collected
during the period of delay at the Site. Said data must demonstrate that an actual departure
from normal weather occurred at the Site during the dates in question.
(2)
The extension requested must be supported by a delay in completion of the entire Project
shown on the critical path of the accepted CPM Schedule or the approved bar graph
schedule required for the Project. Extensions will be granted only for delays in
completion of the Project, not for that portion of any delay which consumes only "float"
time.
(3)
A request for extension of time based on abnormal weather must be made in writing
within fourteen (14) calendar days of the completion of the calendar month during which
abnormal weather is claimed at the Site.
(4)
All of the evidence and data supporting the request (including both historical data and the
recordings at the Site during the time of delay) must be furnished to the Owner before
any consideration will be given to the request. That supporting data shall be submitted by
the end of the calendar month following the month for which the request is made.
10
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
7.
8.
CO-7
(d)
The failure by the Contractor to comply with any and all of the conditions in (c) above shall
constitute a waiver of claims for the extension of time for abnormal weather.
(e)
The Contractor represents and agrees that he has taken into account in his bid the requirements of
the bid documents, the Contract Documents, local conditions, availability of materials, equipment,
and labor, and any other factors which may affect the performance of the Work. The Contractor
agrees and warrants that he will achieve Substantial Completion of the Work to allow the Owner
to have Beneficial Occupancy not later than the Time for Completion or Contract Completion
Date. The Contractor agrees and warrants that he will achieve Final Completion of the Work (the
entire completion of all Work, including "punch list" items), not later than thirty (30) days after
achieving Substantial Completion.
CONDITIONS AT SITE
(a)
The Contractor shall have visited the Site prior to bidding or submitting its proposal and is totally
responsible for having ascertained pertinent local conditions such as location, accessibility and
general character of the Site, and the character and extent of existing conditions, improvements
and work within or adjacent to the Site. Claims, which result from the Contractor's failure to do so,
will be deemed waived.
(b)
If, in the performance of the Contract, hidden physical conditions of a building being modified are
exposed revealing unusual or materially different conditions from those ordinarily encountered or
inherent in work of this nature, or if subsurface or latent conditions at the Site are found which are
materially different from those frequently present in the locality or from those indicated in the
Contract Documents, the Contractor must report such conditions to the Owner and to the
Architect/Engineer before the conditions are disturbed. Upon such notice, or upon his own
observation of such conditions, the Architect/Engineer shall promptly propose such changes in the
Contract Documents as he finds necessary to conform to the different conditions. Any change in
the cost of the Work or additional time needed for completion must be requested pursuant to
Sections 38, 39 and/or 43 of these General Conditions.
(c)
If the Contractor, during the course of the Work, observes the existence of any material which he
knows, should know, or has reason to believe is hazardous to human health, the Contractor shall
promptly notify the Owner. The Owner will provide the Contractor with instructions regarding the
disposition of the material. The Contractor shall not perform any Work involving the material or
any Work causing the material to be less accessible prior to receipt of special instructions from the
Owner.
CONTRACT SECURITY
(a)
For contracts with a value exceeding five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000), the Contractor
shall deliver to the Owner or its designated representative, a Commonwealth of Virginia Standard
Performance Bond, DGS-30-084 (Form CO-10) and a Commonwealth of Virginia Standard Labor
and Material Payment Bond, DGS-30-088 (Form CO-10.1) each fully executed by the Contractor
and one or more surety companies legally licensed to do business in Virginia and each in an
amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the accepted bid or proposal. If more than one
Surety executes a bond, each shall be jointly and severally liable to the Owner for the entire
amount of the bond. Sureties shall be selected by the Contractor, subject to approval by the
Owner. No payment on the Contract shall be due and payable to the Contractor until the bonds
have been approved by the Owner and the Office of the Attorney General of Virginia. In order to
facilitate review of the bonds by the Office of the Attorney General, the power of attorney from
the surety company to its agent who executes the bond shall be attached to the bond, or, if not so
attached, prior to the execution of the bonds by the surety, recorded in the Office of the Clerk of
Court for the City of Richmond, Virginia, at the John Marshall Court Building, 400 North Ninth
11
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
Street, except when the Owner is one of the following, in which case the power of attorney must
be recorded with the Clerk of Court in the place shown:
9.
OWNER
University of Virginia
PLACE OF RECORDATION
City of Charlottesville
Old Dominion University
City of Norfolk
Norfolk State University
City of Norfolk
Christopher Newport University
City of Newport News
Virginia Polytechnic Institute
and State University
County of Montgomery
(b)
For the purposes of all Standard Labor and Material Payment Bonds entered into, the term
"subcontractors" as used in § 2.2-4337(A)(2) of the Code of Virginia is interpreted to mean any
contractors who participated in the prosecution of the Work undertaken by the Contractor (referred
to in § 2.2-4337(A)(2) of the Code of Virginia as the "prime contractor"), whether such contractor
had a direct contract with the Contractor (prime contractor) or whether there were one or more
other intervening Subcontractors contractually positioned between it and the Contractor (prime
contractor).
(c)
See § 2.2-4338 of the Code of Virginia, for alternative forms of security for payment and/or
performance bonds.
(d)
For contracts with a value of less than five hundred thousand dollars ($500,000), the Contractor
will not be required to provide a Standard Performance Bond and a Standard Labor and Material
Payment Bond as described above unless the Invitation for Bid or Request for Proposal states that
such bonds will be required.
SUBCONTRACTS
(a)
The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable after the signing of the Contract, notify the Owner and
Architect/Engineer in writing of the names of all Subcontractors proposed for the principal parts of
the Work and of such others as the Architect/Engineer may direct. Where the specifications
establish qualifications or criteria for Subcontractors, manufacturers, or individuals performing
Work on the Project, the Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining that those proposed meet
the criteria or qualifications. The Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor that the Owner
may, within a reasonable time, object to as unsuitable. Neither the Owner nor the
Architect/Engineer shall direct the Contractor to contract with any particular Subcontractor unless
provided in the specifications or Invitation for Bids or Request for Proposal.
(b)
The Owner may select a particular Subcontractor for a certain part of the Work and designate on
the Invitation for Bids or Request for Proposal that the Subcontractor shall be used for the part of
the Work indicated and that the Subcontractor has agreed to perform the Work for the subcontract
amount stipulated on the bid or Proposal form. The Contractor shall include the stipulated amount
plus his Contractor markups in the bid or Proposal. In such case, the Contractor shall be
responsible for that Subcontractor and its work and the Subcontractor shall be responsible to the
Contractor for its work just as if the Contractor had selected the Subcontractor. If the Contractor
has a reasonable objection to the Subcontractor being assigned, then the Contractor shall note the
exception in his bid or proposal and the reason for the exception and maintain appropriate
provisions for coordinating the work of the Subcontractor. The Owner, at its sole discretion, may
accept the Contractor’s bid or proposal with the exception noted and contract separately with the
Subcontractor under the provisions Section 10 of the contract or assign a different Subcontractor.
12
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
10.
11.
CO-7
(c)
The Owner shall, on request, furnish to any Subcontractor, if practicable, the amounts of payments
made to the Contractor, the Schedule of Values and Requests for Payment submitted by the
Contractor and any other documentation submitted by the Contractor which would tend to show
what amounts are due and payable by the Contractor to the Subcontractor.
(d)
The Contractor shall be fully responsible to the Owner for all acts and omissions of his agents and
employees and all succeeding tiers of Subcontractors and Suppliers performing or furnishing any
of the Work. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship between
Owner or Architect/Engineer and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or
organization, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Architect/Engineer to pay
for or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person
or organization, except as may otherwise be required by law.
(e)
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for his invitees at the Site and for those of his
Subcontractors, Suppliers, and their employees, including any acts or omissions of such invitees.
(f)
The Contractor agrees that he alone is responsible for all dealings with his Subcontractors and
Suppliers, and their subcontractors, employees and invitees, including, but not limited to, the
Subcontractors' or Suppliers' claims, demands, actions, disputes and similar matters unless
specifically provided otherwise by the Contract or by statute.
SEPARATE CONTRACTS
(a)
The Owner reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with the Project, the Work under
which may proceed simultaneously with the execution of this Contract. The Contractor shall
afford other separate contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of their
materials and the execution of their work. The Contractor shall cooperate with them and shall take
all reasonable action to coordinate his Work with theirs. If the Owner has listed other separate
contracts in the Invitation for Bids or Requests for Proposal which it expects to proceed
simultaneously with the Work of the Contractor, and has included the estimated timing of such
other Contracts in the Invitation for Bids or Requests for Proposal, the Contractor shall integrate
the schedule of those separate contracts into his scheduling. The Contractor shall make every
reasonable effort to assist the Owner in maintaining the schedule for all separate contracts. If the
work performed by the separate contractor is defective or performed so as to prevent or threaten to
prevent the Contractor from carrying out his Work according to the Contract, the Contractor shall
immediately notify the Owner and the Architect/Engineer upon discovering such conditions.
(b)
If a dispute arises between the Contractor and any separate contractor(s) as to their responsibility
for cleaning up as required by Sections 31 (c) and 31 (d) of these General Conditions, the Owner
may clean up and charge the cost thereof to the respective contractors in proportion to their
responsibility. If a Contractor disputes the Owner's apportionment of clean-up costs, it shall be
that contractor's burden to demonstrate and prove the correct apportionment.
CONTRACTOR'S AND SUBCONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
(a)
The Contractor shall not commence Work under this Contract until he has obtained all the
insurance required hereunder from an insurer authorized to do business in Virginia and such
insurance has been approved by the Owner; nor shall the Contractor allow any Subcontractor to
commence Work on his subcontract until the same types of insurance in an appropriate amount
have been obtained by the Subcontractor and approved by the Contractor. Approval of insurance
by the Owner shall not relieve or decrease the liability of the Contractor hereunder.
(b)
The Contractor shall take out, and shall maintain in force at all times during the performance of
the Work, Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability Insurance for all of his employees
13
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
engaged in the Work in an amount not less than the minimum required by §§ 2.2-4332 and 65.2100 et seq. of the Code of Virginia. In case any of the Work is sublet, the Contractor shall require
each Subcontractor similarly to provide Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability
Insurance for all of the latter's employees to be engaged in the Work. Prior to award of the
Contract, the Contractor shall submit, on the form provided by the Owner, a Certificate of
Coverage verifying Workers' Compensation. The Contractor shall likewise obtain a Certificate of
Coverage for Workers' Compensation coverage from each subcontractor prior to awarding the
subcontract and shall provide a copy to the Owner.
12.
(c)
During the performance of the Work under this Contract, the Contractor shall maintain
commercial general liability insurance to include Premises / Operations Liability, Products and
Completed Operations Coverage, Independent Contractor's Liability, Owner's and Contractor's
Protective Liability, and Personal Injury Liability, which shall insure him against claims of
personal injury, including death, as well as against claims for property damage, which may arise
from operations under this Contract, whether such operations be by himself or by any
Subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them. The amounts of
general liability insurance shall be not less than $1,000,000 per occurrence and $2,000,000
aggregate combined limit. The Commonwealth of Virginia, its officers, employees and agents,
shall be named as an additional insured with respect to the Work being procured. The
Supplemental General Conditions may require the Contractor to provide an Umbrella insurance
policy in a specified amount for the Project.
(d)
During the performance of the Work under this Contract, the Contractor shall maintain automobile
liability insurance which shall insure him against claims of personal injury, including death, as
well as against claims for property damage, which may arise from operations under this Contract,
whether such operations be by himself or by any Subcontractor, or by anyone directly or indirectly
employed by either of them. The amounts of automobile insurance shall be not less than
$1,000,000 combined limit for bodily injury and property damage per occurrence.
(e)
The Asbestos Contractor or Subcontractor, as the case may be, shall provide occurrence-based
liability insurance with asbestos coverages in an amount not less than $1,000,000 and shall name
the following as additional insureds: The Commonwealth of Virginia, its officers, its employees
and its agents; the Architect/Engineer (if not the Asbestos Project Designer); and the Contractor
(where the asbestos work is being performed by the Asbestos Subcontractor).
"ALL RISK" BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE
(a)
The Contractor, at his cost, shall obtain and maintain in the names of the Owner and the
Contractor "all-risk" builder's risk insurance (or fire, extended coverage, vandalism and malicious
mischief insurance, if approved by the Owner and the Director, Division of Engineering and
Buildings) upon the entire structure or structures on which the Work of this Contract is to be done
and upon all material in or adjacent thereto which is intended for use thereon, to one hundred
percent (100%) of the insurable value thereof. Such insurance may include a deductible provision
if the Owner so provides in the Supplemental General Conditions, in which case the Contractor
will be liable for such deductions, whenever a claim arises. The loss, if any, is to be made
adjustable with and payable to the Owner, in accordance with its interests, as they may appear.
The Owner, its officers, employees and its agents, shall be named as an additional insured in any
policy of insurance issued. Written evidence of the insurance shall be filed with the Owner no later
than thirty (30) days following the award of the Contract. In the event of cancellation of this
insurance, not less than thirty (30) days prior written notice must be sent to the Owner. A copy of
the policy of insurance shall be given to the Owner upon demand.
(b)
The value of the builder's risk insurance shall exclude the costs of excavations, backfills,
foundations, underground utilities and Sitework.
14
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
13.
CO-7
(c)
The Owner maintains insurance coverage on its buildings. On re-roofing, renovation, and interior
modifications of existing building projects where the Owner continues to occupy the building, or a
portion thereof, while the Work is being performed, the Contractor shall provide “all risk” builders
risk insurance, as described above, in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the
Contract Price for the Work. In those instances, the Contract between the Owner and Contractor
for the project shall expressly exclude the project from the requirements of Subsection 12(a). The
Contractor is responsible for providing any desired coverage for Contractor's or Subcontractors'
buildings, equipment, materials, tools or supplies that are on-site.
(d)
Any insurance provided through the Department of Treasury, Division of Risk Management, on
buildings, construction, additions or renovations will not extend to Contractor's nor
Subcontractors' buildings, equipment, materials, tools or supplies unless these items are to become
property of the Owner upon completion of the Project and the Owner has assumed responsibility
for such items at the time of the loss.
TAXES, FEES AND ASSESSMENTS
The Contractor shall, without additional expense to the Owner, pay all applicable federal, state, and local
taxes, fees, and assessments except the taxes, fees and assessments on the real property comprising the Site
of the project. If the State Building Official elects to have the local building official inspect the Work as
provided by §36-98.1 of the Code of Virginia, the Owner shall pay the resulting fees to the local building
official.
14.
PATENTS
The Contractor shall obtain all licenses necessary to use any invention, article, appliance, process or
technique of whatever kind and shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall hold the
Owner, its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any loss or liability for or on account of the
infringement of any patent rights in connection with any invention, process, technique, article or appliance
manufactured or used in the performance of the Contract, including its use by the Owner, unless such
invention, process, technique, article or appliance is specifically named in the specifications or plans as
acceptable for use in carrying out the Work. If, before using any invention, process, technique, article or
appliance specifically named in the specifications or plans as acceptable for use in carrying out the Work,
the Contractor has or acquires information that the same is covered by letters of patent making it necessary
to secure the permission of the patentee, or other, for the use of the same, he shall promptly advise the
Owner and the Architect/Engineer. The Owner may direct that some other invention, process, technique,
article or appliance be used. Should the Contractor have reason to believe that the invention, process,
technique, article or appliance so specified is an infringement of a patent, and fail to inform the Owner and
the Architect/Engineer, he shall be responsible for any loss or liability due to the infringement.
15.
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER'S STATUS
(a)
The Architect/Engineer shall have authority to endeavor to secure the faithful performance by
Owner and Contractor of the Work under the Contract. He shall review the Contractor's Submittals
for conformance to the requirements of the Contract Documents and return copies to the
Contractor with appropriate notations. He shall interpret the requirements of the plans and
specifications and issue Field Orders to the Contractor as may be required. He shall recommend to
the Owner suspension of the Work (in whole or in part) whenever such suspension may be
necessary to ensure the proper execution of the Contract. He shall have authority to reject, in
writing, Work, including material, installation or workmanship, which does not conform to the
requirements of the plans and specifications. He shall determine the progress and quality of the
Work, subject to the right of the Owner to make an overriding decision to the contrary. Upon
request by the Contractor, the Architect/Engineer shall confirm, in writing within fourteen (14)
days, any oral order or determination made by him.
15
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
(b)
The Architect/Engineer shall have no authority to approve or order changes in the Work which
alter the design concept or which call for an extension of time or a change in the Contract Price.
(c)
Although the Owner is bound by the terms of the Contract with the Contractor, including the plans
and specifications, the Owner shall have the right, but not the duty, to countermand any decision
of the Architect/Engineer and to follow or reject the advice of the Architect/Engineer, including
but not limited to acceptance of the Work, as it deems best. In those instances where the
Architect/Engineer has been given authority to act, the Architect/Engineer shall promptly do so,
but in the case of disagreement between the Architect/Engineer and the Owner, the decision of the
Owner shall be final. The Contractor shall not be bound by any determination, interpretation or
decision of the Architect/Engineer, if it is later determined that the same is not in accord with the
Contract Documents. The party taking issue with the determination, interpretation or decision of
the Architect/Engineer shall give the other party written notice of such fact within fourteen (14)
days after the determination, interpretation or decision is communicated by the
Architect/Engineer. In the actual performance of the Work, however, the Contractor shall, in the
first instance, proceed in accordance with instructions given by the Architect/Engineer unless the
Owner and the Contractor mutually agree that the Contractor shall proceed otherwise.
(d)
All orders from the Owner to the Contractor shall either be transmitted through the
Architect/Engineer or communicated directly to the Contractor and the Architect/Engineer by the
Owner.
(e)
Should the Owner choose to employ another or different Architect/Engineer, the status of the
Architect/Engineer so employed shall be the same as that of the former Architect/Engineer.
(f)
The Architect/Engineer will provide to the Owner and the Contractor after each visit to the Site, a
written report indicating the date, time of day, weather conditions and the names of the persons
representing the Architect/Engineer who participated in the visit. The report will advise the Owner
of any problems that were noted and shall compare the Architect/Engineer's observations of the
actual progress of the Work with that reported by the Contractor. On the basis of his on-Site
observations as Architect/Engineer, he will make every reasonable effort to guard the Owner
against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the Contractor. He shall have the authority to
inspect the Work, to note and report Defective Work and deviations from the Contract Documents
to the Owner, to reject same, and to recommend to the Owner the suspension of the Work when
necessary to prevent Defective Work from proceeding or being covered.
The Architect/Engineer shall not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures (other than those expressly specified in Contract Documents), or for
safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, and he shall not be responsible for
the Contractor's failure to carry out the Contractor's own responsibilities.
(g)
(h)
The Architect/Engineer generally conveys written decisions and notices to the Contractor through
the Project Manager and shall generally receive information and Notices from the Contractor
through the Project Manager unless otherwise agreed. The Owner may delegate from the
Architect/Engineer to the Project Manager certain inspection, verification, acceptance, rejection,
and administrative duties and authority, but any such delegation shall be in writing and a copy
thereof provided to the Contractor.
(i)
The provisions of this section are included as information only to describe the relationship
between the Owner, A/E, and Contractor. No failure of the A/E to act in accordance with this
section shall relieve the Contractor from his obligations under the Contract or create any rights in
favor of the Contractor.
16
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
16.
CO-7
INSPECTION
(a)
All material and workmanship shall be subject to inspection, examination and testing by the
Owner, the Architect/Engineer, the Project Inspector, authorized inspectors and authorized
independent testing entities at any and all times during manufacture and/or construction. The
Architect/Engineer and the Owner shall have authority to reject defective material and
workmanship and require its correction. Rejected workmanship shall be satisfactorily corrected
and rejected material shall be satisfactorily replaced with proper material without charge therefor,
and the Contractor shall promptly segregate and remove the rejected material from the Site. If the
Contractor fails to proceed at once with replacement of rejected material and/or the correction of
defective workmanship, the Owner may, by contract or otherwise, replace such material and/or
correct such workmanship and charge the cost to the Contractor, or may terminate the right of the
Contractor to proceed as provided in Section 41 of these General Conditions, the Contractor and
surety being liable for any damage to the same extent as provided in Section 41 for termination
thereunder.
(b)
Site inspections, tests conducted on Site or tests of materials gathered on Site, which the Contract
requires to be performed by independent testing entities, shall be contracted and paid for by the
Owner. Examples of such tests are the testing of cast-in-place concrete, foundation materials, soil
compaction, pile installations, caisson bearings and steel framing connections. The Contractor
shall promptly furnish, without additional charge, all reasonable facilities, labor and materials
necessary and convenient for making such tests. Except as provided in (d) below, whenever such
examination and testing finds defective materials, equipment or workmanship, the Contractor shall
reimburse the Owner for the cost of reexamination and retesting. Although conducted by
independent testing entities, the Owner will not contract and pay for tests or certifications of
materials, manufactured products or assemblies which the Contract, codes, standards, etc., require
to be tested and/or certified for compliance with industry standards such as Underwriters
Laboratories, Factory Mutual or ASTM. If fees are charged for such tests and certifications, they
shall be paid by the Contractor. The Contractor shall also pay for all inspections, tests, and
certifications which the Contract specifically requires him to perform or to pay, together with any
inspections and tests which he chooses to perform for his own purposes, but are not required by
the Contract.
(c)
Where Work is related to or dependent on the Defective Work, the Contractor shall stop such
related or dependent Work until the Defective Work or deficiency is corrected or an alternative
solution is presented that is satisfactory to the Owner. Where Work is rejected because of
defective material or workmanship, the Contractor shall stop like Work in other areas or locations
on the Project until the matter is resolved and the Owner has approved corrective measures.
(d)
Should it be considered necessary or advisable by Owner or the Architect/Engineer at any time
before final acceptance of the entire Work to make an examination of any part of the Work already
completed, by removing or tearing out portions of the Work, the Contractor shall on request
promptly furnish all necessary facilities, labor and material to expose the Work to be tested to the
extent required. If such Work is found to be defective in any respect, due to the fault of the
Contractor or his Subcontractors, the Contractor shall bear all the expenses of uncovering the
Work, of examination and testing, and of satisfactory reconstruction. If, however, such Work is
found to meet the requirements of the Contract, the actual cost of the Contractor's labor and
material necessarily involved in uncovering the Work, the cost of examination and testing, and
Contractor's cost of material and labor necessary for replacement including a markup of fifteen
(15%) percent for overhead and profit shall be paid to the Contractor and he shall, in addition, if
completion of the Work has been delayed thereby, be granted a suitable extension of time.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs and expenses in
removing and replacing the Work if the Contractor had covered the Work prior to any inspection
or test contrary to the instructions of the A/E, Owner or Project Inspector.
17
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
(e)
The Project Inspector has the authority to recommend to the Architect/Engineer and the Owner
that the Work be suspended when in his judgment the Contract Documents are not being followed.
Any such suspension shall be continued only until the matter in question is resolved to the
satisfaction of the Owner. The cost of any such Work stoppage shall be borne by the Contractor
unless it is later determined that no fault existed in the Contractor's Work.
(f)
The Project Inspector has the right and the authority to:
(g)
(h)
(1)
Inspect all construction materials, equipment, and supplies for quality and for compliance
with the Contract Documents and/or approved shop drawings and Submittals.
(2)
Inspect workmanship for compliance with the standards described in the Contract
Documents.
(3)
Observe and report on all tests and inspections performed by the Contractor.
(4)
Recommend rejection of Work which does not conform to requirements of the Contract
Documents.
(5)
Keep a record of construction activities, tests, inspections, and reports.
(6)
Attend all joint Site construction meetings and inspections held by the Owner and/or the
A/E with the Contractor.
(7)
Check materials and equipment, together with documentation related thereto, delivered
for conformance with approved Submittals and the Contract.
(8)
Check installations for proper workmanship and conformance with shop drawing and
installation instructions.
(9)
Assist in the review and verification of the CO-12, Schedule of Values & Certificate for
Payment, submitted by the Contractor each month.
(10)
Do all things for or on behalf of the Owner as the Owner may subsequently direct in
writing.
The Project Inspector has no authority to:
(1)
Authorize deviations from the Contract Documents;
(2)
Enter into the area of responsibility of the Contractor's superintendent;
(3)
Issue directions relative to any aspect of construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures, or in regard to safety precautions and programs in connection
with the Work;
(4)
Authorize or suggest that the Owner occupy the Project, in whole or in part; or
(5)
Issue a certificate for payment.
The duties of the Project Inspector are for the benefit of the Owner only and not for the
Contractor. The Contractor may not rely upon any act, statement, or failure to act on the part of the
Project Inspector, nor shall the failure of the Project Inspector to properly perform his duties in
18
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
any way excuse Defective Work or otherwise improper performance of the Contract by the
Contractor.
17.
18.
SUPERINTENDENCE BY CONTRACTOR
(a)
The Contractor shall have a competent foreman or superintendent, satisfactory to the
Architect/Engineer and the Owner, on the Site at all times during the progress of the Work. The
superintendent or foreman shall be familiar with and be able to read and understand the plans and
specifications, and be capable of communicating orally and in writing with the Owner's inspectors
and the Contractor's workers. The Contractor shall be responsible for all construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences and procedures, for coordinating all portions of the Work under
the Contract except where otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, and for all safety and
worker health programs and practices. The Contractor shall notify the Owner, in writing, of any
proposed change in superintendent, including the reason therefor, prior to making such change.
(b)
The Contractor shall, at all times, enforce strict discipline and good order among the workers on
the Project, and shall not employ on the Work, or contract with, any unfit person, anyone not
skilled in the Work assigned to him, or anyone who will not work in harmony with those
employed by the Contractor, the Subcontractors, the Owner or the Owner's separate contractors
and their subcontractors.
(c)
The Owner may, in writing, require the Contractor to remove from the Site any employee or
Subcontractor's employee the Owner deems to be incompetent, careless, not working in harmony
with others on the Site, or otherwise objectionable, but the Owner shall have no obligation to do
so.
CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION, METHODS AND PROCEDURES
(a)
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for supervising and directing the Work competently and
efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be
necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract. The Contractor shall be solely
responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and for
coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, except where otherwise specified in the
Contract Documents. However, the Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others
in the design or selection of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of
construction which is indicated in and required by the Contract. The Contractor is solely
responsible to the Owner that the finished Work complies with the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for health and safety precautions and programs for
workers and others in connection with the Work. No inspection by, knowledge on the part of, or
acquiescence by the Architect or Engineer, the Project Inspector, the Owner, the Owner's
employees and agents, or any other entity whatever shall relieve the Contractor from its sole
responsibility for compliance with the requirements of the Contract or its sole responsibility for
health and safety programs and precautions.
(b)
If a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is indicated in or
required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means,
method, sequence, technique or procedure of construction acceptable to Architect/Engineer,
subject to the Owner's right to disapprove. The Contractor must submit its written request for the
substitution to the Architect/Engineer with sufficient information to allow the Architect/Engineer
to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that indicated or required by the
Contract.
19
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
(c)
19.
CO-7
The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identification of any drawings shall not
control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the
Work to be performed by any specific trade.
SCHEDULE OF THE WORK
(a)
General: The Contractor is responsible for the scheduling and sequencing of the Work, for
coordinating the Work, for monitoring the progress of the Work, and for taking appropriate action
to keep the Work on schedule. The Contractor may attempt to achieve Substantial Completion on
or before the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date established by the Contract
and receive payment in accordance with Section 36 for the Work completed each period.
However, the date established by the Contract Documents as the deadline for achieving
Substantial Completion must be used in all schedules as the date on which Substantial Completion
will be achieved. The time (in days) between the Contractor's planned early completion and the
contracted Time for Completion is part of the Project "Total Float" time and will be used as such.
Extensions of time pursuant to Sections 38, 39, and 43, damages for delay, and all other matters
between the Owner and the Contractor will be determined using the contractually required
Substantial Completion date, not an early Substantial Completion date planned by the Contractor.
Within two (2) weeks after the Contractor signs the Contract Between Owner and Contractor,
unless otherwise extended by the Owner at the time of the signing, the Contractor shall prepare
and submit to the Owner, with a copy to the Architect/Engineer, a preliminary bar graph schedule
for accomplishing the Work based upon the Time for Completion stated in the Contract. The
preliminary schedule shall be in sufficient detail to show the sequencing of the various trades for
each floor level, wing or work area. The Owner will notify the Contractor of its acceptance of or
objections to the preliminary schedule within fifteen (15) days of receipt by the Owner. A fully
complete Project schedule for accomplishing the Work must be submitted in like manner no later
than sixty (60) days after the Contract is signed by the Owner.
The Owner's failure to reject or its acceptance of any schedule, graph, chart, recovery schedule,
updated schedule, plan of action, etc. shall not constitute a representation or warranty by the
Owner, including but not limited to a representation or warranty that the schedule is feasible or
practical nor shall any such acceptance or failure to reject relieve the Contractor from sole
responsibility for completing the Work within the time allowed.
No progress payments will be payable to the Contractor until after it has submitted a preliminary
schedule which is acceptable to the Owner. Neither the second progress payment nor any
subsequent payment shall be payable to the Contractor until it has submitted a fully complete
Project schedule accepted by the Owner. Nor shall subsequent progress payments be payable to
the Contractor unless and until he submits the monthly bar graphs or status reports required by
Section 19(d) herein or unless and until he provides any recovery schedule pursuant to Section
19(e) herein.
Failure to provide a satisfactory preliminary or fully complete Project schedule within the time
limits stated above shall be a breach of contract for which the Owner may terminate the Contract
in the manner provided in Section 41 of these General Conditions.
The fully complete Project schedule for accomplishing the Work shall be of the type set forth in
subparagraph (1) or (2) below, as appropriate:
(1)
For Contracts with a price of $1,500,000 or less, a bar graph schedule will satisfy the
above requirement. The schedule shall indicate the estimated starting and completion
dates for each major element of the work. See (b) below.
20
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
(2)
(b)
For Contracts with a price over $1,500,000, a Critical Path Method (CPM) schedule shall
be utilized to control the planning and scheduling of the Work. The CPM schedule shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be paid for by the Contractor. See (c)
below.
Bar Graph Schedule: Where a bar graph schedule is required, it shall be time-scaled in weekly
increments, shall indicate the estimated starting and completion dates for each major element of
the Work by trade and by area, level, or zone, and shall schedule dates for all salient features,
including but not limited to the placing of orders for materials, submission of shop drawings and
other Submittals for approval, approval of shop drawings by Architect/Engineer, the manufacture
and delivery of material, the testing and the installation of materials, supplies and equipment, and
all Work activities to be performed by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall allow sufficient time in his schedule for the A/E to conduct whatever
associated reviews or inspections as may be required under the A/E's contract with the Owner. If
the A/E and the Contractor are unable to agree as to what constitutes sufficient time, the Owner
shall determine the appropriate duration for such Architect/Engineer activities. Each Work activity
will be assigned a time estimate by the Contractor. One day shall be the smallest time unit used.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to submit a schedule that shows Substantial Completion of the
Work by the Contract Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date and any interim
deadlines established by the Contract.
(c)
CPM Schedule: Where a CPM schedule is required, it shall be in the time-scaled precedence
format using the Contractor's logic and time estimates. The CPM schedule shall be drawn or
plotted with activities grouped or zoned by Work area or subcontract as opposed to a random (or
scattered) format.
The CPM schedule shall be time-scaled on a weekly basis and shall be drawn or plotted at a level
of detail and logic which will schedule all salient features of the Work, including not only the
actual construction Work for each trade, but also the submission of shop drawings and other
Submittals for approval, approval of shop drawings by Architect/Engineer, placing of orders for
materials, the manufacture and delivery of materials, the testing and installation of materials and
equipment, and all Work activities to be performed by the Contractor. Failure to include any
element of Work required for the performance of this Contract shall not excuse the Contractor
from completing all Work required within the Time for Completion, Contract Completion Date
and any interim deadlines established by the Contract.
The Contractor shall allow sufficient time in his schedule for the A/E to conduct whatever
associated reviews or inspections as may be required under the A/E's contract with the Owner. If
the A/E and the Contractor are unable to agree as to what constitutes sufficient time, the Owner
shall determine the appropriate duration for such Architect/Engineer activities. Each Work activity
will be assigned a time estimate by the Contractor. One day shall be the smallest time unit used.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to submit a schedule that shows Substantial Completion of the
Work by the Contract Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date and any interim
deadlines established by the Contract.
When completed, the CPM schedule shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer and the Owner
for review. The CPM schedule will identify and describe each activity, state the duration of each
activity, the calendar dates for the early and late start and the early and late finish of each activity,
and clearly highlight all activities on the critical path. "Total float" and "free float" shall be
indicated for all activities. Float time, whether "free float" or "total float" as defined in Section 1,
shall not be considered for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Owner or the Contractor, but
must be allocated in the best interest of completing the Work within the Time for Completion or
21
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
the Contract Completion Date. Extensions to the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion
Date, when granted by Change Order, will be granted only when equitable time adjustment
exceeds the Total Float in the activity or path of activities affected by the change provided that the
Owner has reasonably provided information necessary to allow for the orderly progression of the
Work. On contracts with a price over $5,000,000, the CPM schedule shall also show what part of
the Contract Price (expressed in U.S. dollars) is attributable to each activity on the schedule and
shall be in agreement with the schedule of values, the sum of which for all activities shall equal
the total Contract Price. The CPM schedule shall have no line-item activities longer than thirty
(30) days in duration, and activities shall be included to provide sufficient detail for effectively
managing the sequence of the Work. When acceptable to the Owner and Architect/Engineer as to
compliance with the requirements of this Section, the schedule shall become the CPM schedule for
the Project. Acceptance of the schedule by the Owner does not indicate agreement with, nor
responsibility for the proposed or actual duration of any activity or logic shown on the accepted
schedule.
(d)
Monthly Project Reports: The Contractor shall review progress not less than each month, but as
often as necessary to properly manage the Project and stay on schedule. The Contractor shall
collect and preserve information on Change Orders, including extensions of time. The Contractor
shall evaluate this information and update the latest accepted schedule as often as necessary to
finish within the Contract Time for Completion or before the Contract Completion Date. The
Contractor shall submit to the A/E along with his monthly request for payment a copy of the bar
graph schedule annotated to show the current progress. For projects requiring a CPM schedule, the
Contractor shall submit a monthly report of the status of all activities. The bar graph schedule or
monthly status report submitted with each periodic request for payment shall show the Work
completed to date in comparison with the Work scheduled for completion, including but not
limited to the dates for the beginning and completion of the placing of orders; the manufacture,
testing and installation of materials, supplies and equipment. The form shall be approved by the
A/E and the Owner; however, a bar graph or a CPM schedule marked, colored or annotated to
reflect the above will usually satisfy this requirement. If any elements of the Work are behind
schedule, regardless of whether they may prevent the Work from being completed on time, the
Contractor must indicate in writing in the report what measures he is taking and plans to take to
bring each such element back on schedule and to ensure that the Time for Completion or Contract
Completion Date is not exceeded.
(e)
Progress Delay: Should any of the following conditions exist, the Owner may require the
Contractor to prepare, at no extra cost to the Owner, a plan of action and a recovery schedule for
completing the Work by the Contract Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date:
(1)
The Contractor's monthly project report indicates delays that are, in the opinion of the
A/E or the Owner, of sufficient magnitude that the Contractor's ability to complete the
Work by the scheduled Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date is brought
into question;
(2)
The CPM schedule sorted by early finish shows the Contractor to be thirty (30) or more
days behind the critical path schedule at any time during construction up to thirty (30)
days prior to scheduled Substantial Completion date;
(3)
The Contractor desires to make changes in the logic (sequencing of Work) or the planned
duration of future activities of the CPM schedule which, in the opinion of the
Architect/Engineer or the Owner, are of a major nature.
The plan of action and recovery schedule, when required, shall explain and display how the
Contractor intends to regain compliance with the current accepted, fully completed, Project CPM
schedule, as updated by approved change orders.
22
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
The plan of action, when required, shall be submitted to the Owner for review within two (2)
business days of the Contractor receiving the Owner's written demand. The recovery schedule,
when required, shall be submitted to the Owner within five (5) calendar days of the Contractor's
receiving the Owner's written demand.
(f)
Early Completion of Project: The Contractor may attempt to achieve Substantial Completion on
or before the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date. However, such planned early
completion shall be for the Contractor's convenience only and shall not create any additional rights
of the Contractor or obligations of the Owner under this Contract, nor shall it change the Time for
Completion or the Contract Completion Date. The Contractor shall not be required to pay damages
to the Owner because of its failure to achieve Substantial Completion by its planned earlier date.
Likewise, the Owner shall not pay the Contractor any additional compensation for achieving
Substantial Completion early nor will the Owner owe the Contractor any compensation should the
Owner, its officers, employees, or agents cause the Contractor not to achieve Substantial
Completion earlier than the date required by the Contract Documents.
If the Contractor seeks to change the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date to
reflect an earlier completion date, he may request or propose such a change. The Owner may, but
is not required to, accept such proposal. However, a change in the Time for Completion or the
Contract Completion Date shall be accomplished only by Change Order. If the Contractor's
proposal to change the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date is accepted, a
Change Order will be issued stating that all references in the Contract, including these General
Conditions, to the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date shall thereafter refer to
the date as modified, and all rights and obligations, including the Contractor's liability for actual
damages, delay damages and/or liquidated damages, shall be determined in relation to the date, as
modified.
20.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT
(a)
Before submittal of the first partial payment request under the Contract, the Contractor shall
prepare for review and approval of the Architect/Engineer and the Owner, a schedule of the
estimated values listed by trades or by specification sections of the Work, totaling the Contract
Price. Where the total project has multiple parts or phases, the Contractor shall prepare appropriate
schedules of values to facilitate reviews and justifications for payments.
All requests for payment shall be made in the ASTM Uniformat II structure on the Schedule of
Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) pages 1 and 2. Succeeding pages may be on the
Form CO-12 continuation sheets or a computerized spreadsheet which is in the same format and
which contains the same information. Where a computerized spreadsheet is used, one copy of the
entire Schedule of Values shall be provided to the Owner in an agreed electronic format (e.g.
EXCEL) with the initial request for payment.
(b)
If the Contractor requests, or intends to request, payment for materials stored in an approved and
secure manner, the Schedule of Values must indicate the amount for labor and the amount for
materials, and in a supplement thereto must include an itemized list of materials for that trade or
Work section. The material breakdown shall be in sufficient detail to allow verification of the
quantities required for the Project, the quantities delivered, the Work completed, and the quantities
stored on or off Site.
(c)
The "Value of Work Completed" portion of the Form CO-12 shall be completed, the Contractor's
certification completed and signed, and the appropriate substantiating material attached to each
Certificate for Payment (CO-12). Such substantiating material includes, but is not limited to,
invoices for materials, delivery tickets, time sheets, payroll records, daily job logs/records, and
23
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
similar materials which, in the opinion of the Owner and the A/E, are necessary or sufficient to
justify payment of the amount requested.
21.
(d)
The labor progress for any task or activity shall be calculated based upon the percentage of Work
complete up to fifty percent (50%) of the completion of the task or activity. Thereafter, the
evaluation of labor progress will be based upon the effort required to complete that task or
activity. The material progress shall be calculated as the invoiced dollar cost of materials used in
relationship to the amount estimated as necessary to complete a particular element of Work. When
calculating material progress, credit shall be given for installed material as well as that stored on
the Site and any material stored off Site which has been certified by the Architect/Engineer in
accordance with Section 36 of these General Conditions.
(e)
Should Work included in previous Form CO-12 submittals, and for which payment has been
made, subsequently be identified, by tests, inspection, or other means, as not acceptable or not
conforming to Contract requirements, the "Value of Work Completed" portion of the first Form
CO-12 submitted after such identification shall be modified to reduce the "completed" value of
that Work by deleting the value of that which has been identified as not acceptable or
nonconforming.
ACCESS TO WORK
The Architect/Engineer, the Owner, the Project Manager, the Owner's inspectors and other testing
personnel, inspectors from the Department of Labor and Industry, and others authorized by the
Owner, shall have access to the Work at all times. The Contractor shall provide proper facilities
for access and inspection.
22.
23.
SURVEYS AND LAYOUT
(a)
The Owner shall furnish the Contractor all necessary documents showing property lines and the
location of existing buildings and improvements. The Contractor shall provide competent
surveying and engineering services to execute the Work in accordance with the Contract and shall
be responsible for the accuracy of these surveying and engineering services.
(b)
The Owner shall provide such general reference points and benchmarks on the Site as will enable
the Contractor to proceed with the Work will be established in the plans and specifications. If the
Contractor finds that any previously established reference points have been lost or destroyed, he
shall promptly notify the Architect/Engineer.
(c)
The Contractor shall protect and preserve the established benchmarks and monuments and shall
make no changes in locations without written notice to the Architect/Engineer and the written
approval from the Owner. Any of these which may be lost or destroyed or which require shifting
because of necessary changes in grades or locations shall, subject to prior written approval of the
Owner, be replaced and accurately located by the Contractor.
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
(a)
The general character and scope of the Work are illustrated by the plans and the specifications. If
the Contractor deems additional detail or information to be needed, he shall request the same in
writing from the Architect/Engineer. His request shall precisely state the detail or information
needed and shall explain why it is needed. The Contractor shall also indicate a date when the
requested information is required. The Architect/Engineer shall provide by Field Order such
further detail and information as is necessary by the date required so long as the date indicated is
reasonable. Any additional drawings and instructions supplied to the Contractor shall be consistent
with the Contract Documents, shall be true developments thereof, and shall be so prepared that
they can be reasonably interpreted as a part thereof. The Contractor shall carry out the Work in
24
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
accordance with the additional detail drawings and instructions at no additional cost or time to the
Owner.
(b)
If the Contractor finds a conflict, error, omission, or other discrepancy in the plans or
specifications, he shall notify the Architect/Engineer in writing as soon as possible, but before
proceeding with the affected Work. The Architect/Engineer shall issue a clarification by Field
Order to the Contractor stating the correct requirements. If the Contractor deems the Field Order
requires additional Work, he shall notify the A/E of such prior to proceeding with that Work and
he shall submit a request for Change Order along with a detailed substantiating cost proposal
through the A/E to the Owner within fourteen (14) calendar days. If such conflict, error, omission
or other discrepancy in plans or specifications was reasonably apparent or with reasonable
diligence should have been apparent to the Contractor prior to submitting its bid or Proposal, and
the Contractor failed to submit questions to the A/E in the time and manner required by the
Instructions to Bidders or Request for Proposal, then any claims shall be deemed waived and the
Contractor shall not be entitled to additional compensation or time, or entitled to sue the Owner
based on such conflict, error, omission or other discrepancy. If the Contractor performs any Work,
or is delayed in performing any Work, where such Work involves a conflict, error, omission, or
other discrepancy in the plans and specifications that the Contractor knew about, or with
reasonable diligence should have known about, and fails to notify the A/E and Owner as required,
the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such performance or delay and shall bear all
costs attributable to correcting any Work requiring correction or to any delay, and such conflict,
error, omission, or other discrepancy shall not be the basis for a claim, cause of action or right to
sue the Owner.
(c)
In case of differences between small and large scale drawings, the large scale drawings shall
govern. Where on any of the drawings a portion of the Work is drawn out and the remainder is
indicated in outline, the parts drawn out shall apply also to all other like portions of the Work.
(d)
Where the word "similar" appears on the drawings, it shall be interpreted in its general sense and
not as meaning identical, and all details shall be worked out in relation to their location and their
connection with other parts of the Work.
(e)
The specifications are divided into several parts, or sections, for convenience only, since the entire
specifications must be considered as a whole. The divisions of the specifications are not intended
to control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or to limit the Work
performed by any trade. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the coordination of the
trades, Subcontractors and vendors engaged in the Work and for the compensation of the trades,
Subcontractors and vendors for the Work performed.
(f)
Measurements or dimensions shown on the drawings for Site features, utilities and structures shall
be verified at the Site by the Contractor before commencing the Work. The Contractor shall not
scale measurements or dimensions from the drawings. If there are discrepancies, the
Architect/Engineer shall be consulted. If new Work is to connect to, match with or be provided in
existing Work, the Contractor shall verify the actual existing conditions and necessary dimensions
prior to ordering or fabrication.
(g)
As-Built Drawings: The Contractor shall maintain at the Site for the Owner one copy of all
drawings, specifications, addenda, approved shop or setting drawings, Change Orders and other
modifications (collectively referred to herein as "As-Built Drawings") in good order and marked
to record all changes as they occur during construction. These shall be available to the
Architect/Engineer, the Owner, the Project Inspector, the Owner's other inspectors and to the
Owner's testing personnel. The drawings shall be neatly and clearly marked in color during
construction to record all variations made during construction. The representation of such
variations shall include such supplementary notes, symbols, legends, and details as may be
necessary to clearly show the as-built construction.
25
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
(h)
24.
CO-7
Record Drawings: Upon completion of the Work and prior to the final inspection, the Contractor
shall deliver to the Architect/Engineer, for preparation of the Record Drawings, one complete set
of "As-Built Drawings" referred to in the preceding subsection.
SUBMITTALS
(a)
The Contractor shall submit a listing of all Submittals required by the Architect/Engineer or which
the Contractor identifies as necessary, fixing the dates for the submission of shop or setting
drawings, samples and product data. The listing shall be in a format acceptable to the
Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall identify all Submittals with the Owner's Project Code
Number as required by Section 2(f).
(b)
Submittals shall be forwarded to the Architect/Engineer for approval if required by the
specifications or if requested by the Architect/Engineer or the Owner. No part of the Work dealt
with by a Submittal shall be ordered, fabricated or installed by the Contractor, save at his own
risk, until such approval has been given.
Working drawings, shop drawings and/or submittals for fire protection, fire alarm, fire detection
and security systems shall be submitted to, and approved by, the Building Official prior to
ordering, fabricating or installing such systems. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for
obtaining such approval. No part of the Work involving such systems shall be ordered, fabricated
or installed by the Contractor until such approval has been obtained.
(c)
The Contractor shall furnish to the Architect/Engineer for approval the name of the manufacturer,
the model number, and other identifying data and information respecting the performance,
capacity, nature and rating of the machinery and mechanical and other equipment which the
Contractor contemplates incorporating in the Work. When Submittals are required by this Contract
for materials, the Contractor shall furnish full information concerning the material or articles
which he contemplates incorporating in the Work. When required, samples shall be submitted for
approval at the Contractor's expense, with all shipping charges prepaid. Machinery, equipment,
material and articles installed or used without required approval shall be at the risk of subsequent
rejection.
(d)
Unless otherwise indicated or required elsewhere in the specifications, shop drawings shall be
submitted in the form of one reproducible tracing and three blue line or black line prints. Catalog
cuts, product data and other non-reproducible literature, except certificates, shall be submitted in
six (6) copies minimum, of which three (3) will be retained by the Architect/Engineer and the
remainder will be returned to the Contractor. As is mutually agreeable to the Owner,
Architect/Engineer, and Contractor, Submittals may be provided in electronic format in lieu of
hardcopy format.
(e)
Submittals shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal which shall list the Project Code
Number, the Submittals included, the specification section number applicable to each, and the date
shown on each Submittal. Submittals shall be complete in every respect and bound in sets. Each
Submittal shall be clearly marked to show each item, component and/or optional feature proposed
to be incorporated into the Project. Cross reference to the plans or specifications as needed to
identify the use for which the item or component is intended.
(f)
The Contractor shall check the Submittals for compliance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents. The Contractor shall clearly note in writing any and all items which deviate from the
requirements of the Contract Documents. Reasons for deviation shall be included with the
Submittal. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for checking all dimensions and coordinating
all materials and trades to ensure that the components or products proposed, individually or in
26
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
combination, will fit in the space available and that they will be compatible with other components
or products provided.
(g)
After checking each submittal, the Contractor shall stamp each sheet of the Submittal with the
Contractor's review stamp. Data submitted in a bound volume or on one sheet printed on two
sides, may be stamped on the front of the first sheet only. The Contractor's review stamp shall be
worded as follows:
The equipment and material shown and marked in this submittal is that proposed to be incorporated into
this Project, is in compliance with the Contract drawings and specifications unless otherwise shown in
bold face type or lettering and listed on a page or pages headed "DEPARTURES FROM DRAWINGS
AND SPECIFICATIONS", and can be installed in the allocated spaces.
Reviewed by _______________________________________ Date ____________________
The person signing the review stamp shall be the person designated in writing by the Contractor as
having that authority. (A copy of such designation shall be forwarded to the A/E prior to or with
the first Submittal.) The signature on the stamped review statement shall be handwritten in ink, or
in the case of electronic submittals, electronically signed in accordance with §59.1-479 et seq. of
the Code of Virginia. Stamped signatures are not acceptable.
(h)
The Contractor shall forward all Submittals sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to
allow reasonable time for checking, correcting, resubmitting and rechecking.
(i)
If a Submittal indicates a departure from the Contract requirements, the Architect/Engineer may
reject the Submittal or, if he deems it to have merit, may recommend it to the Owner, who shall
approve or reject it as the Owner, in its sole discretion, sees fit. The departure from the Contract
requirements shall be further authorized by a Change Order, if a reduction or increase in the
Contract Price is appropriate.
(j)
The Architect/Engineer is responsible to the Owner, but not to the Contractor, to verify that the
Submittals conform to the design concept and functional requirements of the plans and
specifications, that the detailed design portrayed in shop drawings and proposed equipment and
materials shown in Submittals are of the quality specified and will function properly, and that the
Submittals comply with the Contract Documents.
(k)
The Work shall be in accordance with approved Submittals. Approval of the Contractor's
Submittals by the A/E does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility of complying with the
Contract and all drawings and specifications, except as changed by Change Order.
(l)
The plans and/or specifications may indicate that the Architect/Engineer designed or detailed a
portion of the plans around a particular product (most commonly a piece of equipment). Should a
different product be proposed by the Contractor and accepted, all modifications, rerouting,
relocations and variations required for proper installation and coordination to comply with the
design concept and requirements of the Contract Documents shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor and shall be made at no extra cost to the Owner. If the plans were noted as designed or
detailed around a particular product and/or if a product is named when a "brand name or equal"
specification has been used, this is not intended to favor or preclude the use of other products
pursuant to Section 26 of these General Conditions. Rather such design merely acknowledges the
reality that in many instances the Architect/Engineer must have a basis to design and detail around
for dimensions and characteristics of a product or system.
(m)
Additional Submittal requirements are shown in the specifications.
27
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
25.
26.
CO-7
FEES, SERVICES AND FACILITIES
(a)
The Contractor shall obtain all permits, except the Building Permit, and pay for all fees and
charges necessary for temporary access and public right-of-way blockage or use, for temporary
connections to utilities and for the use of property (other than the Site) for storage of materials and
other purposes unless otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents.
(b)
Certain projects such as renovations and interior modifications of existing buildings will usually
have water and electric service to the building. In those instances, water and electric power, if
required for the Work under the Contract, will be furnished by the Owner subject to reasonable
use by the Contractor, only to the extent and capacity of present services. The Contractor shall be
responsible for providing required connections, temporary wiring, piping, etc. to these services in
a safe manner and in accordance with applicable codes. All temporary wire, pipe, etc. shall be
removed before the Substantial Completion inspection. Acceptance by the Contractor of the use of
Owner's water and electricity constitutes a release to the Owner of all claims and of all liability to
the Contractor for whatever damages which may result from power and water outages or voltage
variations.
(c)
The Owner shall pay any connection charges for permanent utility connections directly to the
utility Supplier. The Contractor shall coordinate such connections with the utility Supplier.
(d)
It is understood that, except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the
Contractor, either directly or through his Subcontractors, shall provide and pay for all material,
labor, tools, equipment, water, light, power, telephone and other services or facilities of every
nature whatsoever necessary to execute completely and deliver the Work within the Contract Time
for Completion or before the Contract Completion Date.
(e)
The Contractor shall provide temporary facilities including Contractor’s office space, Owner’s
Project Inspector office space (if required by the specifications), toilet facilities, and storage space,
as required for the operations and the protection of the material and work. Number, sizes and
locations shall be subject to approval of the Owner. Sanitary facilities shall be plumbed into an
approved waste treatment system or shall be an approved type of chemical toilet and shall be
regularly serviced.
EQUALS
(a)
Brand names: Unless otherwise stated in the specifications, the name of a certain brand, make or
manufacturer denotes the characteristics, quality, workmanship, economy of operation and
suitability for the intended purpose of the article desired, but does not restrict the Contractor to the
specific brand, make, or manufacturer; it is set forth to convey to the Contractor the general style,
type, character and quality of the article specified.
(b)
Equal materials, equipment or assemblies: Whenever in these Contract Documents, a particular
brand, make of material, device or equipment is shown or specified, such brand, make of material,
device or equipment shall be regarded merely as a standard. Any other brand, make or
manufacturer of a product, assembly or equipment which in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer
is the equal of that specified, considering quality, capabilities, workmanship, configuration,
economy of operation, useful life, compatibility with design of the Work, and suitability for the
intended purpose, will be accepted unless rejected by the Owner as not being equal.
(c)
Substitute materials, equipment or assemblies: The Contractor may propose to substitute a
material, product, equipment, or assembly which deviates from the requirements of the Contract
28
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
Documents but which the Contractor deems will perform the same function and have equal
capabilities, service life, economy of operations, and suitability for the intended purpose. The
proposal must include any cost differentials proposed. The Owner will have the A/E provide an
initial evaluation of such proposed substitutes and provide a recommendation on acceptability and
indicate the A/E's redesign fee to incorporate the substitution in the design. If the proposed
substitute is acceptable to the Owner, a Change Order will be proposed to the Contractor to accept
the substitute and to deduct the cost of the A/E redesign fee and the proposed cost savings from
the Contract Price. The Owner shall have the right to limit or reject substitutions at its sole
discretion.
(d)
27.
The Contractor shall be responsible for making all changes in the Work necessary to adapt and
accommodate any equal or substitute product which it uses. The necessary changes shall be made
at the Contractor's expense.
AVAILABILITY OF MATERIALS
If a brand name, product, or model number included in the Contract Documents is not available on the
present market, alternate equal products or model numbers may be proposed by the Contractor through the
Architect/Engineer for approval by the Owner.
28.
CONTRACTOR'S TITLE TO MATERIALS
No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by the Contractor, or by any Subcontractor or
Supplier, subject to any security interest, installment or sales contract or any other agreement or lien by
which an interest is retained by the seller or is given to a secured party. The Contractor warrants that he has
clear and good title to all materials and supplies which he uses in the Work or for which he accepts
payment in whole or in part.
29.
STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS INSTALLATION & WORKMANSHIP
(a)
Unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract, all equipment, material, and accessories
incorporated in the Work are to be new and in first class condition.
(b)
Unless specifically approved by the Owner or required by the Contract, the Contractor shall not
incorporate into the Work any materials containing asbestos or any material known by the industry
to be hazardous to the health of building construction workers, maintenance workers, or
occupants. If the Contractor becomes aware that a material required by the Contract contains
asbestos or other hazardous materials, he shall notify the Owner and the Architect/Engineer
immediately and shall take no further steps to acquire or install any such material without first
obtaining Owner approval.
(c)
All workmanship shall be of the highest quality found in the building industry in every respect. All
items of Work shall be done by craftsmen or tradesmen skilled in the particular task or activity to
which they are assigned. In the acceptance or rejection of Work, no allowance will be made for
lack of skill on the part of workmen. Poor or inferior workmanship (as determined by the
Architect/Engineer, the Owner or other inspecting authorities) shall be removed and replaced at
Contractor's expense such that the Work conforms to the highest quality standards of the trades
concerned, or otherwise corrected to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer, the Owner, or other
inspecting authority, as applicable.
(d)
Under the various sections of the plans or specifications, where specified items are supplied with
the manufacturer's printed instructions, recommendations, or directions for installation, or where
such instructions, recommendations, or directions are available, installation of the specified items
shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions unless those instructions
29
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
contradict the plans or specifications, in which case the Architect/Engineer will be notified for an
interpretation and decision.
30.
31.
(e)
Under the various sections of the plans or specifications, where reference is made to specific codes
or standards governing the installation of specified items, installation shall in all cases be in strict
accordance with the referenced codes and standards. Where no reference is made to specific codes
or standards, installation shall conform to the generally recognized applicable standards for firstclass installation of the specific item to be installed. Contractors are expected to be proficient and
skilled in their respective trades and knowledgeable of the Codes and Standards of the National
Fire Protection Association (NFPA), National Electric Code (NEC), Occupational Safety and
Health Act (OSHA) and other codes and standards applicable to installations and associated work
by his trade.
(f)
Where the manufacturer's printed instructions are not available for installation of specific items,
where specific codes or standards are not referenced to govern the installation or specific items, or
where there is uncertainty on the part of the Contractor concerning the installation procedures to
be followed or the quality of workmanship to be maintained in the installation of specific items,
the Contractor shall consult the Architect/Engineer for approval of the installation procedures or
the specific standards governing the quality of workmanship the Contractor proposes to follow or
maintain during the installation of the items in question.
(g)
During and/or at the completion of installation of any items, the tests designated in the plans or
specifications necessary to assure proper and satisfactory functioning for its intended purpose shall
be performed by the Contractor or by its Subcontractor responsible for the completed installation.
All costs for such testing are to be included in the Contract Price. If required by the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall furnish prior to final inspection the manufacturers' certificates
evidencing that products meet or exceed applicable performance, warranty and other requirements,
and certificates that products have been properly installed and tested.
WARRANTY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
(a)
The Contractor warrants that, unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment incorporated
in the Work under the Contract shall be new, in first class condition, and in accordance with the
Contract Documents. The Contractor further warrants that all workmanship shall be of the highest
quality and in accordance with the Contract Documents and shall be performed by persons
qualified at their respective trades.
(b)
Work not conforming to these warranties shall be considered defective.
(c)
This warranty of materials and workmanship is separate and independent from and in addition to
any of the Contractor's other guarantees or obligations in the Contract or under Virginia law.
USE OF SITE AND REMOVAL OF DEBRIS
(a)
The Contractor shall:
(1)
Perform the Work in such a manner as not to interrupt or interfere with the operation of
any existing activity on, or in proximity to, the Site or with the Work of any other
separate contractor;
(2)
Store his apparatus, materials, supplies and equipment in such orderly fashion at the Site
of the Work as will not unduly interfere with the progress of his Work or the work of any
other separate contractor; and
30
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
(3)
Place upon the Work or any part thereof only such loads as are consistent with the safety
of that portion of the Work.
(b)
The Contractor expressly undertakes, either directly or through his Subcontractor(s), to effect all
cutting, filling or patching of the Work required to make the same conform to the plans and
specifications, and, except with the consent of the Architect/Engineer, not to cut or otherwise alter
the Work of any other separate contractor. The Contractor shall not damage or endanger any
portion of the Work or Site, including existing improvements, unless called for by the Contract.
(c)
The Contractor expressly undertakes, either directly or through his Subcontractor(s), to clean up
frequently all refuse, rubbish, scrap materials and debris caused by his operations, to the end that
at all times the Site shall present a neat, orderly and workmanlike appearance. No such refuse,
rubbish, scrap material and debris shall be left within the completed Work nor buried on the
building Site, but shall be removed from the Site and properly disposed of in a licensed landfill or
otherwise as required by law.
(d)
The Contractor expressly undertakes, either directly or through his Subcontractor(s), before Final
Payment or such prior time as the Owner may require, to remove all surplus material, false Work,
temporary structures, including foundations thereof, plants of any description and debris of every
nature resulting from his operations and to put the Site in a neat, orderly condition; to thoroughly
clean and leave reasonably dust free all finished surfaces including all equipment, piping, etc., on
the interior of all buildings included in the Contract; and to clean thoroughly all glass installed
under the Contract, including the removal of all paint and mortar splatters and other defacements.
If the Contractor fails to clean up at the time required herein, the Owner may do so and charge the
costs incurred thereby to the Contractor in accordance with Section 10 (b) of these General
Conditions.
(e)
32.
The Contractor shall have, On-Site, an employee certified by the Department of Conservation and
Recreation as a Responsible Land Disturber who shall be responsible for the installation,
inspection and maintenance of erosion control and stormwater management measures and devices.
The Contractor shall prevent Site soil erosion, the runoff of silt and/or debris carrying water from
the Site, and the blowing of debris off the Site in accordance with the applicable requirements and
standards of the Contract and the Virginia Department of Conservation and Recreation's Erosion
and Sediment Control Regulations and the Virginia Stormwater Management Regulations.
TEMPORARY ROADS
Temporary roads, if required, shall be established and maintained until permanent roads are
accepted, then removed and the area restored to the conditions required by the Contract
Documents. Crushed rock, paving and other road materials from temporary roads shall not be left
on the Site unless permission is received from the Owner to bury the same at a location and depth
approved by the Owner.
33.
SIGNS
The Contractor may, at his option and without cost to the Owner, erect signs acceptable to the
Owner on the Site for the purpose of identifying and giving directions to the job. No signs shall be
erected without prior approval of the Owner as to design and location.
34.
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
31
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
35.
CO-7
(a)
The Contractor expressly undertakes, both directly and through his Subcontractors, to take every
reasonable precaution at all times for the protection of all persons and property which may come
on the Site or be affected by the Contractor's Work.
(b)
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety
precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Any violation of these requirements or
duties or any potential safety hazard that is brought to the attention of the Contractor by the
Architect/Engineer, the Owner, or any other persons shall be immediately abated.
(c)
The provisions of all rules and regulations governing health and safety as adopted by the Safety
Codes Commission of the Commonwealth of Virginia, issued by the Department of Labor and
Industry under Title 40.1 of the Code of Virginia, shall apply to all Work under this Contract.
(d)
The Contractor shall continuously maintain adequate protection of all his Work from damage and
shall protect the Owner's property from injury or loss arising in connection with this Contract. He
shall make good any such damage, injury or loss, except as may be directly and solely due to
errors in the Contract Documents or caused by agents or employees of the Owner. The Contractor
shall adequately protect adjacent property to prevent any damage to it or loss of use and enjoyment
by its owners. The Contractor shall provide and maintain all passageways, guard fences, lights and
other facilities for protection as required by public authority, local conditions, or the Contract.
(e)
In an emergency affecting the health, safety or life of persons or of the Work, or of the adjoining
property, the Contractor, without special instruction or authorization from the Architect/Engineer
or the Owner, shall act, at his discretion, to prevent such threatened loss or injury. Also, should he,
to prevent threatened loss or injury, be instructed or authorized to act by the Architect/Engineer or
the Owner, he shall so act immediately, without appeal. Any additional compensation or extension
of time claimed by the Contractor on account of any emergency work shall be determined as
provided by Section 38 of these General Conditions.
(f)
When necessary for the proper protection of the Work, temporary heating of a type approved by
the Architect/Engineer must be provided by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, unless
otherwise specified.
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
The Contractor shall suspend activity on and protect any portion of the Work that may be subject
to damage by climatic conditions.
36.
PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR
(a)
Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, the Owner will make partial payments to the
Contractor on the basis of a duly certified and approved Schedule of Values and Certificate for
Payment, Form CO-12, showing the estimate of the Work performed during the preceding
calendar month or work period, as recommended by the Architect/Engineer. When evaluating the
Contractor's Form CO-12, the Architect/Engineer will consider the value of the Work in place, the
value of approved and properly stored materials, the status of the Work on the critical path with
regard to the Time for Completion, and the estimated value of the Work necessary to achieve Final
Completion. The Architect/Engineer will schedule a monthly pay meeting to occur no earlier than
the 25th day of the month represented by the payment request or not later than the 5th day of the
following month. The Contractor shall submit his monthly estimate of Work completed on Form
CO-12 in accordance with the Contract between the Owner and Contractor so that it is received by
the Architect/Engineer and the Owner's Project Manager at least one work day prior to the date
scheduled by the Architect/Engineer for the monthly pay meeting. The Owner will review the
estimate with the Architect/Engineer and the Contractor at the monthly pay meeting, which shall
be considered the receipt date, and may approve any or all of the estimate of Work for payment. In
32
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
preparing estimates, the material delivered to the Site and preparatory Work done shall be taken
into consideration, if properly documented as required by Section 20 of these General Conditions,
or as may be required by the Architect/Engineer so that quantities may be verified. In addition to
material delivered to the Site, material such as large pieces of equipment and items purchased
specifically for the Project, but stored off the Site within the Commonwealth of Virginia, may be
considered for payment, provided all of the following are accomplished prior to the submission of
the monthly payment request in which payment for such materials is requested:
(1)
The Contractor must notify the Owner in writing, at least ten (10) days prior to the
submission of the payment request, through the Architect/Engineer, that specific items
will be stored off Site in a designated, secured place within the Commonwealth of
Virginia. The Schedule of Values must be detailed to indicate separately both the value of
the material and the labor/installation for trades requesting payment for stored materials.
By giving such notification and by requesting payment for material stored off Site, the
Contractor warrants that the storage location is safe and suitable for the type of material
stored and that the materials are identified as being the property of the Contractor, and
agrees that loss of materials stored off the Site shall not relieve the Contractor of the
obligation to timely furnish these types and quantities of materials for the Project and
meet the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date, subject to Section 43 (b) of
these General Conditions. If the storage location is more than 20 miles from the Site, the
Contractor may be required to reimburse the Owner for the cost incurred for travel to the
storage location to verify the Contractor's request for payment for materials stored off
Site.
(2)
Such notification, as well as the payment request, shall:
(a)
Itemize the quantity of such materials and document with invoices showing the
cost of said materials;
(b)
Indicate the identification markings used on the materials, which shall clearly
reference the materials to the particular project;
(c)
Identify the specific location of the materials, which must be within reasonable
proximity to the Site and within the Commonwealth of Virginia;
(d)
Include a letter from the Contractor's Surety which confirms that the Surety on
the Performance Bond and the Labor and Material Payment Bond has been
notified of the request for payment of materials stored off the Site and agrees
that the materials are covered by the bond; and
(e)
Include a certificate of all-risk builder's risk insurance in an amount not less than
the fair market value of the materials, which shall name the Owner and the
Contractor as co-insureds.
(3)
The Architect/Engineer shall indicate, in writing, to the Owner that Submittals for such
materials have been reviewed and meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, that
the stored materials meet the requirement of the plans and specifications, and that such
materials conform to the approved Submittals. Should the A/E deem it necessary to visit
the storage site to make such review, the Contractor shall bear the costs incurred
therewith.
(4)
The Owner, through the Architect/Engineer, shall notify the Contractor in writing of its
agreement to prepayment for such materials.
33
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
(5)
The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing, through the Architect/Engineer, when
the materials are to be transferred to the Site and when the materials are received at the
Site.
(b)
Payment will not be made for materials or equipment stored on or off the Site which are not
scheduled for incorporation into the Work within the six months next following submission of the
request for payment, unless the Contractor has the prior consent of the Owner, which consent may
be granted or withheld by the Owner in its discretion if, in the opinion of the Owner, it is not
necessary to procure the materials more than six months in advance of use to assure their
availability when needed.
(c)
No payment shall be made to the Contractor until:
(1)
The Contractor furnishes to the Owner its Social Security Number (SSN) if an individual,
or its Federal Employer Identification Number (FEIN) if a proprietorship, partnership,
corporation or other legal entity.
(2)
Certificates of Insurance or other satisfactory evidence of compliance by the Contractor
with all the requirements of Section 11 (and Section 12 if applicable) of these General
Conditions have been delivered to the Owner.
(3)
Copies of any certificates of insurance required of a Subcontractor under Section 11 have
been delivered to the Owner for payments based on Work performed by a Subcontractor.
(4)
The Contractor has (i) submitted a preliminary schedule which is acceptable to the Owner
in accordance with Section 19(a), (ii) submitted a fully complete Project schedule
accepted by the Owner in accordance with Section 19(a), (iii) maintained the monthly bar
graphs or status reports required by Section 19(d), or (iv) provided a recovery schedule
pursuant to Section 19(e), as each of them may be required.
(d)
In making such partial payments, five percent (5%) of each payment to the Contractor shall be
retained until Final Completion and acceptance of all Work covered by the Contract, unless
otherwise provided by any law, regulation or program of the federal government. Such retainage
shall be held to assure faithful performance of the Contract and may also be used as a fund to
deduct amounts due to or claimed by the Owner, including, but not limited to, payment to the
Owner of all moneys due for deductive change orders, credits, uncorrected Defective Work,
interest, damages, and the like. (§2.2-4333 of the Code of Virginia) The Owner may, at its sole
discretion, agree on an item by item basis to release the retainage on items which are fully 100%
complete and which have accepted by the Owner as being tested and complete and on which no
further action or work will be required. Retainage which is released by the Owner shall be
distributed by the Contractor in conformance with Section 37 of these General Conditions.
(e)
All material and Work for which partial payments are made shall thereupon become the sole
property of the Owner, but this provision shall not relieve the Contractor from the sole
responsibility for all materials and Work, including those for which payment has been made, or for
the restoration of any damaged materials or Work. Nor shall this provision serve as a waiver of the
right of the Owner to require the fulfillment of all of the terms and conditions of the Contract.
(f)
The Final Payment, which shall include the retainage, less any amounts due to or claimed by the
Owner, shall not become due until the Architect/Engineer and the Owner agree that Final
Completion has been achieved and until the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner through the
Architect/Engineer a Certificate of Completion by the Contractor (Form CO-13.2) and an
Affidavit of Payment of Claims (Form CO-13), stating that all Subcontractors and Suppliers of
either labor or materials have been paid all sums claimed by them for Work performed or
34
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
materials furnished in connection with this Project less retainage. Amounts due the Owner which
may be withheld from the Final Payment may include, but are not limited to, amounts due
pursuant to Section 3(i), Section 16(a)-(d), Section 31(d), costs incurred to repair or replace
Defective Work, costs incurred as a result of the Contractor's negligent acts or omissions or
omissions of those for whom the Contractor is responsible, delay damages under Section 43(h),
and any liquidated or actual damages. If all Subcontractors and Suppliers of labor and materials
have not been paid the full amount claimed by them, the Contractor shall list each to which an
agreed amount of money is due or which has a claim in dispute. With respect to all such
Subcontractors and Suppliers, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner, along with the Affidavit
of Payment of Claims (Form CO-13), an affidavit from each such Subcontractor and Supplier
stating the amount of their subcontract or supply contract, the percentage of completion, the
amounts paid to them by the Contractor and the dates of payment, the amount of money still due if
any, any interest due the Subcontractor or Supplier pursuant to Section 37(b) below, and whether
satisfactory arrangements have been made for the payment of said amounts. If no agreement can
be reached between the Contractor and one or more Subcontractors or Suppliers as to the amounts
owed to the Subcontractors or Suppliers, the Owner may, in its discretion, pay such portion of the
moneys due to the Contractor which is claimed by the Subcontractor or Supplier into a Virginia
Court or Federal Court sitting in Virginia, in the manner provided by law. Said payment into court
shall be deemed a payment to the Contractor. Nothing in this Section shall be construed as
creating any obligation or contractual relationship between the Owner and any Subcontractor or
Supplier, and the Owner shall not be liable to any Subcontractor or Supplier on account of any
failure or delay of the Owner in complying with the terms hereof.
(g)
Upon successful completion of the final inspection and all Work required by the Contract,
including but not limited to the delivery of As-Built drawings, equipment manuals, written
warranties, acceptance of the Work by the Owner and the delivery of the affidavits required in
Section 36(f) of these General Conditions, the Architect/Engineer shall deliver the written
Certificate of Completion by the Architect/Engineer (Form CO-13.1) to the Owner, with a copy to
the Contractor, stating the entire amount of Work performed and compensation earned by the
Contractor, including extra work and compensation therefor. The Owner may accept the Work for
occupancy or use while asserting claims against the Contractor; disputing the amount of
compensation due to the Contractor; disputing the quality of the Work, its completion, or its
compliance with the Contract Documents; or any other reason.
(h)
Unless there is a dispute about the compensation due to the Contractor, Defective Work, quality of
the Work, compliance with the Contract Documents, completion itself, claims by the Owner, other
matters in contention between the parties, or unless monies are withheld pursuant to the
Comptroller's Debt Setoff Program, within thirty (30) days after receipt and acceptance of the
Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) in proper form by the
Architect/Engineer at the monthly pay meeting, which shall be considered the receipt date, the
Owner shall pay to the Contractor the amount approved by the Architect/Engineer, less all prior
payments and advances whatsoever to or for the account of the Contractor. In the case of Final
Payment, the completed Affidavit of Payment of Claims (Form CO-13), the Certificate of
Completion by the Contractor (Form CO-13.2) and the Certificate of Completion by the
Architect/Engineer (Form CO-13.1) shall accompany the final Schedule of Values and Certificate
for Payment (Form CO-12) which is forwarded to the Owner for payment. The date on which
payment is due shall be referred to as the Payment Date. In the event of disputes, payment shall be
mailed on or before the Payment Date for amounts and Work not in dispute, subject to any set offs
claimed by the Owner; provided, however in instances where further appropriations are required
by the General Assembly or where the issuance of further bonds is required, in which case,
payment shall be made within thirty (30) days after the effective date of such appropriation or
within thirty (30) days after the receipt of bond proceeds by the Owner. All prior estimates and
payments including those relating to extra Work may be corrected and adjusted in any payment
and shall be corrected and adjusted in the Final Payment. In the event that any request for payment
(CO-12) by the Contractor contains a defect or impropriety, the Owner shall notify the Contractor
35
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
of any defect or impropriety which would prevent payment by the Payment Date, within five (5)
days after receipt of the Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) by the
Owner from the Architect/Engineer.
37.
(i)
Interest shall accrue on all amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor which remain unpaid
seven (7) days following the Payment Date. Said interest shall accrue at the discounted ninety-day
U.S. Treasury bill rate as established by the Weekly Auction and as reported in the publication
entitled The Wall Street Journal on the weekday following each such Weekly Auction. During the
period of time when the amounts due to the Contractor remain unpaid following the seventh (7)
day after the Payment Date, the interest accruing shall fluctuate on a weekly basis and shall be that
established by the immediately prior Weekly Auction. It shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to gather and substantiate the applicable weekly interest rates to the satisfaction of the
Owner and to calculate to the satisfaction of the Owner the interest due. In no event shall the rate
of interest charge exceed the rate of interest charged pursuant to §58.1-1812 of the Code of
Virginia. No interest shall accrue on retainage or when payment is delayed because of
disagreement between the Owner and the Contractor regarding the quantity, quality or timeliness
of the Work, including, but not limited to, compliance with Contract Documents or the accuracy
of any Request for Payment received. This exception to the accrual of interest stated in the
preceding sentence shall apply only to that portion of a delayed payment which is actually the
subject of such a disagreement and shall apply only for the duration of such disagreement.
Nothing contained herein shall be interpreted, however, to prevent the withholding of retainage to
assure faithful performance of the Contract. These same provisions relating to payment of interest
to the Contractor shall apply also to the computation and accrual of interest on any amounts due
from the Contractor to the Owner for deductive change orders and to amounts due on any claims
by the Owner. The date of mailing of any payment by the U.S. Mail is deemed to be the date of
payment to the addressee.
(j)
The acceptance by the Contractor of the Final Payment shall be and operate as a release to the
Owner of all claims by the Contractor, its Subcontractors and Suppliers, and of all liability to the
Contractor whatever, including liability for all things done or furnished in connection with this
Work, except for things done or furnished which are the subject of unresolved claims for which
the Contractor has filed a timely written notice of intent, provided a claim is submitted no later
than sixty (60) days after Final Payment. Acceptance of any interest payment by the Contractor
shall be a release of the Owner from claims by the Contractor for late payment.
(k)
No certificate for payment issued by the Architect/Engineer, and no payment, final or otherwise,
no certificate of completion, nor partial or entire use or occupancy of the Work by the Owner,
shall be an acceptance of any Work or materials not in accordance with the Contract, nor shall the
same relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or Defective Work or operate to
release the Contractor or his Surety from any obligation under the Contract, the Standard
Performance Bond and the Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond.
PAYMENTS BY CONTRACTOR (§ 2.2-4354, Code of Virginia)
Under § 2.2-4354, Code of Virginia, the Contractor is obligated to:
(a)
Within seven (7) days after receipt of amounts paid to the Contractor by the Owner for Work
performed by the Subcontractor or Supplier under this Contract,
(1)
Pay the Subcontractor or Supplier for the proportionate share of the total payment
received from the Owner attributable to the Work performed by the Subcontractor or the
materials furnished by the Supplier under this Contract; or
(2)
Notify the Subcontractor or Supplier, in writing, of his intention to withhold all or a part
of the Subcontractor or Supplier's payment with the reason for nonpayment;
36
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
(b)
Pay interest to the Subcontractor or Supplier on all amounts owed by the Contractor that remain
unpaid after seven (7) days following receipt by the Contractor of payment from the Owner for
Work performed by the Subcontractor or materials furnished by the Supplier under this contract,
except for amounts withheld as allowed under subsection (a) (2) of this Section.
(c)
Include in each of his subcontracts a provision requiring each Subcontractor to include in each of
its subcontracts a provision requiring each subcontractor to include or otherwise be subject to the
same payment and interest requirements with respect to each lower tier subcontractor. Each
Subcontractor shall include with its invoice to, or request for payment from, the Contractor, a
certification that that Subcontractor has paid each of its suppliers and lower tier subcontractors
their proportionate share of previous payments received from the Contractor attributable to the
Work performed or the materials furnished by it under this Contract.
The Contractor's obligation to pay interest to the Subcontractor or Supplier pursuant to subsection
(b) of this Section is not an obligation of the Owner. A modification to this Contract shall not be
made for the purpose of providing reimbursement for such interest charge. A Contractor's cost
reimbursement claim shall not include any amount for reimbursement of such interest charge.
38.
CHANGES IN THE WORK
(a)
The Owner may at any time, by written order utilizing the Commonwealth of Virginia Change
Order Form CO-11 and without notice to the sureties, make changes in the Work which are within
the general scope of the Contract, except that no change will be made which will increase the total
Contract Price to an amount more than twenty percent (20%) in excess of the original Contract
Price without notice to sureties. At the time of the Preconstruction Meeting described in Section
50(b), the Contractor and the Owner shall advise each other in writing of their designees
authorized to accept and/or approve changes to the Contract Price and of any limits to each
designee's authority. Should any designee or limits of authority change during the time this
Contract is in effect, the Contractor or Owner with such a change shall give written notice to the
other within seven (7) calendar days, utilizing the procedures set forth in these General
Conditions. The Contractor agrees and understands that the authority of the Owner's designee is
limited by Virginia Code §2.2-4309 and any other applicable statute.
In making any change, the charge or credit for the change shall be determined by one of the
following methods as selected by the Owner:
(1)
Fixed Price: By a mutually agreed fixed amount change to the Contract Price and/or
time allowed for completion of the Work. The Change Order shall be substantiated by
documentation itemizing the estimated quantities and costs of all labor, materials, and
equipment required as well as any mark-up used. The price change shall include the
Contractor's reasonable overhead and profit, including overhead for any unreasonable
delay arising from or related to the Change Order and/or the change in the Work. See
Subsections (d), (e) and (f), below.
(2)
Unit Price: By using unit prices and calculating the number of net units of Work in each
part of the Work which is changed, either as the Work progresses or before Work on the
change commences, and by then multiplying the calculated number of units by the
applicable unit price set forth in the Contract or multiplying by a mutually agreed unit
price if none was provided in the Contract. No additional percentage markup for
overhead or profit shall be added to the unit prices.
(3)
Cost Reimbursement: By ordering the Contractor to perform the changed Work on a
cost reimbursement basis by issuing two Change Orders citing this Subsection, an
initiating Change Order, authorizing the changed Work, and a confirming Change Order
37
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
approving the additional cost and time for the changed Work. The initiating Change
Order shall:
(i)
Describe the scope or parameters of the change in the Work;
(ii)
Describe the cost items to be itemized and verified for payment and the method of
measuring the quantity of work performed;
(iii) Address the impact on the schedule for Substantial Completion;
(iv) Order the Contractor to proceed with the change to the Work;
(v)
Order the Contractor to keep in a form acceptable to the Owner, an accurate,
itemized account of the actual cost of the change in the Work, including, but not
limited to, the actual costs of labor, materials, equipment, and supplies;
(vi) Order the Contractor to annotate a copy of the Project schedule to accurately show
the status of the Work at the time this first Change Order is issued, to show the start
and finish dates of the changed Work, and the status of the Work when the changed
Work is completed; and
(vii) State that a confirming Change Order will be issued to incorporate the cost of the
ordered changed in the Work into the Contract Price and any change in the Contract
Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date.
The Contractor shall sign the initiating Change Order acknowledging he has been ordered
to proceed with the change in the Work. The Contractor's signature on each initiating
Change Order citing this Subsection 38(a)(3) as the method for determining the cost of
the Work shall not constitute the Contractor's agreement on the cost or time impact of the
ordered Work.
Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by the Owner, such costs shall not
exceed those prevailing for the trades or crafts (based upon rates established by the US
Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Statistics, or other generally recognized cost data
publication), materials, and equipment in the locality of the Project, may include only
those items listed as allowable in Subsection 38(e), and shall not include any of the costs
listed as not allowable in Subsection 38(f). The Owner shall be permitted, on a daily
basis, to verify such records and may require such additional records as are necessary to
determine the cost of the change to the Work.
Within fourteen (14) days after the conclusion of such ordered Work, the Contractor and
the Owner shall reach agreement on (i) a cost for the ordered Work, based on the records
kept and the Contractor's allowance for overhead and profit determined in accordance
with the provisions set forth in Subsections 38(d), (e), and (f) below; and (ii) the change
in the Contract Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date, if necessary, as a
result of the ordered Work. Such costs and time shall be incorporated into a confirming
Change Order which references the initiating Change Order. If agreement on the cost and
time of the changed Work cannot be reached within the fourteen (14) days allotted, the
Contractor may submit a claim for the disputed cost or time as provided for in Section 47.
(4)
By issuing a unilateral change order in the amount deemed appropriate by the Owner for
the Work. If the Contractor objects to the amount or scope of the change order then the
Contractor may within the 14 days of the date of the change order file a claim for the
disputed amount as provided for in section 47.
38
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
(b)
CO-7
The Contractor shall review any Owner requested or directed change and shall respond in writing
within fourteen (14) calendar days after receipt of the proposed change (or such other reasonable
time as the Owner may direct), stating the effect of the proposed change upon his Work, including
any increase or decrease in the Contract time and price. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner
an itemized breakdown of the quantities and prices used in computing the proposed change in
Contract Price.
The Owner shall review the Contractor's proposal and respond to the Contractor within thirty (30)
days of receipt. If a change to the Contract Price and Time for Completion or Contract Completion
Date are agreed upon, both parties shall sign the Change Order. If the Contract Price and Time for
Completion or Contract Completion Date are not agreed upon, the Owner may direct the
Contractor to proceed under Subsection 38(a)(3), above. Change Orders shall be effective when
signed by both parties, unless approval by the Governor or his designee is required, in which event
the Change Order shall be effective when signed by the Governor or his designee.
(c)
In figuring changes, any instructions for measurement of quantities set forth in the Contract shall
be followed.
(d)
Overhead and profit for both additive and deductive changes in the Work (other than changes
covered by unit prices) shall be paid by applying the specified percentage markups only on the net
cost of the changed Work (i.e. difference in cost between original and changed Work excluding
overhead and profit). Said percentages for overhead and profit shall reasonably approximate the
Contractor’s overhead and profit, but shall not exceed the percentages for each category listed
below:
(e)
(1)
If a Subcontractor does all or part of the changed Work, the Subcontractor's mark-up for
overhead and profit on the Work it performs shall be a maximum of fifteen percent
(15%). The Contractor's mark-up for overhead and profit on the Subcontractor's price
shall be a maximum of ten percent (10%).
(2)
If the Contractor does all or part of the changed Work, its markup for overhead and profit
on the changed Work it performs shall be a maximum of fifteen percent (15%).
(3)
If a Sub-subcontractor at any tier does all or part of the changed Work, the Subsubcontractor's markup on that Work shall be a maximum of fifteen percent (15%). The
markup for overhead and profit on a sub-subcontractor's Work by the Contractor and all
intervening tiers of Subcontractors shall not exceed a total of ten percent (10%).
(4)
Where Work is deleted from the Contract prior to commencement of that Work without
substitution of other similar Work, one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Price
attributable to that Work shall be deducted from the Contract Price. However, in the
event that material Submittals have been approved and orders placed for said materials, a
lesser amount, but in no case less than eighty percent (80%) of the Contract Price
attributable to that Work, shall be deducted from the Contract Price. The credit to the
Owner for reduced premiums on labor and material bonds and performance bonds shall
in all cases be one hundred percent (100%).
Allowable costs for changes in the Work may include but are not limited to the following:
(1)
Labor costs for employees directly employed in the change in the Work, including
salaries and wages plus the cost of payroll charges and fringe benefits and overtime
premiums, if such premiums are explicitly authorized by the Owner.
39
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
(2)
Materials incorporated into the change to the Work, including costs of transportation and
storage, if applicable. If applicable, all cash discounts shall accrue to the Contractor,
unless the Owner deposits funds with the Contractor to make such payments, and all
trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from the sale of surplus materials shall
accrue to the Owner.
(3)
Equipment incorporated in the changed Work or equipment used directly in
accomplishing the Work. If rented expressly for accomplishing the change in the Work,
the cost shall be the rental rate according to the terms of the rental agreement, which the
Owner shall have the right to approve. If owned by the Contractor, the costs shall be a
reasonable price based upon the life expectancy of the equipment and the purchase price
of the equipment. If applicable, transportation costs may be included.
(4)
Costs of increases in premiums for the Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond and
the Standard Performance Bond, provided coverage for the cost of the change in the
Work results in such increased costs. At the Owner's request, the Contractor shall provide
proof of his notification to the Surety of the change in the Work and of the Surety's
agreement to include such change in its coverage. The cost of the increase in premium
shall be an allowable cost but shall not be marked up.
(5)
Contractor and Subcontractor overhead costs as set forth in Subsection (d) markups
above.
(6)
Agreed Compensation for Overhead for Changes to Time for Completion or
Contract Completion Date for Changes to the Work: If the change in the Work also
changes the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date by adding days to
complete the Work, an itemized accounting of the following direct Site overhead and
home office overhead and other indirect overhead expenses set forth in subparagraphs (i)
and (ii) below may be considered as allowable costs for compensation in addition to those
shown above:
(i)
Direct Site Overhead Expenses:
The Contractor’s per diem expenses, as shown by the itemized accounting, for
the following allowable direct Site overhead expenses: The Site superintendent's
pro-rata salary, temporary Site office trailer, and temporary Site utilities
including basic telephone service, electricity, heat, water, and sanitary / toilet
facilities for each day added. All other direct expenses are covered by and
included in the Subsection 38(d) markups above.
(ii)
Home Office and Other Indirect Overhead Expenses:
A five percent (5%) markup on the above direct Site overhead expenses will be
allowed as compensation for the Contractor’s home office overhead and all
other direct or indirect overhead expenses for days added to the Time for
Completion or the Contract Completion Date for a change in the Work. All other
overhead and other direct or indirect overhead expenses are covered by and
included in this markup and the Subsection (d) markups above.
(7)
(f)
Any other costs directly attributable to the change in the Work with the exception of
those set forth in Subsection 38(f) below.
Allowable costs for changes in the Work shall not include the following:
40
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
(g)
CO-7
(1)
Costs due to the negligence of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, their
employees, or other persons for whom the Contractor is responsible, including, but not
limited to, costs for the correction of Defective Work, for improper disposal of material,
for equipment wrongly supplied, for delay in performing the Work, or for delay in
obtaining materials or equipment.
(2)
Home office expenses including payroll costs for the Contractor's officers, executives,
administrators, accountants, counsel, timekeepers, clerks, and other similar administrative
personnel employed by the Contractor, whether at the Site or in the Contractor's principal
or branch office for general administration of the Work. These costs are deemed overhead
included in the percentage markups allowable in Subsections 38(d) above.
(3)
Home and field office expenses not itemized in Subsection 38(e)(6) above. Such items
include, but are not limited to, expenses of Contractor's home and branch offices,
Contractor's capital expenses, interest on Contractor's capital used for the Work, charges
for delinquent payments, small tools, incidental job costs, rent, utilities, telephone and
office equipment, and other general overhead expenses.
(4)
Other items reasonably determined by the Owner to not be allowed.
All Change Orders, except the "initial" Change Orders authorizing work citing Subsection
38(a)(3) procedures, must state that the Contract Time for Completion or Contract Completion
Date is not changed or is either increased or decreased by a specific number of days. The old Time
for Completion and, if changed, the new Time for Completion must be stated.
If the Contractor requests an extension to the Time for Completion or a later Contract Completion
Date, he must provide written justification for the extension to the Architect/Engineer and to the
Owner. The written justification must demonstrate an anticipated actual increase in the time
required to complete the Work beyond that allowed by the Contract as adjusted by prior change
orders or amendments to the Contract, not just an increase or decrease in the time needed to
complete some portion of the total Work. When a CPM schedule is required by the Contract, no
extension to the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date shall be allowed unless, and
then only to the extent that, the additional or changed Work increases the length of the critical path
beyond the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date. If approved, the increase in time
required to complete the Work shall be added to the Time for Completion or Contract Completion
Date.
The Owner may decrease, by Change Order, the Time for Completion or Contract Completion
Date when an Owner-requested deletion from the Work results in a decrease in the actual time
required to complete the Work as demonstrable on the Bar Graph Schedule or on the CPM
Schedule, whichever is appropriate. The Contractor may submit a request to decrease, by Change
Order, the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date under the procedures and subject to
the considerations set forth in Section 19(f). No request for such decrease shall be considered for
approval unless the proposed shorter schedule is otherwise acceptable under Sections 19(b) or (c),
whichever is applicable. The Change Order decreasing the Time for Completion or changing the
Contract Completion Date must be signed by both the Owner and the Contractor.
With the exception of Change Orders under Subsection 38(a)(3), which shall arrive at a change to
the Contract Price and any change to time using the procedures set forth therein, each Change
Order shall include all time and monetary impacts of the change, whether the Change Order is
considered alone or with all other changes during the course of the Project. Failure to include a
change to time and changes in the Contract Price attributable to the change in time under
Subsections 38(a)(1) or (2) shall waive any change to the time and Contract Price unless the
parties mutually agree in writing to postpone a determination of the time related impacts of the
change. Such a determination may be postponed not more than forty-five (45) days to give the
41
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
Contractor an opportunity to demonstrate a change in the time and price needed to complete the
Work. During any such postponement, the Work shall proceed, unless the Owner agrees
otherwise.
If at any time there is a delay in the critical path of the Work due to postponement, due to the
Contractor's efforts to justify an extension of the time or an increase in the Contract Price, or due
to the Contractor's refusal to proceed with any of the Work, pending agreement on a change in
time or price, such delay and any Contractor costs resulting from it shall not serve as the basis for
the extension of the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date or for an increase in the
Contract Price.
(h)
The acceptance by the Contractor of any payment made by the Owner under a Change Order shall
be and operate as a release to the Owner of all claims by the Contractor and of all liability owing
to the Contractor for all things done or furnished in connection with the Work described in the
Change Order. The execution of any Change Order by the Owner shall not be an acceptance of
any Work or materials not in accordance with the Contract Documents, nor shall it relieve the
Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship or operate to release the
Contractor or his surety from any obligation arising under the Contract, the Standard Performance
Bond, or the Standard Labor and Material Payment Bond.
(i)
Payments will not be made for any Work, labor, or materials performed on a unit price or a
Subsection 38(a)(3) basis until the Contractor has furnished the Owner documents, certified as
true and correct by an authorized officer or agent of the Contractor, evidencing the cost of such
Work, labor, and materials. The Owner may require any or all of the following documentation to
be provided by the Contractor.
For Work performed on a Unit Price basis:
(1)
Certified measurements of authorized and approved excavations, over-excavations, fills
and/or backfills, and similar work; and/or
(2)
Certified measurements of piling installed, caissons installed, and similar work; and/or
(3)
Daily records of waste materials removed from the Site and/or fill materials imported to
the Site.
For Work performed on a Subsection 38(a)(3) basis:
(1)
Certified payroll records showing the name, classification, date, daily hours, total hours,
rate, and extension for each laborer, foreman, supervisor, or other worker; and/or
(2)
Equipment type & model, dates, daily hours, total hours, rental rate, or other specified
rate, and extension for each unit of equipment;
(3)
Invoices for materials showing quantities, prices, and extensions;
(4)
Daily records of waste materials removed from the Site and/or fill materials imported to
the Site;
(5)
Certified measurements of over-excavations, piling installed and similar work; and/or
(6)
Transportation records for materials, including prices, loads, and extensions.
Requests for payment shall be accompanied and supported by invoices for all l materials used and
for all transportation charges claimed. If materials come from the Contractor's own stock, then an
42
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
affidavit may be furnished, in lieu of invoices, certifying quantities, prices, etc. to support the
actual cost.
39.
EXTRAS
If the Contractor claims that any instructions given to him by the Architect/Engineer or by the
Owner, by drawings or otherwise, involve extra Work which increases the scope of the Contract,
then, except in emergencies endangering life or property, he shall give the Architect/Engineer and
the Owner written notice thereof before proceeding to execute the Work. Said notice shall be
given promptly enough to avoid delaying the Work and in no instance later than fourteen (14)
days after the receipt of such instructions. Should it not be immediately clear to the Contractor that
the change involves extra Work outside the scope of the Contract, written notice shall be sufficient
if given as soon as possible after such realization, but in no event later than fourteen (14) days
after the start of such Work. If the Owner agrees, a Change Order shall be issued as provided in
Section 38 of these General Conditions, and any additional compensation shall be determined by
one of the three (3) methods provided in Subsection 38(a), as selected by the Owner. If the Owner
does not agree, then any claims for compensation for the extra Work shall be filed in accordance
with Section 47.
40.
CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TERMINATE THE CONTRACT
If the Work should be stopped under an order of any court or other public authority for a period of
ninety (90) days through no fault of the Contractor or anyone employed by him, or if the Owner
should fail to pay to the Contractor within thirty (30) days any sum certified by the
Architect/Engineer when no dispute exists as to the sum due or any provision of the Contract, then
the Contractor may, upon ten (10) calendar days written notice to the Owner and the
Architect/Engineer, stop Work or terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for
the cost of the Work actually performed, together with overhead and profit thereon, but profit on
the Work performed shall be recovered only to the extent that the Contractor can demonstrate that
he would have had profit on the entire Contract if he had completed the Work. The Contractor
may not receive profit or any other type of compensation for parts of the Work not performed. The
Contractor may recover the reasonable cost of physically closing down the Site, but no other costs
of termination. The Owner may offset any claims it may have against the Contractor against the
amounts due to the Contractor. In no event shall termination of the Contract by the Contractor
terminate the obligations of the Contractor's surety on its payment and performance bonds.
41.
OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE THE CONTRACT FOR CAUSE
(a)
If the Contractor should be adjudged as bankrupt, or if he should make a general assignment for
the benefit of his creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed on account of his insolvency, the
Owner may terminate the Contract. If the Contractor should refuse or should repeatedly fail,
except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough properly skilled
workmen or proper materials and equipment, or if he should fail to perform the Work in a diligent,
efficient, workmanlike, skillful, and careful manner, or if he should fail or refuse to perform the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if he should fail to make prompt payment to
Subcontractors or Suppliers of material or labor, or if he should disregard laws, ordinances or the
written instructions of the Architect/Engineer or the Owner, or otherwise be in substantial
violation of any provision of the Contract, then the Owner may terminate the Contract.
(b)
Prior to termination of the Contract, the Owner shall give the Contractor and his surety ten (10)
days written notice of such termination in the manner provided in Section 1 (definition of
"Notice") of these General Conditions and allow ten (10) days during which the Contractor and/or
his surety may rectify the basis for the notice. If rectified to the satisfaction of the Owner within
43
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
said ten (10) days, the Owner may rescind its notice of termination. If not, the termination for
cause shall become effective at the end of the ten (10) day notice period without further notice to
the Contractor. In the alternative, the Owner may, in writing, postpone the effective date of the
termination for cause, at its sole discretion, if it should receive reassurances from the Contractor
and/or its surety that the basis for the termination will be remedied in a time and manner which the
Owner finds acceptable. If at any time after such postponement, the Owner determines that
Contractor and/or its surety has not or is not likely to rectify the causes of termination in an
acceptable manner or within the time allowed, then the Owner may immediately terminate the
Contract for cause, without the necessity of further ten (10) day notice, by notifying the Contractor
and his surety in writing of the termination. In no event shall termination for cause terminate the
obligations of the Contractor's surety on its payment and performance bonds.
(c)
Upon termination of the Contract becoming effective, the Owner shall take possession of the Site
and of all materials, tools and equipment thereon and shall proceed as follows:
(1) No Security Provided: If no security has been provided pursuant to Section 8 herein, the
Owner shall finish the Work by whatever method he may deem expedient. If the expense of
finishing the Work, including compensation for additional managerial and administrative
services, shall exceed the unpaid balance of the Contract Price, the Contractor shall pay the
difference to the Owner, together with any other expenses of terminating the Contract and
having it completed by others.
(2) Security Provided: If security has been provided pursuant to Section 8 herein, the Owner
shall provide Notice to the Surety that termination of the Contract became effective and
proceed as set forth in the Standard Performance Bond, CO-10, Form # DGS-30-084, and the
Terms and Conditions therein. If the expense of finishing the Work, including compensation
for additional managerial and administrative services, shall exceed the unpaid balance of the
Contract Price and the penal amount of the Standard Performance Bond, the Contractor shall
pay the difference to the Owner, together with any other expenses of terminating the
Contract and having it completed by others.
42.
(d)
If it should be judicially determined that the Owner improperly terminated this Contract for cause,
then the termination shall be deemed to be a termination for the convenience of the Owner and the
Contractor’s rights and remedies shall be solely limited to those provided by Section 42 of these
General Conditions.
(e)
Termination of the Contract under this Section is in addition to and without prejudice to any other
right or remedy of the Owner. Any actions by the Owner permitted herein shall not be deemed a
waiver of any other right or remedy of the Owner under the Contract or under the law. The Owner
may offset any claims it may have against the Contractor against the amounts due to the
Contractor. The provisions of this Section shall survive termination of the Contract.
TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
(a)
The Owner may terminate this Contract, in whole or in part, at any time without cause upon giving
the Contractor written notice of such termination in the manner provided in Section 1 (definition
of "Notice") of these General Conditions. Upon such termination, the Contractor shall
immediately cease Work and remove from the Site all of its labor forces, equipment and such of
its materials as Owner elects not to purchase or to assume in the manner hereinafter provided.
Upon such termination, the Contractor shall take such steps as Owner may require to assign to the
Owner the Contractor's interest in all Subcontracts and purchase orders designated by Owner.
After all such steps have been taken to Owner's satisfaction, the Contractor shall receive as full
compensation for termination and assignment the following:
44
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
(1)
Amounts due for Work performed in accordance with the Contract subsequent to the
latest approved Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) through
the date of termination; and
(2)
All amounts then otherwise due under the terms of this Contract associated with the
Work performed prior to the date of termination; and
(3)
Reasonable compensation for the actual cost of demobilization incurred by the Contractor
as a direct result of such termination.
The Contractor shall not be entitled to any compensation or damages for lost profits or for any
other type of contractual compensation or damages other than those provided in Subsection 42(a).
The Owner may offset any claims it may have against the Contractor against the amounts due to
the Contractor. Upon payment of the foregoing, Owner shall have no further obligations to
Contractor of any nature. The Contractor agrees to waive all claims against the Owner for any
consequential damages that may arise from or relate to the Owner’s termination of the Contract
including, but not limited to, damages for loss of revenue, income, profit, business, reputation, or
bonding capacity.
43.
(b)
In no event shall termination for the convenience of the Owner terminate the obligations of the
Contractor's surety on its payment and performance bonds.
(c)
Any actions by the Owner permitted herein shall not be deemed a waiver of any other right or
remedy of the Owner under the Contract or under the law. The provisions of this Section shall
survive termination of the Contract.
DAMAGES FOR DELAYS; EXTENSION OF TIME
(a)
Excusable Non-Compensable Delays: If and to the extent that the Contractor is delayed at any
time in the progress of the Work by strikes, fires, unusual delays in transportation or unavoidable
casualties, or other causes outside the control of the Owner or the Contractor, with the exception
of delays caused by weather provided for in Section 6, for which the Contractor intends to request
an extension of either the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date, as the case may
be, then the Contractor shall give the Owner and Architect/Engineer written notice of the delay
within fourteen (14) days of the inception of the delay. The Contractor shall also give written
notice to the Owner and Architect/Engineer of the termination of the delay not more than fourteen
(14) days after such termination. If the Owner agrees with the existence and the impact of the
delay, the Owner shall extend the Time for Completion, the Contract Completion Date or Final
Completion Date, as the case may be, for the length of time that the date for Substantial
Completion or Final Completion was actually delayed thereby, and the Contractor shall not be
charged with liquidated or actual damages for delay during the period of such extension nor shall
the Contractor be due compensation or damages of any kind, under any theory of law, as a result
of such delay, the impact of such delay, or acceleration of Work as a result of such delay. In the
event a CPM schedule is required by the Contract, no extension of the Time for Completion or
Contract Completion Date shall be granted unless the Contractor demonstrates a delay in the
critical path of the approved CPM schedule or approved bar graph schedule.
(b)
Excusable Compensable Delays: If and to the extent that the Contractor is unreasonably delayed
at any time in the progress of the Work by any acts or omissions of the Owner, its agents, or
employees due to causes within the Owner's control, and the Contractor intends to request an
extension of either the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date, as the case may be,
and/or additional compensation for damages, if any, caused by the delay, then the Contractor shall
notify the Owner and the Architect/Engineer immediately at the time of the occurrence giving rise
to the delay by the fastest means available and shall give written notice no later than two (2)
working days after inception of the delay. The Contractor's written notice shall specify the nature
45
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
of the delay claimed by the Contractor, the cause of the delay, and the impact of the delay on the
Contractor's Work schedule. The Owner shall then have three (3) working days to respond to the
Contractor's notice with a resolution, remedy, direction to alleviate the delay, or rejection of the
Contractor’s notice of delay. The Owner’s failure to respond within the time required shall be
deemed to be a rejection of the Contractor’s notice. The Contractor shall also give written notice
to the Owner and Architect/Engineer of the termination of the delay not more than fourteen (14)
days after such termination. If and to the extent that a delay is caused by or due to the Owner or
A/E taking any actions permitted or required by the Contract, the Contractor shall be entitled to an
extension of time or additional compensation only for the portion of the delay that is unreasonable,
if any.
(c)
(d)
(e)
Non-Excusable Non-Compensable Delays: The Contractor shall not be entitled to an extension
of the Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date or to any additional compensation for
delays if and to the extent they are (1) caused by acts, omissions, fault, or negligence of the
Contractor or his Subcontractors, agents or employees or due to foreseeable causes within their
control, including, but not limited to, delays resulting from Defective Work including
workmanship and/or materials, from rejected work which must be corrected before dependent
work can proceed, from Defective Work or rejected work for which corrective action must be
determined before like work can proceed, from incomplete, incorrect, or unacceptable Submittals
or samples, or from the failure to furnish enough properly skilled workers, proper materials or
necessary equipment to diligently perform the work in a timely manner in accordance with the
Project schedule; or (2) due to causes that would entitle the Owner to recover delay costs or
damages.
No extension of time or additional compensation, if applicable, will be granted for any delay
unless the claimed delay directly affects the critical path of the approved CPM schedule or the
schedule shown on the approved bar graph schedule, whichever is applicable, and any float has
been consumed. No extension of time or additional compensation shall be given for a delay if the
Contractor failed to give notice in the manner and within the time prescribed in Subsections 43(a)
or (b) above, whichever applies. Furthermore, no extension of time or additional compensation
shall be given for any delay unless a written request therefor is made in writing to the Owner, with
a copy to the Architect/Engineer, within twenty (20) days of the end of the delay. The request shall
state the cause of the delay, the number of days of extension requested, and any additional
compensation requested by the Contractor. Failure to give written notice of either the inception or
the termination of the cause of delay or failure to present a claim for extension of time and/or
monetary compensation within the times prescribed shall constitute a waiver of any claim for
extension or additional compensation based upon that cause.
Requests for extensions of time and/or compensation for delays pursuant to Subsection 43(b)
above must be substantiated by itemized data and records clearly showing that the Work delayed
was on the critical path of the approved CPM schedule or on the sequence of Work on the
approved bar graph schedule, as modified, whichever applies, and that the additional time and/or
costs incurred by the Contractor are directly attributable to the delay in the Work claimed.
Furthermore, compensation for delay shall be calculated from the contractual Time for
Completion or Contract Completion Date, as adjusted by Change Order, and shall not be
calculated based on any early completion planned or scheduled by the Contractor, unless a Change
Order has been executed pursuant to Section 19(f) changing the Time for Completion or the
Contract Completion Date to reflect such early completion. See Section 19 for procedures for the
Contractor to follow if he plans early completion of the Work and wishes to request a Change
Order reflecting the early completion date.
Agreed Compensation/Liquidated Damages for Owner Delay:
If and to the extent that the Contractor is entitled to an extension in the Time for Completion or the
Contract Completion Date and additional compensation purely as a result of delay under
Subsection 43(b) and not as a result of a change in the Work under Section 38, the agreed
46
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
compensation and liquidated damages due the Contractor for days added to the Time for
Completion or the Contract Completion Date for each day of such delay shall be the per diem
expenses as determined from an itemized accounting of the direct Site overhead expenses and
home office and other indirect overhead expenses only as specified in Subsections 38(e)(6)(i) and
(ii). These expenses shall exclude any and all expenses specified in Subsection 38(f).
(f)
If the Contractor submits a claim for delay damages pursuant to Subsection 43(b) above, the
Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for a percentage of all costs incurred by the Owner in
investigating, analyzing, negotiating, and litigating or arbitrating the claim, which percentage shall
be equal to the percentage of the Contractor's total delay claim which is determined through
litigation or arbitration to be false or to have no basis in law or in fact. (§ 2.2-4335, Code of
Virginia)
(g)
Any change in the Contract Time for Completion or Contract Completion Date shall be
accomplished only by issuance of a Change Order.
(h)
Agreed Compensation/Liquidated Damages for Contractor Delay: If the Contractor fails to
complete the Work within the Time for Completion or the Contract Completion Date, the
Contractor shall be liable to the Owner in the amounts set forth in the Supplemental General
Conditions, if any, not as a penalty, but as fixed, agreed, and liquidated damages for delay until
the Work is substantially or finally completed as the case may be. If liquidated damages are not so
fixed in the Supplemental General Conditions, the Contractor shall be liable for any and all actual
damages sustained as a result of delay. In addition to damages for delay, whether liquidated or
actual, the Contractor shall also be liable for any and all actual damages sustained by the Owner as
a result of any other breach of the Contract, including, but not limited to, Defective Work and
abandonment of the Contract.
(i)
If liquidated damages are provided by the Supplemental General Conditions, the following
provisions apply:
(j)
44.
(1)
If the Work is not substantially complete by the Time for Completion or Contract
Completion Date, the Contractor shall owe to the Owner, not as a penalty but as Step One
liquidated damages, the sum stated in the Supplemental General Conditions for Step One
liquidated damages for each and every partial or total calendar day of delay in Substantial
Completion.
(2)
Once the Work is substantially complete, the accrual of Step One liquidated damages
shall cease and the Contractor shall have thirty (30) calendar days in which to achieve
Final Completion of the Work.
(3)
If Final Completion of the Work is not achieved on or before the thirtieth (30th) calendar
day after Substantial Completion, and if the Owner has not granted any extension of time,
the Contractor shall owe to the Owner, not as a penalty but as Step Two liquidated
damages, the sum stated in the Supplemental General Conditions as Step Two liquidated
damages for each and every partial or total calendar day of delay in Final Completion.
The Contractor waives any and all defenses as to the validity of any liquidated damage provisions
in the General Conditions or other Contract Documents, or of any liquidated damages assessed
against the Contractor, on the grounds that such damages are void as penalties or are not
reasonably related to actual damages.
INSPECTION FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION & FINAL COMPLETION
(a)
The Contractor shall notify the Owner, in writing on the Certificate of Partial or Substantial
Completion by the Contractor (Form CO-13.2a), of the date when the Work or designated portion
47
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
thereof, will be, in his opinion, substantially complete and ready for inspection and testing to
determine if it has reached Substantial Completion. The notice shall be given at least ten (10) days
in advance of said date and shall be forwarded through the Architect/Engineer, who will attach his
written endorsement as to whether or not he concurs with the Contractor's statement that the Work
will be ready for inspection and testing on the date given. The Architect/Engineer's endorsement is
a convenience to the Owner only and shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility in the
matter nor shall the Architect/Engineer's endorsement be deemed to be evidence that the Work
was substantially complete and ready for inspection and testing. Inspection and testing shall take
place at a time(s) mutually agreeable to the Contractor, Owner and Architect/Engineer.
The inspection shall include a demonstration by the Contractor that all equipment, systems and
operable components of the project function properly and in accordance with the Contract
Documents. The Contractor shall furnish access for the inspection and testing as provided in
Section 21 of these General Conditions. The inspection and testing shall determine whether
Substantial Completion has been accomplished and shall result in a written list of unfinished Work
and Defective Work, commonly referred to as a "punch list", which must be finished and corrected
to obtain Final Completion.
After successful completion of the testing and the Architect / Engineer determines that, in its
opinion, the Work, either in whole or in part, is substantially complete, the Architect / Engineer
shall notify the Owner, in writing on the Certificate of Partial or Substantial Completion by the
Architect/Engineer (Form CO-13.1a), that the Work, or a specified portion thereof, is
recommended to be declared substantially complete. The Owner shall notify the Contractor, in
writing, of the date the Owner accepts the Work, or the specified portion thereof, as substantially
complete or the Owner shall notify the Contractor of the deficiencies to be corrected or completed
before such Work will be accepted as substantially complete.
45.
(b)
The Contractor shall notify the Owner, in writing on the Certificate of Completion by the
Contractor (form CO-13.2), of the date when the Work has reached or will reach Final Completion
and will be ready for final inspection and testing. The notice shall be given at least five (5) days in
advance of said date and shall be forwarded through the Architect/Engineer, who will attach his
endorsement as to whether or not he concurs in the Contractor's statement that the Work will be
ready for inspection and testing on the date given. That inspection and any necessary testing shall
be conducted in the same manner as the inspection for Substantial Completion. When the Work is
finally and totally complete, including the elimination of all defects, the Work shall be finally
accepted by the Owner and Final Payment shall be made in accordance with Section 36 of these
General Conditions.
(c)
The Architect/Engineer shall conduct the inspections. The Owner may elect to have other persons
of its choosing also participate in the inspections. If one or more Substantial or Final Completion
re-inspections are required, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for all costs of re-inspection
or, at the Owner's option, the costs may be deducted from payments due to the Contractor.
(d)
A representative of the State Fire Marshal's Office will either be present at the Substantial and
Final Completion inspections or otherwise inspect the completed Work and advise the Owner
whether the Work meets the fire safety requirements of the applicable building code.
(e)
Approval of Work at or as a result of any inspection required herein shall not release the
Contractor or his surety from responsibility for complying with the Contract.
GUARANTEE OF WORK
(a)
Except as otherwise specified, all Work shall be, and is hereby, guaranteed by the Contractor
against defects resulting from the use of materials, equipment or workmanship, which are
defective, inferior, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract, for one (1) year from the
48
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
date of Final Completion of the entire Project by the Owner. Equipment and facilities which have
seasonal limitations on their operation (e.g. heating or air conditioning units) shall be guaranteed
for one (1) full year from the date of seasonally appropriate tests and acceptance, in writing, by the
Owner. Where the Owner agrees to take Beneficial Occupancy of a portion or phase of the Work
which has been determined to be substantially complete before the entire Work is finally
completed, the guarantees for the materials, equipment and workmanship in that portion or phase
shall begin on the date that the Owner takes Beneficial Occupancy, unless otherwise specified in
the Supplemental General Conditions, Special Conditions, or by separate agreement. At six (6)
months and eleven (11) months after substantial completion, the Contractor shall meet with the
Owner to review the status of and assign value to any unresolved warranty, guarantee, and punch
list items.
(b)
If, within any guarantee period, Work which is not in accordance with the Contract, Defective
Work, or inferior material, equipment or workmanship is noted by the Owner or
Architect/Engineer which requires or renders necessary repairs or changes in connection with the
guaranteed Work, the Contractor shall, promptly upon receipt of notice from the Owner, such
notice being given not later than two weeks after the guarantee period expires, and without
expense to the Owner:
(1)
Place in satisfactory condition in every particular all of such guaranteed Work and correct
all defects, inferior materials, equipment or workmanship therein;
(2)
Make good all damage to the structure or Site or equipment or contents thereof, which, in
the opinion of the Owner or the Architect/Engineer, is the result of the use of materials,
equipment or workmanship which are inferior, defective or not in accordance with the
terms of the Contract; and
(3)
Make good any Work or materials or the equipment and contents of structures and/or Site
disturbance that results from fulfilling the provisions of this Section.
(c)
In any case, when in fulfilling the requirements of the Contract and this guarantee or any other
guaranty or warranty, the Contractor disturbs any work performed by a separate contractor, he
shall restore such work to a condition satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer and Owner and
guarantee such restored work to the same extent as if it was guaranteed under this Contract.
(d)
If the Contractor, after notice, fails to proceed promptly to comply with the terms of the guarantee
as set forth in this Section, the Owner may have the defects or inferior materials, equipment or
workmanship corrected and the Contractor and his surety shall be liable for all expense incurred.
(e)
All special warranties and guarantees applicable to definite parts of the Work that may be
stipulated in or required by the Contract Documents shall be subject to the terms of this Section
during the first year of the life of such special warranty or guarantee.
(f)
The guarantee of this Section shall be in addition to and not in lieu of all other warranties, express
or implied, applicable to or arising from this Contract or by law.
(g)
Nothing contained in this Section shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect
to any other obligation which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents, including
liability for Defective Work under Section 30. This Section relates only to the specific obligation
of the Contractor as set forth in this Section to correct the Work and does not limit the time within
which his obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor
the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with
respect to his other obligations under the Contract Documents.
49
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
46.
CO-7
(h)
In the event the Work of the Contractor is to be modified by another contractor, either before or
after the Final Inspection provided by Section 44 of the General Conditions, the first Contractor
shall remain responsible in all respects under this Section's Guarantee of Work and under any
other warranties or guarantees, express or implied, applicable to or arising from this Contract or by
law. However, the Contractor shall not be responsible for any defects in material or workmanship
introduced by the contractor modifying his Work. The first Contractor and the contractor making
the modifications shall each be solely responsible for his respective work. The contractor
modifying the earlier Work shall be responsible for any damage to or defect introduced into the
Work by his modification. If the first contractor claims that a subsequent contractor has introduced
defects of materials and/or workmanship into his Work, it shall be the burden of the contractor
making the claim to demonstrate clearly the nature and extent of such introduced defects and the
other contractor's responsibility for those defects. Any contractor modifying the work of another
shall have the same burden if he asserts that defects in his work were caused by the contractor
whose work he is modifying.
(i)
The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Commonwealth of Virginia, the Owner and
the Owner’s consultants, representatives, agents and employees from and against any and all
claims, causes of action, losses, costs, expenses or damages, including but not limited to attorney's
fees, of any kind or nature whatsoever, arising from or relating to any bodily injury, including
sickness, disease or death, or any property damage, that result from or arise out of the work
performed by the Contractor, or by or in consequence of any neglect in safeguarding the Work,
through the use of unacceptable materials in the Work, or resulting from any act, omission,
negligence, or misconduct of the Contractor, any of his subcontractors, anyone directly or
indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. The Owner may retain
as much of the moneys due the Contractor under the Contract as the Owner considers necessary to
ensure that a fund will be available to pay a settlement or judgment of such suits, actions, or
claims. If insufficient monies are or will become due, the Contractor’s surety and/or insurers will
not be released from liability until all such claims and actions have been settled and suitable
evidence to that effect has been furnished the Owner.
ASSIGNMENTS
Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract in whole or any part without the written
consent of the other, nor shall the Contractor assign any moneys due or to become due to him
hereunder, without the prior written consent of the Owner. Consent to assignment shall not be
unreasonably withheld. No assignment shall relieve any party from its obligations under the
Contract.
47.
CONTRACTUAL DISPUTES (§2.2-4363, Code of Virginia)
(a)
Contractual claims, whether for money or for other relief, shall be submitted, in writing, no later
than sixty (60) days after Final Payment; however, written notice of the Contractor's intention to
file such claim must be given within fourteen (14) days of the time of the occurrence or beginning
of the Work upon which the claim is based. Such notice shall state that it is a “notice of intent to
file a claim” and include a written statement describing the act or omission of the Owner or its
agents that allegedly caused or may cause damage to the Contractor and the nature of the claimed
damage. The submission of a timely notice is a prerequisite to recovery under this Section. Failure
to submit such notice of intent within the time and in the manner required shall be a conclusive
waiver of the claim by the Contractor. Oral notice, the Owner’s actual knowledge, or a written
notice given after the expiration of fourteen (14) days of time of the occurrence or beginning of
the Work upon which the claim is based, shall not be sufficient to satisfy the requirements of this
Section. Although the Contractor may be required to submit certain classes of claims prior to Final
Payment, and the Contractor is not prevented from submitting claims during the pendency of the
Work, the Owner shall not be obligated to render a final written decision on any claim until after
50
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
Final Payment. All claims shall state that they are “claims” pursuant to this Section, be submitted
along with all practically available supporting evidence and documentation and the certification
required by Subsection 47(f), and request a final decision. Certificates for payment, applications
for payment, vouchers, invoices and similar requests for payment submitted for work done by the
Contractor in accordance with the expected contract performance are routine submissions and
shall not be considered claims under this Section. Proposed or requested change orders, demands
for money compensation or other relief, and correspondence and e-mails to the Owner or its
representatives, which do not strictly comply with the requirements of this Section, shall not be
considered claims under this Section.
48.
(b)
No written decision denying a claim or addressing issues related to the claim shall be considered a
denial pursuant to this Section unless the written decision makes express reference to this Section
and is signed by the Agency head or his designee. The Contractor may not institute legal action
prior to receipt of the Owner's final written decision on the claim unless the Owner fails to render
such a decision within ninety (90) days of submission of the claim, at which time the claim shall
be deemed denied.
(c)
The decision of the agency head or other signatory on the Contract shall be final and conclusive
unless the Contractor within six (6) months of the date of the final decision on a claim, initiates
legal action as provided in § 2.2-4364 of the Code of Virginia. Failure of the Owner to render a
decision within 90 days shall not result in the Contractor being awarded the relief claimed nor
shall it result in any other relief or penalty. The sole result of the Owner's failure to render a
decision within 90 days shall be the Contractor's right to immediately institute legal action. No
administrative appeals procedure pursuant to § 2.2-4365 of the Code of Virginia has been
established for contractual claims under this Contract.
(d)
Pursuant to § 2.2-4366, Alternative Dispute Resolution, of the Code of Virginia, the Owner may
enter into an agreement with the Contractor to submit disputes arising from the performance of
this Contract to arbitration and utilize mediation and other alternative dispute resolution
procedures. However, such procedures entered into by the Owner, the Commonwealth, or any
department, institution, division, commission, board or bureau thereof, shall be non-binding and
subject to § 2.2-514, as applicable.
(e)
In the event that a dispute, claim or controversy between the Owner and the Contractor arises
regarding the requirements of the Contract, the performance of the Work, payment due the
Contractor, the terms of any Change Order, or otherwise, the Contractor shall not stop, suspend or
delay the Work or any part of the Work to be performed under the Contract, or under any Change
Order, or as ordered by the Owner. The Contractor shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work to
completion, including work required in any Change Order or as directed by the Owner.
(f)
Along with a claim submitted under this Section, the Contractor shall submit a claim certification
form. Claims submitted without the certification form shall not constitute a proper claim and, if
not submitted with the certification within the time required, shall be deemed to be waived.
(g)
The remedies provided in these General Conditions, including costs, expenses, damages or
extensions of time, shall be the Contractor’s sole remedies for the acts, omissions or breaches of
the Owner, which shall survive termination or breach of the Contract.
ASBESTOS
(a)
This subsection applies to projects involving existing buildings where asbestos abatement is not a
part of the Work, when the scope of the project has been reviewed and a comprehensive survey
51
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
conducted by an individual licensed by the Virginia Department of Professional and Occupational
Regulation to conduct building inspections for asbestos containing materials in buildings, and
where the Owner has attempted to remove or encapsulate all asbestos containing material that may
become friable or damaged during this Project.
Prior to commencement of Work, the results of the comprehensive survey or any other asbestos
survey shall be made available to the Contractor, who shall be responsible for performing his
Work so as not to disturb any remaining asbestos, encapsulated or otherwise, identified in such
survey or surveys.
If the Contractor discovers or inadvertently disturbs any material that he knows, should have
known or has reason to believe, may contain asbestos that has not been previously identified, was
overlooked during the removal, was deemed not to be friable or was encapsulated, the Contractor
shall stop Work in the area containing or suspected to contain the asbestos, secure the area, and
notify the Owner and the Architect/Engineer immediately by telephone or in person with written
notice as soon as possible. The Owner will have the suspect material sampled.
If the sample is positive and must be disturbed in the course of the Work, the Owner shall have the
material repaired or removed and shall pay for the bulk sample analysis.
Except as provided in §11-4.1 of the Code of Virginia, if the material disturbed is not within the
Contractor's authorized Work and/or Work area or under this Contract, the Contractor shall pay for
all associated sampling and abatement costs.
49.
50.
(b)
If asbestos abatement is included as a part of the Work, the Contractor shall assure that the
asbestos abatement work is accomplished by those duly licensed as described in Section 3 of these
General Conditions and in accordance with the specific requirements of the Contract and all
applicable laws and regulations.
(c)
If asbestos abatement is included as part of the Work, the licensed asbestos Subcontractor shall
obtain the insurance required under Section 11 (e) of these General Conditions.
TRAINING, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF EQUIPMENT
(a)
As a part of the Work, the Contractor in conjunction with his Subcontractors and Suppliers shall
provide the Owner's operations and maintenance personnel with adequate instruction and training
in the proper operation and maintenance of any equipment, systems, and related controls provided
or altered in the Work. The training requirements may be further defined in the specifications.
(b)
The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a minimum of two (2) copies of operating,
maintenance and parts manuals for all equipment and systems provided in the Work. Further
specific requirements may be indicated in the specifications.
PROJECT MEETINGS
(a)
The intention of this Section is that the Contractor, the Owner and the A/E have timely exchange
of information and cooperate to accomplish the Work as required by the Contract Documents. The
Contractor is responsible for managing the Work, obtaining approvals and requesting
clarifications on a timely, reasonable basis. The Owner and its A/E are responsible for making a
reasonable effort to provide timely responses to the Contractor.
(b)
Preconstruction Meeting:
52
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
Prior to the start of construction and no later than 15 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed, a
"Preconstruction" meeting shall be held with attendees to include the Owner's Project Manager
and Project Inspector, the Architect/Engineer's project manager and representatives of each design
discipline involved in the Project, the Regional Fire Marshal, the Contractor's project manager and
superintendent (and scheduler, if Contractor desires), and representatives of the Contractor's major
Subcontractors. The purpose of the meeting is to clarify and discuss the specifics related to, but
not limited to, the following:
(c)
(1)
Persons involved from each entity and their chain of authority including the names of
persons authorized to sign Change Orders and any limits to their authority. Name of
Contractor’s on-site certified Responsible Land Disturber.
(2)
Names, addresses, telephone numbers and FAX numbers to be used for Requests for
Information (RFI), Requests for Clarification (RFC), Requests for Proposals (RFP), shop
drawings, Submittals, and notices.
(3)
Contractor's proposed construction schedule and Owner's sequencing requirements, if
any.
(4)
Schedule of Values and Certificate for Payment (Form CO-12) requirements and
procedures.
(5)
Procedures for shop drawings, product data and Submittals.
(6)
Procedures for handling Field Orders and Change Order Form CO-11.
(7)
Procedures for Contractor's request for time extension, if any.
(8)
Construction Site requirements, procedures and clarifications to include:
- Manner of conducting the Work
- Site specialties such as dust and erosion control, stormwater management, project
signs, clean up and housekeeping, temporary facilities, utilities, security, and traffic
- Safety
- Layout of the Work
- Quality control, testing, inspections, and notices required
Site visits by the A/E and others
- Owner's Project Inspector duties
- Running Punch List
- As-Built Drawings
(9)
Procedures and documentation of differing or unforeseen Site conditions
(10)
Monthly Pay Meeting
(11)
Assignment of responsibility for generation of meeting minutes of all project meetings.
(12)
Project Close-Out requirements and procedures
(13)
Project records
Monthly Pay Meeting:
Section 36 establishes the requirement for a monthly pay meeting which will usually be held at or
near the Site. In addition to Owner, A/E and Contractor representatives, the following
53
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
representatives, at a minimum, should be available to attend portions of the meeting, as applicable
or necessary:
-
Owner's Project Inspector
Contractor's project superintendent
A/E representative of each discipline where Work was performed for the current pay
request or where Work is projected to be performed in the coming month.
A representative of each subcontractor who performed work included in the current
pay request.
A representative of each subcontractor who is projected to perform work in the
coming month.
The following topics should be included, as a minimum, in the monthly pay meeting:
(d)
(1)
Observations of status, quality and workmanship of Work in progress
(2)
Validation of the Schedule of Values and Certificate for payment
(3)
Conformance with proposed construction schedule
(4)
Outstanding Requests for Information, Requests for Clarification and Requests for
Proposal
(5)
Submittals with action pending
(6)
Status of pending Change Orders
(7)
Status of Running Punch List items
(8)
Work proposed for coming pay period
(9)
Discussions of any problems or potential problems which need attention
Other Meetings:
Requirements for other meetings, such as progress meetings, coordination meetings, preinstallation meetings and/or partnering meetings, may be included in the Contract Documents.
51.
SMALL BUSINESSES AND WOMEN-OWNED AND MINORITY-OWNED (SWAM) BUSINESS
PROCUREMENT PLAN
The Owner has developed a “SWAM” plan for increasing procurement from small, womenowned, and minority-owned (SWAM) businesses in its construction program. The Owner’s
SWAM aspirational goals and plan are included in the contract documents for use by the
Contractor in developing its plan for involving small, women-owned, and minority-owned
(SWAM) businesses through subcontracting, and through the purchasing of goods, materials,
supplies and services in the Contractor’s construction program. The Owner’s plan provides
criteria and goals for the Contractor in developing a plan, for submitting its plan and for reporting
its achievements in meeting the goals established for the Contract.
The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable after the posting of the Notice of Intent to Award but
not later than 30 days after the effective date of the contract, provide a list of Subcontractors that
are proposed to perform the work, including SWAM subcontractors, vendors and suppliers
showing their DMBE certification numbers where applicable. Upon receipt of the list, the Owner
54
DGS-30-054
(04/13)
CO-7
may, based on the Agency SWAM Procurement Plan require the Contractor to provide additional
information on work that has been bid by SWAM contractors, and areas in which the scope of
work may be reduced in size to increase the pool of potential SWAM contractors. Selection of
particular Subcontractors for a certain part of the work shall be made in accord with Section 9,
Subcontracts of the General Conditions.
***ENDOFGENERALCONDITIONS***
55
7KLVSDJHLQWHQWLRQDOO\EODQN
DGS-30-064
(Rev. 04/13)
CO-9
Page 1 of 4
COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA
CONTRACT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
This Contract, dated this ______________________ day of ___________________,
between
_______________________________________________________________________ (“Owner”) and
_______________________________________________________________________ (“Contractor”),
is binding among and between these parties as of the date of the Owner’s signature.
RECITALS
1. The legal address for the Owner and for the Contractor and the addresses for delivery of Notices and
other project documents are as follows:
Owner:
Attn:
Address:
City, State, Zip:
Telephone:
FAX:
Contractor:
Attn:
Address:
City, State, Zip:
Telephone:
FAX:
Contractor’s Virginia License #:
FEIN/SSN:
SCC ID #:
2. The Project is identified as:
Project Title:
Project Code – PC#:
General Project Description:
The Project Code (PC#) indicated above is required to be shown for identification purposes on all project-related material
and documents including but not limited to, Notices, Change Orders, Submittals, Requests For Information, Requests For
Quotes, Field Orders, minutes of meetings, correspondence, Schedule of Values and Certificate For Payment (Form CO-12),
test reports, and related materials.
DGS-30-064
(Rev. 04/13)
CO-9
Page 2 of 4
3. After competitive sealed bidding pursuant to the Virginia Public Procurement Act, Contractor is
awarded this Contract to perform the Work described by the Contract Documents for the abovedescribed project (“the Project”).
THEREFORE, in consideration of the Recitals set forth above, and good and valuable consideration as
set forth below, the parties agree as follows:
1. STATEMENT OF WORK: The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and materials and
perform all Work for the Project in strict accordance with the Contract Documents.
2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: This Contract shall consist of the following:
-
this Contract Between Owner and Contractor (Form CO-9);
the Bid Form submitted by the Contractor;
Post Bid Modification(s), if any, dated _______________________;
the General Conditions of the Construction Contract (Form CO-7),
referred to as the “General Conditions”;
the Supplemental General Conditions, if any;
the Special Conditions attached to the Owner’s Invitation for Bids;
the Owner’s Project Plans and Specifications dated _____________________;
All of these documents are incorporated herein by reference.
3. TIME FOR COMPLETION: The Work shall be commenced on a date to be specified in a written
order of the Owner and shall be Substantially Completed within _______ calendar days or not later than
the Contract Completion Date which is _________________.The Work shall be finally completed
within 30 days after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work.
4. COMPENSATION TO BE PAID TO THE CONTRACTOR: The Owner agrees to pay and the
Contractor agrees to accept as just and adequate compensation for the performance of the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents the sum of
_____________________________________________dollars ($__________________).
5. PAYMENTS: The procedures for establishing a Schedule of Values for the Work, for requesting
monthly progress payments for Work in place, and for requesting payments for properly stored materials
are stated in the General Conditions. Unless otherwise provided under the Contract Documents, interest
on payments due the Contractor shall accrue at the rate of one percent per month. §2.2-4354 of the Code
of Virginia.
eVA Vendor Registration: The bidder or offeror shall be a registered vendor in eVA. See the attached
eVA Vendor Registration Requirements.
DGS-30-064
(Rev. 04/13)
CO-9
Page 3 of 4
GCPay: Contract payments shall be made through GCPay. Go to www.dgs.virginia.gov/deb to see the fee
schedule and the instructions on how to process pay applications.
6. CONTRACTUAL CLAIMS: Any contractual claims shall be submitted in accordance with the
contractual dispute procedures set forth in Section 47 of the General Conditions and the supplemental
instructions or procedures of the contracting State Agency, if any, attached to this Contract.
7. NON-DISCRIMINATION: § 2.2-4311 of the Code of Virginia applies to this contract. See Section
4 of the General Conditions.
8. AUTHORIZATION TO TRANSACT BUSINESS: The Contractor certifies that, if it is organized
as a stock or nonstock corporation, limited liability company, business trust, or limited partnership or
registered as a registered limited liability partnership, it is authorized to transact business in the
Commonwealth as a domestic or foreign business entity if so required by Title 13.1 or Title 50 of the
Code of Virginia, or as otherwise required by law, and shall not allow its existence to lapse or its
certificate of authority or registration to transact business in the Commonwealth, if so required under
Title 13.1 or Title 50, to be revoked or cancelled at any time during the term of the Contract. The
Contractor understands and agrees that the Owner may void this Contract if the Contractor fails to
comply with these provisions.
9. DEBARMENT AND ENJOINMENT: By signing contract, the undersigned certifies that this
Contractor or any officer, director, partner or owner is not currently barred from bidding on contracts by
any Agency of the Commonwealth of Virginia, or any public body or agency of another state, or any
agency of the federal government, nor is this Contractor a subsidiary or affiliate of any firm/corporation
that is currently barred from bidding on contracts by any of the same.
10. “ALL RISK” BUILDER’S RISK INSURANCE: As this project is a modification to an existing
building, in accordance with Section 12(c) of the General Conditions, the requirements of Section 12(a)
of the General Conditions do not apply.
DGS-30-064
(Rev. 04/13)
CO-9
Page 4 of 4
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto on the day and year written below have executed this
agreement in three (3) counterparts, each of which shall, without proof or accountancy for the other
counterparts, be deemed on original thereof.
For the CONTRACTOR:
For the OWNER:
By: _______________________________
(signature in ink)
By: _______________________________
(date)
_______________________________
(signature in ink)
(date)
_______________________________
(typed name)
(typed name)
_______________________________
_______________________________
(typed title)
(typed title)
Attest:
Attest:
_______________________________
(signature in ink)
(date)
Attachments:
- Bid Form Submitted by the Contractor
- Post Bid Modification, if any
_______________________________
(signature in ink)
(date)
DGS-30-076
CO-9a
(Rev. 05/02)
Page 1 of 1
COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA
WORKERS' COMPENSATION
Certificate of Coverage
Section 2.2-4332, Code of Virginia, requires construction contractors and subcontractors to
obtain and maintain workers' compensation insurance while performing work on behalf of the
Commonwealth of Virginia, its departments, institutions, or agencies. This same requirement
applies on behalf of local governments.
Evidence of coverage must be provided prior to commencement of Work.
This form must be completed and returned to the organization contracting the Work.
The undersigned organization stipulates that it:
A.
B.
has workers' compensation insurance and is in compliance with the Workers'
Compensation statutes of the Commonwealth of Virginia. _____ Yes _____ No
Insurance Company ____________________________________
Policy expiration date __________________________________
is self insured for workers' compensation. _______ Yes
Title of Construction Contract: ___________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
Contract Number: ______________________________________________________________
Signed by: _____________________________________
Title:_____________________________________
Firm Name: _____________________________________
Address:_____________________________________
_____________________________________
_____________________________________
This page intentionally blank.
DGS-30-084
CO-10
(Rev 09/07)
Page 1 of 5
COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA
STANDARD PERFORMANCE BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That
principal place of business is located at
of ‘Notices’ is located at
, the Contractor (“Principal”) whose
and
(“Surety”) whose address for delivery
are held and firmly bound unto the Commonwealth of Virginia,
, the Owner (“Obligee”) in the amount of
Dollars ($
) for the payment
whereof Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors
and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS,
Principal has by written agreement dated
entered into a contract with Obligee for
which contract (the "Contract") is by reference expressly made a part hereof;
NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if the
Principal shall promptly and faithfully perform said Contract in strict conformity with the plans,
specifications and conditions of the Contract, then this obligation shall be null and void;
otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect.
Provided, that any alterations which may be made in the terms of the Contract, or in the Work to
be done under it, or the giving by the Obligee of any extension of time for the performance of the
Contract, or any other alterations, extensions or forbearance on the part of either or both of the
Obligee or the Principal to the other shall not in any way release the Principal and the Surety, or
either of them, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns from their liability
hereunder, notice to the Surety of any such alterations, extension, or forbearance being hereby
waived.
No action shall be brought on this bond unless brought within one year after: (a) completion of
the Contract and all Work thereunder, including expiration of all warranties and guarantees, or
(b) discovery of the defect or breach of warranty or guarantee if the action be for such.
The Surety represents to the Principal and to the Obligee that it is legally authorized to do
business in the Commonwealth of Virginia.
DGS-30-084
CO-10
(Rev 09/07)
Page 2 of 5
Signed and sealed this
day of
Contractor / Principal
_________________________________________
Witness
(SEAL)
By:_________________________________
Typed Name:
Title:
Surety
(SEAL)
By:_________________________________
Attorney-in-Fact
Typed Name:
AFFIDAVIT AND ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ATTORNEY-IN-FACT
COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA
(or alternatively, Commonwealth or State of
)
CITY of
I, the undersigned notary public, do certify that
, whose name is signed to the foregoing performance bond in
the sum of
and dated
and which names the Commonwealth of Virginia,
, as Obligee, personally
appeared before me today in the above jurisdiction and made oath that he/she is the attorney-in-fact of
,a
corporation which is the Surety in the foregoing bond, that he/she is duly authorized to execute on the above
Surety’s behalf the foregoing bond pursuant to the Power of Attorney noted above and attached hereto, and on
behalf of the surety, he/she acknowledged the foregoing bond before me as the above Surety’s act and deed.
She/he has further certified that her/his Power of Attorney has not been revoked.
[Complete if Power is recorded: Clerk’s Office:
;
Deed Book/Page No. or Instrument No.:
.]
Given under my hand this
day of
.
_________________________________
Notary Public
My name (printed) is:
My registration number is:
My commission expires:
APPROVED:
_______________________________________________
Attorney General/Designee
Date
(SEAL)
DGS-30-084
CO-10
(Rev 09/07)
Page 3 of 5
Terms and Conditions of the Performance Bond
1
The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors,
administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the prompt and faithful performance
of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference.
2
If the Contractor promptly and faithfully performs the Construction Contract in strict
conformity with the plans, specifications and conditions of the Construction Contract, the
Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligations under this Bond.
3
In the event of the Contractor's Default, and subsequent notification to the Surety pursuant to
Section 41 of the General Conditions of the Construction Contract, the Surety shall, within
fourteen (14) days of receipt of such notice, contact the Owner in writing, and arrange a
meeting with the Owner to discuss methods of completing the Construction Contract. See
paragraph 4, below, for the options to be discussed. If the Surety fails to arrange a meeting
or fails to attend such meeting, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond and
the Owner may, at its sole discretion, take what measures it deems necessary to protect the
Owner's interests, without further notice to the Surety, and the Owner shall be entitled to
enforce any remedy available to the Owner under the Construction Contract or under
Virginia law.
4
Within thirty (30) days after such meeting, during which time the Surety may investigate and
otherwise analyze the project, and which period shall not toll any Construction Contract time
periods nor operate as a waiver of any of the Owner's rights, the Surety shall, at its own
expense, notify the Owner in writing that it is taking one of the following actions, which
shall be acceptable to the Owner, at the Owner's sole discretion:
4.1 By written takeover agreement with the Owner, the Surety itself shall undertake to
perform and complete the Construction Contract, which it may do through its licensed
agents or through licensed independent contractors. If the Owner, at its sole discretion,
consents, the Contractor may serve as the Surety's independent contractor (however, due
to conflicts with the Virginia Public Procurement Act, the Owner may not directly
contract with an otherwise qualified independent contractor produced by the Surety); or
4.2 The Surety may, if acceptable to the Owner and at the Owner's sole discretion, waive
its right to perform and complete the Construction Contract, and with reasonable
promptness under the circumstances:
4.2.1 Pay to the Owner all amounts for which it may be liable to the
Owner as surety on this Performance Bond, including the damages
described in paragraph 6 below; or
4.2.2 Deny liability, in whole or in part, and provide written notice
thereof to the Owner, citing reasons therefor.
5
If, after the meeting described in paragraph 4, above, the Surety does not proceed with
reasonable promptness with one of the options provided in subparagraphs 4.1 or 4.2
DGS-30-084
CO-10
(Rev 09/07)
Page 4 of 5
(including its subparts), above, the Owner may send additional written notice to the
Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under the Bond. If the Surety
does not proceed to perform its obligations under the Bond within fifteen (15) days after
receipt of said notice, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond.
Thereafter, the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner
under the Bond, the Construction Contract or Virginia law. If the Surety proceeds as
provided in Subparagraph 4.2, and the Surety and the Owner are unable to agree as to the
amount for which the Surety may be liable to the Owner, or if the Surety has denied
liability, in whole or in part, the Owner, without further notice, shall be entitled to
enforce any remedy available to the Owner under the Bond, the Construction Contract or
Virginia law. In such event, the Owner may immediately proceed to complete the work
in any manner authorized by law.
6
After the Owner has terminated the Contractor’s right to complete the Construction Contract,
and if the Surety elects to act under Subparagraph 4.1 or 4.2.1, above, then the
responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater or less than those of the
Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the
Surety shall not be greater than or less than those of the Owner under the Construction
Contract. To the limit of the amount of this Bond, plus the increased cost of any change
orders under the Construction Contract, provided the Owner commits the balance of the
Construction Contract Price to the prompt and faithful completion of the Construction
Contract, the Surety is obligated without duplication for:
6.1
The responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and
completion of the Construction Contract;
6.2
Additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the
Contractor’s Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety
under Paragraph 4; and
6.3
Liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction
Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of
the Contractor.
The Owner, at its sole discretion, may waive its claim to delay costs and/or liquidated
damages.
7
The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner for obligations of the Contractor that are
unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be
reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of action shall
accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner, its officers, agencies,
administrators, successors or assigns.
8
The Surety hereby waives notice of any changes, including changes of time, to the
Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations.
The Surety understands and agrees that the penal amount of the bond shall be increased
or decreased by any changes to time and amount incorporated into any Change Orders.
DGS-30-084
CO-10
(Rev 09/07)
Page 5 of 5
9
Any proceeding by the Owner, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any
Virginia state court of competent jurisdiction, as permitted under Section 8 of the General
Conditions of the Construction Contract and Virginia Code § 2.2-4337 and 2.2-4340, or by
the Contractor or Surety, as permitted under the Construction Contract or under Virginia law.
10 Notice to the Surety shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the Standard
Performance Bond in the space for Surety address for delivery of Notices
11 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in
the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond
conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and
provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed
incorporated herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and
not as a common law bond when furnished to comply with statutory requirements.
12 DEFINITIONS
12.1
Balance of the Construction Contract Price: The total amount payable by the
Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper
adjustments have been made, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to
or on behalf of the Contractor under the Construction Contract.
12.2
Construction Contract: The agreement between the Owner and the Contractor
identified on first page of the Standard Performance Bond, DGS-30-084, CO-10,
including all Construction Contract Documents and duly executed modifications
and change orders thereto.
12.3
Contractor Default: Failure of the Contractor, as defined under Section 41 of
the General Conditions to the Construction Contract, which has neither been
remedied, as permitted under Section 41 at the Owner's sole discretion, nor
expressly waived by the Owner, to perform or otherwise to comply with the terms
of the Construction Contract.
13 Nothing in these General Conditions shall prevent a surety from becoming involved in the
Construction Contract prior to termination, upon notice from the Owner of the Contractor's
failure to promptly and faithfully perform the Construction Contract in strict conformity with
the plans, specifications and conditions of the Construction Contract.
DGS-30- 088
(Rev 09/11)
CO-10.1
Page 1 of 3
COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA
STANDARD LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That
principal place of business is located
‘Notices’ is located at
and
, the Contractor (“Principal”) whose
(“Surety”) whose address for delivery of
are held and firmly bound unto the Commonwealth of Virginia,
, the Owner (“Obligee”) in the amount of
Dollars ($
) for the payment whereof
Principal and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and
assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS,
Principal has by written agreement dated
entered into a contract with Obligee for
which contract (the "Contract") is by reference expressly made a part hereof;
NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, if the
Principal shall promptly make payment to all claimants as hereinafter defined, for labor
performed and material furnished in the prosecution of the Work provided for in the Contract,
then this obligation shall be void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect, subject,
however, to the following conditions.
The Principal and Surety, jointly and severally, hereby agree with Obligee as follows:
1.
A claimant is defined as one having a direct contract with the Principal or with a subcontractor of the
Principal for labor, material, or both for use in the performance of the Contract. A ''subcontractor'' of the
Principal, for the purposes of this bond only, includes not only those subcontractors having a direct
contractual relationship with the Principal, but also any other contractor who undertakes to participate in
the Work which the Principal is to perform under the aforesaid Contract, whether there are one or more
intervening subcontractors contractually positioned between it and the Principal (for example, a
subcontractor). ''Labor'' and ''material'' shall include, but not be limited to, public utility services and
reasonable rentals of equipment, but only for periods when the equipment rented is actually used at the
work site.
2.
Any claimant who has a direct contractual relationship with the Principal and who has performed labor or
furnished material in accordance with the Contract documents in furtherance of the Work provided in the
Contract, who has not been paid in full therefor before the expiration of ninety (90) days after the day on
which such claimant performed the last of such labor or furnished the last of such materials for which he
claims payment, may bring an action on this bond to recover any amount due him for such labor or
material, and may prosecute such action to final judgment and have execution on the judgment. The
Obligee need not be a party to such action and shall not be liable for the payment of any costs, fees or
expenses of any such suit.
3.
Any claimant who has a direct contractual relationship with any subcontractor of the Principal but who has
no contractual relationship, express or implied, with the Principal, may bring an action on this bond only if
he has given written notice to the Principal within ninety (90) days from the day on which the claimant
performed the last of the labor or furnished the last of the materials for which he claims payment, stating
with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the person for whom the Work was
performed or to whom the material was furnished. Notice to the Principal shall be served by registered or
certified mail, postage prepaid, in an envelope addressed to the Principal at any place where his office is
DGS-30- 088
(Rev 09/11)
CO-10.1
Page 2 of 3
regularly maintained for the transaction of business. Claims for sums withheld as retainages with respect to
labor performed or materials furnished shall not be subject to the time limitations stated in this paragraph 3.
4.
5.
No suit or action shall be commenced hereunder by any claimant.
a.
Unless brought within one year after the day on which the person bringing such action last
performed labor or last furnished or supplied materials, it being understood, however, that if any
limitation embodied in this bond is prohibited by any law controlling the construction hereof, the
limitation embodied within this bond shall be deemed to be amended so as to be equal to the
minimum period of limitation permitted by such law.
b.
Other than in a Virginia court of competent jurisdiction, with venue as provided by statute, or in
the United States District Court for the district in which the project, or any part thereof is situated.
The amount of this bond shall be reduced by and to the extent of any payment or payments made in good
faith hereunder.
DGS-30- 088
(Rev 09/11)
Signed and sealed this
CO-10.1
Page 3 of 3
day of
Contractor / Principal
_________________________________________
Witness
(SEAL)
By: _________________________________
Typed Name:
Title:
Surety
(SEAL)
By: _________________________________
Attorney-in-Fact
Typed Name:
AFFIDAVIT AND ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ATTORNEY-IN-FACT
COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA
(or alternatively, Commonwealth or State of
)
CITY of
I, the undersigned notary public, do certify that
, whose name is signed to the foregoing labor and material
payment bond in the sum of
and dated
and which names the Commonwealth of Virginia,
, as
Obligee, personally appeared before me today in the above jurisdiction and made oath that he/she is the attorney-infact of
,a
corporation which is the Surety in the foregoing bond, that he/she is duly authorized to
execute on the above Surety’s behalf the foregoing bond pursuant to the Power of Attorney noted above and
attached hereto, and on behalf of the surety, he/she acknowledged the foregoing bond before me as the above
Surety’s act and deed
She/he has further certified that her/his Power of Attorney has not been revoked.
[Complete if Power is recorded: Clerk’s Office:
;
Deed Book/Page No. or Instrument No.:
.]
Given under my hand this
day of
.
_________________________________
Notary Public
My name (printed) is:
My registration number is:
My commission expires:
APPROVED:
_______________________________________________
Attorney General/Designee
Date
(SEAL)
_
8VHWKHVKLIWWDEWRPRYHEDFNZDUGVWRWKHSUHYLRXVILOODEOHILHOG
7KH&RQWUDFW6XPPDU\FRQWDLQVJHQHUDOSURMHFWLQIRUPDWLRQDUXQQLQJWDOO\RIDOODSSURYHGFKDQJHRUGHUVDQGWKH
RULJLQDODQGFXUUHQWFRQWUDFWFRVWVDQGFRPSOHWLRQGDWHV
7KHPRVWLPSRUWDQWSDUWRIWKLVVSUHDGVKHHWLVWKH&RQWUDFW6XPPDU\DQG&KDQJH2UGHU/RJ
7+(&+$1*(25'(5/2*&2/RJWDE
&OLFNRQWKHWDEVDWWKHERWWRPRIWKLVILOHWRJRWRWKHDSSURSULDWHSDJH
6RPHILHOGVKDYHGURSGRZQVHOHFWLRQDUURZVRQWKHULJKWVLGHRIWKHILHOG)RUWKHVH
W\SHVRIILHOGVFOLFNRQWKHDUURZWKHQVHOHFWDQDSSURSULDWHFKRLFHIURPWKHOLVW
<RXFDQDOVRXVHWKHPRXVHDQGFXUVRUNH\VWRQDYLJDWHEXWWKHWDENH\LVJHQHUDOO\WKHPRVWHIILFLHQWPHDQV
_!
8VHWKHWDENH\WRPRYHIRUZDUGWRWKHQH[WILOODEOHILHOG
7KHYDULRXV3DUWVRIWKH&2DQG&2DDUHDFFHVVHGE\FOLFNLQJRQWKHEOXHWDEVDWWKHERWWRPRIWKHVFUHHQ
,WLVUHFRPPHQGHGWKDWWKHXVHUSULQWDFRS\RIWKLVLQVWUXFWLRQVKHHWWRXVHDVDUHIHUHQFHZKHQFRPSOHWLQJ
WKHVHIRUPV
7KLVVSUHDGVKHHWFRQWDLQVDQXPEHURIEXLOWLQFDOFXODWLRQVWRVLPSOLI\WKHFUHDWLRQRI&2DQG&2DIRUPV
7RHQVXUHWKHLQWHJULW\RIWKHGDWDSOHDVHGRQRWDWWHPSWWRPRGLI\WKHVSUHDGVKHHW$UHDVZKHUHGDWD
FDQEHHQWHUHGDUHKLJKOLJKWHGLQ\HOORZ
([FHO2IILFHXVHUVPD\QHHGWRVDYHWKLVDVD0DFUR(QDEOHG:RUNVKHHW
0DFURVPXVWEHHQDEOHGWRXVHWKLVWHPSODWH
,QRUGHUIRUPDFURVWRUXQLQ([FHOWKH([FHOPDFURVHFXULW\VHWWLQJPXVWEHVHWWR0HGLXP7RDGMXVWWKLV
VHWWLQJJRWR7RROV0DFUR6HFXULW\RQWKH([FHOPHQXEDUDQGDGMXVWVHFXULW\VHWWLQJWR0HGLXP<RXPD\
QHHGWRH[LW([FHORQFHDQGWKHQUHRSHQ([FHOIRUWKHQHZVHFXULW\VHWWLQJWRWDNHHIIHFW
3OHDVHUHDGDOOLQVWUXFWLRQVFDUHIXOO\EHIRUHXVLQJWKLVVSUHDGVKHHWWRFUHDWHWKH&2DQG&2DIRUPV
,*(1(5$/,16758&7,216
,16758&7,216)25&203/(7,1*
7+(&2DQG&2D)2506
,QWKH&RQWUDFW6XPPDU\VHFWLRQHQWHUQHZRUYHULI\H[LVWLQJGDWDIRUWKHFHOOVKLJQOLJKWHGLQ\HOORZ
,QWKH&KDQJH2UGHU/RJVHFWLRQHQWHUWKHIROORZLQJLQIRUPDWLRQ
&KDQJH2UGHU1XPEHU
&KDQJH2UGHU1XPEHUVDUHVHTXHQWLDOLQWHJHUQXPEHUV6WDUWZLWK
(QWHUFKDQJHRUGHUVVHTXHQWLDOO\LQWKHORJVWDUWLQJZLWKWKHORZHVWQXPEHUFKDQJHRUGHU
6HHWKHQRWHEHORZIRUSURMHFWVDUHDG\LQSURJHVV
'RQ
WVNLSURZVEHWZHHQFKDQJHRUGHUVLHGRQ
WOHDYHDQ\EODQNURZVEHWZHHQ
FKDQJHRUGHUHQWULHVRUHOVHHUURQHRXVUHVXOWVZLOORFFXU
&OLFNRQWKH&RQWUDFW6XPPDU\DQG&KDQJH2UGHU/RJWDE
6DYHDFRS\RIWKHSUHYLRXV&KDQJH2UGHUVSUHDGVKHHWILOHDQGQDPHLWDVQRWHGLQWKHSUHFHGLQJSDUDJUDSK
&KDQJH2UGHU/RJ
,,67(3%<67(3,16758&7,216
%HIRUHEHJLQQLQJHDFKQHZ&2PDNHDFRS\RIWKHVSUHDGVKHHW'RD6DYHDVDQGQDPHWKHQHZYHUVLRQ
RIWKHVSUHDGVKHHW&KDQJH2UGHU1XPEHU;;VXEVWLWXWLQJIRU;;WKHQXPEHURIWKHQH[W&KDQJH2UGHUWREHFUHDWHG
:KLOHWKH&KDQJH2UGHU/RJZLOOOLVWVXPPDU\LQIRUPDWLRQIRUDOO&KDQJH2UGHUVWRGDWHRQO\WKHGHWDLOHGLQIRUPDWLRQLHWKH&2
DQG&2DIRURQHFKDQJHRUGHUQXPEHULVVDYHGLQWKHVSUHDGVKHHW7KHVSUHDGVKHHWLVQRWPHDQWWREHDUHSRVLWRU\
RIDOO&2DQG&2DIRUPV,WLVLQWHQGHGWREHXVHGWRFUHDWHVDYHDQGSULQWLQIRUPDWLRQIRUWKHODWHVW&2DQG&2D
,)<28:,6+725(7$,1'(7$,/(',1)250$7,21)25($&+&+$1*(25'(5'27+()2//2:,1*
$OZD\VXSGDWHWKH&RQWUDFW6XPPDU\DQG&KDQJH2UGHU/RJILUVWEHIRUHFRPSOHWLQJDQGJHQHUDWLQJWKH&2DQG&2D
:KHQHQWHULQJGDWDLQWKH&KDQJH2UGHU/RJDOZD\VHQWHUWKHFKDQJHRUGHUVVHTXHQWLDOO\VWDUWLQJZLWKWKHORZHVWQXPEHUFKDQJHRUGHU
'RQRWOHDYHDEODQNOLQHEHWZHHQFKDQJHRUGHUVRUHUURQHRXVWRWDOVPD\UHVXOW
7KLVEXLOWLQDXWRPDWLRQZDVGHVLJQHGWRVDYHXVHUVIURPUHGXQGDQWNH\LQJRIGDWDDQGWRHOLPLQDWHPDWKDQGWUDQVSRVLWLRQHUURUV
7KHLQIRUPDWLRQHQWHUHGLQWKH&RQWUDFW6XPPDU\DQG&KDQJH2UGHU/RJLVXVHGWRDXWRPDWLFDOO\FRPSOHWHSRUWLRQVRI
WKH&2DQG&2DIRUPVIRUWKH&KDQJH2UGHUQXPEHUHQWHUHGRQWKH&23DUWVKHHW
6SHFLILFDOO\WKHJHQHUDOLQIRUPDWLRQIURPWKH&RQWUDFW6XPPDU\DQG&KDQJH2UGHU/RJLVXVHGWRDXWRPDWLFDOO\FRPSOHWH
&23DUW)XOO\FRPSOHWHV3DUW
&23DUW&RPSOHWHVWKHKHDGHULQIRUPDWLRQ5HPDLQLQJSRUWLRQVPXVWEHFRPSOHWHGE\XVHU
&2D$OO3DUWV&RPSOHWHVWKHKHDGHULQIRUPDWLRQ5HPDLQLQJSRUWLRQVPXVWEHFRPSOHWHGE\XVHU
7KH&KDQJH2UGHU/RJOLVWVWKHNH\FRVWDQGVFKHGXOHGDWDIRUHDFKFKDQJHRUGHUDQGDOVRLGHQWLILHV
LIDSSURYDOE\WKH*RYHUQRU
V'HVLJQHHLVUHTXLUHG
6FKHGXOH([WHQVLRQHQWHUWKHDGGLWLRQDOQXPEHURIGD\VWKHFRQWUDFWZLOOEHH[WHQGHGGXHWRODWHVW&KDQJH2UGHU
3ULQWDFRS\RIWKH/RJLIGHVLUHGXVLQJWKH)LOH3ULQWPHQXFRPPDQG7ROLPLWWKHQXPEHURISDJHVSULQWHG
HQWHUWKHDSSURSULDWHSDJHQXPEHUVLQWKH3DJHVVHFWLRQRIWKH3ULQW5DQJHGLDORJER[
E*URXSDOO&KDQJH2UGHUVDOUHDG\H[HFXWHGXQGHURQHOLQHHQWU\$IWHUWKLV
RQHFDWFKXSHQWU\HQWHUDOOVXEVHTXHQW&KDQJH2UGHUVDVLQGLYLGXDOOLQHLWHPV
D(QWHUDOO&KDQJH2UGHUVDVLQGLYLGXDOOLQHLWHPVLQWKH/RJUHFRPPHQGHGPHWKRGRU
127(,IWKLVVSUHDGVKHHWLVEHLQJLPSOHPHQWHGIRUDSURMHFWDOUHDG\LQSURJUHVVWKHUHDUHWZRRSWLRQVIRU
HQWHULQJ&KDQJH2UGHUVZKLFKZHUHLVVXHGSULRUWRWKLVQHZVSUHDGVKHHWEHFRPLQJDYDLODEOH
3ULQWDFRS\RIWKH&23DUWXVLQJWKH)LOH3ULQWPHQXFRPPDQGRUWKHSULQWHULFRQ<RXFDQDOVRXVHWKH3ULQW
RU3ULQW3UHYLHZEXWWRQVRQWKHWRROEDUEHORZ
(QWHUWKHUHTXLUHGGDWDIRUWKHHDFKRIWKHILYHFROXPQVKLJKOLJKWHGLQ\HOORZ$GGLWLRQDOGDWDHQWU\LQVWUXFWLRQV
DUHSURYLGHGDVHDFKFHOOLVVHOHFWHG
2QFHDOOGHWDLOOLQHLWHPVKDYHEHHQHQWHUHGYHULI\WKDWWKHVXPRIDOOGHWDLOOLQHLWHPVPDWFKWKHWRWDODPRXQW
HQWHUHGHDUOLHULQWKH&KDQJH2UGHU/RJIRUWKLV&KDQJH2UGHU,IWKHDPRXQWLQWKH&KDQJH2UGHU/RJDQGWKHVXPRIWKH3DUWGHWDLO
HQWULHVGRQRWPDWFKDQHUURUPHVVDJHZLOODSSHDULQUHGDWWKHWRSRIWKH3DUWVKHHW&RUUHFWHLWKHUWKHGHWDLODPRXQWVLQ3DUW
3DUWRIWKH&2SURYLGHVDQLWHPL]HGEUHDNGRZQRIWKHVFRSHRIZRUNWREHSHUIRUPHG
&23DUW&RQVWUXFWLRQ&KDQJH2UGHU,WHPL]DWLRQRI:RUN
(QWHUWKHVSHFLILF&KDQJH2UGHU1XPEHUIRUZKLFK\RXZLVKWRFUHDWHD&2DQG&2D1RRWKHULQSXWLVUHTXLUHG
DVDOORWKHULQIRUPDWLRQIRUWKLVVKHHWLVGHULYHGIURPWKH&RQWUDFW6XPPDU\DQG&KDQJH2UGHU/RJ
127(7KH&RQWUDFW6XPPDU\DQG&KDQJH2UGHU/RJPXVWEHFRPSOHWHIRUDOO&KDQJH2UGHUVXSWRDQGLQFOXGLQJ
WKLV&KDQJH2UGHU
3DUWRIWKH&2OLVWVWKHVXPPDU\FRVWDQGFRQWUDFWFRPSOHWLRQLQIRUPDWLRQUHODWHGWRWKHFXUUHQWFKDQJH
WKHFXPXODWLYHFRVWDQGFRPSOHWLRQGDWDDQGSURYLGHVVLJQDWXUHOLQHVIRUDOODIIHFWHGSDUWLHV
&23DUW&RQVWUXFWLRQ&KDQJH2UGHU6XPPDU\RI:RUN
&KDQJH2UGHU$PRXQWHQWHUWKHWRWDOYDOXHRIODWHVW&KDQJH2UGHU
$OORWKHULQIRUPDWLRQVKRZQRQWKHORJLVFRPSXWHGDXWRPDWLFDOO\DQGLVXVHGHOVHZKHUHLQWKHVSUHDGVKHHW
&KDQJH2UGHU'DWHHQWHULQPPGG\\IRUPDW
2QFHWKHHUURUVGHVFULEHGLQDQGDERYHKDYHEHHQFRUUHFWHGSULQWDFRS\RIWKLVVKHHWXVLQJWKH)LOH3ULQW
PHQXFRPPDQG7ROLPLWWKHQXPEHURISDJHVSULQWHGHQWHUWKHDSSURSULDWHSDJHQXPEHUVLQWKH3DJHV
VHFWLRQRIWKH3ULQW5DQJHGLDORJER[
'HVFULEHZK\FKDQJHLVUHTXLUHG
8VHWKHGURSGRZQDUURZWRVHOHFWHLWKHU5HFRPPHQG$SSURYDORU5HFRPPHQG'LVDSSURYDO
3ULQWRXWWKH&2D3DUWDQGREWDLQVLJQDWXUHRIWKHDXWKRUL]HG$(UHSUHVHQWDWLYH
&RPSOHWHWKHWZRLWHPVRILQIRUPDWLRQQHHGHGIRU&KDQJH2UGHUVZKLFKLQYROYHGHVLJQHUURUVDQGRPLVVLRQV
,IWKHFRQWLQJHQF\EDODQFHLVLQVXIILFLHQWWKHPLQLPXPDPRXQWRIDGGLWLRQDOFRQWLQJHQF\UHTXLUHGWR
DFFRPPRGDWHWKLV&KDQJH2UGHUZLOOEHGLVSOD\HG6XEPLWDUHYLVHG&2FRQFXUUHQWZLWKWKH&KDQJH
2UGHUWRLQFUHDVHWKHFRQVWUXFWLRQFKDQJHRUGHUFRQWLQJHQF\DPRXQW
,IVXIILFLHQWFRQWLQJHQF\LVDYDLODEOHWRDFFRPPRGDWHWKLV&KDQJH2UGHUWKHEDODQFHUHPDLQLQJ
DIWHUDSSURYDORIWKLV&KDQJH2UGHUZLOOEHGLVSOD\HG
(QWHUWKHODWHVW$33529('&2&RQWLQJHQF\DPRXQW
3DUWRIWKH&2DLVFRPSOHWHGE\WKH$JHQF\WR
YHULI\WKDWDGHTXDWHFRQWLQJHQF\LVDYDLODEOH
LGHQWLI\FRVWVKDULQJDUUDQJHPHQWVIRUGHVLJQHUURUVRURPLVVLRQV
MXVWLI\&KDQJH2UGHUVZKLFKDUHDUHVXOWRIDFKDQJHLQDJHQF\UHTXLUHPHQWV
&2D3DUW&KDQJH2UGHU-XVWLILFDWLRQ$JHQF\
V-XVWLILFDWLRQ
'HVFULEHWKHZRUN
3DUWRIWKH&2DLVFRPSOHWHGE\WKH$(WR
SURYLGHDEULHIQDUUDWLYHVXPPDU\RIZRUNWREHSHUIRUPHG
H[SODLQZK\WKHFKDQJHLVUHTXLUHG
LGHQWLI\WKH$(
VUHFRPPHQGDWLRQWRWKH$JHQF\
&2D3DUW&KDQJH2UGHU-XVWLILFDWLRQ$(
V-XVWLILFDWLRQ
$QDVWHULVNDSSHDULQJDGMDFHQWWRWKHDPRXQWILHOGRQ3DUWGHQRWHVWKDWHLWKHUWKH,QLWLDWHG%\RU
WKH5HDVRQIRU&KDQJHILHOGVRUERWKZHUHQRWFRPSOHWHGSURSHUO\$QHQWU\PXVWDSSHDULQERWKRIWKHVH
ILHOGVLIDQDVVRFLDWHGGROODUDPRXQWZDVHQWHUHG)LOOLQWKHVHILHOGVZLWKWKHDSSURSULDWHHQWULHVWRFOHDUWKHVH
HUURUIODJV
RUWKHWRWDODPRXQWHQWHUHGLQWKH&KDQJH2UGHU/RJDVQHHGHG2QFHWKHDPRXQWVPDWFKWKHHUURUPHVVDJHZLOOFOHDU
3ULQWRXWWKH&2D3DUWDQGREWDLQVLJQDWXUHRIWKHDXWKRUL]HG$JHQF\UHSUHVHQWDWLYH
2QFHFRUUHFWSULQWRXWDFRS\RIWKLVVKHHW
6XEPLWDKDUGFRS\RULPDJHILOHSUHIHUDEO\LQSGIIRUPDWRIWKH/RJWKH&23DUWVDQGDQGWKH&2D
3DUWVDQGWR%&20LPPHGLDWHO\DIWHUWKHDXWKRUL]HGDJHQF\UHSUHVHQWDWLYHDSSURYHVWKH&KDQJH2UGHU
FRIRUPV#GJVYLUJLQLDJRY
,IIRUPVDUHLQSGIRURWKHUDFFHSWDEOHLPDJHIRUPDWWKH\PD\EHHPDLOHGWR!!!!!
,IDSSURYDOE\'*6LVQRWUHTXLUHG
,QFOXGHFRSLHVRIDGGLWLRQDOVXSSRUWLQJEDFNXSHJ*&6&DQG66IRUPVLIXVHGGUDZLQJVVNHWFKHV
DQGRWKHUDGGLWLRQDOEDFNXS7KLVLVQHFHVVDU\WRSURYLGHWKH'LUHFWRURIWKH'HSDUWPHQWRI*HQHUDO6HUYLFHV
IXQFWLRQLQJDVWKH*RYHUQRU
V'HVLJQHHVXIILFLHQWGDWDWRXQGHUVWDQGHYDOXDWHDQGDSSURYHWKHSURSRVHG
&KDQJH2UGHU
6XEPLWDKDUGFRS\RIWKH/RJWKH&23DUWVDQGDQGWKH&2D3DUWVDQGWR%&20
LPPHGLDWHO\DIWHUDOORWKHUDSSOLFDEOHVLJQDWXUHVKDYHEHHQREWDLQHG
,IDSSURYDOE\'*6LVUHTXLUHG
,,,68%0,77$/5(48,5(0(176
9HULI\WKDWWKHWRWDORQWKLVVKHHWPDWFKHVWKHWRWDO&KDQJH2UGHUDPRXQW,IWKHWRWDORQWKLVVKHHWLV
LQFRUUHFWUHWXUQWR3DUWRIWKH&2VKHHWDQGHQVXUHWKDWDOOOLQHVZLWKDQ$PRXQWKDYHDFRUUHVSRQGLQJ
5HDVRQ&RGH
3DUWRIWKH&2DLVDVWDWLVWLFDOVXPPDU\FRPSLOHGDXWRPDWLFDOO\IURPWKHHQWULHVRQ3DUWRIWKH&2
&2D3DUW&KDQJH2UGHU-XVWLILFDWLRQ$JHQF\
V-XVWLILFDWLRQ
&RPSOHWHWKHIRXULWHPVRILQIRUPDWLRQQHHGHGIRU&KDQJH2UGHUVZKLFKLQYROYHFKDQJHVLQDJHQF\UHTXLUHPHQWV
&KDQJH
2UGHU
1XPEHU
&KDQJH
2UGHU
'DWH
&KDQJH
2UGHU
$PRXQW
'HVFULSWLRQ
6FKHGXOH
([WHQVLRQ
GD\V
*RYHUQRU
V
'HVLJQHH
V
$SSURYDO
5HTXLUHG"
GD\V
12
8SGDWHGWKUX&KDQJH2UGHU1XPEHU &+$1*(25'(5/2*
2ULJLQDO&RQWUDFW&RPSOHWLRQ'DWH
&XPXODWLYH6FKHGXOH([WHQVLRQV
5HYLVHG&RQWUDFW&RPSOHWLRQ'DWH
$JHQF\
3URMHFW
6XE3URMHFW
/RFDWLRQRIWKH:RUN
&RQWUDFWRU1DPH
$UFKLWHFW(QJLQHHU
$JHQF\KDVGHOHJDWHGDXWKRULW\"
'DWH&RQWUDFW5DWLILHG
&RGH1XPEHU
&2175$&76800$5<
&XPXODWLYH
&KDQJH
2UGHUV
2ULJLQDO&RQWUDFW
$GGLWLYH&KDQJHV
'HGXFWLYH&KDQJHV
7RWDO&KDQJHV
5HYLVHG&RQWUDFW
5HYLVHG
&RQWUDFW
9DOXH
&XPXO
5HYLVHG
6FKHGXOH
&RQWUDFW
([WHQVLRQ &RPSOHWLRQ
GD\V
'DWH
3URMHFW
3URMHFW
&KDQJH
2UGHU
1XPEHU
&KDQJH
2UGHU
'DWH
&KDQJH
2UGHU
$PRXQW
8SGDWHGWKUX&KDQJH2UGHU1XPEHU &+$1*(25'(5/2*
6FKHGXOH
([WHQVLRQ
GD\V
*RYHUQRU
V
'HVLJQHH
V
$SSURYDO
5HTXLUHG"
&XPXODWLYH
&KDQJH
2UGHUV
5HYLVHG
&RQWUDFW
9DOXH
&XPXO
5HYLVHG
6FKHGXOH
&RQWUDFW
([WHQVLRQ &RPSOHWLRQ
GD\V
'DWH
3URMHFW
&KDQJH
2UGHU
1XPEHU
&KDQJH
2UGHU
'DWH
&KDQJH
2UGHU
$PRXQW
8SGDWHGWKUX&KDQJH2UGHU1XPEHU &+$1*(25'(5/2*
6FKHGXOH
([WHQVLRQ
GD\V
*RYHUQRU
V
'HVLJQHH
V
$SSURYDO
5HTXLUHG"
&XPXODWLYH
&KDQJH
2UGHUV
5HYLVHG
&RQWUDFW
9DOXH
&XPXO
5HYLVHG
6FKHGXOH
&RQWUDFW
([WHQVLRQ &RPSOHWLRQ
GD\V
'DWH
3URMHFW
&KDQJH
2UGHU
1XPEHU
&KDQJH
2UGHU
'DWH
&KDQJH
2UGHU
$PRXQW
8SGDWHGWKUX&KDQJH2UGHU1XPEHU &+$1*(25'(5/2*
6FKHGXOH
([WHQVLRQ
GD\V
*RYHUQRU
V
'HVLJQHH
V
$SSURYDO
5HTXLUHG"
&XPXODWLYH
&KDQJH
2UGHUV
5HYLVHG
&RQWUDFW
9DOXH
&XPXO
5HYLVHG
6FKHGXOH
&RQWUDFW
([WHQVLRQ &RPSOHWLRQ
GD\V
'DWH
3URMHFW
'*6
&2175$&7&+$1*(25'(5
6XPPDU\RI:RUN
5HY
&KDQJH2UGHU1XPEHU
3URMHFW&RGH
$JHQF\
3URMHFW
6XE3URMHFW
&RGH
'HVFULSWLRQ
&2
3DUW
&KDQJH2UGHU'DWH
1$
7R *HQWOHPHQ
8QGHU\RXUFRQWUDFWGDWHG-DQXDU\IRUZRUNDW
WKH&RQWUDFW3ULFHLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKH&RQWUDFW'RFXPHQWVWKHVXPRI
1$
9$/8(
)DLOXUHWRLQFOXGHDFKDQJHIRUWLPHVKDOOZDLYHDQ\FKDQJHWRWKHWLPHDOORZHGE\WKH&RQWUDFWIRUFRPSOHWLRQRIWKH
:RUNXQOHVVWKHSDUWLHVPXWXDOO\DJUHHLQZULWLQJWRSRVWSRQHDGHWHUPLQDWLRQRIWKHFKDQJHWRWLPHUHVXOWLQJIURPWKH
&KDQJH2UGHU6XFKGHWHUPLQDWLRQPD\QRWEHSRVWSRQHGPRUHWKDQGD\VIURPWKHDSSURYDORIWKLV&KDQJH2UGHU
E\WKHDJHQF\
&2175$&7&2676800$5<
LQFOXVLYHRIWKLV&KDQJH2UGHU
2ULJLQDO&RQWUDFW$PRXQW
&XPXODWLYH&KDQJHV2UGHUV
5HYLVHG&RQWUDFW$PRXQW
&2175$&76&+('8/(6800$5<
LQFOXVLYHRIWKLV&KDQJH2UGHU
1$
1$
2ULJLQDO&RQWUDFW&RPSOHWLRQ'DWH
&XPXODWLYH6FKHGXOH([WHQVLRQ
5HYLVHG&RQWUDFW&RPSOHWLRQ'DWH
-DQXDU\
1$
1$
&+$1*($87+25,=$7,21
,VVXHG%\
$XWKRUL]HG$(5HSUHVHQWDWLYH
'DWH
$XWKRUL]HG&RQWUDFWRU5HSUHVHQWDWLYH
'DWH
$XWKRUL]HG$JHQF\5HSUHVHQWDWLYH
'DWH
$FFHSWHG%\
$SSURYHG5HFRPPHQGHG%\
3ULRUDSSURYDOE\WKH*RYHUQRURUKLVGHVLJQHHLVUHTXLUHGIRUHDFK&KDQJH2UGHUZKLFKFDXVHVDQLQFUHDVHLQWKH
&RQWUDFW3ULFHLIWKHUHVXOWLQJFXPXODWLYHVXPRIDOO&KDQJH2UGHUVH[FHHGVRIWKHRULJLQDO&RQWUDFW$PRXQWRU
ZKLFKHYHULVJUHDWHU
1$
5HFRPPHQGHG%\
'LUHFWRU'LYLVLRQRI(QJLQHHULQJDQG%XLOGLQJV
'DWH
'LUHFWRU'HSDUWPHQWRI*HQHUDO6HUYLFHV
'DWH
$SSURYHG%\
'*6
5HY
%\DQG5HDVRQIRU&KDQJH
3URMHFW&RGH
&2175$&7&+$1*(25'(5
,WHPL]DWLRQRI:RUN
&KDQJH2UGHU1XPEHU
&2
3DUW
&KDQJH2UGHU'DWH
1$
1$
1$
&KDQJH2UGHU7RWDOVXPRIWKHGHWDLOVOLVWHGEHORZ 1$
1$
5HIHUHQFH
1XPEHU
'HVFULSWLRQ
,QLWLDWHG
%\
5HDVRQ
&RGH
$PRXQW
,IDQDVWHULVNDSSHDUVDGMDFHQWWRDQ$PRXQWHQWU\WKLVLQGLFDWHVWKH,QLWLDWHG%\RU5HDVRQIRU&KDQJHILHOGVKDYH
QRWEHHQILOOHGLQSURSHUO\3OHDVHHQWHUWKHDSSURSULDWHYDOXHVLQERWKRIWKHVHILHOGV
5HIHUHQFH
1XPEHU
'HVFULSWLRQ
,QLWLDWHG
%\
5HDVRQ
&RGH
$PRXQW
,IDQDVWHULVNDSSHDUVDGMDFHQWWRDQ$PRXQWHQWU\WKLVLQGLFDWHVWKH,QLWLDWHG%\RU5HDVRQIRU&KDQJHILHOGVKDYH
QRWEHHQILOOHGLQSURSHUO\3OHDVHHQWHUWKHDSSURSULDWHYDOXHVLQERWKRIWKHVHILHOGV
'*6
5HY
&+$1*(25'(5-867,),&$7,21
$UFKLWHFW(QJLQHHU
V-XVWLILFDWLRQ
3URMHFW&RGH
&KDQJH2UGHU1XPEHU
&2D
3DUW
&KDQJH2UGHU'DWH
1$
$(
V'(6&5,37,212):25.,192/9('
$(
V(;3/$1$7,212):+<:25.,65(48,5('
$(
V5(&200(1'$7,21
$UFKLWHFW(QJLQHHU
'DWH
'*6
&+$1*(25'(5-867,),&$7,21
$JHQF\
V-XVWLILFDWLRQ
5HY
3URMHFW&RGH
&KDQJH2UGHU1XPEHU
&2D
3DUW
&KDQJH2UGHU'DWH
1$
$'',7,21$/&217,1*(1&<5(48,5('"
&RQVWUXFWLRQ&RQWLQJHQF\$PRXQW6KRZQRQ/DVW$SSURYHG&2
&XPXODWLYH$PRXQW2I$OO&KDQJH2UGHUV7R'DWH,QFOXVLYH2I7KLV&KDQJH2UGHU
1$
1$
1$
5HPDUNV
&2676+$5,1*)25'(6,*1(55256$1'20,66,216
,VWKLVFKDQJHRUGHUUHTXLUHGLQZKROHRULQSDUWEHFDXVHRIDGHVLJQHUURURURPLVVLRQ"
,I<HVRXWOLQHWKHSURSRVHGFRVWVKDULQJLIDQ\E\WKHUHVSRQVLEOHGHVLJQSURIHVVLRQDO
$'',7,21$/6833257)25&+$1*(6,1$*(1&<5(48,5(0(176
:KHQZDVWKHFKDQJHLQUHTXLUHPHQWVIXQFWLRQPLVVLRQNQRZQ"
,INQRZQEHIRUHFRQVWUXFWLRQELGGLQJZK\ZHUHWKHQHHGHGFKDQJHVH[FOXGHGIURPWKHELGSDFNDJH"
:KDWTXDQWLWDWLYHLPSDFWZRXOGWKHODFNRIWKLVFKDQJHKDYHRQWKHPLVVLRQRUVHUYLFHSURYLGHGE\WKHDJHQF\"
:K\FDQWKHZRUNQRWEHSDFNDJHGDQGELGVHSDUDWHO\"
%\
$JHQF\5HSUHVHQWDWLYH
'DWH
'*6
&2D
3DUW
&+$1*(25'(5-867,),&$7,21
6WDWLVWLFDO6XPPDU\
5HY
3URMHFW&RGH
&KDQJH2UGHU1XPEHU
&KDQJH2UGHU'DWH
1$
5HDVRQ
&RGH
$PRXQW
5HDVRQ&RGH'HVFULSWLRQ
8QIRUHVHHQVLWHFRQGLWLRQV
([LVWLQJEXLOGLQJRUXWLOLW\FRQGLWLRQVQRWDVVKRZQ
&KDQJHLQDJHQF\
VUHTXLUHPHQWV
6XEVWLWXWLRQRUDOWHUQDWHPHWKRG
,WHPQRWDVVKRZQRUVSHFLILHG
&RQIOLFWRUGLVFUHSDQF\LQUHTXLUHPHQWV
2WKHU
7RWDO
7KLVSDJHLQWHQWLRQDOO\EODQN
(QGRI&2DQG&2D
'*6)250&2
)RUP1XPEHU'*65HYLVHG
6&+('8/(2)9$/8(6DQG&(57,),&$7()253$<0(17
0$,10(18DQG*(1(5$/,16758&7,216
%HIRUHSURFHHGLQJSOHDVHFOLFNKHUHWRUHDGLPSRUWDQWZDUQLQJV
&RPSOHWHHDFKVWHSEHORZLQWKHRUGHUOLVWHG
0DNHDEDFNXSFRS\RIWKLV([FHOILOH
EHIRUHSURFHHGLQJWRWKHQH[WVWHS
(QWHUSURMHFWDQGFRQWUDFWLQIRUPDWLRQ
3UHSWKH&2IRUPIRUQHZSD\SHULRG
,I\RXQHHGDVVLVWDQFHFOLFNKHUH
)RUTXHVWLRQVUHJDUGLQJ5HWDLQDJHUHIHUWRWKHQRWHV
LQFOXGHGZLWKLQ6WHS
1HZXVHUVSOHDVHUHYLHZWKHLQVWUXFWLRQV
EHORZEHIRUHFRPSOHWLQJ3DUWV%&
&RPSOHWH&23$57%
2ULJLQDO&RQWUDFW/LQH,WHPV
9LHZ,QVWUXFWLRQV
)RU&RPSOHWLQJ3DUW%
&RPSOHWH&23$57&
&RQVWUXFWLRQ&KDQJH2UGHUV
9LHZ,QVWUXFWLRQV
)RU&RPSOHWLQJ3DUW&
5HYLHZ&23$57$
6XPPDU\DQG&HUWLILFDWLRQ3DJH
3ULQWWKH&2
7RYLHZWKHFRPSOHWH%XLOGLQJ(OHPHQW
FODVVLILFDWLRQVWUXFWXUHXVHGLQ3$57%FOLFN
KHUH
6DYHHDFKPRQWKO\VXEPLWWDOZLWKDXQLTXHILOHQDPH
IRUH[DPSOH3URMHFW3D\5HTXHVW3URMHFW3D\5HTXHVW
6LJQDQGVXEPLWWKH&2
1(;70217+5HSHDW6WHSVWKURXJK
%
127( 2QFHWKHDERYHSURMHFWDQGFRQWUDFWLQIRUPDWLRQKDYHEHHQHQWHUHGXQOHVVWKHUHDUHDQ\FKDQJHV
67(3FDQEHE\SDVVHGRQIXWXUHPRQWKO\XSGDWHV
0RQWK
'D\
<HDU
'DWH&RQWUDFW([HFXWHG
)(,1 )HG(PSOR\HU,GHQWLILFDWLRQ1XPEHU
3URMHFW1XPEHU
3URMHFW7LWOH
,QVWLWXWLRQ$JHQF\1DPH
/RFDWLRQRI:RUN
$()LUP1DPH
&RQWUDFWRU1DPH
&RQWUDFWRU)(,1
$ (QWHUWKHIROORZLQJ
67(3(QWHU3URMHFWDQG&RQWUDFW,QIRUPDWLRQ
67(33UHSDUHWKH&2IRU1HZ3D\3HULRG
:$51,1*5XQWKH,QLWLDOL]H0DFURRQO\RQFHEHIRUHEHJLQQLQJHDFK
QHZPRQWKO\SD\UHTXHVW6HHWKHH[SODQDWLRQEHORZ
7RGD\LV
127(7KLVIRUPZDVODVWLQLWLDOL]HGRQ
$
% 8SGDWHWKHIROORZLQJGDWD
3D\5HTXHVW1XPEHU
)RU3D\3HULRG%HJLQQLQJ
)RU3D\3HULRG(QGLQJ
3D\5HTXHVW6XEPLWWDO'DWH
&RQWUDFWRU5HSUHVHQWDWLYH
5HWDLQDJH3HUFHQWDJH
&
5HWDLQDJHLVLQLWLDOO\VHWDWWKHGHIDXOWYDOXHRI:LWKWKH2ZQHU
V35(
$33529$/WKHUHWDLQDJHSHUFHQWDJHPD\EHDGMXVWHG'2127
$'-867WKHUHWDLQDJHYDOXH817,/$)7(5WKH,1,7,$/,=(PDFURLV
UXQ
)RUWKHILQDOSD\UHTXHVWDGMXVWLQJWKHUHWDLQDJHYDOXHWR$)7(5
WKH,1,7,$/,=(PDFURLVUXQZLOOUHOHDVHUHPDLQLQJUHWDLQDJHLI
DSSURYHGE\WKH2ZQHU
,QLWLDOL]LQJ([SODLQHGZKDWLVGRHVDQGKRZLWZRUNV
, LWL OL L L G L
,QLWLDOL]LQJLVGHVLJQHGWRVDYHWKHXVHUFRQVLGHUDEOHWLPHDQGHIIRUW
GW
WK
LG EO WL
G II W
,QLWLDOL]LQJWKH&2)RUPUXQVDPDFURDQDXWRPDWHGSURFHGXUHZKLFKSUHSDUHVWKH&2
IRUGDWDHQWU\IRUHDFKQHZSD\DSSOLFDWLRQ7KHPDFURFRSLHVDOORIWKHGDWDIURPWKH
&XUUHQW9DOXHWR'DWHFROXPQWRWKH3UHYLRXV9DOXHWR'DWHFROXPQDVVKRZQLQWKH
H[DPSOHEHORZ
7KLVVWHSPXVWEHGRQHWRFRPSXWHWKHFRUUHFWYDOXHVIRUWKHFXUUHQWSD\UHTXHVW
([DPSOH
727$/
9$/8(
%HIRUHLQLWLDOL]LQJ
9$/8(2):25.&203/(7('
35(9,286
9$/8(
&855(17
9$/8(
7+,6
9$/8(
72'$7(
5(3257
72'$7(
3(5&(17
&203/(7(
&HOOVZLWKD\HOORZEDFNJURXQG
DOORZGDWDLQSXWE\WKHXVHU
D
$IWHULQLWLDOL]LQJ
G
$IWHUXSGDWLQJ
F
E
D
7KH,QLWLDOL]HPDFURFRSLHVDOO&XUUHQW9DOXHWR'DWHHQWULHVWRWKH3UHYLRXV9DOXHWR'DWHFROXPQ
E
$IWHUWKHLQLWLDOL]LQJPDFURLVUXQ\RXFDQQRZXSGDWHWKH3HUFHQW&RPSOHWHFROXPQWRUHIOHFWQHZSURJUHVV
F
$IWHUXSGDWLQJWKH3HUFHQW&RPSOHWHFROXPQWKHQHZ&XUUHQW9DOXHWR'DWHDPRXQWLVFDOFXODWHGE\
DIRUPXODZKLFKPXOWLSOLHVWKH3HUFHQW&RPSOHWHE\WKH7RWDO9DOXH
G
$QRWKHUIRUPXODFDOFXODWHVWKH9DOXH7KLV5HSRUWDPRXQWE\VXEWUDFWLQJWKH3UHYLRXV9DOXH
WR'DWHDPRXQWIURPWKH&XUUHQW9DOXHWR'DWHDPRXQW
&HOOVZLWKDZKLWHEDFNJURXQGDUH
FDOFXODWHGFHOOV7KHVHFHOOVDUH
WRSUHYHQWWKHXVHUIURPDFFLGHQWLD
RYHUZULWLQJWKHHPEHGGHGIRUPXOD
,7(0
12
%8,/',1*
(/(0(17
$'',721$/
'(6&5,37,21
3(5&(17
&203/(7(
9$/8(2):25.&203/(7('
9$/8(
&855(17
35(9,286
9$/8(
7+,6
9$/8(
72'$7(
5(3257
72'$7(
727$/
9$/8(
$*(1&<1$0(
352-(&77,7/(
3$57%
25,*,1$/&2175$&7/,1(,7(06
'(6&5,37,21
3DJHRI
6&+('8/(2)9$/8(6$1'&(57,),&$7()253$<0(17
352-(&7&2'(
'*6)250&2
5HY
2ULJLQDO&RQWUDFW/LQH,WHPV
9(1'25
1$0(
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
'0%(
&(57,),&$7(
6 : 0
180%(5
3(5,2'%(*,11,1*'$7(
3(5,2'(1',1*'$7(
3$<0(175(48(6712
'DWH3ULQWHG
%8,/',1*
(/(0(17
727$/25,*,1$/&2175$&7
,7(0
12
'RQRWLQVHUWURZV
EHORZWKLVSRLQW
$'',721$/
'(6&5,37,21
'(6&5,37,21
2ULJLQDO&RQWUDFW/LQH,WHPV
3(5&(17
&203/(7(
727$/
9$/8(
9$/8(2):25.&203/(7('
9$/8(
&855(17
35(9,286
9$/8(
7+,6
9$/8(
72'$7(
5(3257
72'$7(
3DJHRI
9(1'25
1$0(
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
'0%(
&(57,),&$7(
6 : 0
180%(5
'DWH3ULQWHG
,7(0
'(6&5,37,21
3(5&(17
&203/(7(
9$/8(2):25.&203/(7('
35(9,286
9$/8(
&855(17
9$/8(
7+,6
9$/8(
72'$7(
5(3257
72'$7(
727$/
9$/8(
$*(1&<1$0(
352-(&77,7/(
3$57&
&216758&7,21&+$1*(25'(56
&+1*
25'
12
3DJHRI
6&+('8/(2)9$/8(6$1'&(57,),&$7()253$<0(17
352-(&7&2'(
'*6)250&2
5HY
$SSURYHG&KDQJH2UGHUV
9(1'25
1$0(
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
'0%(
&(57,),&$7(
6 : 0
180%(5
3(5,2'%(*,11,1*'$7(
3(5,2'(1',1*'$7(
3$<0(175(48(6712
'DWH3ULQWHG
'RQRWLQVHUWURZVEHORZWKLVSRLQW 3(5&(17
&203/(7(
727$/
9$/8(
9$/8(2):25.&203/(7('
35(9,286
9$/8(
&855(17
9$/8(
7+,6
9$/8(
72'$7(
5(3257
72'$7(
3DJHRI
,7(0
'(6&5,37,21
727$/$33529('&+$1*(25'(56
&+1*
25'
12
$SSURYHG&KDQJH2UGHUV
9(1'25
1$0(
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
'0%(
&(57,),&$7(
6 : 0
180%(5
'DWH3ULQWHG
'*6)250&2
5HY
3$57$
6800$5<$1'&(57,),&$7,21
6&+('8/(2)9$/8(6
3$<0(175(48(6712
DQG
3(5,2'%(*,11,1*'$7( 3(5,2'(1',1*'$7( &(57,),&$7()253$<0(17
352-(&7&2'( $*(1&<1$0( 352-(&77,7/( 9$/8(2):25.&203/(7('
35(9,286
9$/8(
72'$7(
727$/
9$/8(
$
9$/8(
7+,6
5(3257
%
&
&855(17
9$/8(
72'$7(
3(5&(17
&203/(7(
' %&
( '$
2ULJLQDO&RQWUDFW/LQH,WHPVIURP&23$57% $SSURYHG&KDQJH2UGHUVIURP&23$57& $'-867('&2175$&7727$/
5HWDLQDJH
5HWDLQDJH3HUFHQWDJH 1(75(48,67,21$02817
$PRXQW5HTXHVWHG
&2175$&725&(57,),&$7,21
7KHXQGHUVLJQHG&RQWUDFWRUUHTXHVWVSD\PHQWRIWKDWSRUWLRQRIWKHFRQWUDFWSULFHVKRZQRQWKHODVWOLQH
RIWKHIRUHJRLQJ6FKHGXOHRI9DOXHVDQGUHSUHVHQWVDQGZDUUDQWVWRWKH2ZQHUWKDWWKHGDWDVKRZQRQWKH
6FKHGXOHRI9DOXHVLVDFFXUDWHDQGFRUUHFWWKH:RUNFRYHUHGE\WKLV&HUWLILFDWHKDVEHHQFRPSOHWHGLQ
DFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKH&RQWUDFW'RFXPHQWVDOOSUHYLRXVSURJUHVVSD\PHQWVUHFHLYHGIURP2ZQHURQDFFRXQWRI:RUNGRQH
XQGHUWKLV&RQWUDFWKDYHEHHQDSSOLHGWRGLVFKDUJHLQIXOOH[FHSWIRUDOORZDEOHUHWDLQDJHDOOREOLJDWLRQVRI&RQWUDFWRU
LQFXUUHGLQFRQQHFWLRQZLWK:RUNFRYHUHGE\SULRU&HUWLILFDWHVIRU3D\PHQWQRWDSSOLFDEOHIRU3D\5HTXHVW
WLWOHWRDOOPDWHULDOVDQGHTXLSPHQWIRUZKLFKSD\PHQWLVUHTXHVWHGLQWKLV&HUWLILFDWHZKHWKHURUQRWLQFRUSRUDWHG
LQVDLG:RUNZLOOSDVVWR2ZQHUDWWLPHRISD\PHQWIUHHDQGFOHDURIDOOOLHQVFODLPVVHFXULW\LQWHUHVWVDQG
HQFXPEUDQFHVH[FHSWVXFKPDWHULDOVDQGHTXLSPHQWZKLFKDUHFRYHUHGE\D%RQGSUHYLRXVO\DFFHSWHGE\2ZQHU
)(,1 HQWHU)(,1LQ6WHS
'DWH -DQXDU\
&RQWUDFWRU HQWHU&RQWUDFWRUQDPHLQ6WHS
%\
VLJQDWXUH
7\SHG1DPH HQWHU&RQWUDFWRU5HSUHVHQWDWLYH
V1DPHLQ6WHS
$5&+,7(&7(1*,1((5&(57,),&$7,21
7KLVLVWRFHUWLI\WKDWLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHWHUPVRIDFRQWUDFWIRU3URMHFW1XPEHUH[HFXWHG
WKHGD\RIE\DQGEHWZHHQ
WKHFRQWUDFWRUDQGWKH&RPPRQZHDOWKRI9LUJLQLD
WKH2ZQHUIRUZRUNDWWKHUHLVGXHWRWKH&RQWUDFWRUWKHDPRXQWRI
1R'ROODUVDQG1R&HQWV
$UFKLWHFW(QJLQHHU
%\
VLJQDWXUH
SULQWHGQDPH
GDWH
$*(1&<$&7,21
$PRXQWDSSURYHGIRUSD\PHQWWKLVFHUWLILFDWHLV
'ROODUV
%\
VLJQDWXUH
WLWOH
GDWH
VLJQDWXUH
WLWOH
GDWH
%\
%\
67(33ULQWWKH&2
E
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
SUMMARY
Total Change Order Cost
Subtotal
Additional Bond Cost
(3.09+3.10)
3.06+3.07+3.08
Subtotal
3.04+3.05
Item 2.99
Subcontractor Cost
GC Markup on Subcontractors ** (%)
$0.00
3.01+3.02+3.03
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
Item 1.99J
$0.00
Total Cost
Total Mat'l
Item 1.99L
Item 1.99H
$0.00
$0.00 Sales Tax
% of Item 1.97H =
Total Labor
$0.00 Subtotal Mat'l
I
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
Submitted By
Total Equip.
$0.00
A/E Signature:
them to be reasonable (as proposed) (as marked).
I have reviewed the costs proposed and find
Date:
Title:
Signature:
Name:
$0.00
Sales Tax
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00 Subtotal Equip.
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
L=CxK
Total
Equipment
Cost
$0.00
K
Equipment
Cost
Per Unit
Direct Equipment
GC-1
$0.00
J=CxI
Total Material
Cost
Direct Material
Material
Cost
Per Unit
Subtotal Labor
Total Direct Labor Cost
Total Direct Material Cost
Total Equipment Cost
Subtotal
Overhead and Profit * (%)
Description
$0.00
0.00
$0.00
$0.00
0.00
H=FxG
$0.00
G
Total
Labor
Cost
0.00
F=CxE
Total Direct
Labor Hours
Hourly Wage
Rate, Excl.
Taxes & Ins.
Direct Labor
Note: Mark-up is capped in conformance with the provisions of the General Conditions (CO-7).
*Limited to 15% on self-performed work.
**Limited to a total of 10%, shared (cumulative total) if multiple tier subs, on subcontracted work. See Mark-up limitations for a more detailed description.
3.99
2.99
$0.00
3.09
3.10
2.08
2.09
3.01
3.02
3.03
3.04
3.05
Item
No.
3.06
3.07
3.08
C
Total
Cost
2.05
2.06
2.07
Total Subcontract Costs
B
A
2.01
2.02
2.03
2.04
Subcontractor Name
(List totals from attached SC-1 forms)
Item
No.
SUBCONTRACT COSTS
Total Direct Costs
D
1.99
C
Quantity
Subtotal from Estimate Continuation Sheets
Subtotal (S/T) Direct Costs:
Taxes/Insurance:
FICA, FUI, SUI, & Workmens' Comp.
B
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
1.06
1.07
1.08
1.09
1.97
1.98
Description
A
Qty
Units
Direct Labor
Hours
Per Unit
GENERAL CONTRACTOR DIRECT COSTS
General Contractor:
Change Description:
GENERAL CONTRACTOR ESTIMATE FOR CHANGE ORDER
Scope Description
Project Code:
Agency:
Project:
Item
No.
(Rev. 05/13)
DGS-30-200
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Subtotal from Estimate Continuation Sheets
Subtotal (S/T) Direct Costs:
Taxes/Insurance:
Total Direct Costs
1.04
1.05
1.06
1.07
1.08
1.09
1.97
1.98
1.99
S/C Cost to GC-1 Form***
Total Subcontractor Cost
Sub-Subcontractor Cost **
Subtotal
Overhead and Profit * (%)
I
Cost
Per Unit
$0.00
$0.00
3.06+3.07
$0.00
Item 2.99
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
Total Cost
Total Mat'l
3.04+3.05
3.01+3.02+3.03
Item 1.99L
Item 1.99J
Item 1.99H
$0.00
$0.00 Sales Tax
Date:
Title:
Signature:
Name:
$0.00
SC-1
K
Cost
Per Unit
Submitted By
Total Equip.
Sales Tax
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
L=CxK
Equipment
Cost
Total
Direct Equipment
Equipment
$0.00 Subtotal Equip.
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
J=CxI
Total Material
Cost
Direct Material
Material
$0.00 Subtotal Mat'l
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
H=FxG
Labor
Cost
Total
Note: Mark-up is capped in conformance with the provisions of the General Conditions (CO-7).
*Limited to 15% on self-performed work.
**Limited to a total of 10%, shared (cumulative total) if multiple tier subs, on subcontracted work. Total mark-up on subcontracted work is calculated on the GC-1 form. See
mark-up limitations for a more detailed description.
*** The subcontractor cost carried forward to GC-1 form does not include mark-up on sub-subcontractor costs. This mark-up is calculated on the GC-1 form. The GC and
its subcontractors shall establish how the mark-up is to be distributed among the various subcontractors involved in the work.
3.99
2.99
$0.00
3.06
3.07
2.05
2.06
Total Sub-Subcontract Costs
3.04
3.05
2.03
2.04
Total Equipment Cost
Total Direct Material Cost
Total Direct Labor Cost
3.02
Description
3.01
3.03
C
SUMMARY
Total Labor
% of Item 1.97H =
Subtotal Labor
G
Rate, Excl.
Taxes & Ins.
Item
No.
2.02
B
A
Total
Cost
2.01
Sub-Subcontractor Name
(List totals from attached SS-1 forms)
Item
No.
SUB-SUBCONTRACT COSTS
FICA, FUI, SUI, & Workmens' Comp.
0.00
F=CxE
1.03
E
Direct Labor
Labor Hours
0.00
D
Hours
Per Unit
Hourly Wage
Direct Labor
Total
1.02
C
B
Qty
Units
Direct Labor
SUBCONTRACTOR DIRECT COSTS
General Contractor:
Subcontractor:
Subcontractor Trade:
0.00
Quantity
Description
Scope Description
Change Description:
Project Code:
Agency:
Project:
SUBCONTRACTOR ESTIMATE FOR CHANGE ORDER
1.01
A
Item
No.
(Rev. 05/13)
DGS-30-204
Total Direct Costs
Subtotal Labor
Subtotal
Overhead and Profit* (%)
Total Sub-Subcontractor
3.04
3.05
3.99
Note: Mark-up is capped in conformance with the provisions of the General Conditions (CO-7).
*Limited to 15% on self-performed work. See Mark-up limitations for a more detailed description.
Total Direct Material Cost
Total Equipment Cost
3.03
Total Direct Labor Cost
3.02
Description
No.
SUMMARY
Total Labor
3.01
Item
FICA, FUI, SUI, & Workmens' Comp.
1.99
0.00
1.08
G
Taxes & Ins.
Rate, Excl.
5.00% % of Item 1.97H =
0.00
1.07
Taxes/Insurance:
0.00
1.06
1.98
0.00
1.05
Subtotal (S/T) Direct Costs:
0.00
1.04
1.97
0.00
1.03
Subtotal from Estimate Continuation Sheets
0.00
1.09
0.00
F=CxE
Labor Hours
Direct Labor
Hourly Wage
Direct Labor
Total
1.02
E
Per Unit
Hours
Direct Labor
I
Per Unit
Cost
3.01+3.02+3.03
Item 1.99L
Item 1.99J
Item 1.99H
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
Total Cost
Total Mat'l
$0.00 Sales Tax
Date:
Title:
Signature:
Name:
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
J=CxI
Cost
Material
Total
Direct Material
Material
$0.00 Subtotal Mat'l
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
H=FxG
Cost
Labor
Total
SUB-SUBCONTRACTOR DIRECT COSTS
General Contractor:
Subcontractor:
Sub-Subcontractor:
Sub-Subcontractor Trade:
1.01
D
Units
B
A
C
Description
No.
Quantity
Qty
Scope Description
Change Description:
Project Code:
Agency:
Project:
SUB-SUBCONTRACTOR ESTIMATE FOR CHANGE ORDER
Item
(Rev. 05/13)
DGS-30-208
Total
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
L=CxK
Cost
Equipment
Submitted By
Total Equip.
Sales Tax
Subtotal Equip.
K
Per Unit
Cost
Equipment
Direct Equipment
SS-1
DGS-30-108
CO-13
(Rev. 02/01)
Page 1 of 1
COMMONWEALTH OF VIRGINIA
AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF CLAIMS
By:
This day
personally appeared before me,
,
, a Notary Public in and for the City (County) of
and, being by me first duly sworn, states that all subcontractors and suppliers of labor and materials have
been paid all sums due them for work performed or materials furnished in the performance of the
Contract between the Commonwealth of Virginia,
_____________________________________________________________
______________, Owner, and______________________________________________ , Contractor,
,20
dated
, for the construction of
or arrangements have been made by the Contractor satisfactory to such subcontractors and suppliers with
respect to payments of such sums as may be due them by the Contractor.
Typed Contractor Name
By:
Signature
Typed Name &Title of Person Signing
Subscribed and sworn to before me this
expires on the
day of
day of
, 20
, 20
.
Notary Public
. My commission
This page intentionally blank.
MATERIAL/ACTIVITY
Piles
Soil/Rock
Piles
Soil
Soil
Wind
Seismic
PreͲconstructionconference
Y/C/P/NA
CompactionofFillMaterials:Performsievetests
andmodifiedProctortestsofeachsourceoffill
material, per ASTM standards. Inspect
placement, life thickness and compaction of
controlledfillTestdensityofliftoffillbynuclear
meth.Verifyextentandslopeoffillplacement.
Bearing at bottom of footing excavations:
Inspect soils below footings for adequate
bearing capacity and consistency with
geotechnical report ; Inspect removal of
unsuitablematerialandpreparationofsubgrade
priortoplacementofcontrolledfill
BottomofCaissons
Driving records, tip and cutoff elevations:
Inspect and log pile driving operations; Record
pile driving resistance and verify compliance
with driving criteria; Inspect piles for damage
from driving and plum.; Verify pile size, length
and accessories; Inspect installation of drilled
pier foundations; Verify pier diameter, bell
diameter,lengths,embedmentintobedrockand
suitability
LoadTest
FOUNDATION
Quality Assurance Plan; Seismic Classification
(C,D,E,F)
QualityAssurancePlan;WindSpeed>110mph
QUALITYASSURANCE
Y
GENERAL
Meeting with parties listed in Section 6 of
VTSIGPtodiscussSpecialInspectionprocedures
priortocommencementofwork
TYPEOFINSPECTION:Scope
Specifications
1808.2.8.3
1704.9
1704.8
1810
1704.7
Specifications
Construction
1704.7
FieldReview
1705.4
1705.3
ScheduledbySIwiththeContractor
priortocommencementofwork
PE/GE
PE/GE
PE/GE
PE/GE
PE/GE
PE/SE/ME
PE/SE/ME
AllAgencies
1
2
2
2
2
1and
2
APPLICABLETOTHISPROJECT
Agent
EXTENT/REFERENCE
AGENT COMPLETED
Qualifications
2009VUSBCSCHEDULEOFSPECIALINSPECTIONS
HECOͲ6B
ReinforcingSteel
ReinforcingSteel
ReinforcingSteel
Concrete
Concrete
Piers
ReinforcementBar
MATERIAL/ACTIVITY
Y/C/P/NA
Ready mix plant quality control: Review
concrete batch tickets and verify compliance
with approved mix design. Verify that water
added at the site doesnot exceedthat allowed
bythemixdesign,aspermittedbyASTMC94.
Mixdesigntestsandcertificates:SeenotesB,C
&D–submitappropriatecertificate
Shop drawings of reinforcing steel: Verify
compliance with specified design loads and
specifications ; verify on site conditions match
shopdrawingdetails
Placement of Reinforcing Steel: Inspect size,
spacing, cover, positioning and grade of
reinforcingsteel.Verifythatreinforcingbarsare
free from oil or other deleterious materials.
Inspect bar laps and mechanical splices. Verify
thatbarsareadequatelytiedandsupportedon
chairsorbolsters.
Welding: Visually inspect all reinforcing steel
wide
CONCRETE
SizeandPlacementinfoundations:Inspectsize,
spacing, cover, positioning, and grade of
reinforcingsteel.Verifythatreinforcingbarsare
free from oil or other deleterious materials.
Inspect bar laps and mechanical splices. Verify
thatbarsareadequatelytiedandsupportedon
chairsorbolsters.
Size and placement of reinforcement bar:
Inspect size, spacing, cover, positioning, and
gradeofreinforcingsteel.Verifythatreinforcing
bars are free from oil or other deleterious
materials. Inspect bar laps and mechanical
splices.Verifythatbarsareadequatelytiedand
supportedonchairsorbolsters.
TYPEOFINSPECTION:Scope
1704.4
Specifications
1704.4
ACI
Specifications
1704.4.1
Specifications
Drawings,
Specifications,
NoteA,B,C,D
1704.4
Specifications
ACISubmittalandFieldReview
ACI1901.2
1704.4
ACCICCIICCͲ
RNSI
PE/SER
ACCICCIICCͲ
RNSI
ACICCIICCͲRNSI
2
1
1
1
2
APPLICABLETOTHISPROJECT
Agent
EXTENT/REFERENCE
AGENT COMPLETED
Qualifications
ACICCIICCͲRNSI
ACI318
1704.4
1901.2
2
Precast
Precast
Prestressed
Prestressed
Concrete
Concrete
Concrete
Concrete
Formwork
Formwork
MATERIAL/ACTIVITY
Design, placement and shoring: Visually inspect
placement, bracing and general construction of
formwork;reviewdesignofformwork
RemovalandReshoring:Ensureimplementation
of shoring removal schedule is established and
controlled
Sampling and Testing: Test concrete
compressivestrength(ASTMC31&C39),slump
(ASTM C143), air content (ASTM C231 or C173)
andtemperature(ASTMC1064)
Mix proportions and Mix on Delivery Tickets:
VerifyUse
Placement procedures: Inspect placement of
concrete. Verify that concrete conveyance and
depositingavoidssegregationorcontamination.
Verifythatconcreteisproperlyconsolidated.
Curing temperatures and techniques: Inspect
curing,coldweatherandhotweatherprotection
procedures
Prestressing procedures and forces: Inspect
placement,stressing,groutingandprotectionof
postͲtensioningtendons.Verifythattendonsare
correctly positioned, supported, tied, and
wrapped.Recordtendonelongations.
Shopdrawingsofprestressedunits:Verify
compliancewithspecifieddesignloadsand
specifications;verifyonsiteconditionsmatch
shopdrawingdetails
PlantCertification/QualityControlof
Manufacturer:Reviewplantoperationsand
qualitycontrolprocedures
FabricatorExempt
Shop drawings of precast: Verify compliance
with specified design loads and specification;
verify onͲsite conditions match shop drawing
details
TYPEOFINSPECTION:Scope
Y/C/P/NA
Specifications
1704.2
1704.4
1704.4
1905.11
ACI
1905.9
1905.10
1704
1704.4
1905.6
PE/SER
ACICCIICCͲRCSI
ICCͲPCSI
PE/SE
ICCͲPCSI
ACICCIICCͲRCSI
ACICCIICCͲRCSI
ACICCIICCͲRCSI
ACIͲCFTTACIͲ
STT
APPLICABLETOTHISPROJECT
Agent
EXTENT/REFERENCE
AGENT COMPLETED
Qualifications
1906.1
ACICCIICCͲRCSI
ACI318
VUSBC1704.4
1906.2
ACICCIICCͲRCSI
VUSBC1704.4
GroutingOperations
PrestressedMasonry
MortarJoints
InstallationofMasonry
MixingofMortarandGrout
ReinforcingSteel
ReinforcingSteel
MaterialCertification
AnchorRods
Precast
Precast
MATERIAL/ACTIVITY
Y/C/P/NA
Certificates, Tests and Technical Data: For clay
and/or concrete masonryͲsubmittal and field
reviewmeetingallspecifications
FireResistantrateassembliesincluded
ShopDrawings:Verifycompliancewithspecified
design loads and specifications; verify on site
conditionsmatchshopdrawingdetails
Condition,Size,Location,SpacingofReinforcing
Steel: Inspect size, location, condition, spacing
andlappingorreinforcingsteelInspectwelding
ofreinforcingsteel
Proportioning
and
Mixing:
Inspect
proportioning, mixing and retempering of
mortarandgrout
Application & Installation: Inspect size, layout,
bondingandplacementofmasonryunits
Application & Installation: Inspect construction
of mortar joints including tooling and filling of
headjoints
Application&Installation:Inspectionplacement,
anchorageandstressingofprestressingbars
Application & Installation: Inspect placement
and consolidation of grout. Inspect masonry
cleanͲoutsforhighliftgrouting
(IBCsection1704.5.1,1704.5.2and1704.5.3)
1704.5
ACI530.1
1704.5
ACI530.1
1704.5
ACI530.1
1704.5
ACI530.1
1704.5
ACI530.1
1704.5
ACI530.1
Specs.
1704.5
1704.5
1708.1
ACI530.1
ICCͲSMSI
ICCͲSMSI
ICCͲSMSI
ICCͲSMSI
ICCͲSMSI
ICCͲSMSI
AWSͲCWI
PE/SER
PE/SE
ACIͲCCIICCͲRCSI
PE/SE
APPLICABLETOTHISPROJECT
Agent
EXTENT/REFERENCE
AGENT COMPLETED
Qualifications
1704.4
PE/SE
Erection of precast: Inspect erection of precast
concrete including member configuration,
connections,weldingandgrouting
Inspection of Connections: Inspect size,
1704.4
positioning and embedment of connections.
Inspect concrete placement and consolidation
aroundanchors
Anchors cast or drilled and anchored in
1912
concrete: Inspect size, positioning and
embedment of anchor rods. Inspect concrete
placementandconsolidationaroundanchors
MASONRYCONSTRUCTIONͲRequiredInspectionLevel12
TYPEOFINSPECTION:Scope
ErectionͲBolting
SteelFramingDrawings
OpenWebSteelJoists
MaterialCertification
MaterialCertification
SteelMemberFabricator
Seismic
AnchorsandTies
EvaluationofMasonryStrength
WeatherProtection
MATERIAL/ACTIVITY
Y/C/P/NA
Plant
Certification/Quality
Control
of
Manufacturer: Review shop fabrication and
qualitycontrolprocedures
FabricatorExempt
Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance
Structural Steel: Review certified mill reports
and identification markings for wideͲflange
shapes
Manufacturer’sCertificateofCompliance;bolts,
nuts, washers and connectors: Review certified
millreportsandidentificationmarkingsforhigh
strengthbolts,nutsandweldingelectrodes
Inspection of joists installation: Inspect
installation,fieldweldingandbridgingofjoists
Shop drawings review: verify compliance with
specifieddesignloadsandspecifications
Installation of HighͲstrength Bolts: Inspect
installationandtighteningofhighstrengthbolt.
Verify that splines have separated from tension
controlbolts.Verifypropertighteningsequence
STEELCONSTRUCTION
Cold, Hot and Rainy Weather protection
investigation
Testing/Review of strength: Test compressive
strength of mortar (ASTM C780) and grout
specimen samples (ASTM C1019). Test
compressive strength per unit strength method
(ASTMC140)
Inspection ofanchorages: Inspect size, location,
spacingandembedmentofdowels,anchorsand
ties
Reinforcing(SeismicDesignCat.“c”)
TYPEOFINSPECTION:Scope
AWS/AISCͲSSI
ICCͲSWSI
AWS/AISCͲSSI
ICCͲSWSI
1704.3
1704.3
PE/SER
AWS/AISCͲSSI
ICCͲSWSI
Specifications
1704.3.3
AISC360
1704.3
AWS/AISCͲSSI
ICCͲSWSI
PE/SE
ICCͲSMSI
1704.2
1704.8.1
1704.5
ACI530.1
APPLICABLETOTHISPROJECT
Agent
EXTENT/REFERENCE
AGENT COMPLETED
Qualifications
1704.5
ICCͲSMSI
ACI530.1
1704.5
ICCͲSMSI
ACI5301.1
Y/C/P/NA
Fasteningpercodeanddrawings
ShopDrawings:Verifycompliancewithspecified
design loads and specifications; verify on site
conditionsmatchshopdrawingdetails
Trussplacement,fasteningandanchorage
Trusses
PermanentTrussBracing
COLDFORMEDSTEELFRAMING
Installation of SlipͲcritical bolts: Inspection
installationandtighteningofhighstrengthbolts.
Verify that splines have separated from tension
controlbolts.Verifypropertighteningsequence.
Continuous inspection of bolts in slip critical
connectors
Welding: Visually inspect all welds. Inspect preͲ
heat, postͲheat, and surface preparation
between passes. Verify size and length of fillet
weld Ultrasonic testing of all full penetration
welds
Steel Framing and Connections: Inspect size,
number, positioning and welding of shear
connectors. Inspect studs for full 360 degree
flash. Ring test all shear connectors with a 3lb
hammer.Bondtestallquestionablestudsto15
degrees
Inspection of Structural Details: Inspect steel
frame for compliance with structural drawings,
including bracing, member configuration and
connectiondetails
Inspection of metal deck connections: Inspect
weldingandsideuplapfasteningofmetalroof
andfloordeck
TYPEOFINSPECTION:Scope
MemberSizes
MaterialThickness
MaterialProperties
MechanicalConnections
Welding
FramingDetails
MetalDecking
StructuralDetails
ErectionͲShearConnections
ErectionͲWelding
ErectionͲBolting
MATERIAL/ACTIVITY
1707.3
1707.3
1707.3
1707.3
1707.3
1707.3
1707.3
1707.3
1704.3
1704.3.2
1704.3.2
1704.3.1
1707.2
AWS
PE/SER
AWSͲCWI
PE/SE
AWS/AISCͲSSI
ICCͲSWSI
AWSCWIASNT
APPLICABLETOTHISPROJECT
Agent
EXTENT/REFERENCE
AGENT COMPLETED
Qualifications
1704.3.3
AWS/AISCͲSSI
AISC360
ICCͲSWSI
Fasteningpercodeanddrawings
Inspect size, configuration, blocking and
fastening of shearwalls and diaghrams. Verify
panelgradeandthickness
ShopDrawings:Verifycompliancewithspecified
design loads and specifications; verify on site
conditionsmatchshopdrawingdetails
Trussplacement,fasteningandanchorage
Shopdrawings:Verifycompliancewithspecified
design loads and specifications; verify on site
conditionsmatchshopdrawingdetails
Identificationpershopdrawings
Gradestamp&thickness
Connections
DiaphragmsandShearwalls
Laminates
Plywood
Application
CuringandAmbientCondition
ScheduleofThickness
SurfacePreparation
MaterialSpecifications
LaboratoryTestedFireResistance
Design
Laminates
Trusses
Trusses
Specifications,
1704.6.1
Specifications
Specifications,
1704.6
Specifications
Specifications
1704.6.1
Specifications,
2301.1.8
2303
Specifications,
1704.6
1704.2
Manufacturer’sData
ReviewThirdͲpartyfireresistivedesignassembly
(eg.UL,FM,etc.)foreachratedbeam,column,
orassembly
Reviewapprovedthicknessschedule
Inspect surface preparation of steel prior to
applicationofSFRM
InspectapplicationofSFRM
Verify ambient temperature and ventilation is
suitableforapplicationandcuringofSFRM
1704.12.3
1704.12.3
1704.12.4
1704.12.2
Specifications
1704.12
PE/SE/PPE
ICCͲSFSI
PE/SER
PE/SER
APPLICABLETOTHISPROJECT
Agent
EXTENT/REFERENCE
AGENT COMPLETED
Qualifications
SPRAYͲAPPLIEDFIRERESISTANTMATERIAL(SFRM)
FRAMINGANDDETAILS
Plant
Certification/Quality
Control
of
Manufacturer: Inspect shop fabrication and
qualitycontrolproceduresforwoodtrussplant
FabricatorExempt
GradeStamp
MaterialGrading
Y/C/P/NA
WOODCONSTRUCTION
TYPEOFINSPECTION:Scope
WoodPreͲFabrication
MATERIAL/ACTIVITY
1704.12.5
1704.12.6
1704.13
AWCI12ͲB
Devicelocationandairductleakage
Pressure difference, flow measurements &
detectiontesting
Activationsequence
ApplicationofFoamPlasticBoard
ApplicationofCoatings
ApplicationofMesh
AmbientConditionandCuring
FlashingandJointDetails
Sealants/Caulk
Ducts
System
SMOKECONTROL
ConditionofSubstrate
PE/FPE/ME
PE/FPE/ME
PE/FPE/ME
1704.16
1704.16
EDIͲEIFS
EDIͲEIFS
EDIͲEIFS
EDIͲEIFS
EDIͲEIFS
EDIͲEIFS
EDIͲEIFS
EDIͲEIFS
ICCͲSFSI
1704.16
Specifications,
1704.14
Specifications,
1704.14
Specifications,
1704.14
Specifications,
1704.14
Specifications,
1704.14
Specifications,
1704.14
Specifications,
1704.14
Specifications,
1704.14
EXTERIORINSULATIONandFINISHSYSTEMS(EIFS)
Inspect mastic and intumescent fire resistant
coatings applied to structural elements and
decks, in accordance with AWCI 12ͲB: Verify
thicknessandapplicationofcoatingsprescribed
infireͲresistantdesign.
Controls
Y/C/P/NA
APPLICABLETOTHISPROJECT
Agent
EXTENT/REFERENCE
AGENT COMPLETED
Qualifications
1704.12.4
MASTICandINTUMESCENTFIRERESISTIVECOATINGS
TestthicknessofSFRM(ASTME605).Performa
set of thickness measurements for every 1,000
SF of floor and roof assemblies and on not less
than25%ofratedbeamsandcolumns
TestdensityofSFRMmaterial(ASTME605)
Test the cohesive/adhesive bond strength of
SFRM (ASTM E736). Perform not less than one
testforeach10,00SF.
TYPEOFINSPECTION:Scope
MaterialSubmittal
Application
Density
BondStrength
Thickness
MATERIAL/ACTIVITY
Y/C/P/NA
ArchitecturalExteriorCladding
PeriodicAnchorageInspection
PeriodicAnchorageInspection
PeriodicAnchorageInspection
Mechanical,HVAC&Piping
Emergency&StandbyPowerSystems
Manufacturer’sData
PlacementofMaterials
WallPanelsandVeneers
SuspendedCeiling
AccessFloors
Partitions
MechanicalSystems
ElectricalSystems
FireWallAssemblies
FireWallAssemblies
Drawings,
Specifications
1707.8
1708.5
Specifications
1707.7
ASCE7
1707.8
1708.5
1707.6
ASCE7
1707.7
ASCE7
1707.6
ASCE7
1707.6
ASCE7
Inspectplacementoffoundationsystem
Confirmtypeofsoilandheight
LoadTest
Verifydimensionsofwallperapprovedplans
CompactionofFillMaterials
Footing,Foundation
BackfillInformation
GuardRail
WallGeometry
CompactionTesting
LayoutInformation
Drawings,
Specifications,
UniversityPolicy
Drawings,
Specifications,
UniversityPolicy
Drawings
Specifications
UniversityPolicy
Drawings,
Specifications,
UniversityPolicy
Drawings
Specifications
UniversityPolicy
Drawings,
Specifications,
UniversityPolicy
EARTHRETAININGSTRUCTURES>10FT.UNBALANCEDFILL
StorageRacks
PE/SE/GE
PE/SE/GE
PE/SE/GE
PE/SE/GE
PE/SE/GE
PE/SE/GE
APPLICABLETOTHISPROJECT
Agent
EXTENT/REFERENCE
AGENT COMPLETED
Qualifications
ARCHITECTURAL/MECHANICAL/ELECTRICALSYSTEMS
TYPEOFINSPECTION:Scope
Components
MATERIAL/ACTIVITY
Y/C/P/NA
SPECIALCASES
AsrequestedbyBuildingOfficial,reviewand
installation
CommissioningSystemsforLEEDcertified
projects,etc.
TYPEOFINSPECTION:Scope
1704.13
H)
I)
G)
D)
E)
F)
C)
Fabricator,supplier,readymixedplantorotherproductionplantshallprovidecertificatesfromanapprovedindependentinspection,testingorqualityassuranceagency
attestingthattheplantmeetsatleastoneofthefollowingcriteria:
a) Theplantisacertifiedproductionplantmeetingthequalityassurancestandardsofarecognizednationalstandardsorganizationforthatproduct.
b) Theplantmaintainsanagreementwithanindependentinspectionorqualityassuranceagencytoconductperiodicinplantqualityassuranceinspections,where
frequencyisnolessthan6months
c)
Theplanthasaninshopqualityassuranceinspectionprogrambyanindependenttestingorqualityassuranceagencyforthework/producttobeprovidedonthis
project.
A/Eshallreviewfabricator/supplier/producercertificatesandshopdrawingsforconformancewithappropriatestandardsofpracticeandqualityassurance.
Contractor/Suppliershallsubmitmanufacturer’scertificatesofcomplianceandshopdrawingsforthematerials/products.
SpecialInspectionpersonnel/firm(s)selectedtoperformsmokecontrolcommissionmusthaveexperienceinfireprotectionengineering,mechanicalengineering,and
certificationasanairbalancer.
ReferencestoAgency/personnelqualificationsthatarealreadylistedareconsideredtobeaminimumbytheBuildingOfficial,unlessotherwisespecificallyapproved.A
RegisteredDesignProfessional(RDP),i.e.Arch/PEisconsideredtomeetanyoftheminimumcertificationrequirementslistedabove.
Unlessotherwisenoted,thereferencenumberslistedaboverefertothe2009VUSBC&2009IBC
NotationstoPeriodic(P)orContinuous(C)inspectionsindicatefrequencyofcertaininspections.
B)Provideamanufacturer’sfabricationcertificationfromanationallyrecognizedcertificationagency.
A)Inspectionofqualitycontrolproceduresrequiredonlyiffabricatorisnotregularlyinspectedbyanindependentinspectionagency.
Email
APPLICABLETOTHISPROJECT
Agent
EXTENT/REFERENCE
AGENT COMPLETED
Qualifications
Agent
Description(Task)
Firm
Address
Phone
ResponsiblePerson
Agent1
SpecialInspector
Agent2
MaterialsandTestingLab
Agent3
EIFS
Agent4
FireCoatings
Agent5
SmokeControl
Agent6
Commissioning
Agent7
Note:TheQualificationsoftheSpecialInspector,FieldInspectorsandTestingLaboratoriesaresubjecttotheApprovaloftheUniversityBuildingOfficial.
SystemCommissioning
AlternativeMaterials&Sys.
MATERIAL/ACTIVITY
7KLVSDJHLQWHQWLRQDOO\EODQN
HECO-13.1a
(Rev. 01/12)
Page 1 of 1
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER'S
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Date:
TO:
University Building Official
71 Sterrett Facilities Complex (0529)
Blacksburg, VA 24061
PROJECT TITLE:
PROJECT NO:
INSTITUTION/AGENCY:
ADDRESS:
In accordance with the requirements of the Agreement between the Owner and the Architect / Engineer and
based upon the knowledge gained in the performance of the architectural / engineering services provided in said
Agreement and the reports of the Owner's Inspection and Testing entities, the undersigned Architect / Engineer
states that the following portions of the project named above are substantially complete in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and are recommended for occupancy: (Indicate portions which are
recommended for occupancy)
edition of the Virginia
All applicable tests, certificates and regulatory inspections required by the
Uniform Statewide Building Code, which was the basis of the design of the project, have been performed with
respect to the substantially completed portions of the project and the Owner has been provided with a copy of
each report, except for the following: ________________________________________________________
The handicapped standards required by Chapter 7 of the applicable A/E Manual, as revised, have been met. A
copy of the Final Report of Structural & Special Inspections, Form HECO-13.1b, is attached to this certificate.
A tentative list of unfinished Work and defective Work, referred to as the "punch list", is attached hereto. This
list may not be all-inclusive, and the failure to include an item in it does not alter the responsibility of
CONTRACTOR to complete all the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The items in the
tentative list shall be completed or corrected by CONTRACTOR within
days of the above date of
Substantial Completion.
__________________________________________
(Typed Name of Architect/Engineer)
By:_______________________________________
__________________________________________
(Typed Name &Title of Person Signing)
The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Certificate:
- Final Report of Structural & Special Inspections (Form HECO-13.1b)
- Checklist for Beneficial Occupancy (Form HECO-13.3b)
- Punch list containing page 1 through _______
Cc:
Agency Project Manager
HECO-13.2
(Rev. 01/12)
Page 1 of 1
CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION BY CONTRACTOR
Date:
TO:
University Building Official
71 Sterrett Facilities Complex (0529)
Blacksburg VA 24061
PROJECT TITLE:
PROJECT NO:
INSTITUTION/AGENCY:
ADDRESS:
In accordance with the requirements of the Contract Between Owner and Contractor (Form HECO-9), the
undersigned Contractor hereby states that the above named project has been fully completed in accordance with
the requirements of the Contract Documents as modified by approved change orders.
All applicable tests, certificates and regulatory inspections required by the Virginia Uniform Statewide Building
Code and the Contract Documents have been performed with respect to the completed project and the Owner has
been provided with a copy of each report.
As-built marked up prints of the completed project have been provided to the Architect/Engineer as required by
the Contract Documents.
The Owner has been provided with a copy of all warranties and guarantees, including the starting date(s) of all
warranties and guarantees, written and unwritten, required by the Contract Documents.
All training, operating instructions and maintenance manuals required by the Contract Documents have been
provided to the Owner.
__________________________________________
(Typed Contractor Name)
By _______________________________________
__________________________________________
(Typed Name &Title of Person Signing)
cc:
Agency Project Manager
A/E
HECO-13.2a
(Rev. 12/11)
Page 1 of 1
CERTIFICATE OF PARTIAL OR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION BY CONTRACTOR
TO:
University Building Official
71 Sterrett Facilities Complex (0529)
Blacksburg, VA 24061
Date:
PROJECT TITLE:
PROJECT NO:
INSTITUTION/AGENCY:
ADDRESS:
In accordance with the requirements of the Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, the undersigned
Contractor hereby states that portions of the above named project are substantially completed in accordance with
the requirements of the Contract Documents as modified by approved change orders. Those portions of the
project now substantially complete are: (list or describe)
All applicable tests, certificates and regulatory inspections required by the Virginia Uniform Statewide Building
Code and the Contract Documents have been performed with respect to the substantially completed portions of
the project and the Owner has been provided with a copy of each report.
As-built marked up prints of the substantially completed portions of the project have been provided to the
Architect/Engineer as required by the Contract Documents.
The Owner has been provided with a copy of all warranties and guarantees, including the starting date(s) of all
warranties and guarantees, written and unwritten, required by the Contract Documents with respect to the
completed portions of the project, except as follows:
All training, operating instructions and maintenance manuals required by the Contract Documents have been
provided to the Owner, except as follows: (list or describe)
This certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents nor is
it a release of CONTRACTOR's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Typed Contractor Name
By:
Typed Name &Title
DGS-30-120
CO-13.1b
(Rev. 02/01)
Page 1 of 1
FINAL REPORT OF STRUCTURAL & SPECIAL INSPECTIONS
INSTITUTION/AGENCY:
PROJECT TITLE:
PROJECT NO:
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OF RECORD:
To the best of my information, knowledge, and belief, the Structural & Special Inspections required for this
project, and itemized in the Form CO-6b, Special Inspections listing attached to the Form CO-6a, Statement
of Structural and Special Inspections, submitted for permit, have been completed.
The discrepancies that remain outstanding since the last interim report dated
corrected or have been resolved as follows:
, have been
(Attach 8-1/2 x 11 continuation sheet(s) if required to complete the description of corrections or resolution of
deviations)
Respectfully submitted,
Structural Engineer
Signature
Project Inspector
Date
Type or print name
Type or print name
Agency Project Manager
Signature
Type or print name
Signature
Date
Date
This page intentionally blank.
DGS-30-152
CO-13.3b
(Rev. 09/12)
Page 1 of 1
CHECKLIST FOR BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY
Agency:
Project Name:
Agency Representative:
Project Code:
Building:
Inspection by the A/E and Agency prior to BCOM inspection allows for earlier Beneficial Occupancy. Assure that the
following items are complete or do not apply to the project before scheduling a Substantial Completion Inspection.
Site / Building Accessibility
___
Route from the entrance to the public way
___
Plumbing / controls / circulation
Means of Egress
___
Exit Access / Exit / Exit Discharge clear and unobstructed
___
Delayed egress / Access controlled locks
___
Door Hardware / types required
___
Ventilation
___
Exhaust Systems
___
Special Systems (smoke control, dust collection)
___
Testing and Balancing Report
HVAC
Electrical
___
Egress lighting with emergency power on and off
___
Boxes (back, junction, and pull) covered
___
Exit Signs
___
Lightning Protection Certification
Plumbing
___
Fixtures tested and properly functioning
___
Lab gases
___
Secondary Roof Drainage
___
Potable Water Report
Fire Safety
___
Fire alarm system accepted
___
Sprinkler system accepted
___
Supervising Station Name __________________
General Safety
___
Floor finishes complete
___
Elevator inspection
___
Contractor Clean up
Close Out Documents
___
High Performance Building Act (VEES)
___
Fire Marshal letter recommending occupancy
___
Roofing Survey Report
I have inspected for as noted above and conclude that the building is substantially complete and ready for beneficial
occupancy.
Signature ________________________________
Date ___________________
This page intentionally blank.
5()
12
63(&,),&$7,21
6(&7,21180%(5
([DPSOH'HVFULSWLRQ
'(6&5,37,21
6+23'5$:,1*
;
6$03/(
;
0)5
6'$7$
;
;
&(57,),&$7(
7<3(2)68%0,77$/
;
7(675(3257
68%0,77$/5(*,67(5)25
;
*8$5$17((
SUBMITTAL REGISTER
352-(&7&2'(
'$7(5(7851('
)520$(
'$7(1(('('%<
3DJHRI
5(0$5.6
5HIHUHQFH*HQHUDO&RQGLWLRQV6HFWLRQ
; ([DPSOHUHPDUNV
'$7(5(&(,9('
5HY
'$7(6(1772$(
'*6
$&7,2121
68%0,77$/
7KLVSDJHLQWHQWLRQDOO\EODQN
February 12, 2014
Addendum 02, March 12, 2014
LIST OF DRAWINGS
T001 Titl e & Project In formati on
T 0 0 2 A b b r e v ia t io n s & P a r t i t ion Typ e s
D EM OL I T ION
D101 Demolition Plans
ARCH ITECTU RAL
A101
A201
A701
A751
A801
A901
Floor Plans
Sections & Interior Elevations
Interior Elevations & Details
Casework & Millwork Details
Furniture & Finish Plans (See Addendum 1)
Reflected Ceiling Plans & Ceiling Details
FIRE PROTECTION
FP101 Fire Protection Plans
FP102 Fire Protection Details
PLUMBING, MECHANICAL and ELECTRICAL
P101 Plumbing Legends, Schedules, Details & Notes
P102 Demolition Floor Plans - Plumbing
P103 Floor Plans - Plumbing
M101
M102
M103
M104
M105
HVAC Legend and Notes
Demolition Plans - HVAC
Floor Plans - HVAC Ductwork
Floor Plans - HVAC Piping
HVAC Details
E001
E100
E101
E102
Electrical Legend, Abbreviations, Notes and Lighting Fixture Schedule
Demolition Plans
Floor Plans - Lighting
Floor Plans - Power
END OF LIST OF DRAWINGS
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
LIST OF DRAWINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
LIST OF DRAWINGS - 1
February 12, 2014
Addendum 02, March 12, 2014
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
LIST OF DRAWINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
LIST OF DRAWINGS - 2
RENOVATION OF PRITCHARD HALL WEST WING – LLC OFFICES
Each REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI) shall be submitted in writing via email, to the Architect
and shall generally correspond to the format below:
REQUEST FOR INFORMATION
TO:
RFI NO.
VMDO Architects
200 East Market Street
Charlottesville, VA 22903
(434) 296-5684 fax (434) 296-4496
Attention: Kim Thompson Smith; [email protected]
Subject:
Specification Section:
Drawing Number:
REQUEST:
BY:
Date:
Contractor
Date Response Required:
RESPONSE:
BY:
Date:
Architect/Engineer
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION FORM
VT PC# R-2014-05
RFI - 1
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
REQUEST FOR INTERPRETATION FORM
VT PC# R-2014-05
RFI - 2
February 12, 2014
SECTION 01 1000 – SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental General
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
1.3
The project is generally described as selective interior demolition of partitions, finishes and mechanical, electrical and plumbing systems to accommodate new interior build-out for office and
multipurpose room. Scope includes new finishes and furnishings, as well as mechanical and
electrical system improvements as described in the Contract Documents.
USE OF PREMISES
A.
1.4
General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of
Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited by Owner's right
to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.
STANDARD
A.
1.5
All references to specifications and standards referred to in the Contract Documents shall
mean, and are intended to be, the latest edition, amendment and revision of such reference
standard in effect as of the date of these Contractor Documents.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.6
AASHO
ACI
AISC
ANS
ANSI
APA
The words "as directed", "as required", "as permitted", "as allowed", or phrases of like effect or
import as used herein shall mean that the direction, requirement, permission or allowance of the
Architect is intended, and similarly the words "accepted", "approved", "reasonable", "suitable",
"properly", "satisfactory", or words of like effect or import, unless otherwise particularly specified
herein, shall mean acceptable, approved, reasonable, suitable, properly, or satisfactory in the
judgement of the Architect/Engineer.
ABBREVIATIONS
American Association of State Highway Officials
American Concrete Institute
American Institute of Steel Construction
American National Standard
American National Standards Institute (Successor to ASASI & ASA)
American Plywood Association
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
SUMMARY
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 1000 - 1
February 12, 2014
ASHRAE
ASTM
AWI
AWPI
ASTM
AWS
CRSI
CS
DFPA
EPA
FGMA
MLMA
NAAMM
MBHA
NBS
NCMA
NEC
NEMA
NESHAP
NFPA
PCA
SCPI
SMACNA
SPA
SPR
SSPC
TCA
UL
VDOT
WCLA
WRI
WWPA
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers.
American Society for Testing and Materials
American Wood Institute
American Wood Preservers Institute
American Society for Testing and Materials
American Welding Society
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
Commercial Standard (U.S. Department of Commerce)
Douglas Fir Plywood Association
Environmental Protection Agency
Flat Glass Marketing Association
Metal Lath Manufacturer's Association
The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
National Builders Hardware Association
National Bureau of Standards
National Concrete Masonry Institute
National Electrical Code
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
National Emissions for Hazardous Air Pollutants
National Fire Protection Association
Portland Concrete Association
Structural Clay Products Institute
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
Southern Pine Association
Simplified Practice Recommendation (U.S. Department of Commerce)
Steel Structures Painting Council
Tile Council of America
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.
Virginia Department of Transportation
West Coast Lumberman's Association
Wire Reinforcement Institute
Western Wood Products Association
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 1000
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
SUMMARY
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 1000 - 2
February 12, 2014
SECTION 01 1010 – SPECIAL CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
DESCRIPTION
A.
1.3
This section specifies various administrative and procedural requirements required for
performance of the Work. Additional related requirements may be specified in other parts of the
Project Manual.
PROJECT DIRECTORY
A.
1.4
Within 5 days after Owner's issuance of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall prepare and
submit to the Architect a Project Directory consisting of a listing of all firms and individuals
associated with the project. The list shall include all representatives of each subcontractor, subsubcontractor and material supplier. Addresses, telephone numbers, FAX numbers and e-mail
addresses shall be provided for all firms and individuals serving as primary points of contact
with respect to the project.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES AND CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT
A.
The Schedule of Values shall be prepared by the Contractor in accordance with requirements
indicated in the General Conditions. Provide labor and material values for each individual
specification section in the Project Manual and provide additional breakdowns if requested by
the Architect.
B.
Contractor shall prepare and submit with each Certificate for Payment a narrative summary
describing carefully each component of work completed during the period represented by the
Certificate for Payment. The narrative shall also include an inventory and detailed description of
all materials and components stored on site for which payment is requested. Prompt
certification of payment applications shall be conditional upon Contractor's compliance with all
contract requirements, including, but not limited to jobsite cleanliness and adherence to
administrative responsibilities.
1.5
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION
A.
Should questions arise during the construction period regarding the intent of the Contract
Documents, each request for information shall be forwarded to the Architect by the Contractor
on the form provided in this project manual, or a similar for providing the same information
listed.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 1010 - 1
February 12, 2014
1.6
WORK ON UNIVERSITY PROPERTY
A.
1.7
Contractor shall ensure that its employees, agents, subcontractors, and others performing the
Work display appropriate conduct and decorum at all times. Appropriate worker attire shall
include all required safety apparel as well as shirts and trousers. Smoking is prohibited inside
building areas and during job meetings. Smoking shall be permitted only in designated part(s) of
Contractor’s exterior staging area(s). Construction personnel shall not engage in violence,
profanity, or any illegal activity, possess weapons, consume alcohol or be intoxicated, or in any
way harass university personnel, students, parents, or visitors. Violations of the above
standards may result in the immediate and permanent expulsion of offending parties from the
project site.
CONSTRUCTION STAGING
A.
Locations for construction trailers, material storage, stockpiling of soil, equipment storage,
cranes, dumpsters, and other similar site encumbrances shall be as indicated on the drawings,
or if not indicated, in locations acceptable to the Owner. Access to site areas utilized for
university purposes, such as parking areas, shall be unobstructed at all times when needed for
University use. All construction areas shall be maintained safe and secure from unauthorized
access at all times. Emergency exits from the building shall be maintained in a manner
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 1010
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 1010 - 2
February 12, 2014
SECTION 01 1400 - WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
USE OF PREMISES
A.
Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site
beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1.
2.
Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of site.
Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises and adjacent
buildings clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, students and emergency
vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.
a.
b.
B.
1.3
Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances.
Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of
materials and equipment on-site.
Use of Existing Building: Protect and maintain existing buildings in a weathertight condition
throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.
OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install
equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such
occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and
partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1.
On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service
for occupied portions of building.
END OF SECTION 01 1400
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
WORK RESTRICTIONS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 1400 - 1
February 12, 2014
This page intentionally blank.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
WORK RESTRICTIONS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 1400 - 2
Addendum 02: March 12, 2014
SECTION 01 2300 – ADDITIVE BID ITEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for additive bid items.
DEFINITION
A.
Additive Bid Item: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work
defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount
if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described
in the Contract Documents.
1.
2.
1.4
Additive Bid Items described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the
Agreement.
The cost or credit for each Additive Bid Item is the net addition to or deduction from the
Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to
the Contract Sum.
PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate
work of the alternate into Project.
1.
Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.
B.
Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing,
of the status of each Additive Bid Item. Indicate if Additive Bid Items have been accepted,
rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated
revisions to Additive Bid Items.
C.
Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
1.5
SCHEDULE OF ADDITIVE BID ITEMS
A.
Refer to the Bid Form for a general description of each Additive Bid Item for which a cost
proposal is to be provided. Refer to drawings and specifications for requirements associated
with each Additive Bid Item.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ADDITIVE BID ITEMS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 2300 - 1
Addendum 02: March 12, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 2300
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ADDITIVE BID ITEMS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 2300 - 2
February 12, 2014
SECTION 01 3100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental General
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
General project coordination procedures.
Conservation.
Coordination Drawings.
Administrative and supervisory personnel.
Project meetings.
B.
Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility
will be assigned to a specific contractor.
C.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting
the Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating Contract closeout.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, which depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.
B.
If necessary, prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.
1.
C.
Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and
to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 3100 - 1
February 12, 2014
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.
1.
1.4
Delivery and processing of submittals.
Progress meetings.
Pre-installation conferences.
Project closeout activities.
Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Prior to installation of mechanical, electrical, plumbing and fire suppression (MEPS) systems, Coordination Drawings shall be prepared to illustrate actual sizes, specific locations, support methods and sequence of installation for such components throughout the
building. Pay particular attention to above-ceiling locations and other concealed areas where
space may be limited. Contractor(s) shall field verify existing structural and above-ceiling conditions in conjunction with preparation of Coordination Drawings and shall confirm finished ceiling
heights and dimensions for chases and equipment rooms throughout the building. Submit
Coordination Drawings for A/E review and acceptance prior to commencing installation of
MEPS systems.
B.
Staff Resumes: At least 7 days prior to the pre-construction meeting, submit a resume for each
principal staff member who will work on the project, including the Project Manager, Superintendent(s) Field Engineer and Office Engineer. The Owner reserves the right to reject any staff
member and request new resume submissions. Resumes shall include the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.5
Duties and Responsibilities related to this Project
Educational Background
Length of time with the Contractor’s company and past work experience with an outline of
responsible positions held.
Schedule of Pre-Installation Conferences: Prior to commencement of on-site construction activities, submit in writing to the Architect and Owner a comprehensive schedule of all preinstallation conferences to be conducted during the course of the project. Each conference will
be scheduled to coincide with a regularly scheduled jobsite progress meeting.
ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL
A.
General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory
personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.
1.
1.6
Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors.
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 3100 - 2
February 12, 2014
1.
2.
3.
B.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
Agenda: Prepare outline of issues to be discussed and distribute to all invited attendees.
Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including the Owner and Architect, within (3) days of
the meeting.
Pre-construction Meeting: The pre-construction meeting shall be held at a convenient location
prior to the commencement of construction activities, at a time convenient to Owner, Contractor,
and Architect. The meeting will be conducted to review responsibilities and personnel assignments as follows:
1.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other
concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the pre-construction
conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to
the Work. The Contractor shall conduct the meeting.
2.
Agenda: Review items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
Tentative construction schedule.
Phasing.
Critical work sequencing.
Designation of responsible personnel.
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
Distribution of the Contract Documents.
Submittal procedures.
Preparation of Record Documents.
Use of the premises.
Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
Parking availability.
Office, work, and storage areas.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
First aid.
Security.
Progress cleaning.
Working hours.
Requirements, attendance and schedule for site mobilization meeting
C.
Site Mobilization Meeting: The Contractor will conduct site mobilization meeting(s) as determined during the pre-construction meeting. The meeting will take place at the Project site before construction activity begins.
D.
Pre-installation Conferences: The Contractor will conduct the pre-installation conferences. The
conferences will take place at the Project Site prior to commencement of each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. Refer to Submittal requirements this
Section for preparation of a comprehensive Pre-installation Conference Schedule.
1.
Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow will attend the meeting. Advise Owner and
Architect of scheduled meeting dates.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 3100 - 3
February 12, 2014
2.
Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
E.
Contract Documents.
Options.
Related Change Orders.
Purchases.
Deliveries.
Submittals.
Review of mockups.
Possible conflicts.
Compatibility problems.
Time schedules.
Weather limitations.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
Warranty requirements.
Compatibility of materials.
Acceptability of substrates.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Space and access limitations.
Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
Testing and inspecting requirements.
Required performance results.
Protection of construction and personnel.
3.
Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements.
4.
Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work
and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at bi-monthly intervals, except where it is determined that more frequent meetings are essential to the nature of the project. Coordinate
dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. The meetings will take place at the
Project site.
1.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Contractor and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented
at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
2.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Contractor will review the progress since the
last meeting, determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how
construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties
involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that
current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
b.
Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 3100 - 4
February 12, 2014
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
3.
Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have
been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous
meeting and report.
a.
F.
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Work hours.
Hazards and risks.
Progress cleaning.
Quality and work standards.
Change Orders.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each
progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized.
Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
Coordination Meetings: Conduct project coordination meetings at regular intervals convenient
to all parties involved if there is more that one contractor on site. Project coordination meetings
are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, but should be scheduled to coincide
with the dates for progress meetings and pre-installation conferences. The Contractor will advise Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates.
1.
Attendees: Each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities
shall be represented at these meetings. Representatives of Owner and Architect may attend. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to
conclude matters relating to the Work.
2.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting.
Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.
a.
b.
c.
Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last
coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of
schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Combined Contractor's Construction
Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure
commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions
are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed
within the Contract Time.
Schedule Updating: Revise Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule after
each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or
recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.
Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following:
1)
2)
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 3100 - 5
February 12, 2014
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
3.
1.7
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Work hours.
Hazards and risks.
Progress cleaning.
Quality and work standards.
Change Orders.
Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and
to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.
COMMUNICATION
A.
Communication of questions from the Contractor to the Architect/Engineer during construction
shall be via the standard Request for Information form (or similar).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01 3100
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 3100 - 6
February 12, 2014
SECTION 01 3200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental General
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress
of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Submittals Schedule.
Daily construction reports.
Field condition reports.
Special reports.
Material Location Reports
DEFINITIONS
A.
Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume
time and resources.
1.
2.
Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the
planned early start and finish times.
Predecessor activity is an activity that must be completed before a given activity can be
started.
B.
CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project
where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine
when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.
C.
Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.
D.
Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.
E.
Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.
1.
2.
3.
Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a
jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet
schedule milestones and Contract completion date].
Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the
early start of the following activity.
Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely
affecting the planned Project completion date.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 3200 - 1
February 12, 2014
F.
Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for
greater detail.
G.
Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction
element.
H.
Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.
I.
Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity relationships.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names
and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
B.
Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a
tabular format:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Scheduled date for first submittal.
Specification Section Number and title.
Submittal category (action or informational).
Name of subcontractor.
Description of the Work covered.
Scheduled date for Architect's final review.
C.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit one hardcopy and one electronic copy to Owner
and Architect of initial CPM schedule per CO-7 paragraph 19 large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period.
D.
CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit electronic copies to Owner and Architect
of each of the following computer-generated reports. Format for each activity in reports shall
contain activity number, activity description, original duration, remaining duration, early start
date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Monthly Project Report per CO-7 paragraph 19 (d).
Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or
actual start date if known.
Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.
Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
E.
Daily Construction Reports: Submit electronic copy to Owner and Architect at weekly intervals.
F.
Material Location Reports: Submit electronic copy to Owner and Architect at monthly intervals.
G.
Field Condition Reports: Submit electronic copy to Owner and Architect at time of discovery of
differing conditions.
H.
Special Reports: Submit electronic copy to Owner and Architect at time of unusual event.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 3200 - 2
February 12, 2014
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
B.
Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules
and reports.
1.
2.
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.
Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A.
Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1.
2.
2.2
Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Initial Submittal: Submit initial submittal for those required during the first 60 days of construction within 14 days of the date established for commencement of the Work. List
those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because
of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling."
B.
Time Frame: Extend schedule from the date established by the Notice of Award to the date of
Final Completion.
1.
C.
Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows
an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal
element of the Work. Comply with the following:
1.
2.
Review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.
Startup and Testing Time: Include duration for startup and testing.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 3200 - 3
February 12, 2014
3.
D.
Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for
certification of Substantial Completion.
Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.
Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by
Owner.
Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate
the earliest possible delivery date.
Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:
a.
b.
5.
Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the
Work, including, but not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
6.
Uninterruptible services.
Use of premises restrictions.
Subcontract awards.
Submittals.
Purchases.
Mockups.
Fabrication.
Sample testing.
Deliveries.
Installation.
Tests and inspections.
Adjusting.
Curing.
Startup and placement into final use and operation.
Area Separations: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the
Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced
or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Structural completion.
Permanent space enclosure.
Completion of mechanical installation.
Completion of electrical installation.
Substantial Completion.
E.
Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion.
F.
Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.
2.3
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)
A.
General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 3200 - 4
February 12, 2014
B.
CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a CPM network analysis diagram.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for commencement of the
Work in accordance with the Notice to Proceed.
Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information.
Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting
progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.
Use "one workday" as the unit of time.
CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using
the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.
1.
Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship
of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
2.4
Preparation and processing of submittals.
Purchase of materials.
Delivery.
Fabrication.
Installation.
Processing: Process data to produce output data or a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary
to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.
Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate
paths with most float near the edges.
REPORTS
A.
Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
List of subcontractors at Project site.
List of separate contractors at Project site.
Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.
Accidents.
Meetings and significant decisions.
Unusual events (refer to special reports).
Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
Meter readings and similar recordings.
Emergency procedures.
Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
Change Orders received and implemented.
Construction Change Directives received.
Services connected and disconnected.
Equipment or system tests and startups.
Partial Completions and occupancies.
Substantial Completions authorized.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 3200 - 5
February 12, 2014
B.
Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery
dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site.
C.
Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for
changing the Contract Documents.
2.5
SPECIAL REPORTS
A.
General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute
copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
B.
Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at
Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report.
List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of
results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these
events are known or predictable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At bi-monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly
scheduled progress meeting.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect and Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-toknow schedule responsibility.
1.
2.
Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in
the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
END OF SECTION 01 3200
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 3200 - 6
February 12, 2014
㻌
SECTION 01 3300 – SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and Supplemental
General Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.
B.
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for
performance of the Work; however, additional individual requirements for submittals are specified in
other applicable sections of the specifications.
Submittals include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Submittal Schedule.
Construction Log.
Shop Drawings.
Product Data.
Samples.
C.
Except for samples, provision of submittals by the Contractor in electronic format is required, unless
otherwise authorized by the Architect.
D.
Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” contains provisions that relate to this Section.
E.
Definitions:
File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from
another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An
FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and
external users are able to access files.
Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used
for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout
document format.
1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction
activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction
activities to avoid delay.
B.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals and related
activities that require sequential activity.
1.
Incomplete submittals will not be reviewed.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 3300 - 1
February 12, 2014
㻌
C.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing
will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
1.
D.
E.
The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with
other submittals until related submittals are received. The Architect also reserves the right to
withhold action on submittals for finishes and components that are part of required mock-ups
until final acceptance of mock-ups by Owner and Architect.
Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time
required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals.
1.
Allow three (3) weeks for initial submittal review. Allow additional time if processing must be
delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals.
2.
Allow three (3) weeks for reprocessing each submittal.
3.
Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner,
or other parties is required, allow (5) weeks for initial review of each submittal.
4.
No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to
the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing.
Submittal Preparation: Prepare submittals per CO-7 paragraph 24 and place a permanent label or
title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each
submittal on the label or title block.
1.
Provide two (2) spaces, each approximately 4" x 5" on the label or beside the title block on
Shop Drawings to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken
as well as to record the Architect's review comments.
2.
Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
F.
Project name.
Date.
Name and address of Architect.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of subcontractor.
Name and address of supplier.
Name of manufacturer.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit
each submittal using a transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor
will not be reviewed. The transmittal shall meet the requirements of the General Conditions.
1. With each submittal, provide relevant information and requests for data, record deviations from
Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations. Include
Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements.
2. Confirm with Architect in advance the submittals that will require review by the Architect’s
consultants. Transmit such submittals directly to the appropriate Architect’s consultant and
simultaneously transmit one copy of the submittal to the Architect. Once the Architect’s
consultant has completed its review, the consultant shall forward the submittal to the Architect
for Architect’s review and subsequent return to the Contractor.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 3300 - 2
February 12, 2014
㻌
G.
Stamp each submittal with the review block as required by General Conditions.
H.
Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as
follows:
1.
2.
Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal
requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling
navigation to each item.
Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
a.
3.
4.
Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings
and action taken by Architect.
Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Architect,
containing the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
5.
Owner’s project code number..
Project Name.
Date.
Name and address of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
Category and type of submittal.
Submittal purpose and description.
Specification Section number and title.
Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of
multiple items.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
Related physical samples submitted directly.
Indication of full or partial submittal.
Transmittal number.
Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
Other necessary identification.
Remarks.
Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file
metadata:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
6.
File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS061000.01.A).
Project name.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Manufacturer name.
Product name.
Other information as required.
Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Architect's FTP site specifically
established for Project and promptly notify Architect via email as each submittal is posted.
a.
Architect will notify Contractor via email when A/E review has been completed.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 3300 - 3
February 12, 2014
㻌
1.4 RE-DESIGN
A.
If the Contractor makes, or causes to be made, due to approval of substitute equipment or
otherwise, any substantial change in form type, system and details of construction from those on the
Drawing, The Contractor shall pay for all costs arising from such changes. The Contractor shall pay
Architectural and Engineering fees required to check adequacy of such changes. Any changes or
departures from the construction and details shown shall be made only after written approval by the
Architect.
1.5 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A.
Submit a complete schedule of submittals within two weeks of receiving a Notice of Award.
B.
Coordinate submittal schedule with the list of subcontracts, schedule of values and the list of
products as well as the Contractor's construction schedule.
D.
Distribution: Following response to initial submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect,
Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated. Post
copies in the Project meeting room and field office.
1.
e.
When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations.
Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work
and are no longer involved in construction activities.
Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity, where revisions have been
recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.
1.6 CONSTRUCTION LOG
A.
Maintain a daily log, recording the following information concerning events at the site; and submit
duplicate copies to the Architect at weekly intervals:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
List of subcontractors at the site.
Approximate count of personnel at the site.
High and low temperatures, general weather conditions.
Accidents and unusual events.
Meetings and significant decisions.
Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses.
Meter readings and similar recordings.
Emergency procedures.
Orders and requests of governing authorities.
Change Orders received, implemented.
Services connected, disconnected.
Equipment or system tests and start-ups.
Partial Completions, occupancies.
Substantial Completions authorized.
1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise
indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 3300 - 4
February 12, 2014
㻌
standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific
reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings.
B.
Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns,
templates and similar drawings. Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
D.
Dimensions.
Identification of products and materials included.
Compliance with specified standards.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns and similar full- size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings
on sheets at least 8-1/2" x 11" but no larger than 30" x 42".
1.
Submit electronic copies electronically in pdf format and/or by posting to an FTP site for A/E
review. The submittal will be returned electronically and/or posted to an FTP site with A/E
review comments attached. The Contractor shall produce and distribute (2) hard copy prints of
each shop drawing submittal with A/E comments attached to the Owner’s Project Manager.
The Contractor shall produce and distribute as many copies of each shop drawing submittal
with A/E comments as are needed for the use of the Contractor and its subcontractor(s). The
Architect (and each of the Architect’s consultants, as applicable) shall retain (1) copy for A/E
record.
2.
Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in
connection with construction.
Coordination drawings are a special type of Shop Drawing that show the relationship and integration
of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to
fit in the space provided or function as intended.
1.
Submit coordination Drawings for integration of different construction elements. Show
sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space.
1.8 PRODUCT DATA
A.
Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product
Data includes printed information such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts,
standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams and
performance curves. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed
data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop Drawings."
1.
Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes
information on several products, some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the
applicable information. Include the following information:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Manufacturer's printed recommendations.
Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 3300 - 5
February 12, 2014
㻌
B.
2.
Submit electronic copies electronically in pdf format and/or by posting to an FTP site for A/E
review. The submittal will be returned electronically and/or posted to an FTP site with A/E
review comments attached. The Contractor shall produce and distribute (2) hard copy prints of
each shop drawing submittal with A/E comments attached to the Owner’s Project Manager.
The Contractor shall produce and distribute as many copies of each shop drawing submittal
with A/E comments as are needed for the use of the Contractor and its subcontractor(s). The
Architect (and each of the Architect’s consultants, as applicable) shall retain (1) copy for A/E
record.
3.
Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has
been confirmed.
Contractor shall produce additional copies of submittals as required for maintenance manuals.
1.9 SAMPLES
A.
Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the
material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated
components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture and
pattern.
1.
Mount, display, or package Samples in the manner specified to facilitate review of qualities
indicated. Where required, prepare Samples to match the Architect's Sample. Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Description of the Sample.
Sample source.
Product name or name of manufacturer.
Compliance with recognized standards.
Availability and delivery time.
2.
Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for a final check of these
characteristics with other elements, and for a comparison of these characteristics between the final
submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed.
3.
Where Samples are for selection of color, pattern, texture or similar characteristics from a full range
of standard choices, submit three (3) full sets of choices for the material or product; one(1) sets will
be returned with A/E review comments and selections attached. The Contractor shall deliver one (1)
copy to the University Project Manager for record. The Architect shall retain one (1) copy for A/E
record.
4,
Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections,
operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 3300 - 6
February 12, 2014
㻌
PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other
Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field
dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: comply with specified requirements.
C.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and
location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of
Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and
approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2
ARCHITECT'S ACTION
A.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and respond to the Contractor with action
taken, including comments to indicate corrections or revisions required (if any). If necessary,
Architect will make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and provide to the Contractor.
B.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will notify
Contractor if it does not comply with requirements.
C.
Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals
has received prior approval from Architect.
D.
Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will not be reviewed.
E.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be discarded or returned by the Architect
without action.
END OF SECTION 01 3300
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 3300 - 7
February 12, 2014
㻌
This page intentionally blank.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 3300 - 8
February 12, 2014
SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental General
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control, including, but not limited to the preparation of mock-ups.
B.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in
the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control
procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect,
Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements.
B.
Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements.
Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect
C.
Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups
are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects
and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform
specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on
the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B.
Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 4000 - 1
February 12, 2014
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
D.
1.5
Specification Section number and title.
Description of test and inspection.
Identification of applicable standards.
Identification of test and inspection methods.
Number of tests and inspections required.
Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.
Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.
Requirements for obtaining samples.
Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.
Date of issue.
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete test or inspection data.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
B.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.
C.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
D.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
E.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in
material, design, and extent.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 4000 - 2
February 12, 2014
F.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.6
Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Architect's written approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.
Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of
Substantial Completion.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
B.
Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.
2.
Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.
Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing
agency to perform these quality-control services.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to
in writing by Owner.
Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.
Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests
and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner.
1.
2.
Testing agency will notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 4000 - 3
February 12, 2014
3.
4.
5.
Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial
Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether
tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Testing agency will retest and reinspect corrected work.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service
connections. Report results in writing.
E.
Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, Contractor shall provide quality-control services and pay costs for, retesting and
reinspecting performed by Owner’s testing firm(s), for construction that revised or replaced
Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents.
F.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
H.
Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected
work complies with or deviates from requirements.
Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol service through Contractor.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
Access to the Work.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples.
Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 4000 - 4
February 12, 2014
3.1
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1.
2.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of
these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas
in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching.
Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and
Patching."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 014000
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 4000 - 5
February 12, 2014
This page intentionally blank.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 4000 - 6
February 12, 2014
SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental General
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary
utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
B.
Temporary utilities required include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
Water service and distribution.
Sanitary facilities, including toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water facilities.
Heating and cooling facilities.
Ventilation.
Electric power service.
Lighting.
Telephone service.
Dewatering facilities and drains.
Project identification and temporary signs.
Waste disposal facilities.
Field offices.
Storage and fabrication sheds.
Lifts and hoists.
Temporary elevator usage.
Temporary stairs.
Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities.
Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Environmental protection.
Stormwater control.
Tree and plant protection.
Pest control.
Site enclosure fence.
Security enclosure and lockup.
Barricades, warning signs, and lights.
Covered walkways where required by OSHA.
Temporary enclosures.
Temporary partitions.
Fire protection.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 5000 - 1
February 12, 2014
E.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports.
Divisions 02 through 33 for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for
products in those Sections.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete,
insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are
closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.
USE CHARGES
A.
General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect
and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and
facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Owner's construction forces.
Occupants of Project.
Architect.
Testing agencies.
Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Water Service: Subject to reasonable use, water may be obtained from Owner's existing water
system without metering and without payment of use charges, except that Contractor shall be
responsible for costs attributable to excessive, unnecessary or wasteful use of Owner’s water.
C.
Electric Power Service: Subject to reasonable use, electricity may be obtained from Owner's existing system without metering and without payment of use charges, except that Contractor shall
be responsible for costs attributable to excessive, unnecessary or wasteful use of Owner’s electricity.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar
procedures performed on temporary utilities.
B.
Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for submittal of
Contractor's Construction Schedule, submit a schedule indicating implementation and termination of each temporary utility.
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241.
1.
Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary
utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 5000 - 2
February 12, 2014
.
2.
B.
1.7
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Temporary Utilities: At earliest feasible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use
of temporary service to use of permanent service.
1.
B.
Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously
assigned responsibilities.
Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by
all parties engaged in the Work:
1.
2.
3.
Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat.
Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work.
Do not permit excessive or wasteful use of temporary services and facilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended.
B.
Pavement: Comply with Division 2 Section "Hot-Mix Asphalt paving" and Section "Cement
Concrete Pavement."
C.
Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm) 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 8 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- (60mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- (42mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete bases for supporting posts.
D.
Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry."
E.
Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting."
F.
Tarpaulins: Fire-resistive labeled with flame-spread rating of 15 or less.
G.
Water: Potable.
2.2
EQUIPMENT
A.
General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 5000 - 3
February 12, 2014
1.
B.
Field Offices: Mobile units with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes; heated and air conditioned; on foundations adequate for normal loading.
Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as
indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures.
1.
Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure.
C.
Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material.
D.
Drinking-Water Fixtures: Containerized, tap-dispenser, including paper cup supply.
E.
Heating Equipment: Contractor shall provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fueloil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1.
2.
Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating
units is prohibited.
Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use for type of fuel being consumed.
F.
Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to
120-V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light.
G.
Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted and overhead and exposed for surveillance, wiring circuits, not exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.
B.
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of
completed permanent facilities.
3.2
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing service. Where utility company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder
with matching, compatible materials and equipment. Comply with utility company recommendations.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 5000 - 4
February 12, 2014
1.
2.
3.
B.
Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, subject to restrictions indicated. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Provide rubber hoses as necessary to serve Project site.
As soon as water is required at each level, extend service to form a temporary water- and
fire-protection standpipe. Provide distribution piping. Space outlets so water can be
reached with a 100-foot (30-m) hose. Provide one hose at each outlet.
Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a
drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly
from pans.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of
fixtures and facilities.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services. Coordinate interruptions of permanent utilities with Owner.
Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. Before temporary utility is
available, provide trucked-in services.
Obtain easements to bring temporary utilities to Project site where Owner's easements
cannot be used for that purpose. Add provisions for work not in the Contract but served
by temporary facilities if required.
Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for disposal of used material.
Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel.
Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide bottled-water, drinking-water units.
Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that
will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
1.
Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 deg F (10 deg C) in permanently enclosed portions of building for normal construction activities, and 65 deg F (18.3 deg C) for finishing
activities and areas where finished Work has been installed.
E.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
F.
Electric Power Service:
1.
2.
Install power distribution wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage.
Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by electric
company officials.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 5000 - 5
February 12, 2014
G.
Electric Power Service Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power
tools and equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations and traffic conditions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I.
Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical power cords if
single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not
exceed safe length-voltage ratio.
Provide warning signs at power outlets other than 110 to 120 V.
Provide metal conduit, tubing, or metallic cable for wiring exposed to possible damage.
Provide rigid steel conduits for wiring exposed on grades, floors, decks, or other traffic
areas.
Provide metal conduit enclosures or boxes for wiring devices.
Provide 4-gang outlets, spaced so 100-foot (30-m) extension cord can reach each area
for power hand tools and task lighting. Provide a separate 125-V ac, 20-A circuit for each
outlet.
Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp per 500 sq. ft. (45 sq. m), uniformly distributed, for
general lighting, or equivalent illumination.
Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp every 50 feet (15 m) in traffic areas.
Provide one 100-W incandescent lamp per story in stairways and ladder runs, located to
illuminate each landing and flight.
Install exterior-yard site lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction
operations, traffic conditions, and signage visibility when the Work is being performed.
Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for
common-use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install separate
telephone line for each field office and first-aid station.
1.
Provide additional telephone lines for the following:
a.
Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in
each field office.
2.
At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Police and fire departments.
Ambulance service.
Contractor's home office.
Architect's office.
Engineers' offices.
Owner's office.
Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.
Provide an answering machine, voice-mail service or messaging service on superintendent's telephone.
Furnish superintendent with electronic paging device for use when away from field office.
Provide a portable cellular telephone for superintendent's use in making and receiving
telephone calls when away from field office.
Provide a computer with high-speed DSL service and printer. Computer shall be able to
perform normal office operations including transmission and receipt of electronic mail and
shall be equipped with Microsoft Word, Excel and Adobe Acrobat software.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 5000 - 6
February 12, 2014
3.3
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
Locate field offices, storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction
and support facilities for easy access and where acceptable to Owner.
Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.
Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial
Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use
permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.
B.
Traffic Controls: Provide temporary traffic controls at junction of temporary roads with public
roads. Include "STOP" signs for entrance onto public roads. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections for
temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included in individual Sections. Where feasible, use same facilities. Maintain
Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Temporary Signs: Prepare signs in 4’ x 8’ size, unless otherwise indicated. Install signs where
indicated to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. Do not permit installation of
unauthorized signs.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and
visitors.
Construct signs of ¾ inch exterior-type Grade B-B high-density concrete form overlay
plywood. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel.
Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer. Five or more different colors may be required.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle
waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or
unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
1.
2.
F.
Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining
property nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.
Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system, provide temporary drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is completed.
Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.
If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled,
for each type of waste material to be deposited.
Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate types of
waste materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide detailed information for on-site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials. Provide information on destination of each type of waste material and means to be used to
dispose of all waste materials.
Janitorial Services: Provide janitorial services on a weekly basis for temporary offices, first-aid
stations, toilets, wash facilities, lunchrooms, and similar areas.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 5000 - 7
February 12, 2014
G.
Common-Use Field Office: Provide an insulated, weathertight, air-conditioned field office for use
as a common facility by all personnel engaged in construction activities; of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel and meetings of 12 persons at Project site. Keep office
clean and orderly.
1.
Furnish and equip offices as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
H.
Construct framing, sheathing, and siding using fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood.
Paint exposed lumber and plywood with exterior-grade acrylic-latex emulsion over exterior primer. Paint interior walls with two coats of interior latex-flat wall paint.
Provide resilient floor covering and painted gypsum wallboard walls and acoustical ceiling. Provide operable windows with adjustable blinds and insect screens.
Provide an electric heater with thermostat capable of maintaining a uniform indoor temperature of 68 deg F (20 deg C). Provide an air-conditioning unit capable of maintaining
an indoor temperature of 72 deg F (23 deg C).
Provide fluorescent light fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215
lx) at desk height. Provide 110- to 120-V duplex outlets spaced at not more than 12-foot
(4-m) intervals, 1 per wall in each room.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved, including temporary utility services. Sheds may be
open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within building or elsewhere on-site.
1.
2.
Construct framing, sheathing, and siding using fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood.
Paint exposed lumber and plywood with exterior-grade acrylic-latex emulsion over exterior primer.
I.
Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and personnel. Truck cranes and similar
devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" as provided by the
general contractor and not temporary facilities.
J.
Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders
are not adequate. Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance.
K.
Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are
cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.
1.
3.4
Desk and four chairs, four-drawer file cabinet, a plan table, a plan rack, and bookcase.
Water cooler and private toilet complete with water closet, lavatory, and medicine
cabinet with mirror.
Coffee machine and supplies, including regular and decaffeinated coffee, filters,
cups, stirring sticks, creamer, sugar, and sugar substitute.
Provide a room adequate to accommodate 12 persons for Project meetings. Furnish room with conference table, 12 folding chairs, 4’ X 8’ tack board, and 4’ X 4’
square markerboard.
Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect
stairs and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged, restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 5000 - 8
February 12, 2014
A.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize
possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools
and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site.
B.
Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from
heavy rains.
C.
Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line
of trees to protect vegetation from construction damage. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.
D.
Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, install chain-link enclosure fence
with lockable entrance gates. Locate where indicated, or if not indicated, enclose entire Project
site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. Comply with OSHA standards and regulations.
1.
2.
Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and
other construction operations.
Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Provide Owner with two sets of keys.
E.
Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,
vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.
F.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for
erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning
signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.
1.
G.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
For safety barriers, sidewalk bridges, and similar uses, provide minimum 5/8-inch- (16mm-) thick exterior plywood.
Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide
insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.
Vertical Openings: Close openings of 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq. m) or less with plywood or similar
materials.
Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with
load-bearing, wood-framed construction.
Install tarpaulins securely using fire-retardant-treated wood framing and other materials.
Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 sq. ft. (9.2 sq. m) in area, use
fire-retardant-treated material for framing and main sheathing.
Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit
dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise and to protect both new &
existing work under various conditions that may be encountered during construction.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 5000 - 9
February 12, 2014
1.
2.
3.
4.
I.
Construct dustproof floor-to-ceiling partitions of not less than nominal 3 5/8-inch (100mm) metal studs, 5/8-inch (16-mm) gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side,
and 1/2-inch (13-mm) fire-retardant plywood on construction side.
Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks.
Protect air-handling equipment.
Weatherstrip openings.
Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241.
1.
Provide fire extinguishers, installed on walls on mounting brackets, visible and accessible
from space being served, with sign mounted above.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.5
Field Offices: Class A stored-pressure water-type extinguishers.
Other Locations: Class ABC dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA-recommended classes for exposures.
Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose; provide not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable
stairwell.
Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations.
Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fireprotection facilities, stairways, and other access routes for firefighting. Prohibit smoking
in hazardous fire-exposure areas.
Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition.
Permanent Fire Protection: At earliest feasible date in each area of Project, complete installation of permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services, and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities.
Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and first-aid fire-protection program for
personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and
information.
Provide hoses for fire protection of sufficient length to reach construction areas. Hang
hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are
not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning
sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.
1.
2.
Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results
and to avoid possibility of damage.
Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 5000 - 10
February 12, 2014
C.
Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.
2.
3.
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent
paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate
fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances
that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving,
curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 01 5000
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 5000 - 11
February 12, 2014
This page intentionally blank.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 5000 - 12
February 12, 2014
SECTION 01 7329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental General
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Description of Work: The Contractor is responsible for coordination of the Work with the intent of
anticipating and planning for penetrations of different elements (i.e. providing sleeves or sequencing the Work to avoid cutting and patching). In the event cutting and patching of new
work is required, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements of this Section.
B.
Prepare existing substrates for finish materials to be installed in this project. This includes conditions from recent demolition phase.
C.
Work Not Included: Removal or encapsulation of any materials containing asbestos or other hazardous substances is not within scope of Work.
D.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Division 02 Section “Selective Demolition” for demolition and removal of selected portions
of the building.
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching fire-rated construction.
Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants” for joint-sealants.
Divisions 02 through 28 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to
cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.
a.
1.3
Requirements in this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer to Divisions 23 and 26 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cutting: Removal of existing, in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work.
B.
Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
LEED Requirements for Building Reuse:
1.
Credit MR 1.1 and 1.2: Maintain existing building structure (including structural floor and
roof decking) and envelope (exterior skin and framing, excluding window assemblies and
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CUTTING AND PATCHING
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 7329 - 1
February 12, 2014
non structural roofing material) not indicated to be removed; do not cut such existing construction beyond indicated limits.
B.
Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio, except as specifically indicated.
C.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
D.
Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in
occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic
qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
E.
Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved
in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.
1.5
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void
existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
1.
B.
In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent
possible.
1.
2.2
For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and
procedures, use products for patching that comply with requirements in Section 018113,
"Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED for New Construction and Major Renovations."
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
JOINT SEALANTS
A.
As indicated in Davison 07 “Joint Sealants” for patching, including joint-sealant ES-6 for filling
larger cracks in existing concrete slab.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CUTTING AND PATCHING
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 7329 - 2
February 12, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed.
1.
2.
3.2
Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.
Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B.
Protection: Protect adjoining construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed
during cutting and patching operations.
C.
Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas.
D.
Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied areas.
3.3
PERFORMANCE
A.
Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed
with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
B.
Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with
original Installer's written recommendations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.
Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where
required by cutting and patching operations.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CUTTING AND PATCHING
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 7329 - 3
February 12, 2014
C.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections, where applicable.
1.
2.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of
patching and refinishing.
a.
b.
3.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
a.
4.
5.
Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing
materials.
Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer
and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional
coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane
surface of uniform appearance.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.
D.
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,
mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.
E.
Substrate Preparation:
1.
Floor Slabs: Existing floor slabs have undergone demolition procedures that have resulted in areas unsuitable for the application of finish floor coverings. Cut, and patch as
needed to achieve level substrates of 1/4-inch per 10 feet in both directions, and free of
protrusions, bumps and ridges.
END OF SECTION 01 7329
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CUTTING AND PATCHING
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 7329 - 4
February 12, 2014
SECTION 01 7419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.
Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting
from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements, and for disposition
of hazardous waste.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes
packaging.
B.
Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or
selective demolition operations.
C.
Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in
preparation for reuse.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of total
non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the
use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and
demolition waste from landfills and incinerators.
Facilitate recycling and salvage of
materials, including the following:
1.
Demolition Waste:
a.
b.
Concrete.
Concrete masonry units.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 7419 - 1
February 12, 2014
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
2.
Wood trim.
Structural and miscellaneous steel.
Acoustical tile and panels.
Equipment.
Cabinets.
Plumbing fixtures.
Piping.
Supports and hangers.
Valves.
Sprinklers.
Mechanical equipment.
Refrigerants.
Electrical conduit.
Copper wiring.
Lighting fixtures.
Ballasts.
Electrical devices.
Construction Waste:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Wood sheet materials.
Wood trim.
Metals.
Carpet and pad.
Gypsum board.
Piping.
Electrical conduit.
Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph
above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging
materials:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
1.5
Paper.
Cardboard.
Boxes.
Plastic sheet and film.
Polystyrene packaging.
Wood crates.
Plastic pails.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 15 days of date established for the Notice to
Proceed.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable
waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight
tickets, receipts, and invoices.
B.
Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills
and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts,
and invoices.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 7419 - 2
February 12, 2014
C.
Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.
D.
Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for
recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that
recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician
and date refrigerant was recovered.
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications:
program.
B.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.8
Certified by EPA-approved certification
WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN
A.
General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in
this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and
cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate
quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management
plan.
B.
Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition site-clearing and
construction waste generated by the Work. See Form CWM-1 for construction waste and
Form CWM-2 for optional use with demolition waste. Include estimated quantities and
assumptions for estimates.
C.
Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled,
or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. See Form CWM-3 for construction waste and
Form CWM-4 for demolition waste for optional use. Include points of waste generation, total
quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and
transportation procedures.
1.
2.
3.
Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled
materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.
Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include
name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.
Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating
recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated
location where materials separation will be performed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PLAN IMPLEMENTATION
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 7419 - 3
February 12, 2014
A.
General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage,
signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan
during the entire duration of the Contract.
1.
B.
Training:
Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management
procedures, as appropriate for the Work.
1.
2.
C.
Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal
return.
Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review
plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.
1.
2.
3.2
Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Division 01 Section
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that
are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.
Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust
and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.
SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE
A.
Doors and Hardware to be removed:
hardware.
B.
Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures.
equipment from exposure to weather.
C.
Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size.
D.
Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage.
E.
Mechanical Equipment: Salvage rights retained by Owner.
F.
Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles and other devices by type.
3.3
Brace open end of door frames.
Remove all door
Seal openings with caps or plugs.
Protect
RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE, GENERAL
A.
General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.
B.
Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling
or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum
contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.
C.
Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris.
Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to
approved construction waste management plan.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 7419 - 4
February 12, 2014
1.
Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until
removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each
container and bin.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.4
Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials
if found.
Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place,
grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.
Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of
remaining trees.
Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.
Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or
processor.
RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE
A.
Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.
1.
2.
B.
Pulverize concrete to maximum 1-1/2-inch size.
Crush concrete and screen to comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth
Moving" for use as satisfactory soil for fill or subbase.
Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other
metals.
1.
Pulverize masonry to maximum 3/4-inch size.
a.
b.
2.
Crush masonry and screen to comply with requirements in Division 31 Section
"Earth Moving" for use as general fill.
Crush masonry and screen to comply with requirements in Division 32 Section
"Plants" for use as mineral mulch.
Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.
C.
Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length.
lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials.
D.
Metals: Separate metals by type.
1.
2.
Separate
Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length.
Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.
E.
Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry
location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners.
F.
Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry
location.
G.
Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals from
acoustical panels and tile and sort with other metals..
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 7419 - 5
February 12, 2014
H.
Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports,
hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.
I.
Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.
3.5
RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE
A.
Packaging:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry
location.
Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.
Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from
Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood
pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.
Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements
for recycling wood.
Wood Materials:
1.
2.
Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.
Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.
a.
C.
Gypsum Board and Plaster: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store
in a dry location.
1.
3.6
Comply with requirements in Division 32 Section "Plants." for use of clean sawdust
as organic mulch.
Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board and plaster using small
mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding. Separate steel lath.
DISPOSAL OF WASTE
A.
General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove
waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of
accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
B.
Burning: Do not burn waste materials.
C.
Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
3.7
ATTACHMENTS – Optional for Contractor’s use as desired.
A.
Form CWM-1 for construction waste identification.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 7419 - 6
February 12, 2014
B.
Form CWM-2 for demolition waste identification.
C.
Form CWM-3 for construction waste reduction work plan.
D.
Form CWM-4 for demolition waste reduction work plan.
E.
Form CWM-7 for construction waste
F.
Form CWM-8 for demolition waste.
END OF SECTION 01 7419
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 7419 - 7
February 12, 2014
This page intentionally blank.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 7419 - 8
* Insert units of measure.
Other:
Electrical Conduit
Piping
Carpet and Pad (scraps)
Gypsum Board (scraps)
Joint Sealant Tubes
Roofing
Insulation
Metals
Wood Trim (cut-offs)
Wood Waste Chutes
Wood Forms
Plywood or OSB (scraps)
Lumber: Warped Pieces
Lumber: Cut-Offs
Masonry or CMU
Site-Clearing Waste
Packaging: Plastic Pails
Packaging: Paint Cans
Packaging: Crates
Packaging: Pallets or Skids
Packaging: Boxes
Packaging: Plastic Sheet or
Film
Packaging: Polystyrene
Packaging: Cardboard
MATERIAL CATEGORY
GENERATION
POINT
EST. WASTE - %
(B)
TOTAL EST.
QUANTITY OF
WASTE* (C = A x B)
EST. VOLUME
CY (CM)
FORM CWM-1: CONSTRUCTION WASTE IDENTIFICATION
EST. QUANTITY
OF MATERIALS
RECEIVED* (A)
EST. WEIGHT
TONS (TONNES)
REMARKS AND
ASSUMPTIONS
Asphaltic Concrete Paving
Concrete
Brick
CMU
Lumber
Plywood and OSB
Wood Paneling
Wood Trim
Miscellaneous Metals
Structural Steel
Rough Hardware
Insulation
Roofing
Doors and Frames
Door Hardware
Windows
Glazing
Acoustical Tile
Carpet
Carpet Pad
Demountable Partitions
Equipment
Cabinets
Plumbing Fixtures
Piping
Piping Supports and Hangers
Valves
Sprinklers
Mechanical Equipment
Electrical Conduit
Copper Wiring
Light Fixtures
Lamps
Lighting Ballasts
Electrical Devices
Switchgear and Panelboards
Transformers
Other:
MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
EST. QUANTITY
EST. VOLUME
CY (CM)
EST. WEIGHT
TONS (TONNES)
FORM CWM-2: DEMOLITION WASTE IDENTIFICATION
REMARKS AND ASSUMPTIONS
Other:
Electrical Conduit
Piping
Carpet and Pad (scraps)
Gypsum Board (scraps)
Joint Sealant Tubes
Roofing
Insulation
Metals
Wood Trim (cut-offs)
Wood Waste Chutes
Wood Forms
Plywood or OSB (scraps)
Lumber: Warped Pieces
Lumber: Cut-Offs
Masonry or CMU
Site-Clearing Waste
Packaging: Plastic Pails
Packaging: Paint Cans
Packaging: Crates
Packaging: Pallets or Skids
Packaging: Boxes
Packaging: Plastic Sheet or
Film
Packaging: Polystyrene
Packaging: Cardboard
MATERIAL CATEGORY
GENERATION
POINT
TOTAL EST.
QUANTITY
OF WASTE
TONS (TONNES)
EST. AMOUNT
SALVAGED
TONS (TONNES)
EST. AMOUNT
RECYCLED
TONS (TONNES)
EST. AMOUNT
DISPOSED TO LANDFILL
TONS (TONNES)
DISPOSAL METHOD AND QUANTITY
FORM CWM-3: CONSTRUCTION WASTE REDUCTION WORK PLAN
HANDLING AND TRANSPORTATION
PROCEDURES
Asphaltic Conc. Paving
Concrete
Brick
CMU
Lumber
Plywood and OSB
Wood Paneling
Wood Trim
Miscellaneous Metals
Structural Steel
Rough Hardware
Insulation
Roofing
Doors and Frames
Door Hardware
Windows
Glazing
Acoustical Tile
Carpet
Carpet Pad
Demountable Partitions
Equipment
Cabinets
Plumbing Fixtures
Piping
Supports and Hangers
Valves
Sprinklers
Mechanical Equipment
Electrical Conduit
Copper Wiring
Light Fixtures
Lamps
Lighting Ballasts
Electrical Devices
Switchgear & Panelbds.
Transformers
Other:
MATERIAL CATEGORY
GENERATION
POINT
EST. AMOUNT
SALVAGED
TONS (TONNES)
EST. AMOUNT
RECYCLED
TONS (TONNES)
EST. AMOUNT
DISPOSED TO LANDFILL
TONS (TONNES)
DISPOSAL METHOD AND QUANTITY
FORM CWM-4: DEMOLITION WASTE REDUCTION WORK PLAN
TOTAL EST.
QUANTITY
OF WASTE
TONS (TONNES)
HANDLING AND TRANSPORTATION
PROCEDURES
Other:
Electrical Conduit
Piping
Carpet and Pad (scraps)
Gypsum Board (scraps)
Joint Sealant Tubes
Roofing
Insulation
Metals
Wood Trim (cut-offs)
Wood Waste Chutes
Wood Forms
Plywood or OSB (scraps)
Lumber: Warped Pieces
Lumber: Cut-Offs
Masonry or CMU
Site-Clearing Waste
Packaging: Plastic Pails
Packaging: Paint Cans
Packaging: Boxes
Packaging: Plastic Sheet
or Film
Packaging: Polystyrene
Packaging: Pallets or
Skids
Packaging: Crates
Packaging: Cardboard
MATERIAL CATEGORY
GENERATION
POINT
TOTAL QUANTITY
OF WASTE
TONS (TONNES)
(A)
ESTIMATED
TONS (TONNES)
ACTUAL
TONS (TONNES)
(B)
QUANTITY OF WASTE SALVAGED
ESTIMATED
TONS (TONNES)
ACTUAL
TONS (TONNES)
(C)
QUANTITY OF WASTE RECYCLED
FORM CWM-7: CONSTRUCTION WASTE REDUCTION PROGRESS REPORT
TOTAL QUANTITY
OF WASTE
RECOVERED
TONS (TONNES)
(D = B + C)
TOTAL
QUANTITY
OF WASTE
RECOVERED
%
(D / A x 100)
Asphaltic Concrete Paving
Concrete
Brick
CMU
Lumber
Plywood and OSB
Wood Paneling
Wood Trim
Miscellaneous Metals
Structural Steel
Rough Hardware
Insulation
Roofing
Doors and Frames
Door Hardware
Windows
Glazing
Acoustical Tile
Carpet
Carpet Pad
Demountable Partitions
Equipment
Cabinets
Plumbing Fixtures
Piping
Supports and Hangers
Valves
Sprinklers
Mechanical Equipment
Electrical Conduit
Copper Wiring
Light Fixtures
Lamps
Lighting Ballasts
Electrical Devices
Switchgear and Panelboards
Transformers
Other:
MATERIAL CATEGORY
GENERATION
POINT
TOTAL QUANTITY
OF WASTE
TONS (TONNES)
(A)
ESTIMATED
TONS
(TONNES)
ACTUAL
TONS
(TONNES)
(B)
QUANTITY OF WASTE SALVAGED
ESTIMATED
TONS
(TONNES)
ACTUAL
TONS
(TONNES)
(C)
QUANTITY OF WASTE RECYCLED
FORM CWM-8: DEMOLITION WASTE REDUCTION PROGRESS REPORT
TOTAL QUANTITY
OF WASTE
RECOVERED
TONS (TONNES)
(D = B + C)
TOTAL QUANTITY
OF WASTE
RECOVERED
%
(D / A x 100)
February 12, 2014
SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplemental General
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Inspection procedures.
Project Record Documents.
Operation and maintenance manuals.
Warranties.
Instruction of Owner's personnel.
Final cleaning.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list).
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.
Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,
Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Complete comprehensive inspections and startup testing of systems and components.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
Complete final cleaning requirements.
Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion including form
CO-13.2a. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion,
form CO-13.1a, after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 7700 - 1
February 12, 2014
additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate
will be issued.
1.
2.
1.4
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected. Contractor will be responsible for all costs incurred
by the Architect/Engineer and Owner for re-inspections in excess of one that are necessary as a result of the Contractor's failure to attain Substantial Completion.
Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.
This does not relieve the Contractor from complying with the requirements of the Construction Documents.
FINAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance including form CO-13.2
at least five (5) days prior to the Final Completion date. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that
must be completed or corrected before Certificate of Completion, form CO-13.1, will be issued.
1.
1.5
Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be
completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy
of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems.
Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as
incomplete is completed or corrected. Contractor will be responsible for all costs incurred
by the Architect/Engineer and Owner for re-inspections in excess of one that are necessary as a result of the Contractor's failure to satisfactorily complete all work.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A.
Preparation: Submit list electronically. Include name and identification of each space and area
affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including,
if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
1.
2.
3.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
Include the following information at the top of each page:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Project name.
Date.
Name of Architect
Name of Contractor.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 7700 - 2
February 12, 2014
e.
1.6
Page number.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project
Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents
for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
B.
Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract
Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1.
Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that
shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record
Prints.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable.
Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with
durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one set to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in
Product Data.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are
marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings.
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Record Specifications, where applicable.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued
use and reference.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 7700 - 3
February 12, 2014
1.7
WARRANTIES
A.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
(115-by-280-mm) paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
Prepare two copies of each warranty to be provided to the Owner. Provide additional copies of
each warranty in each set of the operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.
B.
Sustainable Cleaning Products: Use sustainable cleaning materials and products, disposable
janitorial paper products and trash bags as listed in Part 2 above.
C.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
Leave Project clean and ready for Phase 2 construction activities.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 7700 - 4
February 12, 2014
D.
Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.
END OF SECTION 01 7700
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 7700 - 5
February 12, 2014
This page intentionally blank.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
VT PC# R-2014-05
01 7700 - 6
February 12, 2014
SECTION 02 4119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy
requirements, and phasing requirements.
Section 017329 "Cutting and Patching" for cutting and patching procedures.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent
damage, and deliver to Owner ready for reuse.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall
where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and
that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled.
1.4
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A.
1.5
Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
2.
3.
Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid
delays.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
VT PC# R-2014-05
02 4119 - 1
February 12, 2014
4.
5.
1.6
Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed
by selective demolition operations.
Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.
B.
Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures
proposed for protecting individuals and property, for dust control, and for noise control. Indicate
proposed locations and construction of barriers.
C.
Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending
dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's on-site operations are
uninterrupted.
Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.
Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
Use of elevator and stairs.
Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of
Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.
D.
Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for
recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that
recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician
and date refrigerant was recovered.
E.
Warranties: Documentation indicated that existing warranties are still in effect after completion
of selective demolition.
1.7
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.
B.
Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility
licensed to accept hazardous wastes.
1.8
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.9
Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications:
program.
Certified by an EPA-approved certification
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.
B.
Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far
as practical.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
VT PC# R-2014-05
02 4119 - 2
February 12, 2014
C.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
D.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the
Work.
1.
If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify
Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate
contract.
E.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
F.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
1.
Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Regulatory Requirements:
Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
B.
Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.
B.
Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not
guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.
C.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
D.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
3.2
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A.
Existing Services/Systems to Remain:
protect them against damage.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
VT PC# R-2014-05
02 4119 - 3
February 12, 2014
1.
B.
Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in
Section 011000 "Summary."
Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,
disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems
serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1.
2.
3.
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC
systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
3.3
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap
or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same
or compatible piping material.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished
according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
PREPARATION
A.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
3.4
Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
members on the next lower level.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
VT PC# R-2014-05
02 4119 - 4
February 12, 2014
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
3.5
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression
devices during flame-cutting operations.
Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
promptly dispose of off-site.
Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in
Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS
A.
Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at
least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at
perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of
concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.
B.
Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to
remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw
cuts.
C.
Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,
using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
D.
Resilient Floor Coverings:
Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to
recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor
Coverings."
3.6
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled,
or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project
site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management
and Disposal."
B.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
VT PC# R-2014-05
02 4119 - 5
February 12, 2014
3.7
CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 024119
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
VT PC# R-2014-05
02 4119 - 6
February 12, 2014
SECTION 03 3053 - MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design,
placement procedures, and finishes.
Hydraulic-cement-based, polymer modified, self-leveling underlayment for application
below interior floor coverings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Other Action Submittal:
1.
1.4
Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing readymixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production
facilities and equipment.
B.
Comply with the following sections of ACI 301, unless modified by requirements in the Contract
Documents:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
1.5
"General Requirements."
"Formwork and Formwork Accessories."
"Reinforcement and Reinforcement Supports."
"Concrete Mixtures."
"Handling, Placing, and Constructing."
Comply with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor-covering products and
adhesives, to ensure compatibility of products.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
VT PC# R-2014-05
03 3053 - 1
February 12, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
FORMWORK
A.
2.2
Furnish formwork and formwork accessories according to ACI 301.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.
B.
Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.
2.3
CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and
source throughout Project:
1.
B.
Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33, graded, 1-1/2-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
C.
Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M.
2.4
RELATED MATERIALS
A.
2.5
Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or
self-expanding cork.
CURING MATERIALS
A.
Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth or cotton mats.
B.
Water: Potable.
2.6
CONCRETE MIXTURES
A.
Comply with ACI 301 requirements for concrete mixtures.
B.
Normal-Weight Concrete:
follows:
1.
2.
3.
2.7
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.
Prepare design mixes, proportioned according to ACI 301, as
Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days.
Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1/2 inch.
Air Content: Maintain within range permitted by ACI 301. Do not allow air content of
trowel-finished floor slabs to exceed 3 percent.
CONCRETE MIXING
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
VT PC# R-2014-05
03 3053 - 2
February 12, 2014
A.
Ready-Mixed Concrete:
Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.
1.
B.
Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to
ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.
1.
2.
3.
2.8
When air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not
more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.
For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each
additional 1 cu. yd..
Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project
identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water
added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.
HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS
A.
Underlayment: Hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/4 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match
adjacent floor elevations.
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
ARDEX GmbH;K-15 Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete.
BASF Construction Chemicals - Building Systems; Chemrex Self-Leveling Underlayment.
Euclid Chemical Company (The); an RPM company; Level Magic Lightweight.
United State Gypsum Company; Levelrock SLC 300.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/4 to 1/4 inch; or coarse sand as recommended by
underlayment manufacturer.
1.
Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for
underlayment thickness required.
D.
Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F.
E.
Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate,
conditions, and application indicated.
1.
F.
Primer shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for metal
substrates.
1.
Coating shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FORMWORK
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
VT PC# R-2014-05
03 3053 - 3
February 12, 2014
A.
3.2
Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301.
EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
3.3
Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work
attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A.
Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting
reinforcement.
1.
3.4
Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before
placing concrete.
JOINTS
A.
General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.
B.
Construction Joints: Locate and install so strength and appearance of concrete are not
impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.
C.
Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least onefourth of concrete thickness, as follows:
1.
2.
D.
Isolation Joints: Install joint-filler strips at junctions with slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces,
such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.
1.
3.5
Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing
each edge of joint with groover tool to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of
contraction joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover marks on concrete
surfaces.
Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints into concrete when cutting
action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops
random contraction cracks.
Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete
surface, unless otherwise indicated.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A.
Comply with ACI 301for placing concrete.
B.
Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement.
C.
Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
VT PC# R-2014-05
03 3053 - 4
February 12, 2014
3.6
FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A.
3.7
Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and
defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch.
FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES
A.
General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for
concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.
B.
Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or
darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or
bleedwater appears on surface.
1.
C.
3.8
Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations.
Trowel Finish: Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces
exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a
cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system.
CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A.
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 for hotweather protection during curing.
B.
Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
C.
Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a
combination of the following methods:
1.
Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the
following materials:
a.
b.
c.
3.9
Water.
Continuous water-fog spray.
Absorptive cover, water saturated and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete
surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
INSTALLING HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance.
1.
B.
Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to
prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.
Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
VT PC# R-2014-05
03 3053 - 5
February 12, 2014
C.
Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil,
and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.
1.
Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with
installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate
of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
D.
Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Application: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and
intercoat adhesion.
At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to
continue through underlayment.
F.
Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
G.
Apply underlayment to produce uniform, surface in alignment and blending with adjacent
surfaces.
1.
2.
Apply a final layer without aggregate to product surface.
Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
H.
Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination
during application and curing processes.
I.
Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing
by underlayment manufacturer.
J.
Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including
areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.
K.
Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.
3.10
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests: Perform according to ACI 301.
1.
3.11
A.
Testing Frequency: One composite sample shall be obtained for each day's pour of each
concrete mix exceeding 5 cu. yd. but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional
50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof.
REPAIRS
Remove and replace concrete that does not comply with requirements in this Section.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
VT PC# R-2014-05
03 3053 - 6
February 12, 2014
END OF SECTION 03 3053
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
VT PC# R-2014-05
03 3053 - 7
February 12, 2014
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
VT PC# R-2014-05
03 3053 - 8
February 12, 2014
SECTION 05 4000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Load-bearing wall framing under new concrete ramps.
Composite floor deck.
Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud
framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
C.
1.4
Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing;
fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.
Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing,
bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.
Include layout and types of steel floor deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing
channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to
other construction
Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel framing.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or in-house
testing with calibrated test equipment indicating steel sheet complies with requirements,
including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical
requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
VT PC# R-2014-05
05 4000 - 1
February 12, 2014
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other
damage during delivery, storage, and handling.
B.
Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof
covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
ClarkDietrich Building Systems, Inc.
Craco Mfg., Inc.
MarinoWARE.
MBA Building Supplies, Inc.
Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc.
Steel Structural Systems.
Super Stud Building Products, Inc.
Telling Industries, LLC.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements," to design cold-formed steel framing.
B.
Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design
loads within limits and under conditions indicated.
1.
Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections
greater than the following:
a.
2.
C.
Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the
insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure,
connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects
when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F.
Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the wall
height under a horizontal load of 5 lbf/sq. ft..
Wall Studs: AISI S211.
Headers: AISI S212.
Lateral Design: AISI S213.
AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply
with AISI S100 and AISI S200.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
VT PC# R-2014-05
05 4000 - 2
February 12, 2014
1.
E.
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.3
AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck
according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members."
Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of
another qualified testing agency.
COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A.
Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and
coating weight as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of
grade and coating as follows:
1.
2.
2.4
Grade: As required by structural performance.
Coating: G60, A60, AZ50, or GF30.
Grade: As required by structural performance.
Coating: G60.
LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A.
Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched,
with stiffened flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated,
unpunched, with straight flanges, and as follows:
1.
2.
2.5
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch.
Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch.
Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches.
COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK
A.
Composite Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and
interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel
Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G60 zinc
coating.
Profile Depth: As required by structural performance.
Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As required by structural performance.
Span Condition: Simple span.
Accessories:
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
VT PC# R-2014-05
05 4000 - 3
February 12, 2014
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.6
General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with
requirements indicated
Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbonsteel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.
Pour Stops: Steel sheet of same material as deck panels and of thickness and profile
required.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B, with dry film containing a
minimum of 94 percent zinc dust by weight.
Hanger Tabs: Manufacture’s standard piercing steel sheet hanger attachment device for
floor deck panels.
FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A.
Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade,
Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.
B.
Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise
indicated, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
2.7
Supplementary framing.
Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.
Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts.
ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
A.
Steel Shapes and Clips:
ASTM A 123/A 123M.
B.
Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or
strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or
equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified
testing agency.
C.
Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated
from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICCES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190
conducted by a qualified testing agency.
D.
Mechanical Fasteners:
steel drill screws.
1.
E.
2.8
ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to
ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping,
Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.
Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B.
B.
Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's
standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
VT PC# R-2014-05
05 4000 - 4
February 12, 2014
2.9
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards,
manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.
1.
2.
3.
Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.
Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,
pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing
members is not permitted.
a.
b.
4.
Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw
penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.
Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin
fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.
B.
Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection
stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.
C.
Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum
allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:
1.
2.
Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from
plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-ofsquare tolerance of 1/8 inch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of
foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field
assembled.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
VT PC# R-2014-05
05 4000 - 5
February 12, 2014
B.
Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written
instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C.
Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting
structure.
1.
D.
Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush,
even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between
fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.
Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with
connections securely fastened.
1.
2.
Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,
or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
a.
b.
Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.
Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and
complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.
E.
Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track
or tension members.
F.
Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in
intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place,
undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent
connections to framing are secured.
G.
Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame
both sides of joints.
H.
Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's
approved or standard punched openings.
I.
Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a
maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:
1.
3.4
Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan
location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of
sheathing or other finishing materials.
LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A.
Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and
securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows:
1.
B.
Anchor Spacing: As shown on Shop Drawings.
Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch between
the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and
bottom tracks. Space studs as follows:
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
VT PC# R-2014-05
05 4000 - 6
February 12, 2014
1.
Stud Spacing: 12 inches.
C.
Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or
warped surfaces and similar configurations.
D.
Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot
be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.
E.
Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting
structure as indicated.
F.
Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners,
clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wallframing system.
3.5
FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface
diameter indicated and as follows:
1.
2.
C.
Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal.
Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds an
average of 12 inches apart, but not more than 18 inches apart.
Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels
between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of half of the span or 36 inches, and as
follows:
1.
D.
Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and
commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and
requirements in this Section.
Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately
aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not
stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.
Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or
deflection.
Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work
projecting through or adjacent to deck.
Coordinate reinforcing requirements of openings in first paragraph below with applicable
Sections.
Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,
continuity of deck, and support of other work.
Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.
Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.
End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2
inches, with end joints as follows:
1.
End Joints: Lapped.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
VT PC# R-2014-05
05 4000 - 7
February 12, 2014
E.
Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting
structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck,
according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and
sides of deck.
3.6
REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A.
Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and
installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and
manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
Installer that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 05 4000
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
VT PC# R-2014-05
05 4000 - 8
February 12, 2014
SECTION 057300 - DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Stainless-steel decorative handrails.
Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring
railings.
Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for metal backing for anchoring railings.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-sided
floor areas and for pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall protection.
COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver items to Project
site in time for installation.
B.
Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support
railings temporarily by any means that do not meet structural performance requirements.
1.5
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
2.
Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components.
Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection:
For products involving selection of color, texture, or
design, including mechanical finishes.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
057300 - 1
February 12, 2014
1.6
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with
railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable
design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:
1.
B.
Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength.
Structural Performance: Railings, including attachment to building construction, shall withstand
the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under
conditions indicated:
1.
Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction.
Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.
Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
METALS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller
marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.
B.
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.3
Provide cast-metal brackets with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded
hanger bolt.
STAINLESS STEEL
A.
Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.
B.
Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 304.
C.
Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20.
2.4
FASTENERS
A.
Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1.
2.
Stainless-Steel Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
057300 - 2
February 12, 2014
B.
Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class
required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction
indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.
C.
Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching railings to
other work unless otherwise indicated.
1.
D.
Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the
design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
based on ICC-ES AC193 or ICC-ES AC308.
1.
2.5
Provide square or hex socket flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless
otherwise indicated.
Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
B.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
C.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.
Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
2.6
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to
support structural loads.
B.
Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain
structural value of joined pieces.
C.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on
exposed surfaces.
D.
Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
E.
Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide
weep holes where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous locations.
F.
Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
G.
Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
057300 - 3
February 12, 2014
H.
Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
I.
Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.
Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
1.
J.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint
Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds; no evidence of a welded joint.
Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is
manufacturer's standard splicing method.
Form changes in direction as follows:
1.
2.
As detailed.
By bending to smallest radius that will not result in distortion of railing member.
K.
Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain
cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or
otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.
L.
Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
M.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.7
At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crushresistant fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural
supports and to prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipment.
C.
Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of
railings.
2.8
STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A.
Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.
B.
Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.
1.
Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
057300 - 4
February 12, 2014
C.
Directional Satin Finish: No. 4.
D.
When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter
and leave surfaces chemically clean.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that locations
of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and
mark locations if not already done.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.
B.
Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in
location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.
1.
2.
3.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other
means without further cutting or fitting.
Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet.
Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet.
C.
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
D.
Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.
E.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for
securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.
3.3
RAILING CONNECTIONS
A.
3.4
Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components.
Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is
performed in the shop or in the field.
ATTACHING RAILINGS
A.
Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets. Provide brackets with 1-1/2-inch clearance from
inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not
indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.
1.
2.
Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural
loads.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
057300 - 5
February 12, 2014
B.
Secure wall brackets to building construction as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger
or lag bolts.
For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into wood backing between studs.
Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.
For steel-framed partitions, fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed steel
reinforcements using self-tapping screws of size and type required to support structural
loads.
CLEANING
A.
3.6
Clean stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with clean water,
and wiping dry.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective
coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of
Substantial Completion.
B.
Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of
correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required
alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
END OF SECTION 05 7300
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
057300 - 6
February 12, 2014
SECTION 06 1053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Division 06 Section “Cultured Marble Fabrications” for blocking requirements for
installation of cultured marble fabrications, including ledger blocking for bathtubs.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in
least dimension.
B.
Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1.
2.
1.4
NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association.
SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1.
2.
3.
1.5
Wood blocking and nailers.
Wood furring.
Plywood backing panels.
Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.
For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content
of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
VT PC# R-2014-05
06 1053 - 1
February 12, 2014
A.
Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.
Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide
for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.2
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on
end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade
compliance issued by grading agency.
Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed
sizes for dry lumber.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior
construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in
contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.
1.
2.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.
For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical
formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise
adversely affect finishes.
B.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
C.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board
of Review.
1.
D.
For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of
each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by
inspection agency.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1.
2.
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
VT PC# R-2014-05
06 1053 - 2
February 12, 2014
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry
or concrete walls.
Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawl spaces or
unexcavated areas.
Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with
requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with firetest-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test
method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame
spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of
significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with
the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any
time during the test.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fireretardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to
accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where
indicated.
Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less
when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where
exterior type is not indicated.
Design Value Adjustment Factors:
Treated lumber shall be tested according
ASTM D 5664, and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to
ASTM D 6841.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A.
General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other
construction, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
Blocking.
Nailers.
Furring.
B.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any
species.
C.
For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any
of the following species and grades:
1.
D.
Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.
For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber
of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will
interfere with its attachment and purpose.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
VT PC# R-2014-05
06 1053 - 3
February 12, 2014
E.
For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.
F.
For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
2.5
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A.
2.6
Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, fire-retardant treated, in thickness
indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.
FASTENERS
A.
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified
in this article for material and manufacture.
1.
Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated,
or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying
with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B.
Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.
C.
Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.
D.
Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E.
Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing:
manufacturer for material being fastened.
F.
Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
G.
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where
indicated, flat washers.
H.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in
unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as
determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and
inspecting agency.
1.
2.
2.7
ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw
Material:
Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
Class Fe/Zn 5.
Material:
Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and
ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Adhesives for Gluing Furring to Concrete or Masonry:
Formulation complying with
ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
1.
Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
VT PC# R-2014-05
06 1053 - 4
February 12, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit
carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring,
nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other
construction.
B.
Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install
continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
C.
Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame
Construction," unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring
backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking
of testing agency exposed to view.
E.
Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.
F.
Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
1.
H.
Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where
framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips
not more than 16 inches o.c.
Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated
and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96
inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close
furred spaces.
Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at
ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not
inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width
as framing members and 2-inch nominal thickness.
Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to
limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below
partitions.
Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more
than 20 feet o.c.
I.
Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or
optimum joint arrangement.
J.
Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
VT PC# R-2014-05
06 1053 - 5
February 12, 2014
1.
2.
K.
Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying
with the following:
1.
2.
3.
L.
3.2
Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.
Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family
Dwellings.
Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails
snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.
WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A.
Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to
shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate
locations with other work involved.
B.
Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces
unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not
less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness
of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.
D.
Coordinate with Division 06 Section “Cultured Marble Fabrications” for ledger blocking at
bathtub-shower unit, in addition to other cultured marble fabrications to be installed.
3.3
WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A.
Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required
for tolerance of finish work.
B.
Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal-size furring
horizontally at 24 inches o.c.
C.
Furring to Receive Gypsum Board or Plaster Lath:
vertically at 16 inches o.c.
3.4
Install 1-by-2-inch nominal-size furring
PROTECTION
A.
Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
VT PC# R-2014-05
06 1053 - 6
February 12, 2014
B.
Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous
rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by
spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION 06 1053
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
VT PC# R-2014-05
06 1053 - 7
February 12, 2014
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
VT PC# R-2014-05
06 1053 - 8
February 12, 2014
SECTION 06 2023 - INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Interior trim, including extension of existing window casings.
Brochures storage rack.
Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other
carpentry work not exposed to view.
Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for priming and backpriming of interior finish carpentry.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
MDF: Medium-density fiberboard.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials, dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application
details.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air
circulation. Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely
anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
B.
Deliver interior finish carpentry materials only when environmental conditions meet
requirements specified for installation areas. If interior finish carpentry materials must be stored
in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions meet requirements
specified for installation areas.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
VT PC# R-2014-05
06 2023 - 1
February 12, 2014
1.7
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry materials until
building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and
HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy
levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and the following grading rules:
1.
B.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade,
species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
1.
C.
NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association, "Standard Grading Rules for
Northeastern Lumber."
For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade
stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency.
MDF: ANSI A208.2-2009, Grade 15S, “Exterior” or “Industrial Grade,” made with binder
containing no urea-formaldehyde resin.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
D.
CMI Jeld-Wen, Inc.; Extira exterior treated wood composite panels.
Sierra Pine; Medex MDF Panels.
Tack-Board Materials:
1.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
a.
b.
2.
Natural-Cork Sheet: Seamless, single-layer, compressed fine-grain cork sheet; bulletin
board quality; face sanded for natural finish with surface-burning characteristics
indicated.
a.
3.
Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
Thickness: 1/4 inch.
Plastic-Impregnated Cork Sheet: Seamless, homogeneous, self-sealing sheet consisting
of granulated cork, linseed oil, resin binders, and dry pigments that are mixed and
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
VT PC# R-2014-05
06 2023 - 2
February 12, 2014
calendared onto fabric backing; with washable vinyl finish and integral color
throughout with surface-burning characteristics indicated.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
2)
3)
b.
Dimensions:
1)
2)
3)
c.
2.2
Forbo Flooring, Inc.; Bulletin Board; contact Garland Wiltshire, (804) 9014258.
PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company.
Waltalkers; Tac-Wall.
Thickness: 1/4-inch.
Widths: 48 and 72 inches, cut down as required to meet installation
conditions.
Length: Continuous.
Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer.
INTERIOR TRIM
A.
Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted Finish):
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Species and Grade: Yellow poplar; A Finish; NHLA.
Maximum Moisture Content: 15 percent.
Finger Jointing: Not allowed.
Face Surface: Saw textured.
Optional Material: Primed MDF, “Exterior” or “Industrial Grade,” of same actual
dimensions as lumber indicated may be used in lieu of lumber.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type,
size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment,
concealed where possible.
B.
Multipurpose Construction Adhesive: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is
recommended for indicated use by adhesive manufacturer.
1.
2.4
Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
FABRICATION
A.
Back out or kerf backs of the following members except those with ends exposed in finished
work:
1.
B.
Interior standing and running trim except shoe and crown molds.
Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch radius and edges of
lumber 1 inch or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch radius.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
VT PC# R-2014-05
06 2023 - 3
February 12, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture
damaged, and mold damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B.
Before installing interior finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in
installation areas for a minimum of 24 hours.
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately
seasoned, too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements, or with defective surfaces,
sizes, or patterns.
B.
Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
3.4
Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as
recommended by manufacturer.
Where face fastening is unavoidable, countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand
unless otherwise indicated.
Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches for level and plumb. Install adjoining interior
finish carpentry with 1/32-inch maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch
maximum offset for reveal installation.
Coordinate interior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it.
Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate interior finish
carpentry.
Seal cut MDF edges and joints, and glue to adjoining members.
STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A.
Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths
of lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches long, except where necessary.
Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns, miter at
outside corners, and cope at inside corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact
throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to
provide uniform thickness across joints where necessary for alignment.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
VT PC# R-2014-05
06 2023 - 4
February 12, 2014
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Match color and grain pattern of trim for transparent finish (stain or clear finish) across
joints.
Install trim after gypsum-board joint finishing operations are completed.
Install without splitting; drill pilot holes before fastening where necessary to prevent
splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastener heads on
exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.6
Replace interior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Interior
finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no
evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
CLEANING
A.
3.7
Clean interior finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Restore damaged or
soiled areas and touch up factory-applied finishes, if any.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction.
B.
Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 06 2023
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
VT PC# R-2014-05
06 2023 - 5
February 12, 2014
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
VT PC# R-2014-05
06 2023 - 6
February 12, 2014
SECTION 07 8413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system.
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
1.
1.4
1.5
Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.
Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.
Include location and design
Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting
agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, and when
confirmed with Authorities having jurisdiction, submit illustration, with modifications
marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as
an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.
a.
The Contractor shall research testing agency documents such as the UL Online
Certifications Directory or the UL Fire Resistance Directory for compliant
assemblies.
b.
If no such assemblies can be found, the Contractor shall submit the proposed
“engineering judgment” to the Architect for review. If the Architect agrees, the
Architect will submit the proposed “engineering judgment” to BCOM under cover of
a sealed statement that it is the Architect’s opinion that the proposed “engineering
judgment” complies with the VUSBC.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B.
Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in
compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
VT PC# R-2014-05
07 8413 - 1
February 12, 2014
A.
Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the
necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified
requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to
Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following
requirements:
1.
2.
Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in
"Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following
requirements:
a.
b.
Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing
and inspecting agency.
Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations
listed by the following:
1)
1.6
UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate
temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when
substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B.
Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural
means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.
1.7
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration
firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.
B.
Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate
penetration firestopping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Grace Construction Products.
Hilti, Inc.
Specified Technologies Inc.
3M Fire Protection Products.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
VT PC# R-2014-05
07 8413 - 2
February 12, 2014
5.
6.
2.2
Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.
USG Corporation.
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
A.
Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according
to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fireresistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be
compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if
any.
B.
Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings
determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of
0.01-inch wg.
1.
2.
C.
Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined
per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch
wg.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Horizontal assemblies include floors floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes of
roof/ceiling assemblies.
F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated.
T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions
penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.
VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping that complies with the following limits for VOC
content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1.
2.
3.
E.
Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire partitions.
F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.
Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to
install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by
penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency
for firestopping indicated.
1.
Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation.
Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to
prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
Fire-rated form board.
Fillers for sealants.
Temporary forming materials.
Substrate primers.
Collars.
Steel sleeves.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
VT PC# R-2014-05
07 8413 - 3
February 12, 2014
2.3
FILL MATERIALS
A.
Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during
exposure to moisture.
B.
Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with
intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.
C.
Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric
sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.
D.
Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents,
inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.
E.
Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil
on one side.
F.
Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement,
fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a
nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.
G.
Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled
with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant
additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect
pillows/bags from being easily removed.
H.
Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand
and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
I.
Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of
grade indicated below:
1.
2.4
Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal
surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless
indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions.
MIXING
A.
For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping
manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required),
type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other
items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
VT PC# R-2014-05
07 8413 - 4
February 12, 2014
B.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to
comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.3
Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign
materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.
Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces
capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose
particles remaining from cleaning operation.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that
manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not
allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation
instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.
B.
Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during
their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths
required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1.
C.
Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1.
2.
3.
3.4
After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming
materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping
Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.
Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and
penetrating items.
For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels.
Attach labels
permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be
visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical
fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to
surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb.
Management of Any Damage."
Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
Date of installation.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
Notify Building
VT PC# R-2014-05
07 8413 - 5
February 12, 2014
5.
6.
3.5
Manufacturer's name.
Installer's name.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers
and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that
penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove
damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems
complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 07 8413
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
VT PC# R-2014-05
07 8413 - 6
February 12, 2014
SECTION 07 9200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Silicone joint sealants.
Urethane joint sealants.
Latex joint sealants.
Preformed joint sealants.
Acoustical joint sealants.
Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for masonry control and expansion joint fillers and
gaskets.
Division 08 Sections "Glazing" and “Fire-Resistant Glazing” for glazing sealants.
Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints.
Division 09 Section "Tiling" for sealing tile joints.
Division 09 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters
with acoustical sealant.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data:
instructions.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples of
joint sealants in the field in actual joints between different materials or in mockups. Allow for
three field sample color choices for each type and color of sealant. Final selections will be made
from in-field samples.
D.
Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
For each joint-sealant product indicated, including installation and storage
Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.
Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.
Joint-sealant formulation.
Joint-sealant color.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
JOINT SEALANTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
07 9200 - 1
February 12, 2014
F.
Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.
G.
Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate:
sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.
H.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
I.
Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports:
indicating the following:
1.
2.
For each
From sealant manufacturer,
Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.
Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate
preparation needed for adhesion.
J.
Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation
methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in
"Preconstruction Testing" Article.
K.
Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.
L.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations:
manufacturer.
C.
Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.
1.
2.
Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single
Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.
Test according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements
specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic
movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.
D.
Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are
indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation
methods specified in this Section. Final color selections will be made from mockups or in-field
samples.
E.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.
1.5
Include all Contractors using sealant at interfacing materials.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
JOINT SEALANTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
07 9200 - 2
February 12, 2014
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.6
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
When joint substrates are wet.
Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or
replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in
this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
Special Manufacturer's Warranty:
Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant
manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with
performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
C.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design
or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's
written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.
Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.
Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric
contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS, GENERAL
A.
Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
B.
VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the
weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
1.
2.
3.
C.
Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.
Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.
Low-Emitting Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing
system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
JOINT SEALANTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
07 9200 - 3
February 12, 2014
D.
Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.
1.
Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that
will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing
according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless
otherwise indicated.
E.
Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous
substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have
not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.
F.
Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in
repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.
G.
Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2
SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant ES-1: ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant ES-2: ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
C.
Dow Corning Corporation; 795 or 791.
GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf NB SCS9000 or SilPruf SCS2000.
Pecora Corporation; 864 NST or PCS.
Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant ES-3:
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements:
a.
b.
c.
D.
Dow Corning Corporation; 790; 756 SMS.
Pecora Corporation; 890 or 890FTS.
Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990.
Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2.
Dow Corning Corporation: 758.
Pecora Corporation; 898.
Tremco, Incorporated; Tremsil 200.
Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant ES-3a: ASTM C 920,
Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
BASF Building Systems; Omniplus.
Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
JOINT SEALANTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
07 9200 - 4
February 12, 2014
c.
2.3
Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.
URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant ES-4: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, for Use NT, paintable.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant:
Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.
1.
ASTM C 920,
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic SL 1.
Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-201.
Polymeric Systems, Inc.; Flexiprene 952.
Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 45.
Multicomponent, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant ES-6: ASTM C 920, Type M,
Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.4
Type S,
BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1 or Sonolastic Ultra.
Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 1a.
Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116.
Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant ES-5:
Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.
1.
D.
ASTM C 920.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
C.
BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic TX1.
Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL.
Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic or Vulkem 116.
BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP 2.
Pecora Corporation; Dynatred.
Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 2c NS or Sikaflex 2c EZ Mix.
Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 227.
LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Latex Joint Sealant LS-1:
Grade NF.
1.
Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
JOINT SEALANTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
07 9200 - 5
February 12, 2014
2.5
PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell
foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. and
impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes
in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive
adhesive and covered with protective wrapping.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.6
EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V.
Schul International, Inc.; Sealtite or Sealtite 50N.
Willseal USA, LLC; Willseal 150 or Willseal 250.
ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS
A.
Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant
complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.7
Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.
Tremco Corporation; SHEETROCK
USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A.
General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated
by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material) or Type B (bicellular
material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise
contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
2.8
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate
tests and field tests.
B.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.
C.
Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
JOINT SEALANTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
07 9200 - 6
February 12, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant performance.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1.
2.
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.
Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.
Porous joint substrates include the following:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint
sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.3
Concrete.
Masonry.
Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
Metal.
Glass.
Porcelain enamel.
Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.
B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as
indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
C.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after
tooling without disturbing joint seal.
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
JOINT SEALANTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
07 9200 - 7
February 12, 2014
A.
General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
B.
Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C.
Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1.
2.
3.
Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application
and replace them with dry materials.
D.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between
sealants and backs of joints.
E.
Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time
backings are installed:
1.
Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2.
Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.
3.
Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
F.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.
Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per
Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.
a.
5.
Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.
Do not use tooling agents.
G.
Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after
removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at ends,
turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply heat to
sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
H.
Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal
construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a
continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at
perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's
written recommendations.
I.
Provide double sealant joints at all exterior applications for the installation of storefront,
curtainwall, windows, louvers and doors.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
JOINT SEALANTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
07 9200 - 8
February 12, 2014
3.4
CLEANING
A.
3.5
Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and
of products in which joints occur.
PROTECTION
A.
3.6
Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.
JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
B.
Joint-Sealant Application JS-2: Exterior joints between metal panels.
1.
Joint Sealant: Single non-sag neutral-curing silicone sealant ES-1.
C.
Joint-Sealant Application JS-3: Exterior joints within storefront framing systems.
1.
Joint Sealant: Single non-sag neutral-curing silicone sealant ES-1.
D.
Joint-Sealant Application JS-4: Exterior vertical construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.
1.
Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant ES-2.
E.
Joint-Sealant Application JS-6: Exterior vertical control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
1.
Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant ES-2.
F.
Joint-Sealant Application JS-8: Exterior vertical joints between different materials listed above.
1.
Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant ES-2.
G.
Joint-Sealant Application JS-9: Exterior perimeter joints between materials listed above and
frames of doors, windows, and louvers.
1.
Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant ES-2.
H.
Joint-Sealant Application JS-10: Exterior control and expansion joints in ceilings and other
overhead surfaces.
1.
Joint Sealant: Single-component neutral-curing silicone sealant ES-2.
I.
Joint-Sealant Application JS-11: Exterior horizontal non-traffic and traffic isolation and
contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
1.
Joint Sealant: Single-component pourable urethane sealant ES-5.
3.7
INTERIOR JOINT SEALANT SCHEDULE
A.
Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.
B.
Interior joint sealants and associated primers must comply with VOC limits indicated n Part 2.
Use specified and scheduled products only.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
JOINT SEALANTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
07 9200 - 9
February 12, 2014
C.
Joint-Sealant Application JS-21: Vertical control and expansion joints on exposed interior
surfaces of exterior walls.
1.
Joint-Sealant: Single-component non-sag urethane sealant ES-4, paintable.
D.
Joint-Sealant Application JS-22: Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings.
1.
Joint-Sealant: Single-component non-sag urethane sealant ES-4.
E.
Joint-Sealant Application JS-23: Interior ceramic and dimension stone tile expansion, control,
contraction and isolation joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.
1.
Joint-Sealant: Single-component pourable urethane sealant ES-5.
F.
Joint-Sealant Application JS-24: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls,
floors, and counters.
1.
Joint-Sealant: Single-component mildew-resistant neutral-curing silicone sealant ES-3.
G.
Joint-Sealant Application JS-25: Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of prefinished interior walls
and partitions.
1.
Joint-Sealant: Single-component non-sag urethane sealant ES-4.
H.
Joint-Sealant Application JS-26: Perimeter joints between prefinished interior wall surfaces and
frames of interior doors, windows and elevator entrances.
1.
Joint-Sealant: Single-component non-sag urethane sealant ES-4.
I.
Joint-Sealant Application JS-27: Perimeter joints between painted interior wall surfaces and
frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator entrances.
1.
Joint-Sealant: Latex sealant LS-1
2.
Joint-Sealant color: Paintable white.
J.
Joint-Sealant Application JS-28: Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal
nontraffic surfaces.
1.
Joint Sealant: Acoustical.
K.
Joint-Sealant Application JS-29: Interior joints to fill existing cracks in concrete floor slab.
1.
Joint-Sealant: Multicomponent, non-sag, urethane sealant ES-6.
END OF SECTION 07 9200
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
JOINT SEALANTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
07 9200 - 10
February 12, 2014
SECTION 08 1113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors.
Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting” and “High-Performance Coatings.”
DEFINITIONS
A.
Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMMHMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.
B.
Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
1.5
Standard hollow metal doors and frames.
Elevations of each door type.
Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses.
Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.
Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses
Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.
Details of each different wall opening condition.
Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.
Details of accessories.
Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.
Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of
supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.
Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1113 - 1
February 12, 2014
A.
1.6
Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and
Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.
1.
Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.
B.
Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded
to jambs and mullions.
C.
Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a
vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch-igh wood blocking. Do
not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Field Measurements:
fabrication.
Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings,
templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor
bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company.
HMF Express.
Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames.
The MPI Group, LLC.
Pioneer Industries, Inc.
Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
INTERIOR FRAMES
A.
Construct interior frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication,
hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.
B.
Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3..
1.
Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1113 - 2
February 12, 2014
2.
Frames:
a.
b.
3.
2.3
Materials: Uncoated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch
Construction: Full profile welded. Knock-down frames not allowed under any
circumstances.
Exposed Finish: Prime.
EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials,
fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as
specified.
B.
Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3.
1.
2.
Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.
Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
Thickness: 1-3/4 inches
Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum
A40 coating.
Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.
Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,
polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's
discretion.
Core: Polyurethane.
1)
3.
Frames:
a.
b.
4.
2.4
Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance
value (R-value) of not less than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested
according to ASTM C 1363.
Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch with
minimum A40coating.
Construction: Face welded.
Exposed Finish: Prime.
FRAME ANCHORS
A.
Jamb Anchors:
1.
2.
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches
wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.
Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch thick.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1113 - 3
February 12, 2014
2.5
MATERIALS
A.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.
B.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for
exposed applications.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
D.
Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Zcoating designation; mill
phosphatized.
1.
For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M
or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
E.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for
attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.
G.
Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches as measured according to
ASTM C 143/C 143M.
H.
Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 8000 "Glazing."
I.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mildry film thickness per
coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components,
and other deleterious impurities.
2.6
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical,
fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site,
clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
B.
Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.
C.
Hollow-Metal Doors:
1.
2.
D.
Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit
moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with inverted closures of same material as
face sheets.
Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
as frames.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1113 - 4
February 12, 2014
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Sidelight and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face
seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at
crossings and to jambs by butt welding.
Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per
anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at
bottoms of jambs.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a.
Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c., to match coursing, and as
follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of
frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1)
2)
3)
4)
c.
6.
Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches
or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24
inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top
and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers
as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.
a.
b.
Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
E.
Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.
F.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to
SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1.
2.
G.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted
door hardware.
Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation
of hollow-metal work for hardware.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where
indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1113 - 5
February 12, 2014
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.7
Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollowmetal work.
Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each
glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors
and frames.
Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.
Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation
types indicated.
STEEL FINISHES
A.
Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
1.
2.8
Shop Primer, Interior Doors and Frames: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and
chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer
manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite
prolonged exposure.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame
installation.
C.
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to
performance of the Work.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding,
filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed
faces.
B.
Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness,
alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:
1.
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees
from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1113 - 6
February 12, 2014
2.
3.
4.
C.
3.3
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to
plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel
lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from
head to floor.
Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door
hardware.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in
place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.
1.
Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and
secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling
limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously;
grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.
Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed.
Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout
containing antifreezing agents.
Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.
Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between
frames and masonry with grout.
In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion
anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1113 - 7
February 12, 2014
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow
metal manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
3.4
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90
degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line
parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on
parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.
Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not
more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.
C.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
D.
Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
END OF SECTION 08 1113
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1113 - 8
February 12, 2014
SECTION 08 1416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
Factory finishing flush wood doors.
Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
Division 08 Section “Hollow Metal Doors and Frames” for HM metal frames.
Division 08 Section “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts” for aluminum frames.
Division 08 Section “Door Hardware.”
Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazed view panels in flush wood doors.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction
and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
other pertinent data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors.
D.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for
each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of
three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished
work.
Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edges
representing actual materials to be used.
a.
Provide samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1416 - 1
February 12, 2014
b.
c.
1.4
Provide samples for each color, texture, and pattern of plastic laminate required.
Finish veneer-faced door samples with same materials proposed for factoryfinished doors.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.
B.
Quality Standard:
In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A,
"Architectural Wood Flush Doors."
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.
C.
Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the
remainder of the construction period.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section.
Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch
span.
Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or
replacement of defective doors.
Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1416 - 2
February 12, 2014
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
Eggers Industries.
Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company.
Lambton Doors.
Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company.
Oshkosh Architectural Door Company.
VT Industries Inc.
DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A.
Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that
do not contain urea formaldehyde.
B.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Particleboard-Core Doors:
1.
2.
D.
Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2 or
M-2, except for density.
Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate
through-bolting hardware.
Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors (Contractor Option):
1.
Structural Composite Lumber:
formaldehyde resin. .
a.
b.
2.3
WDMA I.S.10, made with binder containing no urea-
Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf.
Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf.
VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A.
Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces.
Species: Select white birch.
Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced).
Match between Veneer Leaves: Slip match.
Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match.
Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by
mullions.
Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building. Corridordoor faces do not need to match where they are separated by 10 feet or more.
Exposed Vertical Edges: Same species as faces.
Core: Particleboard or Structural composite lumber, Contactor’s choice.
Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1416 - 3
February 12, 2014
2.4
LIGHT FRAMES
A.
Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads
as follows unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
2.5
Wood Species: Same species as door faces.
Profile: Flush rectangular beads.
FABRICATION
A.
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1.
B.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply
with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings,
DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.
1.
2.
C.
Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment
before factory machining.
Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for
pairs of fire-rated doors.
Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
1.
2.
2.6
Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with
applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,
including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,
before finishing.
1.
Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be
omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.
B.
Finish doors at factory.
C.
Transparent Finish:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Grade: Custom.
Finish: WDMA OP-4 conversion varnish.
Staining: None required.
Effect: Open-grain finish.
Sheen: Satin.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1416 - 4
February 12, 2014
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1.
2.
B.
3.2
Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
Reject doors with defects.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
B.
Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1.
3.3
Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
ADJUSTING
A.
Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B.
Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.
Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence
of repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 08 1416
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1416 - 5
February 12, 2014
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1416 - 6
February 12, 2014
SECTION 08 1743 - ACRYLIC-MODIFIED POLYESTER (AMP) DOOR ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes Acrylic modified polyester (AMP) doors with aluminum frames.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for installation of joint sealants installed with
aluminum-framed systems and for sealants to the extent not specified in this Section.
Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for hardware to the extent not specified in this
Section.
Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing requirements to the extent not specified in this
Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance
Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility
Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
B.
AMP Door: Door assembly with Acrylic-Modified Polyester face panels, aluminum alloy stile
and rails, and poured-in-place urethane core.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminumframed systems.
B.
LEED Submittals:
1.
2.
Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation
indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content.
Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.
Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants used inside of the
weatherproofing system, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.
C.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
D.
Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACRYLIC-MODIFIED POLYESTER (AMP) DOOR ASSEMBLIES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1743 - 1
February 12, 2014
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
B.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems with AMP doors to include in maintenance
manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Capable of assuming engineering responsibility and performing work of
this Section and who is acceptable to manufacturer.
B.
Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics
are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction
testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.9
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed
systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Assembly Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems and AMP doors that do not comply
with requirements or that deteriorate as defined in this Section within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
B.
Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.
Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.
Warranty Period: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components on which finishes fail within specified warranty period. Warranty does
not include normal weathering.
1.
Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACRYLIC-MODIFIED POLYESTER (AMP) DOOR ASSEMBLIES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1743 - 2
February 12, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following
performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:
1.
2.
3.
Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,
story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
Failure includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
B.
Deflection of Framing Members:
1.
2.
C.
Deflection exceeding specified limits.
Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movements to glazing.
Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements.
Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
Sealant failure.
Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6
inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or
an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is
less.
Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch,
whichever is smaller.
Structural-Test Performance:
ASTM E 330 as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to
When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and
permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds.
D.
Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed
glazing and framing areas of 1.00 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to
ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..
E.
Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not
evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load
design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..
F.
Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures.
Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain
and nighttime-sky heat loss.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACRYLIC-MODIFIED POLYESTER (AMP) DOOR ASSEMBLIES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1743 - 3
February 12, 2014
1.
Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
G.
Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing
areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to
AAMA 1503.
H.
AMP Doors
1.
2.
Thermal Transmission (exterior doors): "U" value of not more than 0.07 (BTU/Hr. x sf x
degrees F.) per AAMA 1503.01.
Provide AMP doors and panels with the following performance:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: The design for aluminum-framed systems and acrylic modified
polyester doors is based on Special-Lite AMP Flush entrance system. Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.3
Special-Lite, Inc., SL-18 Door.
Tubelite Inc.
Vistawall Architectural Products, Colonial Door.
Source Limitations: Obtain all components of AMP door assembly system, including framing,
door and accessories, from single manufacturer.
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum:
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying
with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and
pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPCSP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Impact Strength: ASTM D 256 - Nominal value of 2.6 foot-pounds per inch of
notch.
Water Absorption, ASTM D 570: Nominal value of .0.63 percent after 24 hours.
Indentation Hardness, ASTM D 2583: 38.
Abrasion Resistance, Face Sheet, Taber Abrasion Test, 25 Cycles at 1,000 Gram
Weight with CS-17 Wheel: Maximum of 0.022 average weight loss percentage.
Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
FRAMING SYSTEMS
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACRYLIC-MODIFIED POLYESTER (AMP) DOOR ASSEMBLIES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1743 - 4
February 12, 2014
A.
Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness
required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Construction: Thermally improved. Framing members are one-piece members that are
internally slotted at regular intervals.
Welding of framing is not acceptable
Where parallel arm (PA) type closers are to be used, framing system shall include a 5/8”
solid reinforcing bar underneath the stop to accept manufacturer’s standard anchors for
parallel arm plates. Snap-on, unreinforced stops shall not be acceptable where PA type
closers are to be used.
Caulk joints before assembling frame members. Secure joints with fasteners and provide
a hairline butt joint appearance.
Pre-fit doors to frame assembly at factory prior to shipment.
Applied stops for side, transom and borrowed lites and panels, with fasteners exposed on
interior or secure portion only.
Pre-machine and reinforce frame members for hardware in accordance with
manufacturer’s standards and the approved hardware schedule. Factory install hardware.
Install with anchors appropriate for wall conditions to anchor framing to wall materials. A
minimum of five anchors up to 7’-4” on jamb members, and one additional anchor for
each foot over 7’-4”. Secure head and sill members of transom, sidelites and similar
conditions.
Factory preassemble sidelites to the greatest extent possible, mark frame assemblies
according to location.
Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
Glazing Plane: Center.
B.
Brackets and Reinforcements:
Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C.
Fasteners and Accessories:
Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1.
2.
Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural
movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.
Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
D.
Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts,
complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E.
Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
flashing compatible with adjacent materials. Form exposed flashing from sheet aluminum
finished to match framing and of sufficient thickness to maintain a flat appearance without
visible deflection.
F.
Framing System Gaskets and Sealants:
manufacturer for joint type.
1.
2.5
Manufacturer's standard recommended by
Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
GLAZING SYSTEMS
A.
Glass: Uncoated, clear, insulating-glass units made from two lites of 3.0-mm-thick, fully
tempered glass with 1/4-inch interspace, complying with Division 08 Section "Glazing."
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACRYLIC-MODIFIED POLYESTER (AMP) DOOR ASSEMBLIES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1743 - 5
February 12, 2014
B.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types, replaceable, molded or
extruded, that maintain uniform pressure and watertight seal.
C.
Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric types.
2.6
AMP DOORS
A.
Doors: Manufacturer's standard acrylic modified polyester doors, for manual swing operation.
1.
Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.120-inch- thick, acrylic
modified polyester wood grain face sheets. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing
brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods
through an extruded spline.
2.
Face Material:
Fiberglass reinforced acrylic modified polyester, .120" minimum
thickness, with deeply embossed, red oak, wood grained finish. Face sheets to be
manufactured by the resin transfer molding process (RTM) with 30% continuous stand E
glass mat and 20 mil glass surface veil. Panels to be integral part of face sheet molding.
Plant-ons not acceptable. Color to be White.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Core Material: Foamed in place urethane foam (free of CFC and HCFC) of minimum 5
pounds per cubic foot of density.
4.
Door Design: As indicated on drawings.
a.
b.
c.
5.
2.7
Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches
above floor or ground plane.
All trim to match color and finish of door.
Finish Texture: Wood grained.
Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed
gaskets.
a.
B.
Impact Strength of Face Sheets: ASTM D1242, Izod Impact Strength, 9.0 foot
pounds per inch of notch.
Abrasion Resistance of Face Sheets: ASTM D1242, 1000 cycles of Model 503
Taber Abraser with a 1000 gram load, not to exceed 0.18% weight loss.
Hardness of Face Sheets: ASTM D2583, Barcol Meter Hardness Test, not more
than 50.
Humidity Resistance of Face Sheets: ASTM D570, water absorption not greater
than 0.40% after 24 hour immersion.
Ultra-Violet Degradation: Only slight color change, and negligible change in
surface gloss and other physical properties after exposure to 500,000 Langleys.
Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACRYLIC-MODIFIED POLYESTER (AMP) DOOR ASSEMBLIES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1743 - 6
February 12, 2014
1.
B.
2.8
Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Bituminous Paint:
Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
FABRICATION
A.
Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B.
Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for
installing hardware.
1.
2.
D.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of
material in manner which prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces.
Sequence: Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding prior to cleaning,
finishing and surface treatment. Remove arises from cut edges and ease edges and
corners to radius of approximately 1/64".
Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as necessary for high-traffic performance; separate
dissimilar metals with bituminous paint or other separator which will prevent corrosion.
Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting
members.
Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
Door Hardware Installation: Factory install hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill,
and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.
1.
F.
At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.
Frame: Provide 2 by 5 inch tubular frame members with minimum 1/8" thick walls,
fabricated with mechanical joints using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed
tie-rods or j-bolts. Frames to be supplied with 1/2" x 1-1/4" door stop, with heavy duty
weathering pile included. Framing shall be manufactured by door mfg.
AMP Doors
1.
E.
Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
Means to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members,
and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior.
Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing and other work before shipment to project site.
Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.
After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop
Drawings.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACRYLIC-MODIFIED POLYESTER (AMP) DOOR ASSEMBLIES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1743 - 7
February 12, 2014
2.9
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum
Association for designating aluminum finishes.
C.
High-Performance Organic Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and
containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and
apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written
instructions.
1.
Color and Gloss: White to match door finish as closely as possible within manufacturer's
full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Do not install damaged components.
Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
Seal joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated.
Installation of AMP doors and frames by supplier of door only.
Metal Protection:
1.
2.
Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting
contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape or installing nonconductive
spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C.
Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
D.
Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, without warp
or rack.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACRYLIC-MODIFIED POLYESTER (AMP) DOOR ASSEMBLIES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1743 - 8
February 12, 2014
E.
Install door, and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold
stops, anchors, inserts, and equipment supports in accordance with final shop drawings,
manufacturer's instructions and as specified herein.
F.
Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."
G.
Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and to produce
weathertight installation.
3.3
ERECTION TOLERANCES:
A.
Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances:
1.
2.
Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4
inch over total length.
Alignment:
a.
b.
3.
3.4
Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.
Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch.
Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurement to 1/8 inch.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by
manufacturer.
1.
For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3
inches from the latch, measured to the leading door edge.
END OF SECTION 08 1743
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACRYLIC-MODIFIED POLYESTER (AMP) DOOR ASSEMBLIES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1743 - 9
February 12, 2014
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACRYLIC-MODIFIED POLYESTER (AMP) DOOR ASSEMBLIES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 1743 - 10
February 12, 2014
SECTION 08 3113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.
Section 092900 “Gypsum Board” for gypsum board panels for access door insert panels.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
B.
Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles,
and finishes.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate.
C.
Coordination Drawings: Indicate proposed locations of access doors on ceiling coordination
drawings; coordinate with location of above-ceiling items requiring access.
D.
Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches in size, in specified finish.
E.
Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types,
locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to
access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics according to the
following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:
1.
NFPA 252 or UL 10B for fire-rated access door assemblies installed vertically.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 3113 - 1
February 12, 2014
2.
2.2
NFPA 288 for fire-rated access door assemblies installed horizontally.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Acudor Products, Inc.
Babcock-Davis.
Jensen Industries; Div. of Broan-Nutone, LLC.
J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group.
Karp Associates, Inc.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
MIFAB, Inc.
Milcor Inc.
Nystrom, Inc.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single
manufacturer.
C.
Recessed Access Doors for Gypsum Wallboard Surfaces:
1.
D.
2.
3.
4.
Assembly Description: Fabricate door in the form of a pan recessed 5/8 inch for gypsum
board infill. Provide frame with gypsum board bead for concealed flange installation.
Locations: Wall and ceiling.
Door Size: As indicated or as required.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.064 inch, 16 gage.
5.
6.
7.
a.
Finish: Factory prime.
Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door.
Hinges: Concealed pivot rod.
Hardware: Lock.
Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineral-fiber
insulation enclosed in sheet metal. Provide self-latching door with automatic closer and
interior latch release. Provide frame with gypsum board beads for concealed flange
installation.
Locations: Wall.
Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.040 inch, 20 gage.
a.
5.
6.
7.
E.
Finish: Factory prime.
Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.
Hinges: Steel concealed pin.
Hardware: Lock.
Hardware:
1.
2.
Lock: Manufacturer’s standard. Key all interior access doors identically.
Lock: Mortise cylinder.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 3113 - 2
February 12, 2014
a.
b.
c.
2.3
Lock Preparation:
Prepare door panel to accept cylinder specified in
Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
Key access doors identically.
Furnish 2 keys per lock.
MATERIALS
A.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
B.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with
minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating.
C.
Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.
D.
Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners:
ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.
2.4
Hot-dip
galvanized
steel
according
to
FABRICATION
A.
General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for
installation.
B.
Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.
C.
Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish
attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports
indicated.
1.
2.
For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board and
gypsum base securely attached to perimeter of frames.
Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing.
D.
Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish.
Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.
E.
Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when
closed.
1.
2.
2.5
For cylinder locks, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.
For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device.
plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish.
Furnish
FINISHES
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 3113 - 3
February 12, 2014
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D.
Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes:
1.
Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free,
universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.
B.
Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.
B.
Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.
END OF SECTION 08 3113
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 3113 - 4
February 12, 2014
SECTION 08 4113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Interior storefront framing.
Section 08 8000 “Glazing” for glass and glazing systems in aluminum-framed systems.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminumframed systems.
B.
Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
C.
1.4
Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of
moisture in the system to the exterior.
Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor
barriers.
Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard
sizes.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Sample Warranties: For special warranties.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 4113 - 1
February 12, 2014
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics
are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction
testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
1.
B.
1.7
Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data
to Architect for review.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural
Welding Code - Aluminum."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed
systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop
Drawings.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
B.
Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.
Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal
weathering.
1.
Warranty Period for Anodic finishes: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by
testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this
Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in
construction.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 4113 - 2
February 12, 2014
1.
2.
Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting
structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term
creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
Failure also includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.2
Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
Glass breakage.
Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.3
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
EFCO Corporation.
Kawneer North America.
YKK AP America, Inc.
Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront
system, including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer.
FRAMING
A.
Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of
thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Construction: Nonthermal.
Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
Glazing Plane: Center.
Finish: Clear anodic finish.
Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.
B.
Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not
integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.
C.
Brackets and Reinforcements:
Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
D.
Materials:
1.
Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
indicated.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.
Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.
Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer
complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation
and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in
SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 4113 - 3
February 12, 2014
a.
b.
c.
2.4
Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
GLAZING SYSTEMS
A.
Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000 "Glazing."
B.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or
extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
C.
Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L.
D.
Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.
E.
Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to
which sealants will not develop adhesion.
2.5
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
1.
B.
Fasteners and Accessories:
Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1.
2.
3.
C.
2.6
Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing
system.
Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate
fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials
and recommended by manufacturer.
1.
D.
Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel
inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.
Bituminous Paint:
Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
FABRICATION
A.
Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B.
Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of
finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 4113 - 4
February 12, 2014
C.
Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture
migrating within the system to exterior.
Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for
spandrel glazing or metal panels.
Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
D.
Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
E.
Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and
for installing entrance door hardware.
F.
After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop
Drawings.
2.7
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Do not install damaged components.
Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.
Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
Metal Protection:
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 4113 - 5
February 12, 2014
1.
2.
Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by
painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose
or by installing nonconductive spacers.
Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by
painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C.
Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200
"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
D.
Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.
E.
Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."
3.3
ERECTION TOLERANCES
A.
Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the
following maximum tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
Alignment:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to
1/2 inch wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.
Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch
wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.
Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or
more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.
Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.
END OF SECTION 08 4113
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 4113 - 6
AddendumFebruary
02: March12,
12,,2014
2014
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
Finish Hardware for swinging doors:
Provide all components including fasteners, brackets and accessories required
for complete, properly functioning and operable openings.
B.
Related Sections
1.
08 11 13 Metal Doors and Frames
2.
08 14 16 Wood Doors
C.
References
National Fire Protection Association
NFPA 80 Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association
ANSI/BHMA A156.1 Butts & Hinges
ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches
ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Exit Devices
ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Door Controls - Closers
ANSI/BHMA A156.18 Materials and Finishes
ADA Standards for Accessible Design
Door and Hardware Institute (DHI)
Keying Systems and Nomenclature
Sequence and Format
Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames
Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood
Doors
Applicable State and Local Codes
1.2
SUBMITTALS
A.
Comply with Section 013300.
B.
Product Data: Provide 2 copies of catalog cuts indicating design, grade and function of all
hardware items in the hardware sets. Highlight in some manner only those items
appropriate to the hardware schedule.
D.
Shop Drawings - Hardware Schedule: Submit 2 copies of a detailed hardware schedule
in vertical format as outlined in DHI “Sequence and Format”. Include the following:
1.
2.
E.
Submit with door numbers corresponding to Architects door numbers
Include abbreviations list, manufacturer’s product list and Door x HW
Sets
Templates: Submit templates and "reviewed Hardware Schedule" to door and frame
suppliers and others as applicable to ensure timely and accurate door preps and
reinforcing.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
DOOR HARDWARE
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 7100 - 1
Addendum 02:
March 12,,
2014
February
12, 2014
F.
Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with Section 017700 including specific
requirements indicated.
G.
Operating and maintenance manuals: Submit 1 set in a three ring binder containing the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
Copy of final keying schedule
Catalog pages for each product.
Copy of final hardware schedule, edited to reflect, "As installed".
One set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of
hardware, including changing of cylinders.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with Section 0140 00.
B.
Statement of qualification for distributor and installers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Statement of compliance with regulatory requirements and single source
responsibility.
Distributor's Qualifications: Firm with experience in the distribution of
commercial hardware.
Distributor to employ a full time Architectural Hardware Consultants
(AHC) for the purpose of scheduling and coordinating hardware and
establishing keying schedule.
Installer's Qualifications: Firm with experienced in installation of similar
hardware to that required for this Project.
Regulatory Label Requirements as Required: Provide testing agency
label or stamp on hardware for labeled openings.
Fire-Rated Openings: Fire-rated openings shall be provided with firerated hardware in compliance with NFPA 80. Provide only hardware
tested and listed by U/L, for types and sizes of doors required and
complying with requirements of door and door frame labels.
Single Source Responsibility:
a. Except where specified in hardware schedule, furnish products of
only one manufacturer for each type of hardware.
1.5
9.
Keying Schedule: Arrange for a keying meeting with Owner to determine
keying requirements.
10.
Pre-Installation Conference for Finish Hardware and/or Electronic
Hardware: Prior to installation of the hardware, arrange a conference
between the contractor, installers and related trades to review materials,
procedures and coordinating related work.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Marking and Packaging: Mark each item or package separately, with identification
corresponding to the hardware sets and door numbers.
Delivery:
B.
Deliver individually packaged and properly marked finish hardware in a timely manner to
avoid delays in construction or installation.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
DOOR HARDWARE
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 7100 - 2
Addendum 02:
March 12,
12,, 2014
2014
February
C.
At time of delivery, inventory hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier
and the hardware installer until each is satisfied that the count is correct.
Storage:
Store hardware in a clean, secured, dry area on shelving.
1.6
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on
doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements
indicated, as necessary for the proper installation and function, regardless of omissions
or conflicts in the information on the Contract Documents. Verify existing hinge and strike
locations prior to submittals and ordering.
B.
Review Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate provisions will
be made for the proper installation of hardware.
WARRANTY
A.
Refer to General Conditions of the Construction Contract
B.
Manufacturer’s Warranty:
Closers: Ten (10) years
Locksets & Cylinders: Five (5) years
Exit Devices: Three (3) years
All other Hardware: Two (2) years
1.8
OWNER’S INSTRUCTION:
A.
Instruct Owner’s personnel in operation and maintenance of hardware units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A. The following manufacturers are approved subject to compliance with requirements of the
Contract Documents. Approval of manufacturers other than those listed shall be in
accordance with Division 1. Manufacturers listed with asterisks are used in the
Hardware Sets.
Item
Manufacturer
Acceptable
Hinges
Locksets
Alternate Electric Lock
Cylinders
Exit Devices
Closers
Kickplates
Stops
Threshold
Gasketing
*Stanley
*Best
*Arrow
*Best
*Von Duprin
*LCN
*Trimco
*Trimco
* National Guard
* National Guard
Ives, Bommer
No Substitutions
No Substitutions
No Substitutions
Sargent
Sargent
Ives, Rockwood
Ives, Rockwood
Zero, Reese
Zero, Reese
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
DOOR HARDWARE
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 7100 - 3
Addendum 02:
March 12,,
2014
February
12, 2014
2.2
MATERIALS:
a.
Hinges:
Stanley:5 Knuckle Ball Bearing FBB series as indicated.
Acceptable: Ives 5BB, Bommer 5000 series.
1.
Furnish hinges with template screw hole locations.
2.
Provide hinge types as listed in schedule.
3.
Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7 foot 6 inch height. Add one for each
additional 30 inches in height or fraction thereof.
4.
Certified to ANSI/ BHMA A156.1.
5.
Furnish hinge sizes and gauges according to manufacturers
recommendations for weight, thickness and width of doors, unless
otherwise indicated in the hardware sets.
6.
All doors to have ball bearing hinges.
7.
Outswing lockable doors to have NRP hinges.
8.
Exterior out swing doors to have NRP hinges.
9.
Width of hinges shall be sufficient to clear trim and wall conditions as
shown on the drawings.
10.
Provide heavy weight hinges at doors with exit devices.
11.
Verify existing hinge locations and coordinate prior to submittals where
applicable.
B.
Locks and Latchsets:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Best 93K Series 15D lever trim No Substitutions.
Certified to ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Series 4000, Operational Grade 1,
Extra-Heavy Duty.
Fit ANSI A115, door preparation. Provide 4 7/8 inch strike.
Functions and design as indicated in the hardware groups.
Locks to have through bolted anti-rotational studs.
Lever to have independent spring mechanism control.
Provide 2 ¾ backset, 9/16 inch throw.
Outside lever to be seamless, of one piece construction made of
hardened steel alloy.
Keyed lever to be removable only after core is removed, by authorized
control key.
All locking hardware must accept Best interchangeable cores.
Provide strike box at each lock location.
Provide locksets with Best 7-pin removable and interchangeable core
cylinders as specified, no substitute.
Provide strike of sufficient lip length to clear wall and frame trim.
Verify existing strike sizes and locations and furnish compatible strikes.
D. Door Closers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
LCN 4110/ 4011 Series.
Acceptable: Sargent 281 series.
Certified to ANSI / BHMA 156.4, Grade 1.
Provide forged extra-duty arms on all closers.
Provide arms with built in cushioned stop at exterior doors.
Conform to ADA Standards for Accessible Design.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
DOOR HARDWARE
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 7100 - 4
Addendum February
02: March 12,
12,, 2014
2014
6.
7.
9.
10.
E.
Exit Devices:
1.
2
3
4.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
2.3
Von Duprin 99 series. Acceptable: Sargent GL-19-43-80 series.
Heavy duty pushbar type.
Must accept a Best 7 pin cylinder and core.
Certified to ANSI / BHMA A156.3.
Provide rim exit devices at single doors.
Exit device at fire rated doors must bear a label indicating”Fire Exit
Hardware”.
Trim lever handle to match lockset trim.
Provide free wheeling lever trim at exterior openings.
Provide extended pushbar for doors over 36 inches wide.
Furnish gap filler when exit devices are to be mounted on doors
with glass beads to create solid surface with no space between glass
and back of exit device.
G.
Kickplates: Trimco K0050 Provide 10 inches high by width less 2 inches on single doors
push side, 1" less door width on pairs pull side mounted. Provide .050, beveled four sides
(4BE), and countersunk holes, stainless steel. Acceptable Ives 8400, Rockwood K1050..
H.
Stops: Trimco 1211. Acceptable: Ives FS436, Rockwood 440.
J.
Gasketing: National Guard .Acceptable: Pemko, Reese.
K.
Threshold: National Guard 424 with ¼-230 MS & ES. Acceptable: Zero, Reese.
FINISHES
A.
2.4
Separate adjusting valves for closing and latching speed, backcheck and
delayed action.
Provide adapter plates, shim spacers and blade stop spacers as required
by frame and door conditions.
Mount closers on non-public side of door, unless otherwise noted in
specification.
Closers shall be non-sized and multi-sized adjustable to meet ADA.
Hinges
Locks and Latches
Cylinders
Exit Devices
Closers
Protection Plates
Wall and Floor Stops
Thresholds and Gasketing
BHMA 626 (US26D)
BHMA 626 (US26D)
BHMA 626 (US26D)
BHMA 626 (US26D)
BHMA 689 (Alum Painted)
BHMA 630 (US32D)
BHMA 626 (US26D)
BHMA 628 (US28)
KEYS AND KEYING
A.
Provide brass construction cores for all locks and cylinders.
B.
Cylinders, removable and interchangeable core system: Best 7 Pin “PATD” keying
system, no substitution. All locking hardware to accept Best interchangeable cores.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
DOOR HARDWARE
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 7100 - 5
Addendum 02:
March 12,
12,, 2014
2014
February
C.
Permanent keys and cores: Stamped with the applicable key mark for identification.
These visual key control marks or codes will not include the actual key cuts. Permanent
keys will also be stamped "Do Not Duplicate".
D.
Transmit Grand Masterkeys, Masterkeys and other Security keys to Owner by Registered
Mail, return receipt requested.
E.
Furnish keys in the following quantities:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
F.
Two (2) each Permanent System Control keys
Ten(10) each Master-Level keys
Three (3) each Change keys each keyed core
Five (5) each Construction Masterkeys
Two (2) each Construction Control keys
Construction cores are to be returned to the Hardware Supplier. Construction cores and
keys remain the property of the Hardware Supplier.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
EXAMINATION
A.
Verification of conditions: Examine doors, frames, labeled fire-rated door assembly
construction, related items, and conditions under which Work is to be performed, and
identify conditions detrimental to proper and or timely completion.
.
B.
Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
HARDWARE LOCATIONS
A.
Mount hardware units at heights indicated in the following publications except as
specifically indicated or required to comply with the governing regulations.
B.
Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and
Frames.
Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Architectural Flush Wood Doors.
C.
ADA Standards for Accessible Design.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install each hardware item per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not
install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Set
units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment
substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
B.
Installed hardware using the manufacturer's fasteners provided. Drill and tap all screw
holes located in metallic materials.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND FINAL ADJUSTMENT
A.
Field Services: After installation is complete, inspect completed door openings on site to
verify installation of hardware is complete, properly adjusted and operating properly in
accordance with both the Contract Documents and final shop drawings.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
DOOR HARDWARE
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 7100 - 6
Addendum 02:
March 12,,
2014
February
12, 2014
B.
3.5
Report findings, in writing, to the Architect. Outline corrective actions and
recommendations if required.
HARDWARE SCHEDULE:
HARDWARE SCHEDULE:
HW 1
Exterior 200
3 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
Hinges
Exit Device
Rim Cylinder
Surface Closer
Kickplate
Threshold
Set Weatherstrip
Door Bottom
Electric Strike
Door Contact
Reader
Request to Exit
FBB199 4.5 x 4.5 NRP
99L-NL x 996L-NL
12E72
4110 Cush N Stop
K0050 10” x 2” LDW CSK B4E
424 x ¼-20 MS & ES
700ES
200N
By Owner’s Security Vendor
By Owner’s Security Vendor
By Owner’s Security Vendor
By Owner’s Security Vendor
630
626
626
AL
630
Alum
Alum
Alum
STA
VON
BES
LCN
TRI
NAT
NAT
NAT
Operation: Door is normally closed and locked. Entry is by reader validation or key in cylinder.
Egress is always free.
HW 2
Storage 201
3 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
3 each
HW 3
Hinges
Storeroom Lock
Surface Closer
Dome Stop
Silencers
CB168 4.5 x 4.5 NRP
9K3 7 D15D S3
4111 EDA
1211
1229A
626
626
AL
626
STA
BES
LCN
TRI
TRI
CB179 4.5 x 4.5
9K37 R 15D S3
1211
5050C
626
626
626
Cha
STA
BES
TRI
STA
FBB168 4.5 x 4.5
9K3 OL15D S3
4110
1211
5050C
652
626
AL
626
Cha
STA
BES
LCN
TRI
NGP
CB179 4.5 x 4.5
9K3 7 R 15D S3
4011
626
626
AL
STA
BES
LCN
Meet / Conference 202, 301
3 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
HW 4
Hinges
Classroom Lockset
Dome Stop
Gasketing
Toilet
3 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
HW 5
204, 308
Hinges
Privacy Set
Surface Closer
Dome Stop
Gasketing
Closet 203, 307
3 each
1 each
1 each
Hinges
Classroom Lock
Surface Closer
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
DOOR HARDWARE
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 7100 - 7
Addendum February
02: March 12,
12,, 2014
2014
1 each
1 each
HW 6
Dome Stop
Gasketing
1211
5050C
626
Cha
TRI
NGP
626
626
626
STA
BES
TRI
TRI
626
26D
626
626
STA
ARR
BES
TRI
TRI
Office 302, 303,304, 305,306
3 each
1 each
1 each
3 each
Hinges
Office Lockset
Dome Stop
Silencers
CB179 4.5 x 4.5
9K37 AB 15D S3
1211
1229A
Alternate
HW 6A
3 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
3 each
Office 302, 303,304, 305,306
Hinges
Keypad Lock
Best Core
Dome Stop
Silencers
CB179 4.5 x 4.5
V1 51 SR 15 V14 V44
Type required
1211
1229A
IC (SFIC less core)
END
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
DOOR HARDWARE
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 7100 - 8
8
Revolution Stand-Alone Touchscreen Lock
Premier Product
The Arrow Revolution stand-alone touchscreen lock combines
the functional elements of a cylindrical lockset with the latest
technology designed for electronic aesthetics. Dealers will
benefit by providing an up to date technological solution that
is also quick and easy to install.
Users benefit from a simple interaction with the lock through
a voiceguided touchscreen, making day-to-day use and
programming easy. The Revolution is recommended for
healthcare facilities, offices, retail environments, multi-family,
hospitality, government facilities, as well as K-12 school
environments. The Revolution provides a traffic control solution
for areas requiring restricted access. If necessary either a single
user or all users can be easily locked out by the administrator.
This feature provides a quick lockout option in case of a
security concern.
Certification:
u
All Arrow Revolution Stand-alone Touchscreen Locks are UL/cUL
listed for use on 3 hour, A label or lesser doors and are certified to
conform to and exceed the requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.2,
Series 4000, Grade 1.
• Federal Specification FF-H-106C
• ANSI A117.1 Accessibility Code
• California State Reference Code for levers returning to
within 1/2" (12.7mm) of door surface
ADA/Americans with Disabilities Act:
Acceptable Door Hardware: Section 4.13.9
Handles, pulls, latches and other operating devices on accessible
doors shall have a shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and
does not require grasping, tight pinching or twisting of the wrist
to operate. Lever operated mechanisms, push-type mechanisms
and “U” shaped handles are acceptable designs.
u comply with ADA accessibility requirements.
Look for the universal symbol next to Arrow products that
Features & Specifications:
Electronic Elements:
Mechanical Components:
• Stand-alone touchscreen access locking device
• UL listed for use on fire doors
• Interactive voice-guided programming
• ADA compliant levers
• Tri-lingual, English/Spanish/French
• Install lock and latch with only 5 screws
• 4 AA batteries
• Request to enter (REX) input allows remote access capability
• Key Override – Uses standard Arrow cylinders available in AR
and CS keyways
• Volume control – High, Low – Default, Silent
• Also available in Small Format Interchangeable Core Prep
• Visual verification of pin code programming
• Weather resistant
• Feature access through keypad programming,
4-12 digit user pin codes
• Field Reversible
• Door Prep: Standard 161 Prep with one additional 3/4" hole
– 255 users and 1 master user
• Standard three (3) year warranty
– Lockout Mode
Finishes:
– Passage Mode
• Polished Brass US3, Oil Rubbed Bronze US10B,
Satin Chrome US26D
– Auto Re-Lock
Functions:
• V1-51 Key Override
9
Revolution Stand-Alone Touchscreen Lock
Premier Product
Features (Continued):
™
OverDrive™ will allow a locked lever
to rotate freely without retracting
the latch, improving the life and
performance of Arrow locksets.
OverDrive™ – Freewheeling lever action occurs when latch retraction
mechanism disengages from lever handle when handle is locked.
Built-in stops in the rose insert prevent lever from traveling
beyond approximately 57 degrees.
Backset – 2-3/4" (69.85mm) standard. Also available in 2-3/8" backset.
Packaging – 1 per box, 3 per case.
Door Thickness – 1-3/4" (44mm) door thickness standard.
Designs:
For use on 1-3/8" thick doors, a special thin door kit must be used.
To order the 1-3/8" thin door kit, Specify Part Number: V1-Kit1.
This kit includes inside and outside escutcheon spacers as well as
a 2-3/8" latchbolt. Note: Using a 2-3/8" latchbolt results in Grade 2
certification on the lock.
2 13⁄16"
72 mm
Note: Revolution REX Wire Harness sold separately.
u
8 ⁄8"
1
Sierra SR
206 mm
4 3⁄4"
u
120.65 mm
Broadway BRR
3 3⁄4"
4 3⁄4"
95 mm
17⁄16"
37 mm
u
⁄16"
9
120.65 mm
Ventura VR
14 mm
4 5⁄8"
117.47 mm
11⁄2"
11⁄2"
38 mm
38 mm
Finishes:
1
3 5⁄16"
3 5⁄16"
84 mm
84 mm
U.S.
BHMA Equiv.
Arrow
Equiv.
Finish
1
605
US3
03
Bright Brass
2
613
US10B 10B
Dark Oxide Bronze,
Oil Rubbed
3
626
US26D 26D
Satin Chromium
Plated
2
3
ARROW
FUNCTION
DESCRIPTION
V1-51
Touchscreen with
Key Override
• For doors that require mechanical key override.
• Latchbolt retracted by outside lever with valid pincode;
by use of mechanical key, or by operating inside lever.
• Inside lever always active.
• Deadlocking latchbolt.
Inside
Outside
10
Revolution Stand-Alone Touchscreen Lock
Premier Product
Order Example:
Series:
V1
Function:
51 (touchscreen w/key override)
Trim:
SR (lever w/angled return)
Finishes:
26D (US26D), 03 (US3),
10B (US10B)
Strike:
Latch:
V18 (t-strike)
Suffix Options (V1-51 function only):
V14 (ANSI strike)
KD (std. cyl. keyed different)
V44 (2-3/4" BS x 1-1/8" beveled front)
LC (less std. cyl.)
V45 (2-3/4" BS x 1-1/8" flat front)
OB (0-bitted)
IC (SFIC less core)
Example: To order a Revolution stand-alone touchscreen lockset with a Sierra design lever, satin chrome finish, with an ASA strike
and 2-3/4" backset, keyed different:
Specify:
V1
51
SR
26D
V18
V44
KD
Series
Function
Design
Finish
Strike
Latch
Suffix Options
How to Install:
(2) 8-32 x ?"
Flat Head
Machine Screws
(2) 8-32 x ?"
Flat Head
Machine Screws
February 12, 2014
SECTION 08 8000 – GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in
other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1.
2.
1.3
Doors.
Storefront framing.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in
referenced glazing publications.
B.
Glass Thicknesses:
ASTM C 1036.
C.
Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.
1.4
Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to
the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to
remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
B.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.
1.
1.5
Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
GLAZING
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 8000 - 1
February 12, 2014
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are
certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
B.
Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain tinted float glass; coated float glass; laminated glass; and
insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.
C.
Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories:
Obtain from single source from single
manufacturer for each product and installation method.
D.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1.
IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing
Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."
E.
Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing
with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and
safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
F.
Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least
one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.
1.8
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to
glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or
other causes.
B.
Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing
units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1.
Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum.
thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
GLAZING
Provide glass lites in
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 8000 - 2
February 12, 2014
1.
B.
2.2
Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.
Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated
float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance
Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heattreated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance
Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated
float glass.
GLASS PRODUCTS
A.
Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise
indicated; of kind and condition indicated.
1.
2.
2.3
Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion
parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.
For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.
INSULATING GLASS
A.
Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by
a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other
requirements specified.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Sealing System: Dual seal, with polyisobutylene and silicone primary and secondary.
Spacer: Stainless steel or thermally broken aluminum.
Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.
GLAZING GASKETS
A.
Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal, made from the following:
1.
B.
Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned EPDM gaskets
complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain
watertight seal.
1.
2.5
EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.
Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense
compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of
pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.
GLAZING SEALANTS
A.
General:
1.
Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
GLAZING
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 8000 - 3
February 12, 2014
2.
3.
4.
B.
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC content of not more
than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,
Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.6
Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.
Pecora Corporation; 890.
Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990.
Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.
GLAZING TAPES
A.
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric
tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer
rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and
complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1.
2.
2.7
AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.
AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a
full bead of liquid sealant.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
GLAZING
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 8000 - 4
February 12, 2014
D.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass
manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.
E.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
F.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
2.8
FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A.
Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
B.
Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges
with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.
C.
Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
2.9
MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES
A.
Glass Type GL-01T: Clear float glass and fully tempered float glass.
1.
2.
2.10
A.
Thickness: 6.0 mm.
Provide safety glazing labeling.
INSULATING-GLASS TYPES
Glass Type GL-08T: Clear insulating glass.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch.
Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm.
Both Lites: Clear float glass, fully tempered.
Interspace Content: Air.
Provide safety glazing labeling.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the
following:
1.
2.
3.
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
Presence and functioning of weep systems.
Minimum required face and edge clearances.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
GLAZING
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 8000 - 5
February 12, 2014
4.
B.
3.2
Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B.
Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so
that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave
visible marks in the completed work.
3.3
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B.
Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to
provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant
thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
C.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass
from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair
performance and appearance.
D.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
E.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G.
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
1.
2.
Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face
clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of
tape.
H.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
GLAZING
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 8000 - 6
February 12, 2014
J.
Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
K.
Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or
gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when
installation is subjected to movement.
L.
Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
3.4
TAPE GLAZING
A.
Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B.
Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C.
Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D.
Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E.
Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F.
Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
G.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
H.
Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.5
GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A.
Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings
exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B.
Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C.
Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed
and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at
corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight
seal without developing bending stresses in glass.
Seal gasket joints with sealant
recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D.
Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressureglazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
GLAZING
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 8000 - 7
February 12, 2014
produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints
with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E.
3.6
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E.
Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before
date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08 8000
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
GLAZING
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 8000 - 8
February 12, 2014
SECTION 08 8300 – MIRRORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Film-backed glass mirrors qualifying as safety glazing.
Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass with reflective coatings used for vision and
spandrel lites.
Division 10 Section "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for metal-framed mirrors.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.
B.
1.4
Mirrors. Include description of materials and process used to produce each type of
silvered flat glass mirror specified that indicates sources of glass, glass coating
components, edge sealer, and quality-control provisions.
Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and attachments to
other work.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are
certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.
B.
Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from single source from single manufacturer.
C.
Source Limitations for Mirror Accessories:
source.
D.
Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations:
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MIRRORS
Obtain mirror glazing accessories from single
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 8300 - 1
February 12, 2014
1.
2.
GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to
this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this
Section or in referenced standards.
GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the Professional on
the Care and Handling of Mirrors."
E.
Safety Glazing Products: For film-backed mirrors, provide products complying with testing
requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.
F.
Preconstruction Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test: Submit mirror mastic products to mirror
manufacturer for testing to determine compatibility of mastic with mirror backing film and
substrates on which mirrors are installed.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent
damage to mirrors from moisture, condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun,
or other causes.
B.
Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and handling mirrors
as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and abrasion of glass
surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which mirror manufacturer agrees to replace
mirrors that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of mirrors is defined as
defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to mirror breakage or to maintaining
and cleaning mirrors contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
Defects include
discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film.
1.
Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRRORS
A.
Glass Mirrors, General:
coating process.
1.
ASTM C 1503; manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
D & W Incorporated
Donisi Mirror Company.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MIRRORS
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 8300 - 2
February 12, 2014
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
B.
Clear Glass: Mirror Glazing Quality.
1.
2.2
Gardner Glass, Inc.
Gilded Mirrors, Inc.
Lenoir Mirror Company.
Stroupe Mirror Co., Inc.
Virginia Mirror Company, Inc.
Nominal Thickness: 6.0 mm.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
B.
Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror manufacturer for
use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.
C.
Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting
mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with
glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.
1.
2.
D.
2.3
Adhesive shall have a VOC content of not more than 70 g/L when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Film Backing for Safety Mirrors: Film backing and pressure-sensitive adhesive; both compatible
with mirror backing paint as certified by mirror manufacturer.
MIRROR HARDWARE
A.
Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep enough to
produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated and in lengths
required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece.
1.
Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8 and 7/8
inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.05 inch.
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1)
2)
3)
2.
Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.; CRL Standard "J" Channel.
Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Aluminum Shallow Nose "J" Moulding
Lower Bar.
Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Heavy Gauge Aluminum Shallow Nose "J"
Moulding Lower Bar.
Top Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/8 and 1 inch in
height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.062 inch.
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MIRRORS
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 8300 - 3
February 12, 2014
1)
2)
3)
3.
Laurence, C. R. Co., Inc.; CRL Deep "J" Channel.
Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Aluminum Deep Nose "J" Moulding Upper
Bar.
Sommer & Maca Industries, Inc.; Heavy Gauge Aluminum Deep Nose "J"
Moulding Lower Bar.
Finish: Clear bright anodized.
B.
Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it in
finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed.
C.
Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide
toothed or lead-shield expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Provide galvanized
anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls and where indicated.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions, and before tempering, cut mirrors to final sizes and
shapes.
B.
Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible surfaces.
Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.
C.
Mirror Edge Treatment: Flat polished.
1.
2.
D.
Seal edges of mirrors with edge sealer after edge treatment to prevent chemical or
atmospheric penetration of glass coating.
Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory
immediately after cutting to final sizes.
Film-Backed Safety Mirrors: Apply film backing with adhesive coating over mirror backing paint
as recommended in writing by film-backing manufacturer to produce a surface free of bubbles,
blisters, and other imperfections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for
compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror mastic with
existing finishes or primers.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
are dry.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MIRRORS
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 8300 - 4
February 12, 2014
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of substrates,
including coating substrates with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating where applicable.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with
referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids
distorting reflected images.
B.
Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface for air
circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.
C.
Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware. Attach mirror hardware
securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or inserts as
applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrors.
1.
3.4
Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Provide setting blocks 1/8 inch thick by 4 inches
long at quarter points. To prevent trapping water, provide, between setting blocks, two
slotted weeps not less than 1/4 inch wide by 3/8 inch long at bottom channel.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations.
B.
Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.
C.
Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to moisture from
condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.
D.
Wash exposed surface of mirrors not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections
that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash mirrors as recommended in writing by
mirror manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08 8300
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MIRRORS
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 8300 - 5
February 12, 2014
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
MIRRORS
VT PC# R-2014-05
08 8300 - 6
February 12, 2014
SECTION 09 2216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.
Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.
Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for gypsum board to be attached to non-structural metal
framing.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate nonload-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B.
STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical
to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2
FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 30 percent.
B.
Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1.
Steel Sheet Components:
otherwise indicated.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 2216 - 1
February 12, 2014
2.
C.
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise
indicated or having a coating that provides equivalent corrosion resistance. A40
galvannealed products are not acceptable.
Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs
and runners.
1.
Steel Studs and Runners:
a.
b.
1.
Equivalent Gage Steel Studs and Runners:
a.
b.
D.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch (20 gage nominal).
Depth: As indicated on Drawings.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.019 inch (20 gage nominal).
Depth: As indicated on Drawings. Where not otherwise indicated, provide 3-5/8
inch depth.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in
thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner
and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral
bracing.
Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- deep
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer
runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes
applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1)
2)
3)
E.
Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly
indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of
studs.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
F.
Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System.
Grace Construction Products; FlameSafe FlowTrak System.
Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate:
indicated.
1.
G.
Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track.
Steel Network Inc. (The).
Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).
Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.
Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum
1/2-inch- wide flanges.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 2216 - 2
February 12, 2014
1.
2.
H.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1.
2.
I.
Configuration: Asymmetrical.
Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inchwide flanges.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.
Depth: 7/8 inch or 1-1/2 inches as required.
Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound
transmission.
1.
J.
Depth: 1-1/2 inches.
Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.
Depth: 3/4 inch.
Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum
uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter
wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.
SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A.
Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or
double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.
B.
Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1.
Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching
wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that
imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an
independent testing agency.
a.
2.
Type: Cast-in-place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete forms.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosionresistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and
capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by
construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent
testing agency.
C.
Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.
D.
Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated.
E.
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053
inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.
F.
Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1.
Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inchwide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 2216 - 3
February 12, 2014
2.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
a.
b.
3.
Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
a.
b.
4.
1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound
Configuration: Asymmetrical.
Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system
composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.4
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.
Resilient Furring Channels:
transmission.
a.
G.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.025 inch.
Depth: As indicated or as required to achieve proper installation.
Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.
a.
5.
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.033 inch.
Depth: As indicated or as required to achieve proper installation.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.
Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System.
USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1.
B.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following:
1.
Asphalt-Saturated
nonperforated.
Organic
Felt:
ASTM D 226,
Type I
(No. 15
asphalt
felt),
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 2216 - 4
February 12, 2014
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of
overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building
structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and
that hangers will develop their full strength.
1.
3.3
Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in
advance of time needed for coordination and construction.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1.
2.
Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply
to framing installation.
Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to
framing installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4
INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1.
2.
3.
Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C.
Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D.
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1.
2.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;
install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 2216 - 5
February 12, 2014
a.
b.
c.
3.
Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of
openings to match framing required above door heads.
4.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
a.
5.
E.
3.5
Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistancerated assembly indicated.
Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.
Direct Furring:
1.
2.
F.
Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.
Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished
assembly.
Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of
overhead structure.
Screw to wood framing.
Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment,
or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A.
Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than
spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
1.
2.
3.
Hangers: 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c.
Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c.
Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c.
B.
Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C.
Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.
a.
2.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of
trapezes or equivalent devices.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 2216 - 6
February 12, 2014
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads
within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate,
and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching
to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for
structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or
otherwise fail.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts
that extend through forms.
Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E.
Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems
meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other
and butt-cut to fit into wall track.
F.
Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet
measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between
parallel members that will receive finishes.
END OF SECTION 09 2216
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 2216 - 7
February 12, 2014
This page intentionally blank.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 2216 - 8
February 12, 2014
SECTION 09 2900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Interior gypsum board.
Tile backing panels.
Section 083113 “Access Doors and Frames” for gypsum-board-paneled doors.
Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing
suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.
and
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
1.5
Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,
condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack
panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations:
Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.
B.
Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
C.
Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold
damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
GYPSUM BOARD
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 2900 - 1
February 12, 2014
2.1
GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A.
2.2
Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and
that correspond with support system indicated.
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Thickness: 1/2 inch.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, Level 1.
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Thickness: 5/8 inch.
Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.
Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
E.
Thickness: 5/8 inch.
Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounded or beveled) for prefilling.
Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
D.
CertainTeed Corp.
Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
Lafarge North America Inc.
National Gypsum Company.
Temple Inland.
USG Corporation.
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
C.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.
Long Edges: Tapered.
Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
TILE BACKING PANELS
A.
Cementitious Backer Units:
standard edges.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's
C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990.
National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board.
USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.
Thickness: 1/4 inch, 1/2 inch, or 5/8 inch as required by application.
Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
GYPSUM BOARD
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 2900 - 2
February 12, 2014
2.4
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet.
Shapes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.5
Cornerbead.
Bullnose bead.
L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.
Expansion (control) joint.
METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with
seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as
that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.
1.
2.
C.
For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required
to fit penetration exactly.
Height: As indicated on drawings.
Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's
extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer's
designations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying
with seismic design requirements and the following:
1.
2.
2.6
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
CertainTeed Corporation.
Chicago Metallic Corporation.
Fry Reglet Corporation.
United States Gypsum Company.
Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for
type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability
properties of aluminum extrusions complying with ASTM B 221 for Alloy and
Temper 6063-T5.
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B.
Joint Tape:
1.
2.
Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
GYPSUM BOARD
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 2900 - 3
February 12, 2014
C.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1.
2.7
Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas,
use setting-type taping compound.
Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate.
1.
2.
C.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
D.
Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by
panel manufacturer.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)
consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50
respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Laminating adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Density: 6pcf (nominal).
Thickness: 3 inches, or as indicated.
Recycled Content of Blankets: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of
preconsumer recycled content not less than 35 percent.
Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant
complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant.
Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC.
Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
GYPSUM BOARD
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 2900 - 4
February 12, 2014
d.
e.
2.
Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.
USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent
panels not less than one framing member.
C.
Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.
D.
Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.
E.
Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.
F.
Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,
etc.), except in chases braced internally.
1.
2.
3.
G.
Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow
1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and
abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
GYPSUM BOARD
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 2900 - 5
February 12, 2014
H.
Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached
to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
I.
Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily
installed after panels have been installed on one side.
3.3
APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings.
Type X: Where required for fire-resistance rated assembly.
Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.
Abuse-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings, or, if not indicated on drawings, at all
walls where painted gypsum board is exposed finish.
Single-Layer Application:
1.
2.
On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest
extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.
a.
b.
3.
4.
C.
On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end
joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.
Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
Multilayer Application:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses
of panels.
At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.
On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on
walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to
framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum,
from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistancerated assembly.
On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers
vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring
member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer
joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger
joints on opposite sides of partitions.
On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer
either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical
joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring
members.
Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers with screws; fasten face layers with adhesive
and supplementary fasteners.
Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate
(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
GYPSUM BOARD
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 2900 - 6
February 12, 2014
board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels
until fastening adhesive has set.
3.4
APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS
A.
Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile, direct finish
ceiling system, and where indicated.
B.
Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a
uniform plane across panel surfaces.
3.5
INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B.
Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated,
according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.
C.
Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
D.
3.6
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.
Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated.
L-Bead: Use where gypsum board abuts masonry construction and where indicated.
Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A.
General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,
fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces
for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B.
Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
C.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not
intended to receive tape.
D.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels:
ASTM C 840:
1.
2.
Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
a.
3.
Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.
Level 5: At abuse-resistant type; and where indicated.
a.
Provide primer-surfacer product indicated.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
GYPSUM BOARD
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 2900 - 7
February 12, 2014
3.7
PROTECTION
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other
non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall
application.
B.
Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
C.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
1.
2.
Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.
Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
END OF SECTION 09 2900
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
GYPSUM BOARD
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 2900 - 8
February 12, 2014
SECTION 09 3013 – CERAMIC TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Ceramic tile.
Solid-surface-material thresholds.
Waterproof and crack isolation membrane.
Floor preparation where previously existing flooring has been removed.
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and
isolation joints in tile surfaces.
Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units.
DEFINITIONS
A.
General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1
apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.
B.
ANSI A108 Series:
ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B,
ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9,
ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15,
ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard
Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."
C.
Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.
D.
Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and
locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile
surfaces.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of
accessories involving color selection.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CERAMIC TILING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 3013 - 1
February 12, 2014
D.
Samples for Verification:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.5
Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required.
Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and
composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12
inches square, but not fewer than 4 tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors
approved for completed Work.
Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.
Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths.
Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents.
1.
1.6
Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 2 percent of amount
installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source or
producer.
1.
Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent
quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.
B.
Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality
for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate
from one source or producer.
C.
Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this
Section from a single manufacturer for each product:
1.
2.
3.
1.7
Stone thresholds.
Combination isolation and waterproof uncoupling membrane.
Metal edge strips.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels
intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.
B.
Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.
C.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and
contamination can be avoided.
D.
Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CERAMIC TILING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 3013 - 2
February 12, 2014
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A.
ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types,
compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
1.
Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.
B.
ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02,
ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA 2011
installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.
C.
FloorScore Compliance: Tile for floors shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard.
D.
Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and
package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from
other packages and match approved Samples.
E.
Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard
with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.2
Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile
assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is
suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.
TILE PRODUCTS
A.
Tile Type CT-1: Glazed wall tile.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Daltile, Division of Dal-Tile International, Inc.; “Matte.”
American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.
Deutsche Steinzeug America, Inc.
Module Size: 4-1/4 by 4-1/4 inches.
Thickness: 5/16 inch.
Face: Plain with modified square edges or cushion edges.
Finish: Semi-gloss, opaque glaze.
Tile Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's color Group 1.
Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Mounting: Factory, back mounted.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CERAMIC TILING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 3013 - 3
February 12, 2014
1.
Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and
matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from
manufacturer's standard shapes:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Tile Type CT-2: Factory-mounted unglazed ceramic mosaic tile.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Daltile, Division of Dal-Tile International, Inc.; “Keystones.”
American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.
Deutsche Steinzeug America, Inc.
Seneca Tiles, Inc.
Composition: Porcelain.
Module Size: 2 by 2 inch.
Thickness: 1/4 inch.
Face: Plain with cushion edges.
Surface: Smooth without abrasive admixture.
Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42.
Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's color Group 1 or 2.
Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable.
Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.3
Wainscot Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 41/4 by 4-1/4 inches.
External Corners for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, same size as
adjoining flat tile.
Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle
pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.
Base Cove: Cove, module size 2 by 1 inch.
Base Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 2 by 1
inch.
External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size
2 by 1 inch.
Internal Corners: Cove, module size 2 by 1 inch.
THRESHOLDS
A.
General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between
adjacent floor finishes.
1.
B.
Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above
adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of
threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.
Solid Surface Material:
ANSI SS1.
1.
Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
Manufacturer and Product:
following:
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CERAMIC TILING
Subject to compliance with requirements, one of the
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 3013 - 4
February 12, 2014
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
Type: Provide Standard Type unless Special Purpose Type is indicated.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's range of standard
colors in price groups 1 and 2.
a.
4.
5.
Quantity of colors project-wide: 1.
Locations: At toilet rooms, and as indicated.
Provide threshold width to match width of partition. Do not include door frame projecting
away from face of partition.
a.
2.4
Avonite Surfaces.
E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company; “Corian.”
Formica Corporation; “Solid Surfacing.”
LG Chemical, Ltd.; “Hi-Macs”.
Wilsonart International; Wilsonart Contract; “Solid Surface.”
Fabricate threshold to configuration of door frame.
WATERPROOF AND CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE
A.
General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with
ANSI A118.10 and A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for
the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by
manufacturer.
B.
Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Latex-Portland Cement Product: Flexible mortar consisting of cement-based mix and latex
additive.
1.
Available Products:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.5
Bostik, Inc; GoldPlus.
Custom Building Products; Red Gard.
Laticrete International Inc.; LATICRETE Hydro Ban.
MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic AquaDefence.
Boiardi Products; a QEP company; Elastiment 323 Cement Based Waterproofing,
Anti-Fracture/Crack Suppression Membrane.
MAPEI Corporation; Mapelastic L (PRP 315).
Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Southcrete 1100.
TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; Triple Flex Waterproofing, Crack
Isolation Membrane & Mortar.
SETTING MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02.
1.
Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches by 0.062-inch
diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CERAMIC TILING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 3013 - 5
February 12, 2014
B.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
C.
Bostik; Singleflex and Singlewall.
Custom Building Products; Porcelain Thin Set Mortar and Pro Lite Tile & Stone
Mortar.
Laticrete International Inc.; LATICRETE 254 Platinum and LATICRETE 255
MultiMax.
MAPEI Corporation; Ultraflex 3 and Ultracontact.
Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.
a.
For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for
nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.
D.
Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
E.
Medium Bed Mortar for Large Format Tiles: Latex-portland cement mortar, ANSI 118.4.
1.
Custom Building Products; Marble, Granite & Travertine Premium Medium Bed Mortar; or
ProLite Mortar.
2.
Laticrete; 220 Marble & Granite Mortar.
3.
MAPEI Corporation.
2.6
GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.7
Bostik, Inc.; Trucolor.
Custom Building Products; Ceg-Lite.
Laticrete International, Inc.; LATICRETE SpectraLOCK PRO Grout.
MAPEI Corporation; Opticolor.
ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A.
General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply
with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants."
1.
2.
Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Use primers, backer rods, and sealant accessories recommended by sealant
manufacturer.
B.
Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed
joints unless otherwise indicated.
C.
One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;
Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CERAMIC TILING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 3013 - 6
February 12, 2014
fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that
are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.8
Custom Building Products; 100% Silicone Caulk.
Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786.
GE Silicones; a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700.
Laticrete International, Inc.; LATICRETE Latasil.
Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant.
Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations
indicated.
B.
Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect
exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and
grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.
1.
2.
C.
2.9
Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with
a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 87.
Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is
specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.
Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout
manufacturers.
MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A.
Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout
manufacturers' written instructions.
B.
Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.
C.
Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of installed tile.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CERAMIC TILING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 3013 - 7
February 12, 2014
1.
2.
Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are
incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by
ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.
Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with bonded mortar bed or thin-set
mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations
indicated.
a.
b.
3.
4.
B.
3.2
Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically
scarified.
Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or
grinding.
Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.
Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if
not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set
mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting
material manufacturer.
1.
Grind high spots and fill low spots to achieve a level substrate for the tile standards
indicated.
B.
At thinset installations, level substrates to evenness of ¼ inch per 10 feet in both dimensions.
C.
Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar
bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.
D.
Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and
packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from
other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to
manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
E.
Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent
grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of
temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
F.
Substrate Preparation: Existing surfaces have undergone demolition work, resulting in floor and
wall substrates that may be unsuitable for thinset tile installations. Cut and patch as needed to
achieve smooth and level substrates for tile installation types indicated.
1.
Where grinding high spots is determined by Architect to not be practical, provide
underlayment for satisfactory substrate for thinset installation per ANSI standards.
a.
Provide sloping transitions to connect substrates of differing elevations in
compliance with ADA requirements of maximum 1:12 rise-to-run.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CERAMIC TILING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 3013 - 8
February 12, 2014
3.3
TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with 2011 TCNA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods
specified in tile installation schedules.
Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series
"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation
methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting
materials used.
1.
For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile
installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:
a.
b.
c.
Tile floors in wet areas.
Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.
Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger.
B.
Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete
covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated.
Terminate work neatly at
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
C.
Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight
aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so
plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
D.
Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.
E.
Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center
tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize
the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
F.
For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within
tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.
Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same
size, align joints.
Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on
floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.
Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:
1.
2.
3.
Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch.
Paver Tile: 3/16 inch.
Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.
G.
Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
H.
Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated and where backing materials change or
change direction including terminations at tilework where it abuts restraining or dissimilar
surfaces in accordance with TCNA EJ171. Form joints during installation of setting materials,
mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.
1.
Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above
them.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CERAMIC TILING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 3013 - 9
February 12, 2014
2.
I.
Thresholds: Install thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
3.4
Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section
"Joint Sealants."
Install thresholds at transitions from tile to adjacent flooring.
At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent
floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set).
Do not extend waterproofing under thresholds set in latex-portland cement mortar. Fill
joints between such thresholds and adjoining tile set on waterproofing with elastomeric
sealant.
WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION
A.
Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to
produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.
B.
Do not install tile or setting materials over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been
tested to determine that it is watertight.
C.
Waterproof Membrane Flood Testing: Food-test waterproof membranes for a minimum period
of 24 hours. Coordinate observation of testing with Owner’s representative. Do not proceed with
tile installation until membrane has been determined to be water-tight by Owner’s
representative.
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A.
Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are
free of foreign matter.
1.
2.
3.
Remove epoxy and latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.
Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written
instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation.
Use only cleaners
recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners
are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect
metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean
water before and after cleaning.
Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer
and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to
prevent drain clogging.
B.
Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to
prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of
neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.
C.
Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is
completed.
D.
Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from
tile surfaces.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CERAMIC TILING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 3013 - 10
February 12, 2014
3.6
INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A.
Provide movement joints according to TCNA-12 EJ171 and as indicated above.
B.
Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:
1.
Tile Installation F114: Cement mortar bed (thickset) with combination waterproofing and
crack isolation membrane, using epoxy grout; TCNA F114-12 and ANSI A108.1B.
a.
b.
c.
C.
Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring:
1.
Tile Installation W244C: Thin-set mortar on cementitious backer units underlayment;
TCNA W244C-12.
a.
b.
c.
D.
Tile Type: Ceramic mosaic tile, CT-2.
Thin-Set Mortar for Cured-Bed Method: Latex-portland cement mortar.
Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
Tile Type: Glazed wall tile; CT-1.
Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar.
Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
Interior Wall Installations, Masonry or Concrete:
1.
Tile Installation W202: Thin-set mortar over waterproof membrane; TCNA W202E-12.
a.
b.
c.
Tile Type: Glazed wall tiles CT-1.
Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.
END OF SECTION 09 3013
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CERAMIC TILING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 3013 - 11
February 12, 2014
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
CERAMIC TILING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 3013 - 12
February 12, 2014
SECTION 09 5113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
C.
1.3
Division 09 Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for suspended ceiling systems with
gypsum board finish.
Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling
attachment devices to be cast in concrete at ceilings.
DEFINITIONS
A.
LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.
B.
NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size.
1.
2.
1.5
Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and
texture.
Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- long
Samples of each type, finish, and color.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 5 percent of quantity installed.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 5113 - 1
February 12, 2014
2.
1.7
Suspension-System Components:
percent of quantity installed.
Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.8
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension
system through one source from a single manufacturer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they
will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B.
Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized
moisture content.
C.
Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
1.9
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.10
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed
and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
COORDINATION
Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.2
Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL
A.
Low-Emitting Materials: Acoustical panel ceilings shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing
of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 5113 - 2
February 12, 2014
B.
Source Limitations:
1.
2.
C.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated
that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical
ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
D.
2.3
Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.
Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.
Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of
test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795.
Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each
product type.
ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Classification:
follows:
1.
2.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
2.4
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Ultima 1912.
CertainTeed Corporation: Symphony m 1222-OVT-1.
USG Interiors, Inc.; Mars 86985 HRC.
Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as
Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2, water
felted.
Pattern: E (lightly textured).
Color: White.
LR: Not less than 0.89.
NRC: Not less than 0.70.
Edge/Joint Detail: Narrow beveled reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system
members.
Thickness: 3/4 inch.
Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A.
Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
content not less than 25 percent.
B.
Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with
applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.
C.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
1.
Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops
for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a
load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 5113 - 3
February 12, 2014
ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and
inspecting agency.
a.
2.
D.
Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory
devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by
testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic.
Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635,
Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than
0.135-inch- diameter wire.
E.
Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
F.
Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24
inches o.c. on all cross tees.
2.5
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll
formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip
galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation; with
prefinished 9/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.6
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Suprafine.
CertainTeed Corp.; Elite Narrow Stab System.
Chicago Metallic; Tempra 4000.
USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation; DONN DXT FLB.
Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.
End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
Face Design: Flat, flush.
Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold-rolled sheet.
Cap Finish: Painted white.
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1.
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 5113 - 4
February 12, 2014
a.
b.
2.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
Henkel Corporation; OSI Pro-Series SC-175 Acoustical Sound Sealant.
Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.
Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective
in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building
construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1.
2.
3.
Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant.
Concealed Joints:
Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable,
synthetic-rubber sealant.
Acoustical sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified
in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel
ceilings.
B.
Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture
damaged, or mold damaged.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design
requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems
Handbook."
B.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 5113 - 5
February 12, 2014
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will
not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing
members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and
appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved.
Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age,
corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or
power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required,
install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from
hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends
of each member.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
C.
Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one
another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
D.
Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a
neat, precise fit.
1.
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of
suspension system runners and moldings.
For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of
reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
For reveal-edged panels on suspension system members with box-shaped flanges,
install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension system surfaces and
panel faces flush with bottom face of runners.
Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed
panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel
manufacturer.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 5113 - 6
February 12, 2014
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and
suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09 5113
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 5113 - 7
February 12, 2014
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 5113 - 8
February 12, 2014
SECTION 09 5133 - ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes acoustical metal pans and associated suspension system for interior ceilings.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Section 095113 "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for ceilings consisting of mineral-base and
glass-fiber-base acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
1.4
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Suspended ceiling components.
Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.
Size and location of access modules for acoustical panels.
Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
5.
1.6
Lighting fixtures.
Air outlets and inlets.
Speakers.
Sprinklers.
Access space required.
Existing conditions, including structural members.
Perimeter moldings.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 5133 - 1
February 12, 2014
A.
1.7
Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
1.8
Acoustical Metal Pans: Full-size units equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.
Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each grid, exposed molding, and trim
equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver acoustical metal pans, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site
in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where
they are protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B.
Handle acoustical metal pans, suspension-system components, and accessories carefully to
avoid damaging units and finishes in any way.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
2.
2.2
Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class B materials.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
ACOUSTICAL METAL PANS, GENERAL
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical metal ceiling pan and supporting suspension
system from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Glass-Fiber Insulation: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
C.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard pans of configuration indicated
that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical
ratings, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated.
1.
D.
Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of
test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795.
Sheet Metal Characteristics: For metal components exposed to view in the completed Work,
provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with
exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, roughness, stains, or discolorations.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 5133 - 2
February 12, 2014
1.
E.
Sound-Absorbent Pads: Provide width and length to completely fill concealed surface of pan,
with surface-burning characteristics for flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 84, and to comply with the
following requirements:
1.
2.3
Aluminum Sheet: Rolled aluminum sheet, complying with ASTM B 209; alloy and temper
recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated.
Manufacture’s standard acoustic fabric backing, applied in factory.
ALUMINUM PANS FOR ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILING
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide USG Interiors, Inc.;
Celebration Metal Ceiling Panel System; or comparable product approved by Architect before
bid date.
B.
Classification: Units complying with ASTM E 1264 for Type XX, other types described as
perforated aluminum facing (pan) units with sound-absorbent fabric backing.
1.
2.
C.
Pattern: USG Pattern C250A: 1/4 inch diameter perforations at 0.65 inches on-center
with 12 percent open area.
Embossing: None.
Pan Fabrication: Manufacturer's standard units of size, profile, and edge treatment indicated,
formed from metal indicated and finished to comply with requirements indicated.
1.
Snap-in Pans: Designed with dimples or continuous beads on flanges for snap-in, secure
engagement with concealed suspension system.
D.
Pan Thickness: Manufacturer’s standard for size and pattern indicated.
E.
Pan Edge Detail: Manufacturer's standard edge detail.
F.
Pan Joint Detail: Narrow reveal, not greater than 9/16 inch wide.
G.
Pan Size: 30 by 30 inches.
H.
Pan Face Finish: Clear anodized.
I.
NRC: Not less than 0.60.
2.4
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A.
Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension
systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable
ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements.
B.
Suspension Systems: Provide systems complete with carriers, runners, splice sections,
connector clips, alignment clips, leveling clips, hangers, molding, trim, retention clips, loadresisting struts, and other suspension components required to support ceiling units and other
ceiling-supported construction.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 5133 - 3
February 12, 2014
C.
Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M,
Table 1, Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
1.
Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops
for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a
load equal to 5 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified
testing and inspecting agency.
a.
b.
2.
D.
Type: Postinstalled expansion or Postinstalled bonded anchors.
Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application
indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory
devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without
failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by
testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting
agency.
Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic.
Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel copper alloy for UNS No. N04400 alloy.
Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times the hanger design load indicated in
ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, Direct Hung, is less than yield stress of wire, but provide
not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire.
E.
Hanger Rods or Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.
F.
Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch- thick,
galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with
bolted connections and 5/16-inch- diameter bolts.
G.
Exposed Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Provide exposed members as indicated or as
required to comply with seismic requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, to conceal edges
of and penetrations through ceiling, to conceal edges of pans and runners, for fixture trim and
adapters, for fasciae at changes in ceiling height, and for other conditions; of metal and finish
matching acoustical metal pan ceiling units unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.5
For Circular Penetrations of Ceiling: Fabricate edge moldings to diameter required to fit
penetration exactly.
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL SNAP-IN METAL PAN CEILING
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by snap-in metal
pan ceiling manufacturer.
1.
USG Interiors, Inc.; DXF/DXLF Fineline Suspension System.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 5133 - 4
February 12, 2014
B.
Indirect-Hung, Snap-Tee Bar System: Designed to support metal pans that snap into main
runners, consisting of main runners connected to carrying channels that are attached by
hangers to building structure, and complying with the following requirements:
1.
Main Runners: Formed from the following metal:
a.
2.
Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled steel, not less than 0.060-inch nominal thickness of base
(uncoated) metal and 7/16-inch- wide flanges, protected with rust-inhibitive paint, and as
follows:
a.
C.
Depth and Weight: 1-1/2 inches and 475 lb/1000 feet.
Access Panels: For access at locations indicated, provide acoustical snap-in metal pan ceiling
units, accessible by key or tool.
1.
2.6
Metal Sheet: Metal as standard with ceiling system manufacturer, with factoryapplied protective finish complying with ASTM C 635/C 635M.
Access Key or Tool: Provide manufacturer's standard key or tool for opening access
panels; two.
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
B.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
C.
High-Humidity Finish:
Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for "Coating
Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated.
2.7
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical
metal pan ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical
metal pan ceilings.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 5133 - 5
February 12, 2014
A.
3.3
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical metal pans to balance border
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width pans at borders, and
comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans and coordination drawings.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install acoustical metal pan ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic
design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's
"Ceiling Systems Handbook."
B.
Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.
Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means.
Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard
suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in
form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,
eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that do
not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing
members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and
appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and hanger type involved.
Install hangers in a manner that does not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age,
corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten
hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or
power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete.
When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required,
install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.
Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.
Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from
hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends
of each member.
Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within
performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.
C.
Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four
tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers,
without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing
wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.
D.
Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical metal pans.
1.
Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of
moldings before they are installed.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 5133 - 6
February 12, 2014
2.
3.
Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not
more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of
1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
E.
Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one
another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.
F.
Cut acoustical metal pan units for accurate fit at borders and at interruptions and penetrations
by other work through ceilings. Stiffen edges of cut units as required to eliminate evidence of
buckling or variations in flatness exceeding referenced standards for stretcher-leveled metal
sheet.
G.
Install acoustical metal pans in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and
trim. Comply with installation tolerances according to CISCA's "Metal Ceilings Technical
Guidelines."
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
3.4
For snap-in pans, fit adjoining units to form flush, tight joints.
Align joints in adjacent courses to form uniform, straight joints parallel to room axis in
both directions unless otherwise indicated.
Fit adjoining units to form flush, tight joints.
Install directionally patterned or textured metal pans in directions indicated.
Install sound-absorbent pads in perforated metal pans.
Install sound attenuation panels in areas indicated by reflected ceiling plans or room finish
schedules. Lay panels directly on ceiling system and close major openings to form complete
coverage in required areas. Lay second sound-absorbent pads on sound attenuation panels.
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical metal pan ceilings, including trim and edge moldings,
after removing strippable, temporary protective covering, if any. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for stripping of temporary protective covering, cleaning, and touchup of
minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully
cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage, including dented and bent
units.
END OF SECTION 09 5133
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 5133 - 7
February 12, 2014
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ACOUSTICAL METAL PAN CEILINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 5133 - 8
February 12, 2014
SECTION 09 6513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Resilient base.
Resilient stair accessories.
Section 096813 “Tile Carpeting” for metal transitions with resilient tile flooring.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and
pattern required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long.
1.4
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.5
Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less
than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time
periods:
1.
2.
3.
B.
48 hours before installation.
During installation.
48 hours after installation.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 6513 - 1
February 12, 2014
C.
1.6
Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each
type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE
A.
Resilient Base:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.
Flexco, Inc.
Roppe Corporation, USA.
Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid,
homogeneous).
1.
Style and Location:
a.
b.
Style A, Straight: Provide in areas with carpet.
Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient flooring.
C.
Thickness: 0.125 inch.
D.
Height: 4 inch.
E.
Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F.
Outside Corners: Job formed.
G.
Inside Corners: Job formed.
H.
Colors: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
1.
I.
Quantity of colors project-wide: 2.
Finish: Satin.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 6513 - 2
February 12, 2014
2.2
RUBBER STAIR ACCESSORIES
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
B.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc.
Flexco.
Roppe Corporation, USA; Rubber Stair Tread Style #98 Raised Circular Vantage Design
Tread without riser.
Stair Treads: ASTM F 2169.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Type: TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset).
Class: 2 (raised design rubber stair treads).
Nosing Style: Square, adjustable to cover angles between 60 and 90 degrees.
Nosing Height: 1-1/2 inches.
Thickness: 1/4 inch and tapered to back edge.
Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece.
D.
Landing Tile: Matching treads; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended
by manufacturer for installation with treads.
E.
Locations: Provide rubber stair accessories in areas indicated.
F.
Colors and Patterns:
1.
2.
2.3
Raised circular profile.
Color: 1 color project-wide as selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for
applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
1.
Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a.
b.
C.
Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
Stair-Tread Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient stair-tread
manufacturer to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 6513 - 3
February 12, 2014
D.
Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient stairtread manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
3.2
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.
Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B.
Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to
ASTM F 710.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives
and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale
recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.
Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to
manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:
a.
b.
c.
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3
lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170.
Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative
humidity level.
If ongoing moisture testing indicates higher moisture-vapor-emission rates and
relative humidity than listed above, use a higher performance adhesive that meets
the moisture level indicated by testing, and in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
C.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D.
Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they
are to be installed.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 6513 - 4
February 12, 2014
1.
E.
3.3
At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation
materials into spaces where they will be installed.
Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient
products.
RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B.
Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and
other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C.
Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
D.
Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E.
Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F.
On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G.
Job-Formed Corners:
1.
Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns
not less than 3 inches in length.
a.
2.
Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns
not less than 3 inches in length.
a.
3.4
Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.
Miter corners to minimize open joints.
RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B.
Resilient Stair Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece.
For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint
between units.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 6513 - 5
February 12, 2014
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1.
2.
3.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C.
Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D.
Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads
before applying liquid floor polish.
1.
E.
Apply two coat(s).
Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 6513
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 6513 - 6
February 12, 2014
SECTION 09 6543 - LINOLEUM FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes linoleum floor tile.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and pattern specified in manufacturer's
standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch sections.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Maintenance Data: For each type of linoleum flooring to include in maintenance manuals.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.6
Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color,
and pattern of floor tile installed.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are
competent in techniques required by manufacturer for flooring installation.
1.
1.7
Section 096813 “Tile Carpeting” for metal transitions with linoleum flooring.
Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by
flooring manufacturer for installation techniques required.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
LINOLEUM FLOORING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 6543 - 1
February 12, 2014
A.
Store flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient
temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65
deg F or more than 90 deg F.
1.
1.8
Floor Tile: Store on flat surfaces.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive flooring during the following time periods:
1.
2.
3.
72 hours before installation.
During installation.
72 hours after installation.
B.
After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range
recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.
C.
Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation.
D.
Close spaces to traffic for 72 hours after flooring installation.
E.
Install flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For linoleum flooring, as determined by testing identical
products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
2.2
LINOLEUM FLOOR TILE
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following product system:
1.
B.
Forbo Industries, Inc.; MCT – Marmoleum Composition Tile.
Linoleum Floor Tile: ASTM F 2195, Type II, linoleum floor tile with special backing.
1.
Nominal Floor Tile Size: 13 by 13 inches.
C.
Thickness: 0.08 inch (2mm).
D.
Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.
1.
2.3
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
Quantity of colors project-wide: 2.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
LINOLEUM FLOORING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 6543 - 2
February 12, 2014
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by linoleum flooring
manufacturer for applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers to suit
products and substrate conditions indicated.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following product:
a.
Forbo Industries, Inc; Sustain 885m.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
1.
B.
3.2
Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified
in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of flooring.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to linoleum flooring manufacturer's written instructions to ensure
adhesion of flooring.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with flooring
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods
recommended by linoleum flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by linoleum flooring
manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on
pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9
pH.
Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by linoleum flooring manufacturer, but not
less stringent than the following:
a.
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 5
lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
1)
b.
Note: Maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 8 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in
24 hours is allowed when using Forbo Sustain 885m adhesive.
Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170.
Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative
humidity level.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
LINOLEUM FLOORING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 6543 - 3
February 12, 2014
1)
c.
Note: Maximum relative humidity of 85 percent is allowed when using Forbo
Sustain 885m adhesive.
If ongoing moisture testing indicates higher moisture-vapor-emission rates and
relative humidity than listed above, use a higher performance adhesive that meets
the moisture level indicated by testing, and in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
C.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D.
Do not install flooring until it is the same temperature as space where it is to be installed.
1.
E.
3.3
At least 72 hours in advance of installation, move flooring and installation materials into
spaces where they will be installed.
Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by flooring.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing flooring.
B.
Scribe and cut flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and
built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.
C.
Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
D.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking
device.
E.
Install flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor
areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of flooring installed on
covers and adjoining flooring. Tightly adhere flooring edges to substrates that abut covers and
to cover perimeters.
F.
Adhere flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a
completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing
of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.4
LINOLEUM FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Lay out linoleum floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor
offsets, so floor tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid
using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1.
B.
Lay floor tiles square with room axis in checkerboard pattern with alternating colors.
Match linoleum floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence
as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or
deformed floor tiles.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
LINOLEUM FLOORING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 6543 - 4
February 12, 2014
1.
3.5
Lay floor tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent floor tiles (basket-weave
pattern).
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting linoleum flooring.
B.
Perform the following operations immediately after completing linoleum flooring installation:
1.
2.
3.
Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
C.
Protect linoleum flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.
D.
After allowing drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation) to disappear, cover
linoleum flooring until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 6543
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
LINOLEUM FLOORING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 6543 - 5
February 12, 2014
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
LINOLEUM FLOORING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 6543 - 6
$GGHQGXP0DUFK
6(&7,217,/(&$53(7,1*
3$57*(1(5$/
$
5(/$7(''2&80(176
'UDZLQJV DQG JHQHUDO SURYLVLRQV RI WKH &RQWUDFW LQFOXGLQJ *HQHUDO DQG 6XSSOHPHQWDU\
&RQGLWLRQVDQG'LYLVLRQ6SHFLILFDWLRQ6HFWLRQVDSSO\WRWKLV6HFWLRQ
6800$5<
$
6HFWLRQLQFOXGHVPRGXODUWXIWHGFDUSHWWLOH
%
5HODWHG5HTXLUHPHQWV
$
$&7,2168%0,77$/6
3URGXFW'DWD)RUHDFKW\SHRISURGXFW
%
$
0DLQWHQDQFH'DWD)RUFDUSHWWLOHVWRLQFOXGHLQPDLQWHQDQFHPDQXDOV,QFOXGHWKHIROORZLQJ
$
&DUSHW7LOH)XOOVL]H6DPSOH
([SRVHG(GJH7UDQVLWLRQDQG2WKHU$FFHVVRU\6WULSSLQJLQFKORQJ6DPSOHV
&/26(28768%0,77$/6
,QFOXGH PDQXIDFWXUHU
V ZULWWHQ GDWD RQ SK\VLFDO FKDUDFWHULVWLFV ZKLFK LQFOXGHV SURGXFW
FRQVWUXFWLRQ ILEHU G\H PHWKRG VRLOVWDLQ SURWHFWLRQ DQWLPLFURELDO SURWHFWLRQ VHFRQGDU\
EDFNLQJ \DUQ ZHLJKW PDFKLQH JDXJH SLOH KHLJKW SLOH GHQVLW\ WRWDO WKLFNQHVV VL]H
SDWWHUQUHSHDWUDGLDQWSDQHOVPRNHGHQVLW\VWDWLFDQGIODPPDELOLW\UHVXOWV
,QFOXGHLQVWDOODWLRQUHFRPPHQGDWLRQVIRUHDFKW\SHRIVXEVWUDWH
6DPSOHV )RU HDFK RI WKH IROORZLQJ SURGXFWV DQG IRU HDFK FRORU DQG WH[WXUH UHTXLUHG /DEHO
HDFK 6DPSOH ZLWK PDQXIDFWXUHU
V QDPH PDWHULDO GHVFULSWLRQ FRORU SDWWHUQ DQG GHVLJQDWLRQ
LQGLFDWHGRQ'UDZLQJVDQGLQVFKHGXOHV
6HFWLRQ³7LOLQJ´IRUPHWDOWUDQVLWLRQVWULSVZKHUHFDUSHWLQJPHHWVWLOLQJ
6HFWLRQ5HVLOLHQW%DVHDQG$FFHVVRULHVIRUUHVLOLHQWZDOOEDVH
0HWKRGV IRU PDLQWDLQLQJ FDUSHW WLOH LQFOXGLQJ FOHDQLQJ DQG VWDLQUHPRYDO SURGXFWV DQG
SURFHGXUHVDQGPDQXIDFWXUHU
VUHFRPPHQGHGPDLQWHQDQFHVFKHGXOH
3UHFDXWLRQVIRUFOHDQLQJPDWHULDOVDQGPHWKRGVWKDWFRXOGEHGHWULPHQWDOWRFDUSHWWLOH
0$,17(1$1&(0$7(5,$/68%0,77$/6
)XUQLVKH[WUDPDWHULDOVIURPWKHVDPHSURGXFWUXQWKDWPDWFKSURGXFWVLQVWDOOHGDQGWKDWDUH
SDFNDJHGZLWKSURWHFWLYHFRYHULQJIRUVWRUDJHDQGLGHQWLILHGZLWKODEHOVGHVFULELQJFRQWHQWV
3ULWFKDUG+DOO:HVW:LQJ±//&2IILFHV
7,/(&$53(7,1*
973&5
$
$
$GGHQGXP0DUFK
&DUSHW7LOH)XOOVL]HXQLWVHTXDOWRSHUFHQWRIDPRXQWLQVWDOOHGIRUHDFKW\SHLQGLFDWHG
EXWQRWOHVVWKDQVT\G
48$/,7<$6685$1&(
,QVWDOOHU 4XDOLILFDWLRQV $Q H[SHULHQFHG LQVWDOOHU ZKR LV FHUWLILHG E\ WKH ,QWHUQDWLRQDO &HUWLILHG
)ORRU&RYHULQJ,QVWDOOHUV$VVRFLDWLRQDWWKH&RPPHUFLDO,,FHUWLILFDWLRQOHYHO
'(/,9(5<6725$*($1'+$1'/,1*
&RPSO\ZLWK&5,
),(/'&21',7,216
$
&RPSO\ZLWK&5,IRUWHPSHUDWXUHKXPLGLW\DQGYHQWLODWLRQOLPLWDWLRQV
%
(QYLURQPHQWDO /LPLWDWLRQV 'R QRW GHOLYHU RU LQVWDOO FDUSHW WLOHV XQWLO VSDFHV DUH HQFORVHG DQG
ZHDWKHUWLJKWZHWZRUNLQVSDFHVLVFRPSOHWHDQGGU\DQGDPELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHDQGKXPLGLW\
FRQGLWLRQVDUHPDLQWDLQHGDWRFFXSDQF\OHYHOVGXULQJWKHUHPDLQGHURIWKHFRQVWUXFWLRQSHULRG
&
'RQRWLQVWDOOFDUSHWWLOHVRYHUFRQFUHWHVODEVXQWLOVODEVKDYHFXUHGDQGDUHVXIILFLHQWO\GU\WR
ERQG ZLWK DGKHVLYH DQG FRQFUHWH VODEV KDYH S+ UDQJH UHFRPPHQGHG E\ FDUSHW WLOH
PDQXIDFWXUHU
'
:KHUHGHPRXQWDEOHSDUWLWLRQVRURWKHULWHPVDUHLQGLFDWHGIRULQVWDOODWLRQRQWRSRIFDUSHWWLOHV
LQVWDOOFDUSHWWLOHVEHIRUHLQVWDOOLQJWKHVHLWHPV
$
:$55$17<
6SHFLDO :DUUDQW\ IRU &DUSHW 7LOHV 0DQXIDFWXUHU DJUHHV WR UHSDLU RU UHSODFH FRPSRQHQWV RI
FDUSHWWLOHLQVWDOODWLRQWKDWIDLOLQPDWHULDOVRUZRUNPDQVKLSZLWKLQVSHFLILHGZDUUDQW\SHULRG
:DUUDQW\ GRHV QRW LQFOXGH GHWHULRUDWLRQ RU IDLOXUH RI FDUSHW WLOH GXH WR XQXVXDO WUDIILF
IDLOXUHRIVXEVWUDWHYDQGDOLVPRUDEXVH
)DLOXUHVLQFOXGHEXWDUHQRWOLPLWHGWRPRUHWKDQSHUFHQWHGJHUDYHOLQJVQDJVUXQV
GLPHQVLRQDOVWDELOLW\H[FHVVVWDWLFGLVFKDUJHORVVRIWXIWELQGVWUHQJWKORVVRIIDFHILEHU
FRORUIDGHDQGGHODPLQDWLRQ
:DUUDQW\3HULRG\HDUVIURPGDWHRI6XEVWDQWLDO&RPSOHWLRQ
3$57352'8&76
3(5)250$1&(
$
5HF\FOHG&RQWHQWRI7LOH&DUSHWLQJ3URGXFWV3RVWFRQVXPHUUHF\FOHGFRQWHQWSOXVRQHKDOIRI
SUHFRQVXPHUUHF\FOHGFRQWHQWQRWOHVVWKDQSHUFHQW
%
3URGXFW7HVWLQJ
5DGLDQW3DQHO,&ODVV,
3ULWFKDUG+DOO:HVW:LQJ±//&2IILFHV
7,/(&$53(7,1*
973&5
$GGHQGXP0DUFK
$
1%66PRNH/HVVWKDQ
(OHFWURVWDWLF3URSHQVLW\/HVVWKDQNY
0$18)$&785(56
3URGXFWV6XEMHFWWRFRPSOLDQFHZLWKUHTXLUHPHQWVSURYLGHSURGXFWVE\RQHRIWKHIROORZLQJ
%HQWOH\3ULQFH6WUHHW
,QWHUIDFH//&86$&RORUVWREHGHWHUPLQHG
D
E
F
6KDZ&RQWDFW*URXS&RORUVWREHGHWHUPLQHG
D
E
F
$
&37 )ROGHG 7LOH 6W\OH 1R 7 6L]H E\ LQFKHVFP E\
FP
&37 ([SDQG 7LOH 6W\OH 1R 7 6L]H E\ LQFKHVFP E\
FP
&37 /LJKW 6HULHV 9LEUDQW 7LOH 6W\OH 1R 7 6L]H E\ LQFKHVFPE\FP
&$53(77,/(
&37 6KDZ &RQWUDFW *URXS %H\RQG WKH )ROG FROOHFWLRQ )ROGHG 7LOH 7 VW\OH RU D
FRPSDUDEOHDHVWKHWLFSURGXFWDSSURYHGE\$UFKLWHFWZLWKVLPLODUFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
%
&37'XR6W\OH3URGXFW1R$.6L]HFPE\PE\
LQFKHV
&37 7ULR 3URGXFW 1R $. 6L]H FP E\ FP E\ LQFKHV
&37 6WUDLJKW (GJH 3URGXFW 1R 6L]H FP E\ P E\
LQFKHV
&RORU7REHGHWHUPLQHG
&RQVWUXFWLRQ0XOWLOHYHOSDWWHUQORRS
)LEHUFRQWHQWSHUFHQWQ\ORQ
7XIWHGZHLJKWR]
*DXJH
6WLWFKHVSHULQFK
)LQLVKHGSLOHWKLFNQHVVLQFK
7RWDOWKLFNQHVVLQFK
$YHUDJHGHQVLW\R]FX\G
7LOHVL]HE\LQFKHV
3ULPDU\EDFNLQJ6\QWKHWLFQRQ39&
6HFRQGDU\EDFNLQJ(FRZRU[WLOHQRQ39&
3URWHFWLYHWUHDWPHQW6636KDZ6RLO3URWHFWLRQ
&37 6KDZ &RQWUDFW *URXS %H\RQG WKH )ROG FROOHFWLRQ ([SDQG 7LOH 7 VW\OH RU D
FRPSDUDEOHDHVWKHWLFSURGXFWDSSURYHGE\$UFKLWHFWZLWKVLPLODUFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
&RORU7REHGHWHUPLQHG
&RQVWUXFWLRQ0XOWLOHYHOSDWWHUQORRS
)LEHUFRQWHQWSHUFHQWQ\ORQ
7XIWHGZHLJKWR]
*DXJH
3ULWFKDUG+DOO:HVW:LQJ±//&2IILFHV
7,/(&$53(7,1*
973&5
$GGHQGXP0DUFK
&
&37 6KDZ &RQWUDFW *URXS /LJKW 6HULHV FROOHFWLRQ 9LEUDQW 7LOH 7 VW\OH RU D
FRPSDUDEOHDHVWKHWLFSURGXFWDSSURYHGE\$UFKLWHFWZLWKVLPLODUFKDUDFWHULVWLFV
6WLWFKHVSHULQFK
)LQLVKHGSLOHWKLFNQHVVLQFK
7RWDOWKLFNQHVVLQFK
$YHUDJHGHQVLW\R]FX\G
7LOHVL]HE\LQFKHV
3ULPDU\EDFNLQJ6\QWKHWLFQRQ39&
6HFRQGDU\EDFNLQJ(FRZRU[WLOHQRQ39&
3URWHFWLYHWUHDWPHQW6636KDZ6RLO3URWHFWLRQ
&RORU7REHGHWHUPLQHG
&RQVWUXFWLRQ0XOWLOHYHOSDWWHUQORRS
)LEHUFRQWHQWSHUFHQWQ\ORQ
7XIWHGZHLJKWR]
*DXJH
6WLWFKHVSHULQFK
)LQLVKHGSLOHWKLFNQHVVLQFK
7RWDOWKLFNQHVVLQFK
$YHUDJHGHQVLW\R]FX\G
7LOHVL]HE\LQFKHV
3ULPDU\EDFNLQJ6\QWKHWLFQRQ39&
6HFRQGDU\EDFNLQJ(FRZRU[WLOHQRQ39&
3URWHFWLYHWUHDWPHQW6636KDZ6RLO3URWHFWLRQ
,167$//$7,21$&&(6625,(6
$
7URZHODEOH /HYHOLQJ DQG 3DWFKLQJ &RPSRXQGV /DWH[PRGLILHG K\GUDXOLFFHPHQWEDVHG
IRUPXODWLRQSURYLGHGRUUHFRPPHQGHGE\FDUSHWWLOHPDQXIDFWXUHU
%
$GKHVLYHV :DWHUUHVLVWDQW PLOGHZUHVLVWDQW QRQVWDLQLQJ SUHVVXUHVHQVLWLYH W\SH WR VXLW
SURGXFWV DQG VXEIORRU FRQGLWLRQV LQGLFDWHG WKDW FRPSOLHV ZLWK IODPPDELOLW\ UHTXLUHPHQWV IRU
LQVWDOOHGFDUSHWWLOHDQGLVUHFRPPHQGHGE\FDUSHWWLOHPDQXIDFWXUHUIRUUHOHDVDEOHLQVWDOODWLRQ
&
$GKHVLYHV VKDOO KDYH D 92& FRQWHQW RI J/ RU OHVV ZKHQ FDOFXODWHG DFFRUGLQJ WR
&)56XESDUW'(3$0HWKRG
0HWDO(GJH7UDQVLWLRQ6WULSV([WUXGHGDOXPLQXPZLWKPLOOILQLVKRISURILOHDQG ZLGWKVKRZQRI
KHLJKWUHTXLUHGWRSURWHFWH[SRVHGHGJHRIFDUSHWDQGRIPD[LPXPOHQJWKVWRPLQLPL]HUXQQLQJ
MRLQWV
0DQXIDFWXUHUDQG3URGXFWV6XEMHFWWRFRPSOLDQFHZLWKUHTXLUHPHQWVSURYLGHRQHRIWKH
IROORZLQJIRUIORRULQJWUDQVLWLRQVIURPFDUSHWLQJWROLQROHXPWLOH
D
E
F
%ODQNH&RUSRUDWLRQ
&XVWRP%XLOGLQJ3URGXFWV
6FKOXWHU6\VWHPV/35(129%DVLVRI'HVLJQSURGXFW
3URYLGH DQJOHG FRPSRQHQW RI PHWDO HGJH VWULS WR FRPSO\ ZLWK $'$ EHYHOHG WUDQVLWLRQ
UHTXLUHPHQWVJLYHQILQDOKHLJKWWUDQVLWLRQRIILQDOSURGXFWVIXUQLVKHG
D
E
5LVHWRUXQUDWLRIRUWRLQFKKLJK
5LVHWRUXQUDWLRDERYHLQFK
3ULWFKDUG+DOO:HVW:LQJ±//&2IILFHV
7,/(&$53(7,1*
973&5
$GGHQGXP0DUFK
0DWHULDODQGILQLVK$OXPLQXPFOHDUDQRGL]HG
3$57(;(&87,21
(;$0,1$7,21
$
([DPLQH VXEVWUDWHV DUHDV DQG FRQGLWLRQV ZLWK ,QVWDOOHU SUHVHQW IRU FRPSOLDQFH ZLWK
UHTXLUHPHQWVIRUPD[LPXPPRLVWXUHFRQWHQWDONDOLQLW\UDQJHLQVWDOODWLRQWROHUDQFHVDQGRWKHU
FRQGLWLRQV DIIHFWLQJ FDUSHW WLOH SHUIRUPDQFH ([DPLQH FDUSHW WLOH IRU W\SH FRORU SDWWHUQ DQG
SRWHQWLDOGHIHFWV
%
&RQFUHWH6XEIORRUV9HULI\WKDWFRQFUHWHVODEVFRPSO\ZLWK$670)DQGWKHIROORZLQJ
&
6ODE VXEVWUDWHV DUH GU\ DQG IUHH RI FXULQJ FRPSRXQGV VHDOHUV KDUGHQHUV DQG RWKHU
PDWHULDOV WKDW PD\ LQWHUIHUH ZLWK DGKHVLYH ERQG 'HWHUPLQH DGKHVLRQ DQG GU\QHVV
FKDUDFWHULVWLFV E\ SHUIRUPLQJ ERQG DQG PRLVWXUH WHVWV UHFRPPHQGHG E\ FDUSHW WLOH
PDQXIDFWXUHU
6XEIORRU ILQLVKHV FRPSO\ ZLWK UHTXLUHPHQWV VSHFLILHG LQ 'LYLVLRQ 6HFWLRQ &DVWLQ
3ODFH&RQFUHWHIRUVODEVUHFHLYLQJFDUSHWWLOH
6XEIORRUVDUHIUHHRIFUDFNVULGJHVGHSUHVVLRQVVFDOHDQGIRUHLJQGHSRVLWV
3URFHHGZLWKLQVWDOODWLRQRQO\DIWHUXQVDWLVIDFWRU\FRQGLWLRQVKDYHEHHQFRUUHFWHG
35(3$5$7,21
$
*HQHUDO &RPSO\ ZLWK &5, 6HFWLRQ 6LWH &RQGLWLRQV )ORRU 3UHSDUDWLRQ DQG ZLWK
FDUSHW WLOH PDQXIDFWXUHU
V ZULWWHQ LQVWDOODWLRQ LQVWUXFWLRQV IRU SUHSDULQJ VXEVWUDWHV LQGLFDWHG WR
UHFHLYHFDUSHWWLOHLQVWDOODWLRQ
%
8VH WURZHODEOH OHYHOLQJ DQG SDWFKLQJ FRPSRXQGV DFFRUGLQJ WR PDQXIDFWXUHU
V ZULWWHQ
LQVWUXFWLRQVWRILOOFUDFNVKROHVGHSUHVVLRQVDQGSURWUXVLRQVLQVXEVWUDWHV)LOORUOHYHOFUDFNV
KROHVDQGGHSUHVVLRQVLQFKZLGHRUZLGHUDQGSURWUXVLRQVPRUHWKDQLQFKXQOHVVPRUH
VWULQJHQWUHTXLUHPHQWVDUHUHTXLUHGE\PDQXIDFWXUHU
VZULWWHQLQVWUXFWLRQV
&
5HPRYHFRDWLQJVLQFOXGLQJFXULQJFRPSRXQGVDQGRWKHUVXEVWDQFHVWKDWDUHLQFRPSDWLEOHZLWK
DGKHVLYHVDQGWKDWFRQWDLQVRDSZD[RLORUVLOLFRQHZLWKRXWXVLQJVROYHQWV8VHPHFKDQLFDO
PHWKRGVUHFRPPHQGHGLQZULWLQJE\FDUSHWWLOHPDQXIDFWXUHU
'
%URRPDQGYDFXXPFOHDQVXEVWUDWHVWREHFRYHUHGLPPHGLDWHO\EHIRUHLQVWDOOLQJFDUSHWWLOH
,167$//$7,21
$
*HQHUDO &RPSO\ ZLWK &5, 6HFWLRQ &DUSHW 0RGXOHV DQG ZLWK FDUSHW WLOH
PDQXIDFWXUHU
VZULWWHQLQVWDOODWLRQLQVWUXFWLRQV
%
,QVWDOODWLRQ0HWKRG$VUHFRPPHQGHGLQZULWLQJE\FDUSHWWLOHPDQXIDFWXUHU
&
0DLQWDLQG\HORWLQWHJULW\'RQRWPL[G\HORWVLQVDPHDUHD
3ULWFKDUG+DOO:HVW:LQJ±//&2IILFHV
7,/(&$53(7,1*
973&5
'
$GGHQGXP0DUFK
&XWDQGILWFDUSHWWLOHWREXWWWLJKWO\WRYHUWLFDOVXUIDFHVSHUPDQHQWIL[WXUHVDQGEXLOWLQIXUQLWXUH
LQFOXGLQJFDELQHWVSLSHVRXWOHWVHGJLQJVWKUHVKROGVDQGQRVLQJV%LQGRUVHDOFXWHGJHVDV
UHFRPPHQGHGE\FDUSHWWLOHPDQXIDFWXUHU
(
([WHQG FDUSHW WLOH LQWR WRH VSDFHV GRRU UHYHDOV FORVHWV RSHQERWWRPHG REVWUXFWLRQV
UHPRYDEOHIODQJHVDOFRYHVDQGVLPLODURSHQLQJV
)
0DLQWDLQUHIHUHQFHPDUNHUVKROHVDQGRSHQLQJVWKDWDUHLQSODFHRUPDUNHGIRUIXWXUHFXWWLQJ
E\UHSHDWLQJRQILQLVKIORRULQJDVPDUNHGRQVXEIORRU8VHQRQSHUPDQHQWQRQVWDLQLQJPDUNLQJ
GHYLFH
*
,QVWDOOSDWWHUQSDUDOOHOWRZDOOVDQGERUGHUV
+
6WDJJHUMRLQWVRIFDUSHWWLOHVVRFDUSHWWLOHJULGLVRIIVHWIURPDFFHVVIORRULQJSDQHOJULG'RQRW
ILOOVHDPVRIDFFHVVIORRULQJSDQHOVZLWKFDUSHWDGKHVLYHNHHSVHDPVIUHHRIDGKHVLYH
$
&/($1,1*$1'3527(&7,21
3HUIRUPWKHIROORZLQJRSHUDWLRQVLPPHGLDWHO\DIWHULQVWDOOLQJFDUSHWWLOH
5HPRYH H[FHVV DGKHVLYH VHDP VHDOHU DQG RWKHU VXUIDFH EOHPLVKHV XVLQJ FOHDQHU
UHFRPPHQGHGE\FDUSHWWLOHPDQXIDFWXUHU
5HPRYH\DUQVWKDWSURWUXGHIURPFDUSHWWLOHVXUIDFH
9DFXXPFDUSHWWLOHXVLQJFRPPHUFLDOPDFKLQHZLWKIDFHEHDWHUHOHPHQW
%
3URWHFWLQVWDOOHGFDUSHWWLOHWRFRPSO\ZLWK&5,6HFWLRQ3URWHFWLQJ,QGRRU,QVWDOODWLRQV
&
3URWHFW FDUSHW WLOH DJDLQVW GDPDJH IURP FRQVWUXFWLRQ RSHUDWLRQV DQG SODFHPHQW RI HTXLSPHQW
DQGIL[WXUHVGXULQJWKHUHPDLQGHURIFRQVWUXFWLRQSHULRG8VHSURWHFWLRQPHWKRGVLQGLFDWHGRU
UHFRPPHQGHGLQZULWLQJE\FDUSHWWLOHPDQXIDFWXUHU
(1'2)6(&7,21
3ULWFKDUG+DOO:HVW:LQJ±//&2IILFHV
7,/(&$53(7,1*
973&5
Addendum 02: March 12, 2014
SECTION 09 7613 - RESIN-TILE WALL SURFACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Composite-wood-tile wall surfacing.
Shop-finishing of interior composite-wood-tiles.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product, including composite-wood-tile products, adhesives and
finishing materials and processes.
B.
Samples for Verification: For composite-wood-tiles and for each color, pattern, texture, and
finish specified, three full-size units.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install paneling until building is enclosed, wet work
is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature between 60 and
90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the
construction period.
B.
Established Dimensions: Where wall surfacing is indicated to fit to other construction, establish
dimensions for areas where wall surfacing is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and
coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied
with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified
testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
RESIN-TILE WALL SURFACING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 7613 - 1
Addendum 02: March 12, 2014
1.
Surface-Burning Characteristics, 1 inch thickness: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a
qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
a.
b.
2.2
Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
WOOD-COMPOSITE-TILE WALL SURFACING
A.
Description: Premanufactured, composite-wood-tiles for interior application.
B.
Basis-of-Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 3-Form;
Profile Tiles, “Glide,” or a comparable product approved by Architect.
C.
Composite Wood Material: Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130, made with
binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
D.
Composite-Tile Size: 15-1/2 by 4-5/8 inches.
E.
Finish from Manufacturer: Factory-primed.
2.3
ACCESSORIES
A.
Two-Face Tape: Manufacturer's standard high-bond, foam-core tape, 0.045 inch thick, with
adhesive on both sides.
1.
3M VHB No. 4496 Double Coated Polyethylene Foam Tape, or as recommended by
manufacturer.
a.
2.4
Color: Black.
SHOP FINISHING
A.
General: Finish composite-wood-tiles at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only
final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.
B.
Opaque Finish for Interior Items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Grade: Custom.
Finish: System - 5, conversion varnish.
Colors: Match Architect's samples. Allow for 3 colors.
Sheen:
Semigloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per
ASTM D 523.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
RESIN-TILE WALL SURFACING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 7613 - 2
Addendum 02: March 12, 2014
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting
performance of the Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.
B.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil,
grease, mold, mildew, and incompatible primers.
C.
Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking,
unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.
1.
2.
D.
3.3
Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete
masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter.
Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer
manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer.
Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas
not less than 24 hours before installation.
COMPOSITE-WOOD-TILE INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install wood-tiles using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
1.
2.
B.
Comply with composite-wood-tile manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to
products and applications indicated.
1.
2.
C.
Install wood-tiles level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with
wood-tile surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.
Install wood-tiles in pattern and color-locations as indicated.
Compensate for natural bow and warp of MDF with proper installation techniques as
recommended by manufacturer.
Allow for nominal expansion/contraction movement due to fluctuations in moisture
content. Allow for possible linear expansion of plus-or-minus 0.33 percent.
Two-Face Tape: Clean bond-breaking materials from substrate surface and remove loose
debris. Apply tape strips symmetrically to back of wood-tile and of suitable quantity to support
weight of wood-tile without slippage. Keep strips away from edges to prevent visibility at sign
edges. Place wood-tile in position, and push to engage tape adhesive.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
RESIN-TILE WALL SURFACING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 7613 - 3
Addendum 02: March 12, 2014
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Remove and replace damaged or deformed wood-tiles and wood-tiles that do not comply with
specified requirements. Replace wood-tiles with damaged or deteriorated finishes or
components that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair
procedures.
B.
Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by composite-wood-tile manufacturer.
C.
Replace wood-tiles that cannot be cleaned.
END OF SECTION 09 7613
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
RESIN-TILE WALL SURFACING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 7613 - 4
February 12, 2014
SECTION 09 7836 – OPEN-GRID WOOD WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
2.
1.3
Rigid open-grid wood panels for walls and railings.
Factory finishing of open-grid wood panels.
Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and
hanging strips required for installing open-grid wood panels and that are concealed within
other construction before paneling installation.
Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and backing
that support open-grid wood panels.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate suspended decorative wood grid lengths, end conditions, placement
of hangers, T-rail carriers, details of suspension system, and ceiling-mounted and wood gridmounted items.
1.
D.
1.4
Included details of field modifications to accommodate openings.
Samples for Verification: 12 by 12 inch suspended decorative wood grid, finished as specified.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by
a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate marking of applicable testing
agency.
1.
Flame-Spread Index: 75 or less.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
OPEN-GRID WOOD WALL PANELS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 7836 - 1
February 12, 2014
2.
1.6
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver wood grid components to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in
a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture,
humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.
B.
Handle suspended decorative grids and accessories carefully to avoid damaging units and
finishes in any way.
1.7
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.8
Environmental Limitations: Do not install suspended decorative grids until spaces are enclosed
and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project
when occupied for its intended use.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of suspended decorative grids with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, firesuppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Rulon Company;
Panel Grille wood grid wall panel system, or a comparable product by the following:
1.
2.
2.2
9-Wood, Inc..
Norton Industries, Inc.
OPEN-GRID WOOD WALL PANELS
A.
Wood Grid Species and Cut: American Cherry, plain sawn.
1.
B.
Wood Grid Pattern: Rulon profile PG 8-12-32 panel grille.
1.
2.
C.
Provide solid wood.
Clear spacing between strips, 7/8 inches.
Wood Strip Sizes: 3/4 inch width by 2 inch depth in continuous lengths.
Connecting Pieces:
1.
Dowels: Black flexible plastic, approximately 9/16 inch diameter.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
OPEN-GRID WOOD WALL PANELS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 7836 - 2
February 12, 2014
2.
2.3
Wood-backers where indicated:
dowels.
Per manufacturer’s recommendations. Align with
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
2.4
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and
manufacturer's written recommendations.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate open-wood grids to sizes indicated. Fabricate from finished grid members of specified
wood species and cut, of size indicated, with black transverse dowels, according to
manufacturer’s published details and approved Shop Drawings.
B.
Two-Sided Wall Panel: Where wall panel is shown with two exposed panel sides, fabricate and
finish wood panel grid accordingly, with all visible sides finished.
1.
Fabricate for visual alignment.
C.
Curvilinear Wall Panel: Where wall panel is shown curving, fabricate with flexible connector
dowels to accommodate indicated radius.
D.
Mounting: Fabricate open-grid wood panels for fastening to non-structural metal framing.
1.
2.5
Finish exposed fasteners to match wood-backers.
SHOP FINISHING
A.
Manufacturer’s standard finish system.
1.
Wood finish: Transparent.
a.
Stain: None.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which
open-grid wood panels attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
specified in this and other Sections that affect wall installation and anchorage and with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting appearance of open-grid
wood panels.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
OPEN-GRID WOOD WALL PANELS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 7836 - 3
February 12, 2014
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Measure each wall area and establish layout of open-grid wood panels as indicated in drawings.
Comply with layout shown on drawings.
INSTALLATION
A.
Use installation materials and techniques in accordance with Manufacturer’s written instructions.
B.
Install open-grid wood panels in patterns indicated and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Install two-sided open-grid wood panels with 2-sided finished panels and concealed attachment
wherever possible.
1.
2.
3.4
Align joints in adjacent courses to form uniform, straight joints parallel to room axis in
both directions unless otherwise indicated.
Fit adjoining units to form flush, tight joints.
Where grid edges are visible, install cover profiles unless other trim is indicated.
Attach wood-backed panel grilles through woodbacker into wall furring.
Attach non-woodbacked panel grilles through wood strips on both sides of the
interconnecting male-to-female dowel connection to framing members.
CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed surfaces of suspended decorative grids. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for cleaning, and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace grid
components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate
evidence of damage, including dented and deformed grids.
END OF SECTION 09 7836
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
OPEN-GRID WOOD WALL PANELS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 7836 - 4
February 12, 2014
SECTION 09 9123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Steel.
Galvanized metal.
Wood Trim.
Wood-based panel products.
Gypsum board.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to
ASTM D 523. (a traditional ‘eggshell-like finish)
B.
Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according
to ASTM D 523. (a ‘satin-like finish)
C.
Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. (a traditional semi-gloss
finish)
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
B.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.
C.
Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.
Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
Label each coat of each Sample.
Label each Sample for location and application area.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in
Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.
VOC content.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
INTERIOR PAINTING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 9123 - 1
February 12, 2014
1.5
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.6
Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to
verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic
effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1.
Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of
each paint system specified in Part 3.
a.
b.
2.
3.
Simulate final lighting conditions with fixtures, lamps, wattage and diffusers.
Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.
a.
4.
5.
1.7
Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.
Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of
additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.
Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations
in writing.
Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1.
2.
1.8
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are
between 50 and 95 deg F.
B.
Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
INTERIOR PAINTING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 9123 - 2
February 12, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Benjamin Moore & Co.
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
The Sherwin-Williams Company.
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed
in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B.
Material Compatibility:
1.
2.
C.
VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for
interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of
colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA
Method 24).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.3
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L.
Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/L.
Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/L.
Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/L.
Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/L.
Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/L.
Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L.
Floor Coatings: 100 g/L.
Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/L.
Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/L.
PRIMERS/SEALERS
A.
Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood: MPI #39.
B.
Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI #50.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
INTERIOR PAINTING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 9123 - 3
February 12, 2014
2.4
METAL PRIMERS
A.
Primer, Rust-Inhibitive, Water Based: MPI #107.
B.
Primer, Galvanized, Water Based: MPI #134.
2.5
WATER-BASED PAINTS
A.
Latex, Interior, Flat, (Gloss Level 5, Semi-gloss): MPI #54.
B.
Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, (Gloss Level 3, Eggshell): MPI #139.
C.
Latex, Interior, High Performance Architectural, (Gloss Level 5, Semi-gloss): MPI #141.
D.
Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy, (Gloss Level 3, Eggshell): MPI #141:
1.
Basis-of-Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide The SherwinWilliams Co.; Pro Industrial Zero VOC; Pre-Catalyzed Waterbased Epoxy; or a
comparable product approved by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
Wood: 15 percent.
Plaster: 12 percent.
C.
Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.
D.
Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.
E.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
F.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
INTERIOR PAINTING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 9123 - 4
February 12, 2014
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
In all spaces where work of this contract takes place and except as otherwise specifically
indicated, paint all exposed new surfaces, all exposed existing previously painted
surfaces and existing unpainted surfaces which are indicated to be painted.
Do not paint surfaces or materials that are specifically indicated not to be painted or are
to remain natural.
Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar
adjacent materials or surfaces.
If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes
available.
For bidding purposes, Contractor shall assume that different paint colors shall be
provided and applied to each different kind of component and surface, including, but not
limited to walls, ceilings, door frames, window frames, and exposed structural members;
accent colors are expected to be included.
Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed
surfaces, operating parts, and labels.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates indicated.
C.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and
are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
D.
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall
items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
E.
Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture
content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceed that permitted in manufacturer's written
instructions.
F.
Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.
G.
Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply
with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
H.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that
promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
INTERIOR PAINTING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 9123 - 5
February 12, 2014
I.
Wood Substrates:
1.
2.
3.
4.
J.
Previously Coated Surfaces – In addition to applicable “Preparation” points above:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.3
Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.
Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.
Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood
filler. Sand smooth when dried.
Follow paint manufacturer’s recommendations for paint type.
Wash off dirt, grease, soap and oil buildup with the appropriate cleaner. Rinse
thoroughly.
Remove loose paint and powdery substances.
Patch holes and cracks with spackling or patching compound in accord with
manufacturer’s written instructions. Allow to dry, then sand smooth.
For glossy or nonporous surfaces, lightly sand to a dull finish or use an abrasive cleaner.
Remove sanding dust or cleaner residue.
Test for adhesion before applying intermediate and topcoats. If adhesion is questionable,
follow manufacturer’s written instructions for alternate techniques such as a transition
barrier coat.
Prime all bare areas prior to applying intermediate and topcoat. Do not prime in isolated
spots. When priming is required, apply a uniform coat on entire field.
Apply intermediate and topcoats as scheduled for new materials to existing materials
previously painted.
APPLICATION
A.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI
Manual."
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or
furniture with prime coat only.
Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.
Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed
or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.
B.
Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C.
If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.
D.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
INTERIOR PAINTING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 9123 - 6
February 12, 2014
E.
Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety
and Security Work:
1.
Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.4
Equipment, including panelboards.
Uninsulated metal and plastic piping.
Pipe hangers and supports.
Metal and plastic conduit.
Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering
or other paintable jacket material.
Other items as directed by Architect.
Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and
outlets that are visible from occupied spaces.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B.
After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
D.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
3.5
INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A.
For previously painted surfaces, see paragraph in “Preparation” article above. After preparing
and successfully testing previously coated surfaces, proceed with intermediate and topcoats if
re-priming or a transition coat is not required.
B.
Steel Substrates, including hollow-metal doors and frames:
1.
Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System:
a.
b.
c.
Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based MPI #107.
Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, matching
topcoat.
Topcoat: Light industrial coating, interior, water based, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5,
semi-gloss), MPI #153.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
INTERIOR PAINTING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 9123 - 7
February 12, 2014
C.
Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1.
Latex over Waterborne Primer System:
a.
b.
c.
D.
Wood Substrates: Including wood-based panel products:
1.
High-Performance Architectural Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
E.
Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Latex, interior, flat, (Gloss Level 5, semi-gloss), MPI #54.
Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching
topcoat.
Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 5, semigloss), MPI #141.
Gypsum Board:
1.
High-Performance Architectural Latex System:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching
topcoat.
Topcoat, unless otherwise noted: Latex, interior, high performance architectural,
(Gloss Level 3, eggshell), MPI #139.
Topcoat in public areas such as corridors, lobbies, laundry and toilet rooms:
Latex, interior, high performance architectural, (Gloss Level 5, semigloss), MPI #141.
END OF SECTION 09 9123
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
INTERIOR PAINTING
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 9123 - 8
February 12, 2014
SECTION 09 9600 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes application of high-performance coating systems on the following substrates:
1.
Exterior Substrates:
a.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Steel, including hollow-metal doors and frames.
Division 09 Painting Sections for general field painting.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
application instructions.
B.
Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:
1.
1.5
Include preparation requirements and
Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas.
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
Use same
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.
1.
2.
1.6
Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air
temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 9600 - 1
February 12, 2014
B.
Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5
deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
C.
Do not apply exterior coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
ICI Paints.
PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.
Sherwin-Williams Company (The).
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS, GENERAL
A.
Material Compatibility:
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.3
Provide materials for use within each coating system that are compatible with one
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a coating system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in coating system and on substrate indicated.
Provide products of same manufacturer for each coat in a coating system.
Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
METAL PRIMERS
A.
Primer, Zinc-Rich, Inorganic: MPI #19.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
ICI Paints, Devoe Coatings: “Catha-Cote 304,” 304.
PPG, Metalhide One-Pac: “Inorganic Zinc Rich Primer,” 97-676.
Sherwin-Williams, Industrial & Marine “Zinc Clad II Ethyl Silicate,” B69V3 and B69D11.
EPOXY COATINGS
A.
Epoxy, High-Build, Low Gloss:
1.
2.
3.
ICI Paints, Devoe Coatings: “Bar-Rust 235,” 235.
PPG, Ameron: “Amercoat.385,” AT385-XX.
Sherwin-Williams, Industrial & Marine: “Macropoxy 646 Fast Cure Epoxy,” B58-600 and
B58V600.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 9600 - 2
February 12, 2014
2.5
POLYURETHANE COATINGS
A.
Polyurethane, Two-Component, Pigmented, Gloss (Gloss Level 6):
1.
2.
3.
ICI Paints, Devoe Coatings: “Devthane Aliphatic Urethane Gloss Enamel,” 379UVA.
PPG, Pitthane Ultra: “Gloss Urethane Enamels,” 95-812/819.
Sherwin-Williams, Industrial & Marine: “Acrolon 218 HS,” B65-W651 and B65V600.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
C.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
3.2
Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and
conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Comply with the Virginia State Fire Prevention Code regarding ventilation and fire safety.
C.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and
are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
D.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dust, dirt, oil,
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
E.
3.3
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall
items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce coating systems indicated.
Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of
shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply
with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.
APPLICATION
A.
Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 9600 - 3
February 12, 2014
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated.
Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces. Before final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or
furniture with prime coat only.
Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items
to match exposed surfaces.
Do not apply coatings over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
B.
Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
C.
If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film
has a uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.
D.
Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush
marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and
color breaks.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and
inspecting agency to inspect and test coatings for dry film thickness.
1.
2.
3.5
Contractor shall touch up and restore coated surfaces damaged by testing.
If test results show that dry film thickness of applied coating does not comply with coating
manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply
additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with coating
manufacturer's written recommendations.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from
Project site.
B.
After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
C.
Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by
cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an
undamaged condition.
D.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced coated surfaces.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 9600 - 4
February 12, 2014
3.6
EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE
A.
Steel Substrates:
1.
Pigmented Polyurethane over Inorganic Zinc-Rich Primer and High-Build Epoxy System:
a.
b.
c.
Prime Coat: Primer, zinc-rich, inorganic.
Intermediate Coat: Epoxy, high-build, low gloss.
Topcoat: Polyurethane, two-component, pigmented, gloss (Gloss Level 6).
END OF SECTION 09 9600
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 9600 - 5
February 12, 2014
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS
VT PC# R-2014-05
09 9600 - 6
February 12, 2014
SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Public-use washroom accessories.
Section 088300 “Mirrors” for custom-sized frameless mirrors.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.4
Construction details and dimensions.
Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work
and substrate preparation.
Material and finish descriptions.
Features that will be included for Project.
Manufacturer's warranty.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products
from single source from single manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,
cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
VT PC# R-2014-05
10 2800 - 1
February 12, 2014
B.
Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent
delaying the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.
C.
Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.
D.
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamperand-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
E.
ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.
2.2
PUBLIC-USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bobrick Washroom
Equipment, Inc. product indicated, or comparable product by one of the following:
1.
2.
B.
Toilet Tissue (Jumbo-Roll) Dispenser A:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc; B-2890.
Description: One-roll unit.
Mounting: Surface mounted.
Capacity: 9- or 10-inch- diameter rolls.
Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Lockset: Tumbler type.
Refill Indicator: Pierced slots at front.
Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser B:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
American Specialties, Inc.
Bradley Corporation.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc; B-263.
Mounting: Surface mounted.
Minimum Capacity: 400 single-fold towels.
Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Lockset: Tumbler type.
Refill Indicators: Pierced slots at sides or front.
Liquid-Soap Dispenser E:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc; B-2111.
Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form.
Mounting: Vertically oriented, surface mounted.
Capacity: 40 ounce.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
VT PC# R-2014-05
10 2800 - 2
February 12, 2014
5.
6.
7.
E.
Materials: Molded plastic push button and spout fir valve; stainless-steel spring.
Lockset: Tumbler type.
Refill Indicator: Window type.
Grab Bar F1:
1.
2.
3.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; B-5806 Series.
Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.
a.
4.
5.
F.
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc; B-270.
Mounting: Surface mounted.
Door or Cover: Self-closing, disposal-opening cover.
Receptacle: Removable.
Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Robe Hook T:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc; B-2706-25.
Type: Sanitary napkin and tampon.
Mounting: Surface mounted.
Capacity: 20 sanitary napkins and 30 tampons.
Operation: Single coin (25 cents).
Exposed Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).
Lockset: Tumbler type with separate lock and key for coin box.
Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit H:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
H.
Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches.
Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.
Vendor G:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin).
Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc; B-2116.
Description: Single-prong unit.
Material and Finish: Satin nickel-plated brass.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors
and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage
and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
B.
Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of 2 keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
VT PC# R-2014-05
10 2800 - 3
February 12, 2014
A.
Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B.
Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to
ASTM F 446.
3.2
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.
B.
Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C.
Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION 10 2800
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
VT PC# R-2014-05
10 2800 - 4
February 12, 2014
SECTION 10 4413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Fire protection cabinets for the following:
a.
B.
1.3
Portable fire extinguishers.
Owner-Furnished Material: Portable fire extinguishers.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection
cabinets.
1.
Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting
methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware,
cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.
B.
Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
C.
Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: Department of Justice’s “2010 ADA Standards for
Accessible Design,” dated September 15, 2010.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated are accommodated.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
VT PC# R-2014-05
10 4413 - 1
February 12, 2014
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
B.
Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick,
Class 1 (clear).
2.2
FIRE PROTECTION CABINET
A.
Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher of minimum 10 lb. canister size, approximately 5
inches diameter by 21 inches high.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group.
Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
Potter Roemer LLC.
Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc..
Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.
1.
Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from
0.0428-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- thick, fire-barrier
material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
C.
Cabinet Material: Aluminum sheet.
D.
Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of
trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).
Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to
accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation.
1.
2.
Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth with a 3 inch rough opening depth,
maximum.
Cabinet Depth: Projection from wall shall be less than 4 inches.
E.
Cabinet Trim Material: Aluminum sheet.
F.
Door Material: Aluminum sheet.
G.
Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame.
H.
Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
VT PC# R-2014-05
10 4413 - 2
February 12, 2014
I.
Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
1.
1.
J.
Provide recessed door pull and friction latch.
Provide concealed hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.
Accessories:
1.
2.
Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to
fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers
indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect.
a.
Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE
EXTINGUISHER."
1)
2)
3)
4)
K.
Materials:
1.
Aluminum: ASTM B 221, with strength and durability characteristics of not less than
Alloy 6063-T5 for aluminum sheet. ASTM B 221 for extruded shapes.
a.
2.
2.3
Location: Applied to cabinet door.
Application Process: Silk-screened.
Lettering Color: Black.
Orientation: Vertical.
Finish: Clear anodic.
Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm
thick, Class 1 (clear).
FABRICATION
A.
Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and
hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials
indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1.
2.
C.
Weld joints and grind smooth.
Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.
Install door locks at factory.
Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2
inch thick.
Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground
smooth.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
VT PC# R-2014-05
10 4413 - 3
February 12, 2014
2.4
GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by
applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.
D.
Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed
cabinets will be installed.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of
cabinet and trim style.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not
indicated, at heights indicated below:
1.
B.
Fire Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet.
Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
1.
Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb.
C.
Identification: Apply vinyl lettering at locations indicated.
D.
Depth of installation shall be less than 4 inch projection from face of wall finish.
3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
VT PC# R-2014-05
10 4413 - 4
February 12, 2014
B.
Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking
devices operate properly.
C.
On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factoryfinished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire
protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.
E.
Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 10 4413
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
VT PC# R-2014-05
10 4413 - 5
February 12, 2014
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
VT PC# R-2014-05
10 4413 - 6
February 12, 2014
SECTION 12 2413 - ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Requirements:
1.
1.3
Manual operated roller shade with single rollers
Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for
mounting roller shades and accessories.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband
materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.
C.
Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of shadeband material.
1.
D.
Samples for Verification: For each type of roller shade.
1.
2.
3.
E.
1.4
Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.
Shadeband Material: Not less than 10 inches square. Mark inside face of material if
applicable.
Roller Shade: Full-size operating unit, not less than 12 inches wide by 12 inches long for
each type of roller shade indicated.
Installation Accessories: Full-size unit, not less than 10 inches long.
Roller-Shade Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
Product Certificates: For each type of shadeband material, signed by product manufacturer.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
VT PC# R-2014-05
12 2413 - 1
February 12, 2014
C.
Product Test Reports:
A.
1.5
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701-99 small and large-scale vertical
burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Maintenance Data: For roller shades to include in maintenance manuals.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.7
Roller Shades:
a.
Fabric equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each color, and shadeband
material indicated.
b.
Brackets equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each type on project
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.8
Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer having at least ten
years experience installing products comparable to those specified in this section.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.9
Deliver roller shades in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and
location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install roller shades until construction and finish work in
spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
B.
Field Measurements: Where roller shades are indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed
units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from
Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
1.10
WARRANTY
A.
Roller Shade Hardware and Shadecloth: Manufacturer’s standard non-depreciating twenty-five
year limited warranty
B.
Roller Shade Installation: One year from date of substantial completion, not including
scaffolding, lifts and other means of access
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
VT PC# R-2014-05
12 2413 - 2
February 12, 2014
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Mecho 5 manual
shades; MechoShade Systems, Inc. Denise Khoury 301.574.3840 Fax 301.574.9430
[email protected]; or a comparable product by one of the following:
1.
B.
2.2
Levolor Window Fashions, a Newell-Rubbermaid Company.
Source Limitations: Obtain roller shades from single source from single manufacturer.
MANUALLY OPERATED SHADES WITH SINGLE ROLLERS
A.
Chain-and-Clutch Operating Mechanisms: With continuous-loop bead chain and clutch that
stops shade movement when bead chain is released; permanently adjusted and lubricated.
1.
Bead Chains: Stainless steel
a.
b.
c.
2.
Spring Lift-Assist Mechanisms: Manufacturer's standard for balancing roller-shade weight
and lifting heavy roller shades.
a.
B.
Loop Length: Full length of roller shade.
Limit Stops: Provide upper and lower ball stops.
Chain-Retainer Type: Standard Clip
Provide for shadebands that weigh more than 12 lb] or for shades as
recommended by manufacturer, whichever criteria are more stringent.
Rollers: Corrosion-resistant extruded-aluminum tubes of diameters and wall thicknesses
required for accommodating operating mechanisms and weights and widths of shadebands
indicated without deflection. Provide with permanently lubricated drive-end assemblies and
idle-end assemblies designed to facilitate removal of shadebands for service.
1.
2.
3.
Roller Drive-End Location: As indicated on Drawings.
Direction of Shadeband Roll: Regular, from back of roller.
Shadeband-to-Roller Attachment: Removable spline fitting integral channel in tube
C.
Mounting Hardware: Brackets or endcaps, corrosion resistant and compatible with roller
assembly, operating mechanism, installation accessories, and mounting location and conditions
indicated.
D.
Shadebands:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Shadeband Material: Light-filtering fabric.
Shadeband Bottom (Hem) Bar: Steel or extruded aluminum.
Type: Enclosed in sealed pocket of shadeband material
Installation Accessories (Multiple Mounting Conditions):
1.
Roller Shade No Cost Pocket:
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
VT PC# R-2014-05
12 2413 - 3
February 12, 2014
a.
2.3
Continuous overhead blocking to be provided by others in locations indicated on
drawings
SHADEBAND MATERIALS
A.
Shadeband Material Flame-Resistance Rating: Comply with NFPA 701. Identify products with
appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
B.
Light-Filtering Fabric: Woven fabric, stain and fade resistant.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.4
Basis of Design: MechoShade 1500 series
Type: Extruded vinyl yarn comprising of 21 percent polyester and 79 percent reinforced
vinyl.
Weave: Basketweave.
Thickness: single thickness non-raveling 0.030-inch (0.762 mm) thick vinyl fabric, woven
from 0.018-inch (0.457 mm) diameter extruded vinyl yarn
Roll Width: 96 inches
Orientation on Shadeband: As indicated on Drawings.
Openness Factor: 3 percent.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
ROLLER-SHADE FABRICATION
A.
Product Safety Standard: Fabricate roller shades to comply with WCMA A 100.1, including
requirements for flexible, chain-loop devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.
B.
Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74
deg F:
1.
C.
Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between
shades of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical
separations between openings.
Shadeband Fabrication: Fabricate shadebands without battens or seams to extent possible
except as follows:
1.
Railroaded Materials: Railroad material where material roll width is less than the required
width of shadeband and where indicated. Provide battens and seams as required by
railroaded material to produce shadebands with full roll-width panel(s) plus, if required,
one partial roll-width panel located at top of shadeband.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, [accurate locations of
connections to building electrical system, and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
VT PC# R-2014-05
12 2413 - 4
February 12, 2014
3.2
ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION
A.
3.3
Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.4
Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or
malfunction throughout entire operational range.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and
installer that ensure that roller shades are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
C.
Replace damaged roller shades that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect,
before time of Substantial Completion.
3.5
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain motor-operated roller shades.
END OF SECTION 12 2413
This page intentionally blank.
Pritchard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
ROLLER WINDOW SHADES
VT PC# R-2014-05
12 2413 - 5
February 12, 2014
SECTION 21 1000 - FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
CONDITIONS
A.
The applicable provisions of Section 22 0000, PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, are
hereby made a part of this section, and the Contractor is cautioned to read Section 22 0000 carefully
as items of work applicable to this section are included in Section 22 0000.
B.
Alteration of existing system shall be accomplished by a Contractor who is duly licensed and
accredited in the installation of automatic sprinkler systems and fire protection equipment for the
past three years.
1.2
AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION
A.
The Fire Protection System shall meet all applicable rules and regulations of the Authorities Having
Jurisdiction listed below:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
University Building Official
Regional Office of the State Fire Marshal
Project Manager
CODES, STANDARDS, AND REGULATIONS
A.
Material, equipment, and installation shall be in compliance with, but not limited to, the following
codes and standards:
1.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.4
NFPA 10-2007 - Portable Fire Extinguishers
NFPA 13-2007 - Installation Sprinkler Systems
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI)
Local utility company rules and regulations
Rules and regulations of the Board of Health, Commonwealth of Virginia
2009 Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code
2009 Virginia Uniform Statewide Fire Code
Return Air Plenum Note: All material located in the return air plenums shall meet the
requirements of the International Mechanical Code, Section 602.2.1.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The work to be performed under this section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all
labor and materials and the completion of all work of this section as shown on the drawings and/or
herein specified. In general, the work included under this section consists of, but is not limited to,
the following:
1.
Sprinkler system layouts, hydraulic design, risers, sprinklers, standpipes, water flow switches,
valves, fire department connections, all interior piping, all exterior piping, and all other
components indicated and/or required.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
VT PC# R-2014-05
21 1000 - 1
February 12, 2014
2.
3.
Submit for review and comments by the Architect, a sepia of the reflected ceiling plan
showing the proposed locations of sprinkler heads with respect to ceiling, lights, diffusers,
ceiling grid, framing members, etc. The sprinkler heads shall be centered within the ceiling
grid.
Prepare Working Plans:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
1.5
Alteration of the existing wet pipe sprinkler system in renovated areas of the building
as indicated on the plans.
The sprinkler system in corridors, toilets, offices, classrooms, lobbies and similar
spaces shall be Light Hazard designed to provide 0.10 GPM/Sq. Ft. over 1500 Sq. Ft.
plus a 100 GPM hose allowance. The system shall be wet using 155 Deg. F. sprinkler
heads and cover no more than 225 Sq. Ft. per head.
The sprinkler system in mechanical rooms, storage rooms and similar spaces shall be
Ordinary Hazard 1 designed to provide 0.15 GPM/Sq. Ft. over 1500 Sq. Ft. plus a 250
GPM hose allowance. The system shall be wet using 155 Deg. F. sprinkler heads and
cover no more than 130 Sq. Ft. per head.
Data on these working plans shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
Requirements listed in NFPA 13-2007 - Sprinkler Systems, size of all piping; method
of anchoring or hanging pipe lines; location and type of valves; position, type, and
temperature ratings of sprinkler heads; material and equipment list indicating
manufacturer's names and types; structural, mechanical, electrical, and architectural
coordinating information; and the various other items pertinent to the complete
installation of the systems. Where seismic bracing is required, seismically brace
piping system in accordance with NFPA 13-2007.
Before any piping or equipment is installed, the Contractor shall submit the required
shop drawings to the Architect/Engineer (A/E) and obtain their approval. Once the A/E
has approved the submittal, the A/E shall submit one (1) copy to the University
Building Official (UBO) for their approval. Once the submittal has been accepted by
UBO, an approved copy shall be furnished by the A/E to the regional office of the State
Fire Marshal. Once all submittals have been approved, a copy of the submittals and a
copy of UBO’s and the Fire Marshal’s letters of approval shall be furnished to the
Owner by the A/E. All work shall be subject to installation, testing and inspection
requirements of the State Fire Marshal’s Office.
Coordinate the sprinkler system with other pipes, ducts, lights, conduit, structural
systems, ceiling supports, and framing before installation. There shall be mutual
agreement among all of the trades as to the location of each trade's materials to be
installed. In the event that the Contractor should proceed to install his material without
properly coordinated with the other trades, all and any conflicting work shall be
removed and reinstalled at the Contractor's own expense. The reinstalled work shall
be at the direction and approval of the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
RELATED WORK
A.
1.6
Section 22 0000 PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
SUBMITTALS
A.
In accordance with Section 22 0000 PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, furnish the
following: (Contractor shall submit manufacturer's literature and data, drawings, hydraulic
calculations and verification of water test data to the Authorities Having Jurisdiction for approval.
Two copies of the approved submittal shall then be submitted to the Architect for their records.)
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
VT PC# R-2014-05
21 1000 - 2
February 12, 2014
1.
Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Submit the following as one package with layout
drawings and calculations:
a.
b.
2.
3.
B.
Piping and Fittings
Sprinkler Heads
Complete layout drawings of sprinkler system.
Hydraulic calculations.
Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be shown on drawings and be specifically identified with
the applicable style or series number.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING
A.
Interior: Steel piping (welded and seamless) having a corrosion resistance ratio (CRR) of 1.0 or
greater, or copper tube (drawn, seamless) within the building shall be of the materials listed in NFPA
13-2007 – Installation of Sprinkler System and acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Steel
pipe shall be Schedule 40 for sizes 2 inches and smaller, and Schedule 10 for sizes 2-1/2 inches
and larger. (Plastic piping will not be an acceptable piping material.) Changes in direction of piping
shall be made with fittings. All materials and installation shall be suitable for minimum working
pressure of 175 PSI or as specified hereinafter for tests.
1.
Grooved mechanical piping system for ferrous piping 2-1/2” and larger shall be used with roll
cut or cut grooved (ANSI/AWWA C606) carbon steel ASTM A53 or ASTM A-795 pipe. All
grooved components shall be of one manufacturer and shall be UL listed and FM Global
approved.
a.
b.
Grooved end fittings shall be cast of ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade
65-45-12, forged steel conforming to ASTM A-234, Grade WPB 0.375” wall, or
fabricated from standard weight carbon steel pipe conforming to ASTM A-53, Type F,
E or S, Grade B, supplied with factory grooved ends designed to accept mechanical
couplings.
Grooved joint couplings shall be manufactured in two segments of cast ductile iron,
conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12. Gaskets shall be pressure-responsive
synthetic rubber, grade to suit the intended service, conforming to ASTM D-2000.
Mechanical coupling bolts shall be zinc plated (ASTM B-633) heat treated carbon steel
track head conforming to physical properties of ASTM A-183 and A-449, minimum
tensile strength 110,000 psi (758450 kPa) as provided standard.
(1)
(2)
Rigid type: Housings shall be cast with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads to
provide system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with NFPA 132007. Tongue and recess rigid type couplings shall be permitted if the
contractor uses a torque wrench for installation and maintains the required gaps
between bolt pads equally on each side of the coupling. Required torque shall
be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Contractor shall
remove and replace any improperly installed products. 1-1/4” thru 8” shall be
“Installation Ready” equal to Victaulic Style 009-EZ and Style 107H rigid type
designed for direct “stab” installation onto grooved end pipe without prior
disassembly of the coupling. 5” and larger shall be standard rigid joint, equal to
Victaulic “FireLock” Style 005.
Flexible type: Use in seismic locations where required by NFPA 13-2007, equal
to Victaulic Style 75 or 77.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
VT PC# R-2014-05
21 1000 - 3
February 12, 2014
c.
d.
2.
3.
B.
Fire
Protection
Service
Temperature
Range
Gasket
Recommendation
Water/Wet
Systems
Ambient
Grade E EPDM, Type A
Grooved Joint Flange Adapters: ASTM A-536 ductile iron casting, flat face, for
incorporating flanged components with ANSI Class 125, 150 and 300 bolt hole
patterns to a grooved system. Victaulic Stile 741/744.
Press Piping Joints: For use with 2 inches and smaller, Schedule 10 carbon steel pipe.
Precision cold drawn carbon steel housing, externally zinc electroplated, o-ring seal suitable
for intended service, and pipe stops. Use the required tool for the piping system being
installed with the proper sized jaw for pressing.
Threaded Fittings: May be used with Schedule 40 steel pipe only. Threaded pipe and fittings
shall have threads cut in accordance with ASME B1.20.1 as indicated in NFPA 13-2007.
Flexible Sprinkler Hose Fittings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Description: Flexible Sprinkler Hose Fittings for use in commercial suspended ceilings and
sheetrock ceilings.
Regulatory Requirements: In accordance with NFPA 13-2007.
Basis of Design: Victaulic VicFlex.
Product Performance Criteria:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.2
Coupling gaskets shall be as follows:
FM Approved for its intended use pursuant to FM 1637 Approval Standard for Flexible
Sprinkler Hose with Threaded End Fittings.
UL Listed for its intended use pursuant to UL 2443 Standard for Flexible Sprinkler
Hose with Fittings for Fire Protection Service.
Seismically qualified for use pursuant to ICC-ES AC-156 Acceptance Criteria for
Seismic Qualification by Shake-Table Testing of Nonstructural Components and
Systems.
Materials: 100% Type 304 Stainless Steel, rated pressure 175 psi, fully welded nonmechanical fittings, braided, leak-tested with minimum 1 inch true-bore internal
corrugated hose diameter, ¾ inch outlets, straight assembly lengths and elbow
assembly lengths from 2 feet to 6 feet, factory assembled and shipped as one unit.
Ceiling Brackets: Type G90 galvanized steel bracket, direct attachment type, having
integrated snap-on clip ends positively attached to the ceiling using tamper-resistant
screws, removable hub type flexible hose attachment with set screw.
SPRINKLERS
A.
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. approved, automatic, fusible link type or frangible glass bulb type,
having temperature ratings suitable for installation. Sprinklers shall be upright in space with no
ceilings, pendent in storage rooms with finished ceilings, recessed sidewall with threaded
escutcheons in bathrooms, or recessed with threaded escutcheons in finished spaces. Pendent and
sidewall shall have chrome finish, upright shall be brass. Sprinkler body shall be integrally cast with
a hex-shaped wrench boss to facilitate installation and reduce the risk of damage during installation.
B.
Wrenches shall be provided by the sprinkler manufacturer that directly engage the hex-shaped
wrench boss integrally cast in the sprinkler body.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
VT PC# R-2014-05
21 1000 - 4
February 12, 2014
C.
Install guards over sprinkler heads in Storage spaces where less than 8 feet above floor, in
dormitory closets, on heads where subject to mechanical injury or installed in mechanical areas, I.T.,
Data, Telephone, Telecommunications and A/V rooms/closets. Guards shall be listed, supplied and
approved for use with the sprinkler by the sprinkler manufacturer.
D.
Install high temperature heads where necessary because of heaters, duct openings, etc, or where
installed in attic spaces.
E.
Provide a non-combustible water shield beside sprinkler heads adjacent to electrical service
equipment in mechanical or electrical rooms. Quick response sprinklers shall be installed in all light
hazard areas, and in ordinary hazard areas where listed for such use.
F.
Sprinklers in tile ceilings shall be located in center of 2 ft. x 2 ft. tile, or 1 ft. from one end and each
side of 2 ft. x 4 ft. tile.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
INTENT OF DRAWINGS
A.
It is not the intent of these drawings and specifications to provide a complete detailed description of
apparatus, material, equipment, etc., which is required to install a fire protection system or to comply
with local building department requirements. The sprinkler contractor shall prepare drawings
showing all material, equipment, and sizes required to install the system which meets the approval
of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction for the completed project, or their designated representatives.
Piping layout that may be shown on drawings is a suggested pipe route for the system and is not
considered as absolute. Contractor shall submit his layout to the aforementioned authorities for their
approval. Contractor's layout shall fit the design of the building, and under no circumstances will the
building design be modified to fit the Contractor's layout.
B.
All materials and methods shall be in accordance with applicable codes, regulations, and/or
ordinances and shall meet the approval of the local inspection authority having jurisdiction. NFPA
13-2007 as referenced in the 2009 International Building Code shall be the minimum requirement for
all work. All materials under this section of the specifications shall be listed by the Underwriter's
Laboratories, Inc., as approved for fire protection installation.
C.
The sprinkler systems shall be designed in accordance with NFPA 13-2007.
D.
Wet pipe sprinkler systems shall not be installed in locations subject to freezing or unheated attic
spaces or spaces exterior to building insulation.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF GROOVED JOINT PIPING SYSTEMS
A.
Grooved joint piping systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines and
recommendations. All grooved couplings, fittings, valves and specialties shall be supplied by a
single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as the grooved
components. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the
intended service as specified. Gaskets shall be supplied by the grooved coupling manufacturer.
Grooved end shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from
pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing. A factory-trained field representative shall provide
onsite training to Contractor's field personnel in the installation of grooved piping products. Factorytrained representative shall periodically review the product installation. Contractor shall remove and
replace any improperly installed products.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
VT PC# R-2014-05
21 1000 - 5
February 12, 2014
B.
Press Piping Installation: Pipe shall be certified for use in the press piping system. Pipe shall be
square cut, +/-0.030", properly deburred and cleaned. Pipe ends shall be marked at the required
location, using a manufacturer-supplied gauge, to ensure full insertion into the coupling or fitting
during assembly. Use the required tool for the piping system being installed with the proper sized
jaw for pressing.
C.
The sprinkler bulb protector must remain in place until the sprinkler is completely installed and
painting in the area around the sprinkler is complete and before the system is placed in service.
Remove bulb protectors carefully by hand after installation. Do not use any tools to remove bulb
protectors.
D.
Do not install sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or show a visible loss of fluid. Never
install sprinklers with cracked bulbs.
3.3
TESTING AND CLEANING
A.
General: Contractor shall provide all instruments, materials, and labor required for the following:
B.
Cleaning:
1.
2.
C.
Testing:
1.
2.
D.
3.4
Remove trash, plaster, dust, paint spots and all foreign matter from inside and outside of all
equipment.
The Contractor shall check each length of new pipe before it is put in place to make certain
there is not foreign material (stones, sand, etc.) in the systems. All new pipes shall be
thoroughly flushed with water to remove construction debris before final connections are
made to equipment.
General - Tests shall be made in the presence of the Owner and/or the authority having
jurisdiction or as otherwise directed by the Architect and/or Authorities Having Jurisdiction,
who shall be given five (5) days notice by the Contractor of his readiness to perform tests, as
required by the NFPA. Any leaks that develop during the tests shall be repaired by remaking
the joint or replacing pipe and fittings. No piping shall be concealed until it has been tested,
with results acceptable to the Architect and/or Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
All new fire protection system piping shall be hydrostatically tested at a minimum 200 PSI
pressure for two (2) hours or 50 PSI above maximum static pressure when maximum static
pressure is above 150 PSI.
Reports: Contractor shall verify in writing before completion of the job that all specified cleaning
procedures and tests have been performed, with results as specified or as required by codes.
REPORT OF INSPECTION
A.
The Contractor's Material and Test Certificates for Aboveground Piping shall be filled out in triplicate
after acceptance test and the copies sent to the Owner, insurance carrier, Fire Department or other
authorities that the Owner may designate.
END OF SECTION 21 1000
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
VT PC# R-2014-05
21 1000 - 6
February 12, 2014
SECTION 22 0000 - PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A.
This section of the specifications shall be applicable to all phases of plumbing work covered by
specifications and drawings issued for this project.
B.
The "General Conditions of the Contract," "Supplementary General Conditions," and all other similar
general requirements issued for this project shall apply to all plumbing work and are hereby made a
part of this section.
C.
The Contractor and/or his representatives shall be fully acquainted with the design and operation of
the systems and equipment described in these specifications and on the drawings.
D.
Work included under this section shall include complete systems as shown on the plans and as
specified. Provide supervision, labor, material, equipment, machinery, plant, and other items
necessary to complete the plumbing systems. It is the intention of these specifications and drawings
to call for finished work, tested, and ready for operation.
E.
Definitions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
"Owner" and "Contractor" shall mean the respective parties to the prime contract governing
the project. Only one contractor is recognized as a party to this contract. Where the terms
"Plumbing Contractor" or "Subcontractor" are used, it is for convenience only.
"Architect/Engineer" shall mean the firm and authorized representatives of the firm engaged
by the Owner for architectural and engineering services related to this project.
"Plumbing" shall mean all work related to plumbing systems including sanitary and storm
drainage, domestic water, gas, compressed air, fuel oil, and similar systems, including all
related components, accessories, controls, and miscellaneous work required for a complete
system.
"Contract Documents" shall mean and include the agreement, the drawings and
specifications and all modifications thereto authorized by the Owner in writing prior to final
completion of the project.
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
6.
The term "Agreement" shall mean the completed and signed contract form.
The term "Drawings" shall mean the drawings prepared by the Architect/Engineer for
specific use in bidding and execution of the work.
The term "Specifications" shall include the legal and procedural documents, the
general conditions, special conditions, and the technical specifications.
The term "Technical Specifications" shall mean that part of the specifications which
describes, outlines, and stipulates the kind and quality of the materials to be furnished,
the quality of workmanship required, and the methods to be used in the construction
under the contract. For convenience, the plumbing portions of the technical
specifications are arranged into one general section and several detailed sections
related to the various trades represented in the work. Such arrangement and
references shall not operate to make the Architect/Engineer an arbiter in establishing
the limits of any subcontract or trade.
"Work" of the Contractor shall mean labor or materials or both.
"As shown," "as indicated," "as detailed," or words of similar import shall mean reference to
the drawings included in the contract documents, unless stated otherwise.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0000 - 1
February 12, 2014
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
1.2
"As directed," "as required," "as permitted," "approved," or words of similar import shall mean
that the direction, requirement, permission, approval, or acceptance of the Architect/Engineer
is intended unless stated otherwise.
"As necessary" shall mean that which is necessary to achieve satisfactory completion of the
work in order to provide the intended function and form of the project in compliance with the
contract documents.
"Provide" shall mean "provide complete and in place," that is "furnish and install," ready for
beneficial occupancy by the Owner. Except where stated otherwise, description of any work
in the contract documents shall mean that the work shall be provided by the Contractor, even
though the words "provide" or "furnish and install" do not accompany the description.
"Similar" shall be interpreted in a general sense and not as meaning identical, and all related
details shall be worked out in respect to their location and their connection with other parts of
the work.
Exposed: Piping and equipment exposed to view in finished rooms.
Option or Optional: Contractor's choice of an alternate material or method.
INTENT OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
The contract documents are complementary, and what is called for in one place shall be as binding
as if called for in all places. Where variances occur between drawings and specifications or within
either document itself, include in the contract price the item or arrangement of better quality, greater
quantity, or higher cost. Agreement shall take precedence over the specifications and drawings.
Figured dimensions shall be used in preference to scaling the drawings. In case of conflict between
large and small scale drawings, the large scale drawings shall govern.
B.
The plumbing drawings show the general arrangement of all piping, equipment, and appurtenances
and shall be followed as closely as actual building construction and the work of other trades will
permit. The plumbing work shall conform to the requirements shown on the plumbing drawings.
Architectural and structural drawings shall take precedence over plumbing drawings. Because of
the small scale of the plumbing drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and
accessories which may be required. The Contractor shall investigate the structural and finish
conditions affecting the work and shall arrange his work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves,
boxes, offsets, transitions, and other accessories as may be required to meet such conditions.
1.3
CODES AND STANDARDS
A.
All materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable codes, state and federal laws, local
ordinances, industry standards, utility company regulations, and all other criteria which normally
apply to work of this nature.
B.
In case of difference between building codes, state laws, federal laws, local ordinances, industry
standards, utility company regulations, other criteria and the contract documents, the more stringent
regulations will apply. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of any
such difference.
C.
If the Contractor performs any work that does not comply with these contract documents or the
requirements of the applicable building codes, state laws, local ordinances, industry standards, utility
company regulations, and other applicable criteria, he shall bear all costs arising in correcting the
deficiencies.
D.
The standards referred to, except as modified in the specifications, shall have full force and effect as
though printed in these specifications. The manufacturer and trades involved shall be familiar with
the application of these standards.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0000 - 2
February 12, 2014
E.
Applicable codes and standards shall include, but are not necessarily restricted to, the most recently
recognized issues of the following:
1.
Building Codes:
a.
b.
2.
1.4
Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code
International Plumbing Code and accumulative supplements.
Industry Standards, Codes, and Specifications:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
AASHO
ABA
ADA
AGA
ANSI
ASHRAE
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
ASME
ASPE
ASSE
ASTM
AWS
CISPI
CSA
AWWA
FS
MSS
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
NBS
NEC
NSF
PDI
UL
UFAS
American Association of State Highway Officials
Architectural Barriers Act
Americans with Disabilities Act
American Gas Association
American National Standards Institute
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning
Engineers
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
American Society of Plumbing Engineers
American Society of Sanitary Engineering
American Society of Testing and Materials
American Welding Society
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
Canadian Standards Association
American Water Works Association
Federal Specification
Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings
Industry, Inc.
National Bureau of Standards
National Electrical Code
National Sanitation Foundation
Plumbing & Drainage Institute
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (2012)
GOVERNMENTAL FEES, PERMITS, AND INSPECTIONS
A.
1.5
Under each applicable section of the detailed plumbing specifications, the Contractor shall obtain
and pay for all required licenses, permits, charges for connections to outside services, fees and
inspections. Upon completion of the work under each section of the detailed plumbing specifications,
the Contractor shall furnish a certificate of final inspection to the Architect/Engineer from the
governmental inspection department having jurisdiction.
VISITING THE SITE
A.
Each Contractor shall be responsible for visiting the site before bidding the job to familiarize himself
with all existing conditions to be met in the execution of the work under this contract. No additional
compensation will be allowed for any changes which may be required to make because of site
conditions.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0000 - 3
February 12, 2014
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Criteria:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
1.7
All materials shall be new and shall bear the manufacturer's name, trade name, and the UL
label in every case where a standard has been established for this particular material. The
equipment to be furnished shall be essentially the standard product of a manufacturer
regularly engaged in the production of the required type of equipment, and shall be the
manufacturer's latest approved design. All equipment shall bear a permanent and legible
factory-applied nameplate to permit identification of manufacturer, model number and type of
unit.
Equipment Service: Products shall be supported by a service organization which maintains
an adequate inventory of repair parts and is located, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer,
reasonably close to the site.
Multiple Units: When two or more units of materials or equipment of the same type or class
are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer to provide for uniform
appearance, operation, and maintenance.
Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components made by
others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product.
Manufacturers' directions shall be followed in the delivery, storage, protection, and installation of all
equipment and materials. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of
any conflict between any requirements of the contract documents and the written instructions before
proceeding with the work. If the Contractor performs any work that does not comply with the
manufacturers' directions or such written instructions from the Architect/Engineer, he shall bear all
costs arising in correcting the deficiencies.
BIDDING INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Products are generally specified by a performance specification and/or by manufacturer's name and
model number or trade name.
B.
When specified only by a performance specification, the Contractor may use any manufacturer who
meets the performance specification and applicable codes. (The Contractor shall be subject to the
requirements of 1.9 - SHOP DRAWINGS.)
C.
When several products/manufacturers are specified together, then the Contractor has the option of
using any product/manufacturer listed. The Contractor shall be subject to the requirements of 1.9 SHOP DRAWINGS. The Contractor's bid shall be compiled on the use of the listed products without
exception. Substitutions will only be considered after the contract has been executed and shall be
subject to the requirements of 1.8 - SUBSTITUTIONS.
D.
When several products/manufacturers are specified together and the system design is based on one
of the listed products by specific model number(s) or catalog number(s), then the Contractor has the
option of using the one specific product or any other product/manufacturer listed. In either case, the
Contractor shall be subject to the requirements of 1.9 - SHOP DRAWINGS. However, when the
other listed product/ manufacturer is used, the Contractor shall be responsible for determining that
the product(s) will be compatible with building design, electrical design, plumbing design, and the
product(s) will not necessitate design modifications by the Architect/Engineer. The Contractors bid
shall be compiled on the use of the listed products without exception. Substitutions will only be
considered after the Contract has been executed and shall be subject to the requirements of 1.8 SUBSTITUTIONS. If the products/manufacturer are listed to be "only," then substitutions will not be
considered.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0000 - 4
February 12, 2014
E.
1.8
When only one manufacture's name is listed, this shall be the basis of the bid. The Contractor's bid
shall be compiled on the use of the listed product. Substitutions will only be considered after the
Contract has been executed and shall be subject to the requirements of 1.8 - SUBSTITUTIONS.
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Substitutions will not be considered during the bid.
B.
After the Contract has been executed, the Architect/Engineer will consider a formal request for a
review of substituted products in place of those specified, under the following conditions:
1.
2.
C.
Not later than 30 days from the Contract Date, the Contractor shall provide a list of products
proposed as substitutions, including the name, manufacturer, and section of the
specifications governing the product.
The request shall be accompanied by accurate cost data on the proposed substitutions
indicating whether or not a modification of the Contract Sum is to be considered.
Substitutions are understood to mean that the installing Contractor:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Has personally investigated the proposed substitute and has determined that it is equal or
superior in all respects to the item specified;
Will provide the same guarantee for the substitution that he would for the item or equipment
specified;
Certifies that the cost data is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract, and
waives all claims for additional cost related to the installation of the accepted substitute;
Has coordinated the installation of the substitute, providing design modifications and changes
as required for the work to be complete in all respects;
Has coordinated the installation of the substitute with the General Contractor pertaining to
changes required for the work to be complete with all trades and all changes shall be
provided without additional cost to the Owner.
D.
The acceptance by the Architect/Engineer of any or all of those substitute items listed by the
Contractor for review shall not constitute an approval of the substitute but shall mean that the
Contractor may then submit detailed shop drawings for review.
E.
When a request for substitution is granted, shop drawings will be reviewed by the
Architect/Engineer. Shop drawings not complete with proper review information will not be reviewed
and will be returned unchecked. If after two submittals, the substitute equipment is not approved,
the specified equipment shall be provided.
1.9
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Shop Drawings are required for all material and equipment that is specified by a manufacturer's
name or as indicated in the technical specifications. Furnish the number of copies required by the
General and Special Conditions of the Contract, but in no case less than six (6) copies. Submittal
data for related equipment shall be submitted at one time.
B.
Substitutions will not be considered if:
1.
2.
They are indicated or implied on shop drawing submissions without information specified in
1.8 - SUBSTITUTIONS.
They require a substantial revision of the Contract Documents in order to accommodate their
use.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0000 - 5
February 12, 2014
C.
Identify submittals with PROJECT NAME and NUMBER, CONTRACTOR'S NAME, SECTION
NUMBER & NAME, and PARAGRAPH NUMBER of SPECIFICATION GOVERNING,
MANUFACTURER, MODEL or STYLE, and CONTRACTOR's REVIEW STAMP. Submittals shall
be detailed, dimensioned drawings showing construction, size and arrangement, service clearances,
performance characteristics, and capacity. Where submittals are provided that include multiple
types or styles of the specified item and/or multiple options, the exact item and options being
submitted shall be CLEARLY MARKED on the submittal sheet. Submittals not properly identified or
containing information of a general nature will not be reviewed and will be returned unchecked.
D.
Acceptance of shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurements or building
conditions. Acceptance shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility or necessity of
furnishing material or performing work required by the drawings and specifications. Submittal data
on any one item shall not be reviewed more than three (3) times. If not accepted after the third
review, the Contractor shall provide the equipment upon which the design was based.
E.
Failure to submit shop drawings in ample time for checking shall not entitle an extension of contract
time, and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed.
F.
No material or equipment, for which submittals are required, may be delivered to or installed at the
job site until submittals have been accepted.
G.
Unless a specific finish is indicated in the contract documents, wherever a choice of finish is
available for the specified item, submit accurate color chips or charts to the Architect for review and
selection.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
DRIVE GUARDS
A.
For machinery and equipment, provide guards as shown in AMCA 410 for belts, chains, couplings,
pulleys, sheaves, shafts, gears and other moving parts regardless of height above the floor. Drive
guards may be excluded where motors and drives are inside factory fabricated unit casings.
B.
Materials: Sheet steel, cast iron, expanded metal or wire mesh rigidly secured so as to be
removable without disassembling pipe, duct, or electrical connections to equipment.
C.
Access for Speed Measurement: One inch diameter hole at each shaft center.
D.
Lubrication: Guards shall not interfere with lubrication of equipment.
2.2
PAINTING
A.
General - Paint plumbing equipment and material in Equipment Rooms and utility type areas and
located outside of the building or on the roof. Painting of equipment and material in finished rooms
or areas shall be accomplished as described in PAINTING Section of the Architectural
Specifications. Painting in concealed spaces shall be limited to equipment and materials not
otherwise protected from rusting such as hangers and supports. Paint shall be products of SherwinWilliams, Pittsburgh, or Pratt-Lambert, and shall comply with Green Seal Standards GS-03, GS-11,
and SCAQMD Rule #1113 VOC limits for paints and coatings.
B.
Workmanship - The work shall be accomplished by workmen skilled in the painting trade after
testing is complete and systems are ready for operation. Surfaces to be painted shall be completely
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0000 - 6
February 12, 2014
dry before applying paint. Surfaces shall not be painted when the temperature is below 50 Deg. F or
above 120 Deg. F, or when they are exposed to hot sun. Materials shall be evenly spread and
smoothly flowed on without runs or sags. Each coat shall be thoroughly dry before application of
succeeding coat. The painters shall protect adjacent surfaces with drip covers during the process of
painting. Upon completion, paint spots, if any, shall be removed from adjacent surfaces.
C.
Preparation of surface - Metal surfaces shall be cleaned with solvent before applying materials.
Rust and scale shall be removed by wire brushing or sanding. Galvanized surfaces shall be
pretreated with a phosphoric acid cleaning solution and primed with Sherwin-Williams "Galvanized
Iron Primer."
D.
Painting - After preparation as described above, each item shall be painted as follows, except color
of paint for equipment and material located outside of the building or on the roof shall be as selected
by the Architect.
E.
1.
Painting is not required of equipment, equipment supports, and hangers with a factory-finish
coat. Patch painting is required of any damaged areas to match factory-finish coat. Painting
is required where equipment or equipment supports do not have factory-finish paint.
Equipment and associated hangers and supports shall be primed with one coat of alkyd, zinc
potassium chromate metal primer, except insulated surfaces shall be primed with one coat
Sherwin-Williams "Wall Primer and Sealer." Finish with two coats of Sherwin-Williams
"Metalastic II-Steel Gray" Enamel. Exterior of belt guards and other protective guards shall
be finished with two coats of machinery enamel in OSHA yellow color. Interior of items
covered by belt guards and other protective guards shall be finished with two coats of
machinery enamel in OSHA orange color. Nameplates on equipment shall not be painted.
2.
Exposed pipes, conduits, and associated hangers exposed in equipment rooms and other
unfinished areas such as storage areas shall have two finish coats of paint of the same color
as adjacent walls or ceilings. Bare copper pipe shall not be painted. Canvas or paper jacket
insulation of pipes exposed in unfinished areas shall be primed with Sherwin-Williams "Wall
Primer and Sealer" before final two coats of paint. Hangers and supports in concealed areas
not protected by factory-finish paint shall have one coat of Sherwin-Williams "Kromik Metal
Primer."
Identification of pipes and equipment:
1.
Equipment - Each piece of equipment shall be identified by stenciled marking that will read
the same as the identification shown on plumbing drawings. Stencil letters shall be 2 inches
high upper case painted with Sherwin-Williams "Metalastic II" white enamel.
2.
Pipes shall be identified using pre-printed markers sized appropriately for the pipes being
identified (shop drawings required). Markers shall be Seton "Setmark" type or approved
equal or equivalent stencil. Pipe identification shall meet the most current edition of ANSI
Specification A13.1. Apply a minimum of two complete wraps of tape at each end of preprinted pipe markers equal to Seton Style #AR or approved equal. Markers shall be located
close to valves or flanges and adjacent to changes in direction, branches and where pipes
pass through walls or floors, and at intervals of 15 feet on straight runs. Provide a Color
Code Chart, framed with glass front, indicating piping service and color code schedule. Post
in Mechanical Room where directed by Engineer.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0000 - 7
February 12, 2014
3.
Color code schedule
COLOR BANDING CODE
4.
Number
Color
Catalog Number
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Orange
Blue
Brown
Red
Black
Yellow
Green
No. F65 E 36
No. F65 L 3
No. F65 N 11
No. F65 R 1
No. F65 B 1
No. F65 Y 48
No. F65 G 40
Pipe shall be identified with flow arrows as described below
a.
b.
c.
d.
Arrows shall be stencil type.
Arrows shall be readable from floor.
Arrows shall be installed every 15'-0".
Arrows shall be painted on pipes.
F.
Identification of Valves: Properly mark service and control valves. Valve markers shall be metal
tags with designations stamped thereon or laminated engraved plastic chained with jack chains (not
beaded chains) to their respective valves. Identification symbols or designations shall be the same
as shown on the Contract Documents.
G.
Equipment locations above acoustic tile ceilings: Provide colored brass push-pins complete with a
minimum 1/2" shank and 5/8" diameter head. Pin head color shall be blue or color as selected by
Architect or Owner. Locate push-pins directly below all scheduled plumbing equipment.
2.3
MOTORS, CONTROL, AND ELECTRICAL WIRING
A.
Provide motors in accordance with NEMA Standards and suitably designed to match the starting
and running characteristics of the driven equipment. Unless indicated otherwise, motors less than
1/2 horsepower shall be wound for 120 volt, single phase, 60 hertz. Motors 1/2 horsepower and
above, unless indicated otherwise, shall be wound for three phase, 60 hertz, 200 volt, 230 volt, or
460 volt as required by the system voltage. Select motors coordinated with the utilization voltage
and phase. Motors for equipment with VFD shall be matched to the VFD.
B.
All starters and safety switches, except for those specified to be furnished with the plumbing
equipment, shall be furnished as part of the Electrical Work - Division 26.
C.
Starters and safety switches furnished with the plumbing equipment shall comply with the
specifications of Division 26. Starters furnished as an integral part of the plumbing equipment shall
be complete with properly sized overload heaters. Integral 3-phase motor starters and VFD's shall
be provided with phase loss relay as specified in Division 26.
D.
All equipment that has electrical connections shall have wiring terminals/connectors rated for not
less than 75 deg. C. If terminals/connectors are provided that are rated for less than 75 deg. C., the
mechanical contractor shall incur all costs associated with upsizing wire and conduit as required by
the National Electrical Code.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0000 - 8
February 12, 2014
2.4
FIRE-STOPPING
A.
2.5
Pipe penetrations of rated walls, floors, and floor-ceiling assemblies shall be constructed in
accordance with Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., Fire Resistance Directory, Volume II, Hourly
Ratings for Through Firestop Penetrations. The Contractor shall provide U.L. firestop penetrations
according to the particular wall, floor, or floor-ceiling assembly rating, construction type, pipe
material, pipe size, insulation requirements, sleeve requirements, and the contractor's choice of
firestop products as listed by U.L. Refer to the architectural drawings for the wall, floor, or floorceiling assembly construction types and ratings.
PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTS
A.
Under each applicable section of the detailed plumbing specifications, the Contractor shall furnish
and install all accessories, connections, bases, guards, supports, and incidental items necessary to
fully complete the work, ready for use, occupancy, and operation by the Owner.
B.
Type Numbers Specified: MSS SP-58; for selection and application, MSS SP-69. Refer to Section
05 5000, METAL FABRICATIONS, for miscellaneous metal support materials and prime coat
painting.
C.
For Attachment to Concrete Construction:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Concrete Insert: MSS SP-69, Type 18
Self-Drilling Expansion Shields and Machine Bolt Expansion Anchors: Fed. Spec. FF-S-325,
permitted in concrete not less than four inches thick. Applied load shall not exceed onefourth the proof test load listed in Fed. Spec. FF-S-235.
Power-Driven Fasteners: Permitted in existing concrete or masonry not less than four inches
thick when approved by the Architect/ Engineer for each job condition. Use fasteners
capable of supporting a 1000 pound test load, with the actual load not exceeding 50 pounds.
For Attachment to Steel Construction; MSS SP-69:
1.
2.
Welded Attachment: Type 22.
Beam Clamps: Types 20, 21, 28 or 29. Type 23 C-clamp may be used for individual copper
tubing up to 7/8-inch outside diameter.
E.
Attachment to Metal Pan or Deck: As required for materials specified in Division 05 - METAL
DECKING.
F.
For Attachment to Wood Construction: Wood screws or lag bolts.
G.
Hanger Rods: Hot-rolled steel, ASTM A 36 or A 575 for allowable load listed in MSS SP-58. For
piping, provide adjustment means for controlling level or slope. Types 13 or 15 turnbuckles shall
provide 1-1/2 inches minimum of adjustment and incorporate locknuts. All-thread rods are
acceptable.
H.
Multiple (Trapeze) Hangers: Galvanized, cold formed, lipped steel channel horizontal member, not
less than 1-1/2 inches by 1-1/2 inches, No. 12 gage, designed to accept special spring held,
hardened steel nuts. Not permitted for chemical waste drain piping.
1.
2.
Allowable Hanger Load: Manufacturers rating less 200 pounds.
Guide individual pipes on the horizontal member of every other trapeze hanger with 1/4-inch
U-bolt fabricated from steel rod. Provide Type 40 insulation shield, secured by two 2-inch
galvanized steel bands, for insulated piping at each hanger.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0000 - 9
February 12, 2014
I.
Pipe Hangers and Supports: Use hangers sized to encircle insulation on insulated piping. Refer to
Section 22 0700 - PLUMBING INSULATION, for insulation thickness. To protect insulation, provide
Type 39 saddles for roller type supports. Provide Type 40 insulation shields at all other types of
supports and hangers including those for pre-insulated piping.
1.
General Types (MSS SP-69):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
Plumbing Piping:
a.
b.
c.
d.
J.
2.6
Standard Clevis Hanger: Type 1; provide locknut
Riser Clamps: Type 8 or 42
Wall Brackets: Types 31, 32, or 33
Saddle Support: Type 36, 37, or 38
Roller Support: Type 41, 43, or 46
Turnbuckle: Types 13 or 15
U-Bolt Clamp: Type 24
For Uninsulated Copper Tube: Material compatible for use with copper to prevent
electrolysis
Supports for Plastic or Glass Piping: As recommended by the pipe manufacturer
Horizontal Piping: Types 1, 5, 7, 9, and 10
Chrome Plated Piping: Chrome plated supports
Hangers and Supports in Pipe Chase: Prefabricated system ABS self-extinguishing
material, not subject to electrolytic action, to hold piping, prevent vibration, and
compensate for all static and operational conditions
Blocking, Stays and Bracing: Angle iron or preformed metal channel shapes, 18 gage
minimum
Concrete Equipment Bases: Unless otherwise noted on the drawings or in the specifications,
concrete pads and bases not less than 4 inches high and which project not less than 3 inches
beyond the equipment on all sides shall be provided for pumps, compressors, water heaters, tank
supports, and other similar floor-mounted equipment which normally requires foundations. Concrete
shall conform to requirements in the concrete section of these specifications. The trade responsible
for the supported equipment shall establish sizes and locations of the various concrete bases
required and shall provide all necessary anchor bolts, together with templates for holding these bolts
in position. Anchor bolts shall be placed in steel pipe sleeves to allow for adjustment, with a suitable
plate at bottom end of sleeve to hold the bolt. When indicated in the drawings or detailed
specifications, other floor-mounted items of equipment shall have a similar concrete base. Special
vibration isolation foundations that are required are specified in the detailed specifications.
PIPE SLEEVES
A.
Locate sleeves during normal course of work. Provide sleeves for piping and conduit passing
through concrete floor slabs and concrete, masonry, tile, and gypsum wall construction. Sleeves
shall not be provided for piping and conduit running embedded in concrete or slab on grade, except
that copper piping shall require sleeves through slabs on grade. Sleeves through structural
members shall be only as directed by Architect. In interior wall, provide 1/4 inch space all around
between sleeve and conduit, piping, or insulation of piping.
B.
Sleeves placed in exterior walls below grade shall be O.Z. Gedney Type 'FSK' or equal, Thunderline
'LINK SEAL', or equal sleeve assemblies sized for the pipe or conduit encountered, except for cast
iron piping. Sleeve assembly shall provide watertight seal and electrical insulation to reduce
cathodic reaction. When a sleeve passes through a wall below a concrete slab on grade, the
sealing assembly shall be on the outside of the wall. When a sleeve passes through a wall into a
crawl space or the building interior, the sealing assembly shall be in the crawl space or interior of the
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0000 - 10
February 12, 2014
building. Provide sleeve assembly for copper piping through slab on grade, with sealing assembly
located on interior side of floor slab. Where cast iron pipes pass through an exterior wall below
grade, provide an iron-pipe sleeve two (2) pipe sizes greater than pipe passing through. Caulk
between pipe and sleeve with a rubber-based compound.
C.
Where sleeves are located through fire-rated walls and floor/ceiling assemblies, provide sleeves and
protect the penetration in accordance with Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., Fire Resistance
Directory, Volume II, Ratings for Through Firestop Penetrations.
D.
Sleeves in mechanical rooms with floor drains or hose bibbs shall extend 4 inches above floor.
Provide flanges or flashing rings with sleeves in floors with waterproof membrane and clamp or flash
into the membrane. Provide sleeves flush with floor in other rooms.
E.
Sleeves shall be constructed of 20 gage galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints for all sleeves
set in concrete floor slabs terminating flush with the floor. All other sleeves shall be constructed of
galvanized steel pipe unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Fasten sleeves securely in floors or walls so that they will not become displaced when concrete is
poured or when other construction is built around them. Take precautions to prevent concrete,
plaster, or other materials from being forced into the space between pipe and sleeve during
construction.
2.7
WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES (ESCUTCHEONS)
A.
Material and Type: Chrome plated brass or chrome plated steel, one piece or split type with
concealed hinge, with setscrew for fastening to pipe, or sleeve. Use plates that fit tight around
pipes, cover openings around pipes, and cover the entire pipe sleeve projection.
B.
Thickness: Not less than 3/32-inch for floor plates. For wall and ceiling plates, not less than 0.025
for up to 3-inch pipe, 0.035 for larger pipe.
C.
Locations: Use where pipe penetrates floors, walls and ceilings in exposed locations, except
mechanical rooms.
2.8
ACCESS PANELS
A.
Under each applicable section of the detailed plumbing specifications, the Contractor shall provide
access panels in all locations where required for access to concealed valves, traps, air cushions,
controls, and any other equipment or materials requiring inspection or maintenance. Access panels
shall be of adequate size and properly located so that concealed items will be readily accessible for
servicing or for removing and replacing if necessary, except as indicated or specified otherwise.
Access panels are not required in ceilings formed of removable acoustical panels.
B.
Access panels that are not fire-rated shall be Milcor or equal. Provide modular-sized access panels
in inaccessible acoustic tile ceilings sized according to the tile size. Provide Milcor metal access
panels with cam lock and mounting trim to match finish encountered. Provide natural anodized
aluminum finish for panels in kitchens and toilets. Provide prime finished steel for panels in other
areas. Paint panels in finished areas to match finish surface.
C.
Where indicated and where access panels are installed in walls of shafts that are not sealed at each
floor, access panels shall be Milcor or equal "Fire-Rated" and shall bear the Underwriters'
Laboratories, Inc. Class B, 1-1/2 hour label. Openings shall be framed in accordance with the
access panel manufacturer's recommendations. Frames shall be not lighter than 16-gage steel.
Panels shall be not lighter than 20-gage steel and shall be insulated sandwich type. Panels shall
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0000 - 11
February 12, 2014
have a continuous hinge, self-lubricating lock, a direct action-knurled knob, and an interior latch
release mechanism.
2.9
CHARTS, DIAGRAMS, AND SCHEMES
A.
Charts, diagrams, and schemes listed below shall be provided under each applicable section of the
detailed plumbing specifications by the Contractor, framed under glass, and installed where shown
on the drawings or directed in the field. All charts, diagrams, and schemes shall be complete, neat,
clear, legible, and permanent.
B.
Electric sequence control diagrams of all plumbing system components.
C.
Valve identification chart with typewritten schedule of all valves giving their tag number, description,
system served, and normal operation position.
D.
Piping schemes where required by the detailed specifications.
2.10
A.
2.11
A.
CATALOG DATA FOR OWNER
Furnish one (1) bound copy of Catalog Data on each manufactured item of equipment used in the
plumbing work, complete with index listing the products alphabetically by name, together with the
names and addresses of manufacturers, sales, and service representatives. Furnish two (2) bound
copies of Operating and Maintenance Instructions of each item of equipment. Catalog Data and
Operating and Maintenance Instructions shall be submitted to the Engineer for review prior to
transmittal to the Owner.
RECORD OF AS-BUILTS AND CONDITIONS
Provide a complete set of prints of plumbing plans marked to indicate as-built conditions which are
different from those shown on the original construction documents. Site as-built conditions which
are different from the construction documents shall be dimensioned from building or identifiable
marker. Accurate locations of all concealed utility lines, both interior and exterior shall be recorded.
These drawings shall be delivered to the Architect/Engineer before being turned over to the Owner.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Coordination of Work:
1.
2.
The Contractor shall compare the plumbing drawings and specifications with the drawings
and specifications of other trades, and shall report any discrepancies between them to the
Architect/Engineer, and shall obtain from him written instructions for changes necessary in
the plumbing work. The plumbing work shall be installed in cooperation with other trades
installing interrelated work. Before installation, the Contractor shall make proper provision to
avoid interferences in a manner approved by the Architect/Engineer. All changes required in
the work of the Contractor caused by his neglect to do so shall be made by him at his own
expense.
Anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts, and supports that may be required for the work shall be fully
coordinated and compatible with the related equipment or materials. Locations shall be
determined by the trade installing the related equipment or materials.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0000 - 12
February 12, 2014
3.
4.
Slots, chases, openings, and recesses through floors, walls, ceilings, roofs, and partitions
shall be located by the trades requiring them.
Locations of pipes, equipment, fixtures, etc., shall be adjusted to accommodate the work to
interferences anticipated and encountered. The installing Contractors shall coordinate their
work to the building structure and to other trades as directed by the General Contractor. No
additional compensation or extension of completion time will be granted for extra work
caused by a lack of coordination. The installing Contractor shall provide dimensions and
locations of all openings, shafts, and similar items to the General Contractor for his
coordination and execution. Work shall be installed as required so as not to interfere with or
delay the building construction. Pipes, etc., shall be concealed above ceilings, in walls, or in
floors as applicable in all areas of the building except in equipment rooms, unfinished storage
rooms, or other areas specifically noted to the contrary.
a.
b.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Right-of-Way: Lines which pitch shall have right-of-way over those which do not pitch.
For example, plumbing drains shall normally have right-of-way. Lines whose
elevations cannot be changed shall have the right-of-way over lines whose elevations
can be changed.
Offsets, transitions, and changes in direction of pipes shall be made as required to
maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on the
drawings. The Contractor shall furnish and install all traps, drains, sanitary vents, etc.,
as required to affect these offsets, transitions, and changes in direction.
Exact locations of items in finished areas of the building and on the exterior of the building
shall be coordinated with each other, the building structure, and architectural features thereof
so as to be aligned with or centered on other items as applicable. Locations indicated on the
drawings are approximate. Trades shall coordinate their work with door swings, block
coursing, tile arrangement, and other similar features before establishing the location of any
components. Before any related work has begun, the Architect/Engineer may direct
reasonable minor changes in equipment locations with no increase in contract price to the
Owner. Before roughing in conduit or pipe, verify the location of equipment to be connected.
Installation and Arrangement: The Contractor shall install all plumbing work to permit
removal of all parts requiring periodic replacement or maintenance. The Contractor shall
arrange pipes and equipment to permit ready access to valves, cocks, traps, motors, control
components, and to clear the openings of swinging and overhead doors and of access
panels.
Drawings by Contractor: When directed by the Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall
submit for review by Architect/Engineer drawings clearly showing certain portions of the
plumbing work and its relation to the work of other trades before beginning shop fabrication or
erection in the field.
Dimensions: The Contractor shall ensure that items to be furnished fit the space available.
He shall make necessary field measurements to ascertain space requirements, including
those for connections, and shall furnish and install such sizes and shapes of equipment that
the final installation shall suite the true intent and meaning of the drawings and specifications.
If he concludes that there is insufficient space for installation or specified materials, he shall
immediately notify the Architect/Engineer of the conflict and shall stop affected work until he
receives instructions as to how to proceed from the Architect/Engineer.
Damage to Work: The Contractor is responsible for damage caused by his work or workmen.
Repairing of damaged work shall be done by the Contractor as directed by the Engineer at
no additional cost.
Connections to Existing Facilities, Piping Systems, Etc: All connections to existing facilities,
piping systems, etc., shall be made as required or deemed necessary to insure the
maintenance of continued operation of the above and provide the very minimum of
interruption. This Contractor shall make such temporary connections as may be required to
facilitate this work and to protect the existing building from damage. Any work which will in
any way affect the continued operation of any existing facility shall be coordinated with the
proper authorities as well as the Architect-Engineer before any service is interrupted.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0000 - 13
February 12, 2014
11.
B.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any interruptions to existing services and shall repair
any damages to existing systems caused by his operations.
Protection and Cleaning:
1.
2.
3.
Equipment and materials shall be carefully handled, properly stored, and adequately
protected to prevent damage before and during installation, in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations. Damaged or defective items, in the opinion of the
Architect/Engineer, shall be replaced.
All items subject to moisture damage (such as controls and electrical equipment) shall be
stored in dry, heated spaces.
Protect all finished parts of equipment, such as shafts and bearings where accessible, from
rust prior to operation by means of protective grease coating and wrapping. Close pipe
openings with caps or plugs during installation. Tightly cover and protect fixtures and
equipment against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical injury. Clean plumbing equipment to
remove dust, oil, dirt, plaster, mortar, trash, or paint. Piping and conduit shall be blown out or
flushed of all foreign matter before wires are pulled in or before connections are made to
equipment or systems.
C.
Concrete and Grout: Use concrete and shrink compensating grout 3000 psi minimum.
D.
Install valves and other devices with due regard for ease in reading or operating and maintaining
said devices. Servicing shall not require dismantling adjacent equipment or pipe work.
E.
Work in Existing Building:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Cut required openings through existing masonry and reinforced concrete using diamond core
drills. Use of pneumatic hammer type drills, impact type electric drills, and hand or manual
hammer type drills will be permitted only with approval of the Architect/Engineer. Locate
openings that will least effect structural slabs, columns, ribs or beams. Refer to the
Architect/Engineer for determination of proper design for openings through structural sections
and opening layouts approval, prior to cutting or drilling into structure.
After
Architect/Engineer's approval, carefully cut opening through construction not larger than is
absolutely necessary for the required installation.
Remove existing work as necessary to install new work. Except as otherwise shown or
specified, do not cut, alter or remove any structural work or any ducts, plumbing, steam, gas
or electric work without approval of Architect/Engineer. Existing work (walls, ceilings,
partitions, floors, mechanical, and electrical work) disturbed or removed as a result of
performing required new work shall be patched, repaired, reinstalled, replaced with new work,
and refinished and left in as good condition as existed before commencing work. Existing
work to be altered or extended that is found to be defective in any way shall be reported to
the Architect/Engineer before it is disturbed. Materials and workmanship used in restoring
work shall conform in type and quality to that of original existing construction, except as
otherwise shown or specified.
Continuity of service shall be maintained to all existing systems, except for designated short
intervals during which connections are to be made. Interruptions shall be coordinated with the
Owner as to the time and duration.
Upon completion of contract, deliver work complete and undamaged. Damage that is caused
by Contractor or Contractor's workmen to existing structures, grounds, or utilities or to work
done by others shall be repaired by Contractor and left in as good condition as existed prior
to damaging.
a.
At Contractor's own expense, Contractor shall immediately restore to service and
repair any damage caused by Contractor's workmen to existing piping and conduits,
wires, cable, etc., of utility services or of fire protection system and communications
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0000 - 14
February 12, 2014
b.
3.2
systems (except telephone) which are not scheduled for discontinuance or
abandonment.
Restoration work required by damage to telephone systems shall be done by
telephone company at Contractor's expense.
GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Under each applicable section of the detailed plumbing specifications, the Contractor shall furnish
and install as shown on the drawings or as necessary to complete the working system in
accordance with the intent of the drawings and specifications, a complete system of piping, valves,
supports, anchors, sleeves, and all other appurtenances. The piping drawings are diagrammatic
and indicate the general location and connections. The piping may have to be offset, lowered, or
raised as required or as directed at the site. This does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
the proper erection of systems of piping in every respect suitable for the work intended as described
in the specifications and as approved by the Architect/Engineer. Wherever two dissimilar metals join
in any piping system, install a dielectric fitting at their intersection.
B.
Erection: Piping shall be properly supported and adequate provisions shall be made for expansion,
contraction, slope, and anchorage without damage to joints or hangers. All piping shall be cut
accurately for fabrication to measurements established at the construction site. Pipe shall be
worked into place without springing and/or forcing, properly clearing all windows, doors, and other
openings and equipment. Cutting or other weakening of the building structure to facilitate piping
installation will not be permitted without written approval. Pipe extending through the roof shall be
properly flashed. All changes in direction shall be made with fittings. Wherever pipe hanger bears
directly on the pipe being supported, the hanger shall be of the same material as the pipe.
C.
Arrangement: All piping shall be arranged so as not to interfere with removal of other equipment or
devices nor to block access to doors, windows, manholes, or other access openings. Piping shall
be arranged so as to facilitate removal of tube bundles. Flanges or unions, as applicable for the
type of piping specified, shall be provided in the piping at connections to all items of equipment.
Piping shall be placed and installed so that there will be no interference with the installation of the
equipment, ducts, etc. All piping shall be installed to ensure noiseless circulation. All piping shall be
erected and pitched to ensure proper drainage. Piping shall be installed so as to avoid liquid or air
pockets throughout the work. Pipe in finished areas shall be concealed. Install piping generally
parallel to walls and column centerlines, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Space piping,
including insulation, to provide one inch minimum clearance between adjacent piping or other
surface. Pipe shall be installed to permit free expansion and contraction without damage to joints or
hangers. Exposed piping shall be installed in practical alignment with the building. All valves and
specialties shall be placed to permit easy operation and access, and all valves shall be regulated,
packed, and glands adjusted at the completion of the work before final acceptance. Water pipes
shall not be installed in attic spaces, crawl spaces, exterior walls or similar areas which are subject
to freezing, unless indicated to be heat traced.
D.
Installation of Underground Pipe: Each pipe shall be laid true to line and grade and in such manner
as to form a close concentric joint with adjoining pipe and to prevent sudden offsets to flow line. As
work progresses, the interior of the pipe shall be cleared of dirt and superfluous materials of every
description. Where cleaning after laying is difficult because of small pipe size, a suitable swag or
drag shall be kept in the pipe and pulled forward past each joint immediately after jointing has been
completed. Trenches shall be kept free from water until pipe jointing material has set. Pipe shall not
be laid when the condition of the trench or weather is unsuitable for such work. At all times when
work is not in progress, all open ends of pipe and fittings shall be securely closed so that no water,
earth, or other substance will enter the pipe or fittings.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0000 - 15
February 12, 2014
3.3
PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Supports: The Contractor shall support plumb, rigid, and true to line all work and equipment
furnished under each section of these specifications. The Contractor shall study thoroughly all
general, structural, and plumbing drawings, shop drawings, and catalog data to determine how
equipment, fixtures, piping, ductwork, etc., are to be supported, mounted, or suspended, and shall
provide extra steel bolts, inserts, pipe stands, brackets and accessories for proper support, whether
or not shown on the drawings. When directed, the Contractor shall submit drawings showing
supports for review by the Architect/Engineer.
B.
Where hanger spacing does not correspond with joist or rib spacing, use structural steel channels
secured directly to joist and rib structure that will correspond to the required hanger spacing, and
then suspend the equipment and piping from the channels. Drill or burn holes in structural steel only
with the prior approval of the Architect/Engineer.
C.
Use of chain, wire or strap hangers; wood for blocking stays or bracing; or hangers suspended from
piping above will not be permitted. If products are rusty, replace or thoroughly clean and coat with
prime paint.
D.
Use hanger rods that are straight and vertical. Turnbuckles for vertical adjustments may be omitted
where limited space prevents use. Provide a minimum of 2-inch clearance between pipe or pipe
covering and adjacent work. Pipe hanger rods shall be attached to the top chord only on steel joists
and beams by joist or beam clamps, without welding. Where clamps cannot be attached to the top
chord of joists or beams, trapeze hangers shall be provided.
E.
Horizontal Pipe Support Spacing:
1.
2.
3.
Cast Iron: Five feet on centers maximum spacing. At least one hanger on each full length of
pipe, close to hub where possible and at least one within 24 inches of each fitting, and
wherever else required to prevent tendency toward deflection due to load. Provide a hanger
at upper angle at each drop. Locate hangers adjacent to hubs on multiple fittings not more
than four feet on centers.
Plastic Pipe: Support in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
For support spacing of all other horizontal piping, refer to MSS SP-69 and provide additional
supports at valves, strainers, inline pumps and other heavy components. Provide a support
within one foot of each elbow.
F.
Vertical Pipe Supports--Cast Iron Stacks: Base of stacks shall be supported on concrete, brick in
cement mortar, or metal brackets permanently attached to building structure. Support stacks on
each building floor structure, but not to exceed 15 feet spacing.
G.
Connections: All piping connecting to equipment shall be installed without strain at the piping
connection. The Contractor shall be required as directed to remove the bolts in flanged connections
or to disconnect piping to demonstrate that piping has been so connected.
3.4
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all required digging, cutting, etc., incident to the work, and
shall thereafter make all required repairs necessary to restore the cut structure or material to the
condition existing prior to the cutting. In no case shall the Contractor cut into any major structural
element, beam, or column without the written approval of the Architect/Engineer. All cutting,
patching, repairing, or replacing of work required because of fault, error, tardiness, or damage by
any trade shall be performed with no increase in the contract price to the Owner.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0000 - 16
February 12, 2014
B.
3.5
Patch and repair roof in accordance with requirements of existing roof warranties and
manufacturer's standard approved details.
LUBRICATION
A.
3.6
Under each applicable section of the detailed plumbing specifications, the Contractor shall provide
all oil and grease required for the operation of all equipment until acceptance by the Owner. The
type and application of all lubricants shall conform to the recommendations of the manufacturer of
the equipment involved. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage to bearings while
the equipment is being operated by him up to the date of acceptance of the project. This Contractor
shall be required to protect all bearings during installation and shall thoroughly grease or otherwise
protect steel shafts and other bare ferrous parts to prevent corrosion. All equipment shall be
provided with covers as necessary for proper protection against damage or deterioration during
construction.
OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS
A.
Prior to the final inspection, perform required tests as specified under each applicable section of the
detailed plumbing specifications, and submit the test reports and records to the Architect/Engineer.
B.
Should evidence of malfunction in any tested system, or piece of equipment or component part
thereof, occur during or as a result of tests, make proper corrections, repairs or replacements, and
repeat tests at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.7
QUIET OPERATION AND VIBRATION
A.
3.8
Systems shall operate under conditions of load without unusual or excessive noise or vibration.
Unusual or excessive noise or vibration shall be corrected.
INSTRUCTIONS TO OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A.
3.9
Under each applicable section of the detailed plumbing specifications, the Contractor shall instruct
the representative of the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of all elements of the
plumbing systems. A competent representative of the Contractor shall spend not less than two days
in such formal instruction and shall spend such additional time as directed by the Architect/Engineer
to fully prepare the Owner to operate and maintain the plumbing systems. The Contractor shall
provide letter of instruction upon completion to the Architect/Engineer stating the date of instruction
and the names of those in attendance.
GUARANTEE
A.
3.10
A.
All plumbing equipment, materials, and labor required by the contract documents for this project
shall be guaranteed to be free of defective materials or workmanship for a period of one year after
final acceptance of the project. Defects in equipment, materials, or workmanship occurring during
this period shall be corrected with new equipment and materials or additional labor at no cost to the
Owner.
SITE VISIT REPORT
Answer in writing each item of discrepancy noted on all site visit reports.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0000 - 17
February 12, 2014
3.11
DEMOLITION
A.
Contractor shall visit the site before bidding to determine the extent and location of demolition to be
performed.
B.
Contractor to remove all pipes, equipment, etc. not required, reused or needed for reconnecting to
the new systems. All items not required for the new system shall be removed.
C.
The Owner shall select and retain such existing items indicated or required to be removed as he
desires. Items selected by the Owner to be retained shall be removed and relocated to an Owner
designated location by the Contractor.
D.
All equipment, piping, conduit, etc. to remain and be reused shall be protected from damage. Any
damage to existing material shall be repaired to original condition.
E.
Coordinate all demolition activities with the phasing of construction. Demolition shall not affect
operations of the building.
3.12
PHASING OF WORK
A.
The mechanical contractor is required to fully understand the phasing of work and to coordinate his
work according to phasing plan drawings and related sections of the specifications.
B.
Sections of the existing building will continue to be occupied during renovation. The contractor shall
be responsible for retaining existing plumbing systems to serve the occupied sections of the
building. Otherwise, the contractor shall provide interim plumbing systems for the occupied sections
of the building.
C.
The contractor is cautioned to fully understand the need to operate plumbing systems during
construction.
D.
Provide temporary plumbing to protect the owner's property from freeze damage and from high
humidity. For new construction, provide plumbing for proper drying and application of finishes.
E.
Portions of the renovated building will be reoccupied as sections of renovation become complete.
The contractor shall be responsible for providing plumbing for the reoccupied sections of building.
END OF SECTION 22 0000
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0000 - 18
February 12, 2014
SECTION 22 0700 - PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
CONDITIONS
A.
1.2
The applicable provisions of Section 22 0000, PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, are
hereby made a part of this section, and the Contractor is cautioned to read Section 22 0000 carefully
as items of work applicable to this section are included in Section 22 0000.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The work to be performed under this section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all
labor and materials and the completion of all work of this section as shown on the drawings and/or
herein specified.
B.
Insulation materials and accessories shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by skilled and
experienced workers who are regularly engaged in commercial insulation work.
C.
In general, the work included under this section consists of, but is not limited to, the following:
1.
1.3
Field applied insulation for thermal efficiency and condensation control for plumbing piping
and equipment.
RELATED WORK
A.
Section 22 0000, PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
B.
Section 22 1100, FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION.
C.
Section 22 1300, DRAINAGE SYSTEMS.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
In accordance with Section 22 0000, PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, furnish the
following:
1.
Manufacturer's Literature and Dimension Cuts:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Insulation Materials: Each type used. State surface burning characteristics and
thermal properties.
Insulation Facings and Jackets: Each type used. State vapor barrier properties.
State that white finish will be furnished for exposed pipe and equipment.
Insulation Accessory Materials: Each type used.
Manufacturer's installation and fitting fabrication instructions for elastomeric unicellular
insulation.
Make reference to applicable specification paragraph numbers for coordination.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING INSULATION
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0700 - 1
February 12, 2014
1.5
DEFINITIONS
A.
Cold: Equipment or piping handling media at design temperature of 60 Deg. F. or below.
B.
Hot: Equipment or piping handling media above 105 Deg. F.
C.
PCF: Density, pounds per cubic foot.
D.
Runout: Branch pipe connection up to one inch nominal size and not over 12 feet in length.
E.
Thermal Conductance: Heat flow rate through materials.
1.
2.
Flat Surface: BTU per hour per square foot.
Pipe or Cylinder: BTU per hour per linear foot.
F.
Thermal Conductivity (k):
temperature difference).
(BTU x inch thickness)/(hour x square foot x degree Fahrenheit
G.
Finished Spaces: Spaces used for habitation or occupancy where rough surfaces are plastered,
paneled, or otherwise treated to provide a pleasing appearance.
H.
Unfinished Spaces: Spaces used for storage or work areas where appearance is not a factor,
unexcavated spaces, crawl spaces, etc.
I.
Concealed Spaces: Spaces between a ceiling and floor construction above or between double walls
or furred-in areas, pipe shafts, etc.
J.
Exposed: Open to view inside the building. For example, pipe run through a room, and not covered
by other construction, is exposed.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL
A.
Building characteristics of insulation materials shall comply with NFPA 90A, pertinent parts of which
are noted as follows:
1.
2.
Pipe insulation and coverings shall meet the requirements of NFPA 90A Sections 4-3.3.1 and
4-3.3.2 when installed in plenums or concealed spaces used as part of the air distribution
system.
In addition to NFPA, the insulation material shall not transform into a molten flaming liquid
during combustion as characterized by some polyethlenes.
B.
Test Methods: ASTM E 84, UL 723, or NFPA 255.
C.
Insulation shall be Johns Manville, Owens Corning, Pittsburg Corning, or Armstrong. Trade names
are used herein, unless indicated otherwise, to establish a standard of quality.
D.
Specified k factors are at 75 Deg. F. mean temperature unless stated otherwise. Where optional
insulation material is used, select thickness to provide thermal conductance no greater than that for
the specified material. For pipe, use insulation manufacturer's published heat flow tables. For a flat
surface, thermal conductance equal thermal conductivity (k) divided by the thickness of the
insulation. For runout insulation and condensation control insulation, no thickness adjustment need
be made.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING INSULATION
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0700 - 2
February 12, 2014
E.
All materials shall be compatible and suitable for service temperature and shall not contribute to
corrosion or otherwise attack surfaces to which applied in either the wet or dry state.
F.
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. label or listing, or satisfactory certified test report from an approved
testing laboratory will be required to show that surface burning characteristics for materials to be
used do not exceed specified ratings.
2.2
INSULATION FACINGS AND JACKETS
A.
Fed. Spec. HH-B-100 for Vapor Barrier Types I and II:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.3
Puncture Test Method: ASTM D 781.
Type I, Low Vapor Transmission (0.02 Perm Rating), Beach Puncture 50 Units: For
insulating facing on exposed equipment, and for all pipe insulation jackets. Facings and
jackets shall be white all service type (ASJ) suitable for painting without priming.
Type II, Medium Vapor Transmission, Beach Puncture 25 Units: Foil-Scrim-Kraft (FSK) type
for concealed equipment.
Factory composite materials may be used provided they have been tested and certified by
the manufacturer to meet Beach puncture units specified above.
Fire and smoke treatment of jackets and facings shall be permanent. The use of water
soluble treatments is not acceptable.
Pipe insulation jackets shall have 1-1/2 inch minimum lap at longitudinal joints and not less
than 3-inch butt strips at end joints. Facing on board, blanket and block insulation shall have
2-inch laps or 3-inch minimum butt strips. Butt strip material shall be the same as the jacket
or facing. Laps and butt strips may be self-sealing type with factory applied pressure
sensitive adhesive.
MINERAL FIBER INSULATION
A.
Owens-Corning Fiberglass SSL II ASJ Heavy Density Sectional Pipe Insulation, Fed. Spec. HH-I558, Form D, Type III (Molded), Class 12, k = 0.24.
B.
Molded pipe fitting covering: Fed. Spec. HH-I-558, Form E. Class 16, k = 0.26, for temperatures up
to 370 Deg. F.
C.
Insulation thickness and type for various piping systems shall be as indicated in the following table
(Pipe Size/Insulation Thickness).
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING INSULATION
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0700 - 3
February 12, 2014
PIPE SIZE/INSULATION THICKNESS (1)
System
Temp.
Range
(oF)
Runouts
1" or less
1-1/2" &
less
2"
to 8"
8" &
above
Ins.
Type
(3)
Domestic
Hot Water
(Copper)
90-159
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
A
Misc.
80-89
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
A
Domestic
Cold Water
(Copper)
56-79
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
A
Any
---
---
1.0
1.5
A
Horizontal
Soil (2)
NOTES:
(1)
Minimum thickness for insulation listed in preceding table is based on Thermal Conductivity,
'k' not exceeding 0.27 Btu per inch/hr. x sq. ft. x Deg. F. based on Mean Temperature of 75
Deg. F. Insulation with greater Thermal Conductivity shall have increased thickness to
provide same performance characteristics as specified.
(2)
All horizontal sanitary piping above Dining Areas only.
(3)
A Fiberglass type insulation.
-------------------------------------------2.4
INSULATION ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Insulation inserts at pipe supports:
1.
2.
B.
Material: Cellular glass or calcium silicate 1/2 section of insulation, same thickness as
adjacent insulation.
Provide inserts for all insulated piping greater than 1-1/2 inch diameter. Install with metal
insulation shields furnished with pipe supports, Section 22 0000, PLUMBING GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS. Minimum insert length: 10 inches for up to 3 inch pipe, 12 inches for 3 to
6 inch pipe, and 16 inches for 8 to 10 inch pipe.
Adhesives, Mastics, Cement:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Mil. Spec. MIL-A-3316B, Class 1: Jacket and lap adhesive and protective finish coating for
insulation.
Mil. Spec. MIL-A-3316B, Class 2: Adhesive for laps for adhering insulation to metal surfaces.
Mil. Spec. MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class 1: Adhesive for installing flexible unicellular
insulation and for laps and general use.
Mil. Spec. MIL-B-19565B, Type 1 or Type II: Vapor barrier compound for indoor use.
Fed. Spec. SS-C-160A, Type IIIB, (ASTM C 449): Mineral fiber hydraulic-setting thermal
insulating and finishing cement.
Other: Insulation manufacturer's published recommendations.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING INSULATION
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0700 - 4
February 12, 2014
C.
Mechanical Fasteners:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Reinforcement and Finishes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
E.
Pins, Anchors: Welded pins, or metal or nylon anchors with tin-coated or fiber washer, or
clips. Pin diameter shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
Staples: Outward clinching monel or stainless steel.
Wire: 18 gage soft annealed galvanized, or 14 gage copper clad steel or nickel copper alloy.
Bands: 3/4-inch nominal width, brass, aluminum or stainless steel.
Glass Fabric, Open Weave: ASTM D 1668, Type III (resin treated) and Type 1 (asphalt
treated).
Glass Fiber Fitting Tape: Mil. Spec. MIL-C-20070, Type II, Class 1.
Tape for Flexible Unicellular Insulation: Scotch No. 472, Nashua PE-12, or approved equal
recommended by the insulation manufacturer.
PVC Fitting Cover: Fed. Spec. L-P-535D, Composition A, Type II, Grade GU, with Form B
mineral fiber insert, for media temperature 45 Deg. F. to 250 Deg. F. Below 45 Deg. F. and
above 250 Deg. F., provide double layer insert. Provide color matching, vapor barrier,
pressure sensitive tape.
Firestopping Material: Refer to Section 22 0000, PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL INSULATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Required pressure tests of joints and connections shall be completed before application of
insulation. Surface shall be clean and dry with all foreign materials, such as dirt, oil, loose scale,
and rust removed.
B.
Insulation materials and accessories shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by skilled and
experienced workers who are regularly engaged in commercial insulation work. If any insulation
material has become wet because of transit or job site exposure to moisture or water, the Contractor
shall not install such material, and shall remove it from the job site. No insulation material shall be
installed that has become damaged in any way. The Contractor shall also use necessary means to
protect his work and materials.
C.
Except for specific exceptions, insulate entire specified equipment and piping systems. Insulate
each pipe individually. Do not use scrap pieces of insulation where a full length section will fit.
D.
Insulation materials shall be installed in a first class manner with smooth and even surfaces, with
jackets and facings drawn tight and smoothly cemented down at all laps. Insulation shall be
continuous through all sleeves and openings. Vapor barriers shall be continuous and uninterrupted
throughout systems with operating temperature 60 Deg. F. and below. Lap and seal vapor barrier
over ends and exposed edges of insulation. Anchors, supports, and other metal projections through
insulation on cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed for a minimum length of six inches.
E.
Insulation on hot piping and equipment shall be terminated square or beveled with insulating
cement, covered with jacket, at items not to be insulated, access openings and nameplates.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING INSULATION
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0700 - 5
February 12, 2014
F.
On cold systems, vapor barrier performance is extremely important. Particular care must be given
to vapor sealing the fitting cover or finish to the insulation vapor barrier. All penetrations of the
jacket and exposed ends of insulation must be sealed with vapor barrier mastic. All valve stems
must be sealed with caulking which allows free movement of the stem but provides a seal against
moisture incursion.
G.
Plumbing Work Not To Be Insulated:
1.
2.
Chromium plated brass piping.
Domestic Hot Water: Unions, flexible connectors, control valves.
H.
Apply insulation materials subject to the manufacturer's recommended temperature limits. Apply
adhesives, mastics and coatings at the manufacturer's recommended minimum coverage.
I.
New insulation (as specified herein) shall be provided and installed for existing piping at all locations
where insulation has been removed during asbestos abatement. Contractor shall obtain and
examine the asbestos abatement documents to determine the extent of the work.
3.2
INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Molded Mineral Fiber Pipe and Tubing Covering:
1.
2.
Fit insulation to pipe aligning longitudinal joints. Seal longitudinal joint laps and
circumferential butt strips by rubbing hard with a nylon sealing tool to assure a positive seal.
Staples may be used to assist in securing insulation. Seal all vapor barrier penetrations with
vapor barrier mastic. Provide inserts and install with metal insulation shields at outside pipe
supports.
Fittings, Flange and Valve Insulation:
a.
b.
Fiberglass Pipe insulation shall be installed with joints butted firmly together. Valves
and devices requiring access shall be insulation with mitered sections of insulation
equal in thermal resistance and thickness to the adjoining insulation. Fittings shall be
covered with Schuller "Zeston" type, pre-molded PVC fitting covers. Jackets on pipe
insulation shall be stapled using outward clinching type staples spaced 3" apart at
least 1/4" from the lap edge on systems operating at 80 Deg. F. and above; below 80
Deg. F. the laps are to be vapor sealed using self-sealing lap, lap seal gun, or
adhesive. All insulation joints, laps, voids, punctures, and end tapers shall be sealed
with 1/32" thickness of Foster Vapor-Safe or Vapor-Fas adhesive regardless of
service.
Fitting tape shall extend over the adjacent pipe insulation and overlap on itself at least
two inches.
END OF SECTION 22 0700
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
PLUMBING INSULATION
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 0700 - 6
February 12, 2014
SECTION 22 1100 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
CONDITIONS
A.
1.2
The applicable provisions of Section 22 0000, PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, are
hereby made a part of this section and the Contractor is cautioned to read Section 22 0000 carefully
as items of work applicable to this section are included in Section 22 0000.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The work includes providing a complete plumbing system including, but not necessarily restricted to,
the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Domestic water system to a point within building walls.
Installation and connections to miscellaneous equipment furnished by Owner.
Connections to fixtures and equipment provided under other sections of these specification.
Miscellaneous work as described herein, as shown on drawings, and as required for a
complete system.
RELATED WORK
A.
Section 22 0000, PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
B.
Pipe Insulation: Section 22 0700, INSULATION
C.
Plumbing Fixtures: Section 22 4000, PLUMBING FIXTURES
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturer's shop drawings shall indicate that piping and equipment meet specified codes. All
piping, pump systems, equipment, and fittings that are connected to potable water systems, shall
meet the 1996 Safe Water Drinking Act and the 2011 Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act, and
where applicable, meeting NSF Standard 61, and be so labeled and be so certified. In accordance
with Section 22 0000, PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, furnish the following:
1.
Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Piping
Valves
Backflow Preventers
Shock Absorbers
Access Panels
Hose Bibbs
Tempering Valves
Pipe Supports (except hangers)
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 1100 - 1
February 12, 2014
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS, PIPE SLEEVES, AND WALL CEILING PLATES
A.
2.2
Provide in accordance with specifications in Section 22 0000, PLUMBING GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS.
INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING (DISTRIBUTION)
A.
Copper Tube and Fittings:
1.
2.
3.
Tube (ASTM B 88) - Above ground: Type L, hard drawn.
Fittings: Wrought copper, ASME B16.22 or cast copper alloy ASME B16.18. Victaulic or
accepted equal full flow copper fittings with grooved ends. Grooved copper fittings shall be
copper per ASTM B75 alloy C12200; bronze sand cast per ASTM B-584 copper alloy CDA
844 (81-3-7-9) per ANSI B16.18.
Joints--Above ground: Soldered in accordance with ASTM B828, ASTM B32 lead free solder,
ASTM B813 lead free flux. Lead free shall mean less than 0.2 percent lead. Grooved end
copper piping systems as manufactured by Victaulic Company of America or accepted equal
may be installed 2" – 8". For grooved end systems, couplings shall be copper tubing sized
manufactured to ASTM A536 ductile iron Grade 65-45-12 painted copper color alkyd enamel.
Gaskets for grooved system shall be of flush seal pressure responsive design having
properties as designated in ASTM D2000. Installation-Ready, for direct stab installation
without field disassembly. Victaulic Style 607H or equal. Gaskets shall be UL classified in
accordance with ANSI/NSF-61 for Potable water service.
B.
Brass, Copper, Chromium-plated nipples - ASTM B687.
C.
Press Fittings: Copper press fittings by Viega, Ridge Tool Company or accepted equal,
requirements of ASME B16.18 or ASME B16.22. O-rings for copper press fittings shall be EPDM.
2.3
EXPOSED WATER PIPING
A.
Finished Room: Use full iron pipe size chrome plated brass piping for exposed water piping
connecting fixtures, including those furnished by the Owner or specified in other sections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.4
Pipe: Red brass, standard weight, chrome plated.
Fittings: Screwed brass or bronze, Class A, 125 pound, drainage pattern for waste.
Nipples: Brass, standard weight.
Unions: Brass or bronze. Unions 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be flange type with approved
gaskets.
Unfinished and Mechanical Rooms: Chrome-plated brass piping is not required. Paint as specified
in Section 22 0000 - PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
VALVES
A.
General: All valves and specialties shall be suitable for 125 psi working pressure except as
otherwise indicated. Each item shall have threaded or flanged connections as applicable to match
joints specified for its respective service.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 1100 - 2
February 12, 2014
B.
Valves:
1.
Hot and Cold Domestic Water Service Acceptable manufacturers subject to compliance with
requirements are Nibco, Jenkins, Hammond, Milwaukee, Lunkenheimer, Watts and Victaulic.
a.
Ball valves: Valves 2 1/2 inch and smaller shall be rated 150 psi SWP and 600 psi
non-shock WOG and shall have 2 piece cast bronze bodies, TFE seats, full port,
separate packnut with adjustable stem packing, anti-blowout stems and chrome-plated
brass/bronze ball. Valve ends shall have full depth ANSI threads or extended solder
connections and be manufactured to comply with MSS-SP110. [NIBCO T585-70
(threaded); S585-70 (solder)] [Victaulic Company Series 722 (threaded); PL300 (pushto-connect, 200 psi)].
Note: Where piping is insulated, ball valves shall be equipped with 2” extended
handles of non-thermal conductive material. Also, provide a protective sleeve that
allows operation of the valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing the
insulation. Memory stops, which are fully adjustable after insulation is applied, shall be
included. [NIBCO T585/70NS (threaded); S585-0NS (solder)]
C.
Hose bibbs: Toilets Chicago No. 293-6 or equal, loose key, chrome plated, 1/2 inch size, with wall
flange.
D.
Hose bibbs and hose-end drain valves: Equipment rooms and similar spaces. Watts LFSC-6 3/4
inch, Matco-Norca 646 RLF or equal rough brass, lead-free.
E.
Shock Absorbers: Josam "Absorbotron" 75000 Series, Smith 5000 Series “Hydrotrols”, Zurn Z1700
“Shoktrols”, Wade “Shokstop” or equal, lead-free, stainless steel. SA-A Max. 11 SFU. Provide on
both hot and cold water branches. Job fabricated air chambers will not be permitted. O-ring type
shock absorbers will not be accepted. (ASME/ANSI A112.26.1 OR ASSE 1010)
F.
Tempering Valve (Watts or equal) (Individual Fixture Tempering Valve): Provide Watts Model Series
USG-B-M1 under-sink Guardian ASSE 1070 and CSA B-125 thermostatic tempering valve for single
lavatory applications. Provide at all lavatory locations. Set valve for 110 Deg. F.
2.5
BACKFLOW PREVENTERS
A.
Provide a backflow prevention device at any point in the plumbing system where the potable water
supply comes in contact with a potential source of contamination. Device shall be same size as line
in which installed. Device shall be certified by recognized testing laboratory listed. Provide air gaps
with drains pipe the same size as vent discharge on all backflow preventers with atmospheric vent.
Listed below is a list of connection to the potable water system which shall be protected against
backflow or back siphonage:
1.
2.
Hose Vacuum Breaker Type (ASSE 1011; CSA CAN/CSA-B64.2): Watts No. 8A, 8AC
(chrome finished) or equal, with non-removable feature. Hose bibbs and laundry tubs with
threaded outlets
Copper-body Dual Check: Watts CU7 or equal for bottle filler filter.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 1100 - 3
February 12, 2014
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Suspended horizontal piping shall be supported by adjustable wrought steel clevis hangers.
Where supports bear on copper pipe, they shall be copper plated. Chain, strap, wire or other
make-shift devices will not be permitted as hangers or supports. Hangers on all insulated
pipes shall go around the insulation, with galvanized sheet steel saddle of sufficient size and
thickness to prevent crushing of the insulation. Risers shall be securely supported and
braced in an approved manner. Hangers for metal piping shall be spaced not over 6 feet
apart for pipe 1/2 inch or smaller, 8 feet apart for 3/4 inch pipes and not over 10 feet apart for
pipes 1 inch or larger. Hangers shall be located at all changes in direction.
Install branch piping for water from the respective piping systems and connect to all fixtures,
valves, outlets, and equipment, including those furnished by the Owner or specified in other
sections of these specifications. Approximate locations for roughing-in are shown on the
contract drawings. No piping or roughing-in shall be started until data showing exact
locations for equipment and connections required are provided by the Architect. This data
shall then be used for roughing-in equipment. Individual stops and other connection
components not furnished with the equipment, but required for a complete installation, shall
be provided under this section of these specifications. All exposed trim and fixture supply
pipe, except in laundry, shall be chrome-plated.
Install trim and fittings provided with casework and cabinets but not installed at point of
fabrication.
Pipe shall be round and straight. Cutting shall be done with proper tools. Pipe shall be
reamed to full size after cutting.
All pipe runs shall be laid out and scheduled to avoid interferences with other work.
Press connections: Copper press fittings shall be made in accordance with the
manufacturers installation instructions. The tubing shall be fully inserted into the fitting and
the tubing marked at the shoulder of the fitting. The fitting alignment shall be checked against
the mark on the tubing to assure the tubing is fully engaged (inserted) in the fitting. The joints
shall be pressed using the tool approved by the manufacturer.
Install valves with stem in horizontal position whenever possible. All valves shall be easily
accessible. Isolation gate valves shall be installed on each side of each major piece of
equipment and at other points indicated or required for draining, isolation, or sectionalizing
purposes. Discharge of relief valves and backflow preventers shall be piped full size of valve
connection to 6 inches above nearest floor drain or to exterior concrete pad as marked on
drawings. Pipe shall be supported so that weight of pipe is not on valve body. Trap primers
shall be piped full size to the floor drain indicated.
Unions or flanged joints shall be provided on each side of each valve 2-1/2 inch or larger and
in each line immediately preceding the connection of each major piece of equipment. Unions
shall be 125 psi bronze seat type. Flanges shall be ANSI standard 125 psi service with 1/16
inch thick composition or red rubber gaskets. Where grooved end piping is used, Victaulic
Style 608 valves with 607H couplings will be considered unions.
Joints between pipes of dissimilar metals shall have dielectric fittings such as unions, flanges
or Clearflow dielectric nipples to isolate metals. Isolation shall be accomplished by nonmetallic sleeves or couplings of materials suitable to withstand temperatures and pressures
encountered.
Grooved joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest published
installation instructions. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections,
and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. Gaskets shall be of an elastomer grade
suitable for the intended service, and shall be molded and produced by the coupling
manufacturer. The grooved coupling manufacturer’s factory trained representative shall
provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools and
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 1100 - 4
February 12, 2014
11.
B.
installation of grooved joint products. The representative shall periodically visit the jobsite and
review contractor is following best recommended practices in grooved product installation. A
distributor’s representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training or jobsite visits.
Anchors for pipe shall be provided at all flush valves and fixtures or where required to localize
pipe movement. Anchors shall consist of brass collars bolted to the pipe and rigidly
connected to the building structure in an approved manner and so as not to damage the
building structure.
Piping shall conform to the following:
1.
Domestic Water:
a.
b.
3.2
Grade all lines to facilitate drainage. Provide hosed-end drain valves at bottom of
risers. All unnecessary traps in circulating lines shall be avoided.
Connect branch lines at bottom of main serving fixtures below and pitch down so that
main may be drained through fixture. Connect branch lines to top of main serving only
fixtures located on floor above.
TESTS
A.
General: Contractor shall provide all instruments, materials, and labor required. Tests shall be
made in the presence of the Owner or Authority having jurisdiction or as otherwise directed by the
Architect, who shall be given five (5) days notice by this Contractor of his readiness to perform such
tests. Any leaks that develop during the tests shall be repaired by remaking the joint or replacing
pipe and fittings. Temporary caulking will not be permitted. No piping shall be insulated or
concealed until it has been tested, with results acceptable to the Architect. Air testing will be
acceptable where permitted by the Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code. Test systems either in
its entirety or in sections.
B.
Potable Water System: Test after installation of piping and domestic water heaters, but before
piping is concealed, before covering is applied, and before plumbing fixtures are connected. Fill
systems with water and maintain hydrostatic pressure of 125 psig or at 50 percent higher than actual
operating pressure which ever is greater for one hour during inspection and prove tight without any
loss of pressure.
C.
Optional tests for connections to existing systems: After installation of piping and connecting to
existing systems, and where herein before specified tests are impractical, test all new piping under
actual operating conditions and prove tight to the satisfaction of the Architect.
3.3
DISINFECTION
A.
After tests have been successfully completed and thoroughly flush, disinfect the interior domestic
water distribution system in accordance with the local Health Department. In the absence of a
prescribed procedure, systems shall be disinfected in accordance with AWWA C651 or AWWA
C652.
B.
Optimal Disinfection: After all tests have been satisfactorily completed, the entire water distribution
system shall be thoroughly flushed and disinfected. Disinfect by tapping the main and introducing a
solution of chlorine and water in such quantity as to provide a concentration of not less than 50 PPM
with all water lines filled with water from the water main connection to all supply outlets. Care shall
be taken not to flush the lines at this time. Air only shall be allowed to escape. This solution shall
be allowed to stand in the lines for not less than twenty-four hours, after which the lines shall be
flushed out until a residual reading of 0.5 PPM is obtained.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 1100 - 5
February 12, 2014
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Remove trash, plaster, dust, paint spots and all foreign matter from outside of all piping and
equipment.
B.
The Contractor shall check each length of pipe before it is put in place to make certain there is not
foreign material (stones, sand, etc.) in the systems. Provide temporary bypass around equipment if
or as required. All plumbing pipes shall be thoroughly flushed with water to remove construction
debris before final connections are made to equipment and fixtures.
3.5
REPORTS
A.
Reports of cleaning, disinfection and testing: Contractor shall verify in writing before completion of
the job that all specified cleaning procedures, tests, and disinfection have been performed, with
results as specified or as required by codes.
END OF SECTION 22 1100
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 1100 - 6
February 12, 2014
SECTION 22 1300 - DRAINAGE SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
CONDITIONS
A.
1.2
The applicable provisions of Section 22 0000, PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, are
hereby made a part of this section and the Contractor is cautioned to read Section 22 0000
carefully as items of work applicable to this section are included in Section 22 0000.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A.
The work includes providing a complete plumbing system including, but not necessarily
restricted to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Sanitary sewer system to a point within building.
Installation and connections to miscellaneous equipment furnished by Owner.
Connections to fixtures and equipment provided under other sections of these
specification.
Miscellaneous work as described herein, as shown on drawings, and as required for a
complete system.
RELATED WORK
A.
Supports: Division 05, METAL FABRICATIONS.
B.
Section 22 0000, PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
C.
Pipe Insulation: Section 22 0700, INSULATION.
D.
Plumbing Fixtures: Section 22 4000, PLUMBING FIXTURES.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturer's shop drawings shall indicate that piping and equipment meet specified codes.
In accordance with Section 22 0000, PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, furnish the
following:
1.
Manufacturer's Literature and Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Piping
Valves
Cleanouts
Access Panels
Pipe supports
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
DRAINAGE SYSTEM
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 1300 - 1
February 12, 2014
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS, PIPE SLEEVES, AND WALL CEILING PLATES
A.
2.2
Provide in accordance with specifications in Section 22 0000, PLUMBING GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS.
SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPING
A.
Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: Used for pipe buried in or in contact with earth and for
extension of pipe to a distance of approximately five feet outside of building walls. May be used
for piping above ground, where space within partitions involved can accommodate greatest
diameter of cast iron soil pipe without any dimension deviation from the requirements of contract
drawings. Pipe shall be bell and spigot, modified hub, or plain end (no-hub) as required by
selected jointing method. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the
C.I.S.P.I. and listed by NSF International. Drains from urinals shall be cast iron or PVC piping.
1.
2.
Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping Material (Pipe and Fittings): ASTM A74, ASTM A888, CISPI
301, service weight.
Joints: Provide any one of the following types to suit pipe furnished.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
B.
Coating: Provide a heavy coat of asphalt or bitumastic paint on pipe buried in earth or
installed in cinders or concrete construction.
Steel Pipe and Fittings: May be used for sanitary vent.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Lead and oakum and caulked by hand.
Mechanical: Compression-type (ASTM C564) molded neoprene gasket. Gaskets
shall suit class of pipe being jointed. Dual-service gaskets will not be accepted.
Mechanical: Mechanical joint coupling (ASTM C564) (CISPI 310) (CSA CAN/CSAB602) shall consist of a stainless steel coupling and neoprene gaskets. Do not
install below grade.
Adapters: Where service weight pipe is connected to extra heavy pipe and extra
heavy fittings of chair carriers, provide adapters or similar system to make tight,
leakproof joints.
Pipe Galvanized: ASTM A 53, schedule 40.
Fittings--Sanitary Vent: Malleable iron, ASME B16.3, or cast iron, ASME B16.4. All to be
same kind. Couplings of vent piping may be standard couplings furnished with pipe.
Joints: Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1. Pipe-joint compound or tape shall be
applied on the male threads only.
Joints: ASTM F656 purple primer, solvent ASTM D2564 (Not Purple in color) complying
with SCAQMD Rule #1168, joints made in accordance with ASTM D2855.
EXPOSED WASTE PIPING
A.
Finished Room: Use full size chrome plated brass piping for exposed waste piping connecting
fixtures, including those furnished by the Owner or specified in other sections.
1.
2.
3.
Pipe: Red brass, standard weight, chrome plated.
Fittings: Screwed brass or bronze, drainage pattern for waste.
Nipples: Brass, standard weight.
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
DRAINAGE SYSTEM
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 1300 - 2
February 12, 2014
B.
2.4
Unfinished and Mechanical Rooms: Chrome-plated brass piping is not required. Paint as
specified in Section 22 0000, PLUMBING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
CLEANOUTS
A.
Same size as pipe served up to 4 inches. Cleanouts shall be easily accessible. Provide a
minimum of 18-inch clearance for 6 inch and smaller pipes for rodding. Cleanouts shall be
provided at all points in sanitary drainage systems where direction change is more than 45
degrees, where required by code, and where indicated on the drawings. All cleanout plugs shall
be bronze, set in graphite grease. All cleanout covers shall be secured with vandal resistant
screws unless noted otherwise. (ASTM A74, ASME A112.3.1, ASME A112.36.2M) Covers
shall be set flush with finished floor or wall unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
2.5
Cleanouts at base of vertical stacks: Josam 58600-COT with stainless steel wall cover
and tapped for center screw threaded bronze plug. Josam 58540-19 with 58600 wall
cover for 8 inch size. Cleanout plug located approximately 30 inches above floor.
Cleanout plugs under lavatories and sinks located approximately 10 inches above floor.
In horizontal runs above grade: Cleanouts shall be iron body ferrule with bronze screw
plug in fitting or tapped cast iron ferrule with bronze plug.
TRAPS
A.
2.6
Provide traps on all sanitary branch waste connections from fixtures or equipment not provided
with traps. Exposed brass shall be polished brass chromium plated with nipple, cleanout, and
setscrew escutcheons. Concealed traps may be rough cast brass. Slip joints not permitted on
sewer side of trap. Traps shall correspond to fittings on cast iron soil pipe and size shall be as
required by connected service or fixture.
WATERPROOFING
A.
Provide at points where pipes pass through membrane waterproofed floors or walls in contact
with earth. Waterproofing shall consist of 6-pound sheet lead mopped-in between piles of
waterproofing membrane. Flange out lead at opening for pipe and caulk into a cast iron pipe
hub set just below line of membrane waterproofing to form watertight joint through floors.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
Suspended horizontal piping shall be supported by adjustable wrought steel clevis
hangers. Chain, strap, wire or other make-shift devices will not be permitted as hangers
or supports. Hangers on insulated pipes shall go around the insulation, with galvanized
sheet steel saddle of sufficient size and thickness to prevent crushing of the insulation.
Risers and stacks shall be securely supported and braced in an approved manner.
Hangers for plastic piping shall be 4 feet apart. Hangers shall be located at all changes
in direction and at each joint for suspended soil, waste or storm branches and mains.
Install branch piping for waste from the respective piping systems and connect to all
fixtures, outlets, casework, cabinets and equipment, including those furnished by the
Owner or specified in other sections of these specifications. Approximate locations for
roughing-in are shown on the contract drawings. No piping or roughing-in shall be
Prichard Hall West Wing – LLC Offices
DRAINAGE SYSTEM
VT PC# R-2014-05
22 1300 - 3
February 12, 2014
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
B.
started until data showing exact locations for equipment and connections required are
provided by the Architect. This data shall then be used for roughing-in equipment.
Individual traps and other connection components not furnished with the equipment, but
required for a complete installation, shall be provided under this section of these
specifications.
Install trim and fittings provided with casework and cabinets but not installed at point of
fabrication.
Pipe shall be round and straight. Cutting shall be done with proper tools. Pipe, including
plastic, shall be reamed to full size after cutting.
All pipe runs shall be laid out and scheduled to avoid interferences with other work.
Screwed joints for steel pipe shall be made with tapered threads, properly cut and all
burrs removed. Pipe ends shall be reamed to full size of bore and all filings removed.
Joints shall be made tight with an approved joint cement suitable for the service
encountered and applied to the male threa